Yamaha MCX-2000 Handleiding
- Categorie
- MP3 / MP4-spelers
- Type
- Handleiding
Deze handleiding is ook geschikt voor
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA
6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.
YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD.
135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA
YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H.
SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY
YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A.
RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD.
YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND
YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B.
J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN
YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD.
17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA
©
2006 All rights reserved.
RX-N600
Printed in Malaysia WG73890-1
RX-N600
AV Receiver
OWNER’S MANUAL
U
TAPE DECK
AIWA 70029, 70197
CARVER 70029
DENON 70076
HARMAN/KARDON
70029, 70182
JVC 70244, 70273
KENWOOD 70070
MAGNAVOX 70029
MARANTZ 70029
ONKYO 70135, 70282
OPTIMUS 70027, 70220
PANASONIC 70229
PHILIPS 70029
PIONEER 70027, 70099,
70220
POLK AUDIO
70029
RCA 70027, 70220
SANSUI 70029
SONY 70170, 70243,
70291
TECHNICS 70229
VICTOR 70273
WARDS 70027
YAMAHA 70094, 70097,
70524
TUNER
ADC 80531
ADCOM 80616, 81616,
81617
AIWA 80121, 80158,
80189, 81405
AMC 81077
AMPLIFIER TECHNOLOGIES
81584
ANAM 81074, 81609
ARCAM 81189
ATLANTIC TECHNOLOGY
81487
AUDIOTRONIC
81189
AUDIOVOX 81627
B & K 80701, 80820,
80840
BEL CANTO DESIGN
81584
BK 80702
BOSE 81933
BOSTON ACOUSTICS
81918
BRIX 81602
CAPETRONIC 80531
CARVER 80008, 80121,
80189, 80360,
81189
CLASSE 81916
DELPHI 81414
DENON 80121, 81360
EMERSON 80424
FISHER 80219, 80360
FOSGATE 81487
GARRARD 80424
GATEWAY 81567
HARMAN/KARDON
80110, 80189,
80891, 81304
INTEGRA 80135, 81320
JBL 80110
JVC 80074, 81058,
81811
KENWOOD 80027, 80077,
81313, 81569,
81570
KLH 81428
KOSS 80424
LEXICON 81076
LINN 80189
MAGNAVOX 80189, 80531,
81189, 81269
MARANTZ 80039, 80189,
80200, 81189,
81269
MCS 80039, 80346
MICROMEGA 81189
MITSUBISHI 81393
MYRYAD 81189, 81918
NAD 80320
NAKAMICHI 80347, 81313,
81555, 81919
NIRO 81908
ONKYO 80135, 81320
OPTIMUS 80177, 80219,
80531, 80670,
81023, 81074
OUTLAW 81487
OUTLAW AUDIO81487
PANASONIC 80039, 80309,
81308, 81518
PHILIPS 80189, 81189,
81269
PIONEER 80014, 80150,
80531, 80630,
81023
POLK AUDIO 80189, 81414
QUASAR 80039
RCA 80054, 80346,
80360, 80531,
81023, 81074,
81154, 81609
REALISTIC 80163
SAMSUNG 81304
SANSUI 80189, 80346,
81189
SANYO 80219
SCOTT 80163, 80322
SHERWOOD 81077, 81423,
81567, 81918
SIRIUS 81602, 81627,
81811
SONY 80158, 81058,
81406, 81759
SOUNDESIGN
80670
STEREOPHONICS
81023
SUNFIRE 81313
TEAC 80163, 81074
TECHNICS 80039, 80309,
81308, 81518
THORENS 81189
TOSHIBA 80135
VICTOR 80074
WARDS 80014, 80054,
80158, 80189
XM 81406, 81414
YAMAHA 80176, 81176,
81276, 81331,
81375, 81908,
(TUNER ID1) 81916
(TUNER ID2) 81917
(XM ID1) 81918
(XM ID2) 81919
OTHER AUDIO
ACCESSORIES
YAMAHA (iPod) 81981
YAMAHA (NET/USB) 81982
RX-N600_U_cv.fm Page 1 Wednesday, May 24, 2006 4:36 PM
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
i
• Explanation of Graphical Symbols
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an
equilateral triangle, is intended to alert you to the
presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within
the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient
magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to
persons.
The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle
is intended to alert you to the presence of important
operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in
the literature accompanying the appliance.
1 Read Instructions – All the safety and operating instructions
should be read before the product is operated.
2 Retain Instructions – The safety and operating instructions
should be retained for future reference.
3 Heed Warnings – All warnings on the product and in the
operating instructions should be adhered to.
4 Follow Instructions – All operating and use instructions
should be followed.
5 Cleaning – Unplug this product from the wall outlet before
cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners.
6 Attachments – Do not use attachments not recommended by
the product manufacturer as they may cause hazards.
7 Water and Moisture – Do not use this product near water –
for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or
laundry tub; in a wet basement; or near a swimming pool;
and the like.
8 Accessories – Do not place this product on an unstable cart,
stand, tripod, bracket, or table. The product may fall,
causing serious injury to a child or adult, and serious
damage to the product. Use only with a cart, stand, tripod,
bracket, or table recommended by the manufacturer, or sold
with the product. Any mounting of the product should
follow the manufacturer’s instructions, and should use a
mounting accessory recommended by the manufacturer.
9 A product and cart combination should be moved with care.
Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven surfaces may
cause the product and cart combination to
overturn.
10 Ventilation – Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided
for ventilation and to ensure reliable operation of the
product and to protect it from overheating, and these
openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings
should never be blocked by placing the product on a bed,
sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This product should not
be placed in a built-in installation such as a bookcase or rack
unless proper ventilation is provided or the manufacturer’s
instructions have been adhered to.
11 Power Sources – This product should be operated only from
the type of power source indicated on the marking label. If
you are not sure of the type of power supply to your home,
consult your product dealer or local power company. For
products intended to operate from battery power, or other
sources, refer to the operating instructions.
12 Grounding or Polarization – This product may be equipped
with a polarized alternating current line plug (a plug having
one blade wider than the other). This plug will fit into the
power outlet only one way. This is a safety feature. If you
are unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try
reversing the plug. If the plug should still fail to fit, contact
your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not
defeat the safety purpose of the polarized plug.
13 Power-Cord Protection – Power-supply cords should be
routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched
by items placed upon or against them, paying particular
attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the
point where they exit from the product.
14 Lightning – For added protection for this product during a
lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for
long periods of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and
disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent
damage to the product due to lightning and power-line
surges.
15 Power Lines – An outside antenna system should not be
located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other
electric light or power circuits, or where it can fall into such
power lines or circuits. When installing an outside antenna
system, extreme care should be taken to keep from touching
such power lines or circuits as contact with them might be
fatal.
16 Overloading – Do not overload wall outlets, extension
cords, or integral convenience receptacles as this can result
in a risk of fire or electric shock.
17 Object and Liquid Entry – Never push objects of any kind
into this product through openings as they may touch
dangerous voltage points or short-out parts that could result
in a fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on
the product.
18 Servicing – Do not attempt to service this product yourself
as opening or removing covers may expose you to
dangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to
qualified service personnel.
19 Damage Requiring Service – Unplug this product from the
wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel
under the following conditions:
a) When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged,
b) If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the
product,
c) If the product has been exposed to rain or water,
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
CAUTION
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF
ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE
COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE
PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO
QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
ii
EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING
MAST
GROUND
CLAMP
ANTENNA
LEAD IN
WIRE
ANTENNA
DISCHARGE UNIT
(NEC SECTION 810–20)
GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
(NEC SECTION 810–21)
GROUND CLAMPS
POWER SERVICE GROUNDING
ELECTRODE SYSTEM
(NEC ART 250. PART H)
ELECTRIC
SERVICE
EQUIPMENT
NEC – NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE
d) If the product does not operate normally by following
the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls
that are covered by the operating instructions as an
improper adjustment of other controls may result in
damage and will often require extensive work by a
qualified technician to restore the product to its normal
operation,
e) If the product has been dropped or damaged in any
way, and
f) When the product exhibits a distinct change in perfor-
mance - this indicates a need for service.
20 Replacement Parts – When replacement parts are required,
be sure the service technician has used replacement parts
specified by the manufacturer or have the same
characteristics as the original part. Unauthorized
substitutions may result in fire, electric shock, or other
hazards.
21 Safety Check – Upon completion of any service or repairs to
this product, ask the service technician to perform safety
checks to determine that the product is in proper operating
condition.
22 Wall or Ceiling Mounting – This unit should be mounted
to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the
manufacturer.
23 Heat – The product should be situated away from heat
sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other
products (including amplifiers) that produce heat.
24 Outdoor Antenna Grounding – If an outside antenna or
cable system is connected to the product, be sure the antenna
or cable system is grounded so as to provide some
protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges.
Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70,
provides information with regard to proper grounding of the
mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire
to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors,
location of antenna discharge unit, connection to grounding
electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode.
Note to CATV system installer:
This reminder is provided to call the CATV system installer’s
attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that provides
guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular, specifies
that the cable ground shall be connected to the grounding
system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as
practical.
FCC INFORMATION (for US customers)
1 IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS
UNIT!
This product, when installed as indicated in the
instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC
requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by
Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to
use the product.
2 IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to
accessories and/or another product use only high quality
shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST
be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to
follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to
use this product in the USA.
3 NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply
with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15
for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these
requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that
your use of this product in a residential environment will
not result in harmful interference with other electronic
devices.
This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if
not installed and used according to the instructions found
in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the
operation of other electronic devices.
Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that
interference will not occur in all installations. If this
product is found to be the source of interference, which
can be determined by turning this unit “OFF” and “ON”,
please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the
following measures:
Relocate either this product or the device that is being
affected by the interference.
Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit
breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.
In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient
the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead,
change the lead-in to coaxial type cable.
If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory
results, please contact the local retailer authorized to
distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the
appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Electronics
Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA
90620.
The above statements apply ONLY to those products
distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its
subsidiaries.
CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT.
iii
1 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual
carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference.
2 Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean
place – away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration,
dust, moisture, and/or cold. Allow ventilation space of at
least 30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the left and right, and 20
cm on the back of this unit.
3 Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances,
motors, or transformers to avoid humming sounds.
4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from
cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in an environment
with high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent
condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical
shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.
5 Avoid installing this unit where a foreign object may fall
onto this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid
dripping or splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place:
– other components, as they may cause damage and/or
discoloration on the surface of this unit.
– burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire,
damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.
– containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and
liquid may cause electrical shock to the user and/or
damage to this unit.
6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain,
etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature
inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit,
and/or personal injury.
7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections
are complete.
8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat,
possibly causing damage.
9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords.
10 When disconnecting the power cable from the wall outlet,
grasp the plug; do not pull the cord.
11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might
damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth.
12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this
unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and
may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.
YAMAHA will not be held responsible for any damage
resulting from use of this unit with a voltage other than
specified.
13 To prevent damage by lightning, keep the power cable and
outdoor antennas disconnected from a wall outlet or this unit
during a lightning storm.
14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified
YAMAHA service personnel when any service is needed.
The cabinet should never be opened for any reasons.
15 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time
(i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall
outlet.
16 Install this unit near the AC wall outlet where the power
cable plug can be reached easily.
17 Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section on
common operating errors before concluding that this unit is
faulty.
18 Before moving this unit, press MASTER ON/OFF to release
it outward to the OFF position to turn off this unit, and then
disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet.
19 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (General model only)
The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit
must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging
into the AC wall outlet.
Voltages are 110/120/220/230–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz.
Responsible Party: Yamaha Electronics Corporation, U.S.A.
Address: 6660 Orangethorpe Avenue
Buena Park, CA 90620
Telephone: 714-522-9105
Fax: 714-670-0108
Type of Equipment: AV Receiver
Model Name: RX-N600
• This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
• Operation is subject to the following conditions:
– This device may not cause harmful interference.
– This device must accept any interference received including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
See the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section at the end of this
manual if interference to radio reception is suspected.
CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT.
WARNING
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC
SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN
OR MOISTURE.
This unit is not disconnected from the AC power
source as long as it is connected to the wall outlet, even
if this unit itself is turned off. In this state, this unit is
designed to consume a very small quantity of power.
FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS
To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to
wide slot and fully insert.
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian
ICES-003.
POUR LES CONSOMMATEURS CANADIENS
Pour éviter les chocs électriques, introduire la lame la
plus large de la fiche dans la borne correspondante de
la prise et pousser jusqu’au fond.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à
la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
IMPORTANT
Please record the serial number of this unit in the space
below.
MODEL:
Serial No.:
The serial number is located on the rear panel of this
unit. Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for
future reference.
COMPLIANCE INFORMATION STATEMENT (DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY PROCEDURE)
1 En
PREPARATIONINTRODUCTION
BASIC
OPERATION
SOUND FIELD
PROGRAMS
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
FEATURES............................................................. 2
GETTING STARTED............................................ 3
Supplied accessories .................................................. 3
Installing batteries in the remote control ................... 3
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS ......................... 4
Front panel ................................................................. 4
Remote control........................................................... 6
Front panel display .................................................... 9
Rear panel ................................................................ 11
CONNECTIONS .................................................. 12
Placing speakers....................................................... 12
Connecting speakers ................................................ 13
Information on jacks and cable plugs ...................... 16
Audio and video signal flow.................................... 17
Connecting a TV...................................................... 18
Connecting a DVD player, a DVD recorder,
a VCR or an STB................................................. 19
Connecting a CD player, an MD player
or a tape deck....................................................... 21
Connecting a YAMAHA iPod universal dock ........ 22
Connecting the network........................................... 23
Connecting a multi-format player,
an external decoder or a sound processor............ 24
Connecting a game console, a video camera
or a portable audio player.................................... 24
Connecting the FM and AM antennas ..................... 25
Connecting the power cable..................................... 26
Setting the speaker impedance................................. 27
Turning on and off the power .................................. 28
BASIC SETUP...................................................... 29
PLAYBACK.......................................................... 32
USING AUDIO FEATURES............................... 34
Using SILENT CINEMA ........................................ 34
Muting the audio output........................................... 34
Selecting the night listening mode........................... 34
Selecting the input mode ......................................... 35
Using the sleep timer ............................................... 35
Adjusting the speaker level...................................... 36
Selecting the Compressed Music Enhancer mode... 37
Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT component......... 38
Enjoying multi-channel sources in 2-channel stereo39
Enjoying unprocessed input sources........................ 39
Enjoying pure hi-fi stereo sound.............................. 39
USING VIDEO FEATURES............................... 40
Displaying the input source information ................. 40
Selecting the OSD mode.......................................... 41
Playing video sources in the background ................ 41
ENJOYING SURROUND SOUND .................... 42
Enjoying multi-channel sources
in 6.1-channel surround ....................................... 42
Enjoying 2-channel sources in surround.................. 43
Using Virtual CINEMA DSP .................................. 44
RECORDING ....................................................... 45
FM/AM TUNING..................................................46
Automatic tuning ..................................................... 46
Manual tuning.......................................................... 47
Automatic preset tuning........................................... 48
Manual preset tuning ............................................... 49
Selecting preset stations........................................... 50
Exchanging preset stations ...................................... 51
XM
®
SATELLITE RADIO TUNING.................53
Connecting XM Passport System ............................ 54
XM Satellite Radio controls and functions.............. 55
Activating XM Satellite Radio ................................ 56
Basic XM Satellite Radio operations....................... 57
Selecting the XM Satellite Radio search mode ....... 58
Setting the XM Satellite Radio preset channels ...... 62
Displaying the XM Satellite Radio information...... 63
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS .............................65
Selecting sound field programs ............................... 65
Sound field program descriptions............................ 66
Changing sound field parameter settings................. 68
SET MENU ............................................................74
Using SET MENU................................................... 76
1 SOUND MENU.................................................... 77
2 INPUT MENU...................................................... 82
3 NET/USB MENU................................................. 84
4 OPTION MENU................................................... 86
ADVANCED SETUP............................................90
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ...................93
Controlling this unit, a TV, or other components.... 93
Setting the remote control code ............................... 95
Setting library codes ................................................ 96
Resetting all remote control codes........................... 97
USING MULTI-ZONE CONFIGURATION.....98
Connecting Zone 2................................................... 98
Controlling Zone 2................................................... 99
USING iPod
®
.......................................................101
Controlling iPod .................................................... 101
USING NETWORK/USB FEATURES.............103
Navigating the network and USB menus .............. 103
Using a PC server or YAMAHA
MCX-2000......................................................... 105
Using the Internet radio ......................................... 106
Using a USB memory device or
a USB portable audio player ............................. 107
RESETTING THE SYSTEM.............................108
TROUBLESHOOTING .....................................109
GLOSSARY.........................................................116
Audio information ................................................. 116
Video information.................................................. 118
Sound field program information .......................... 118
SPECIFICATIONS.............................................119
CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC OPERATION
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS
ADVANCED OPERATION
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
FEATURES
2 En
Built-in 6-channel power amplifier
◆ Minimum RMS output power
(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 Ω)
Front: 95 W + 95 W
Center: 95 W
Surround: 95 W + 95 W
Surround back: 95 W
Sound field programs
◆ Proprietary YAMAHA technology for the creation of sound
fields
◆ Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital EX decoder
◆ DTS/DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, Discrete 6.1, DTS Neo:6,
DTS 96/24 decoder
◆ Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic II/
Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder
◆ Neural Surround decoder (U.S.A. and Canada models only)
◆ Virtual CINEMA DSP
◆ SILENT CINEMA
™
Sophisticated AM/FM tuner
◆ 40-station random and direct preset tuning
◆ Automatic preset tuning
◆ Preset station shifting capability (preset editing)
XM Satellite Radio
(U.S.A. and Canada models only)
◆ XM Satellite Radio tuning capability (using “XM Passport
System” sold separately)
◆ Neural Surround decoder to play back the surround sound
content of the XM Satellite Radio broadcasts in multi-
channels, resulting in a full surround sound experience
iPod controlling capability
◆ DOCK terminal to connect a YAMAHA iPod universal dock
(such as YDS-10 sold separately), which supports iPod (Click
and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini
Network features
◆ LAN port to connect a PC and YAMAHA MCX-2000 or
access the Internet radio via a LAN
◆ DHCP automatic or manual network configuration
USB features
◆ USB port to connect a USB memory device or a USB portable
audio player
Other features
◆ 192-kHz/24-bit D/A converter
◆ OSD (on-screen display) menus that allow you to optimize
this unit to suit your individual audiovisual system
◆ 6 additional input jacks for discrete multi-channel input
◆ S-video signal input/output capability
◆ Component video input/output capability
(3 COMPONENT VIDEO INs and 1 MONITOR OUT)
◆ Digital video signal conversion (composite video ↔
S-video → component video) capability for monitor out
◆ Optical and coaxial digital audio signal jacks
◆ Sleep timer
◆ Cinema and music night listening modes
◆ Remote control with preset remote control codes,
backlighting input selector buttons, and an iPod (stationed in a
YAMAHA iPod universal dock connected to the DOCK
terminal) controlling capability
◆ Zone 2 custom installation facility
◆ Zone switching capability between the main zone and Zone 2
using ZONE CONTROL
◆ Compressed Music Enhancer mode to improve the sound
quality of compression artifacts (such as the MP3 format) to
that of a high-quality stereo
MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology licensed from
Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson.
This unit contains programs licensed under the GNU General
Public License and GNU Lesser General Public License.
Windows XP, Windows Media Audio, Windows Media Connect
are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft
corporation in the United States and/or countries.
FEATURES
M
anu
f
acture
d
un
d
er
li
cense
f
rom
D
o
lb
y
Laboratories.
“Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D
symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories.
Manu
f
acture
d
un
d
er
li
cense
f
rom D
i
g
i
ta
l
Theater Systems, Inc. “DTS”, “DTS-ES”,
“NEO:6”, and “DTS 96/24” are trademarks
of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. Copyright
1996, 2003 Digital Theater Systems, Inc. All
right reserved.
iPod
®
“i
Po
d”
i
s a tra
d
emar
k
o
f
A
pp
l
e
C
omputer,
Inc., registered in the U.S. and other
countries.
Thi
s rece
i
ver supports networ
k
connect
i
ons.
“S
ILENT
C
INEM
A”
i
s a tra
d
emar
k
o
f
YAMAHA CORPORATION.
T
h
e XM name an
d
re
l
ate
d
l
ogos are
registered trademarks of XM Satellite Radio
Inc.
Neural Surround
™
name and related logos
are trademarks owned by Neural Audio
Corporation.
GETTING STARTED
3 En
INTRODUCTION
Check that you received all of the following parts.
1 Take off the battery compartment cover.
2 Insert the two supplied batteries
(AA, R6, UM-3) according to the polarity
markings (+ and –) on the inside of the
battery compartment.
3 Snap the battery compartment cover back
into place.
• Change all of the batteries if you notice the following
conditions:
– the operation range of the remote control decreases.
– the TRANSMIT indicator does not flash or its light becomes
dim.
• Do not use an old battery together with a new one.
• Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and
manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as
these different types of batteries may have the same shape and
color.
• If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid
touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with
clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before
installing new batteries.
• Do not throw away batteries with general house waste; dispose
of them correctly in accordance with your local regulations.
• If the remote control is without batteries for more than 2
minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote control,
the contents of the memory may be cleared. When the memory
is cleared, insert new batteries and set up the remote control
code that may have been cleared.
GETTING STARTED
Supplied accessories
About this manual
• y indicates a tip for your operation.
• Some operations can be performed by using either the
buttons on the front panel or the ones on the remote control.
In case the button names differ between the front panel and
the remote control, the button name on the remote control is
given in parentheses.
• This manual is printed prior to production. Design and
specifications are subject to change in part as a result of
improvements, etc. In case of differences between the
manual and product, the product has priority.
TV MUTE TV INPUT
MUTE
AMP
SOURCE
TV
MENUTITLE
SET MENU
LEVEL
DISPLAYRETURN
BAND
SRCH MODE
ON SCREENXM MEMORY
A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.
ENTER
PRESET/CH
REC
AUDIO
USB
NET RADIO
PC/MCX
STEREO
1
EFFECT
VOLUME
TV VOL TV CH
TRANSMITCODE SET
STANDBY
POWER
POWERPOWER
CD
AVTV
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
CD-R XM
DVD DTV
MD
DOCK USB
CBL
NET
TUNER
V-AU X DVR
STANDARD
5
SPEAKERS
9
MUSIC
2
SELECT
6
ENHANCER
0
ENTERTAIN
3
EXTD SUR.
7
NIGHT
10
MOVIE
4
DIRECT ST.
8
STRAIGHT
ENT.
Remote control
Batteries (2)
(AA, R6, UM-3)
Indoor FM antenna
(U.S.A., Canada, China
and General models)
AM loop antenna
Indoor FM antenna
(Europe, Australia and
Korea models)
Installing batteries in the remote
control
Notes
1
3
2
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
4 En
The XM Satellite Radio controlling functions in the following buttons (SEARCH MODE, CATEGORY, PRESET/TUNING/CH
l / h, MEMORY, and DISPLAY) are only applicable to the U.S.A. and Canada models and are operational only when “XM” is
selected as the input source. For details, see “XM Satellite Radio controls and functions” on page 55.
1 MASTER ON/OFF
Turns on or off this unit (see page 28).
2 MAIN ZONE ON/OFF
Turns on the main zone or sets it to the standby mode
(see page 28).
• In the standby mode, this unit consumes a small amount of
power in order to receive infrared signals from the remote
control.
• When you turn on this unit, there will be a 4 to 5-second delay
before this unit can reproduce sound.
• This button is operational only when MASTER ON/OFF is
pressed inward to the ON position.
3 Remote control sensor
Receives signals from the remote control (see page 8).
4 Front panel display
Shows information about the operational status of this unit
(see page 9).
5 A/B/C/D/E, NEXT
• Selects one of the 5 preset station groups (A to E) when
“TUNER” is selected as the input source (see page 49).
• Selects the speaker channel whose output level you
want to adjust when “TUNER” is not selected as the
input source (see page 36).
6 PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h, LEVEL
• Selects one of the 8 preset station numbers (1 to 8)
when “TUNER” is selected as the input source. The
colon (:) is displayed in the front panel display (see
page 50).
• Selects the tuning frequency when “TUNER” is
selected as the input source. The colon (:) is not
displayed in the front panel display (see page 46).
• Adjusts the level of the speaker channel selected using
NEXT when “TUNER” is not selected as the input
source (see page 36).
7 MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM)
Stores a preset station in the memory. Hold down this
button for more than 3 seconds to start automatic preset
tuning (see page 48).
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
Front panel
Note
DISPLAY
VIDEO L AUDIO R
CATEGORY
NEXT
SEARCH MODE
EFFECT
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
FM/AM
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
l PRESET/TUNING/CH h
TUNING MODE
AUTO/MAN'L
INPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT
SPEAKERSPHONES
MAIN ZONE
MASTER
SILENT CINEMA
BA
MULTI CH
INPUT
VOLUME
USBVIDEO AUX
INPUT
ON OFF
LEVEL
ON/OFF
ZONE 2
ON/OFF
ZONE
CONTROL
M
3145687
IJKGFD
A
L
BC
2
EH
90
(U.S.A. model)
Notes
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
5 En
INTRODUCTION
8 TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L)
Switches between automatic tuning (the AUTO indicator
is turned on) and manual tuning (the AUTO indicator is
turned off) (see page 46).
9 ZONE 2 ON/OFF
Turns on Zone 2 or sets it to the standby mode
(see page 99).
This button is operational only when MASTER ON/OFF is
pressed inward to the ON position.
0 ZONE CONTROL
Switches the zone you want to control between the main
zone and Zone 2 (see page 99).
y
When Zone 2 is selected, the ZONE2 indicator flashes in the front
panel display for approximately 5 seconds. While the indicator is
flashing, perform the desired operation.
A VOLUME
Controls the output level of all audio channels.
y
This does not affect the AUDIO OUT (REC) level.
B PHONES (SILENT CINEMA) jack
Outputs audio signals for private listening with
headphones (see page 34).
• When you connect headphones, no signals are output at the
SUBWOOFER OUTPUT jack or the speaker terminals.
• All Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals are mixed down to the
left and right headphone channels.
C SPEAKERS A/B
Turns on or off the set of front speakers connected to the
FRONT A and/or B terminals on the rear panel each time
the corresponding button is pressed.
D PRESET/TUNING, EDIT
• Switches the function of PRESET/TUNING/CH
l / h between selecting preset station numbers and
selecting the tuning frequency.
• Edits the assignments of preset stations (see page 51).
E STRAIGHT (EFFECT)
Turns the sound field programs off or on. When the
“STRAIGHT” mode is selected, 2-channel or multi-
channel input signals are output directly from their
respective speakers without effect processing (see
page 39).
F FM/AM
Switches the reception band between FM and AM when
“TUNER” is selected as the input source (see page 46).
G PROGRAM selector
Selects sound field programs or adjusts the bass/treble
balance in conjunction with TONE CONTROL (see
page 33).
H TONE CONTROL
Adjusts the bass/treble balance of the front left and right
speakers in conjunction with the PROGRAM selector
(see page 33).
I INPUT MODE
Selects either digital or analog input signals exclusively or
sets this unit to automatically detect the type of input
signals and select the corresponding input signals when
one component is connected via both digital and analog
connections (see page 35).
J INPUT selector
Selects the desired input source.
K MULTI CH INPUT
Selects the component connected to the MULTI CH
INPUT jacks as the input source (see page 38).
The input source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks takes
priority over the source selected with the INPUT selector on the
front panel (or the input selector buttons on the remote control).
L VIDEO AUX jacks
Input audio and video signals from a portable external
source such as a game console, a video camera or a
portable audio player (see page 24).
y
To reproduce the source signals input at these jacks, select
“V-AUX” as the input source.
The audio signals input at the DOCK terminal on the rear panel
take priority over the ones input at the VIDEO AUX jacks.
M USB port
Use to connect a USB memory device or a USB portable
audio player (see page 107).
Note
Notes
Note
Note
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
6 En
This section describes the function of each control on the remote control used to control this unit. To operate other
components, see “REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES” on page 93.
• The operation mode of the remote control buttons in the shaded area below depends on the component selector switch position. Set the
component selector switch to AMP to control this unit. To control the TUNER functions, set the component selector switch to
SOURCE and then press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
• The XM Satellite Radio controlling functions in the following buttons (XM, XM MEMORY, SRCH MODE, DISPLAY, cursor
buttons u / d / j / i, numeric buttons and ENT.) are only applicable to the U.S.A. and Canada models and are operational only when
“XM” is selected as the input source. For details, see “XM Satellite Radio controls and functions” on page 55.
■ Controlling this unit
Set the component selector switch to AMP to control this
unit.
1 Infrared window
Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the
component you want to operate (see page 8).
2 CODE SET
Use to set up remote control codes (see page 95).
3 Input selector buttons
Select the input source you want to control.
The corresponding input selector button for the currently selected
input source lights up for approximately 5 seconds after you press
any buttons on the remote control, showing which source
component is currently being operated.
4 Sound field program selector buttons
Select sound field programs (see page 65).
– Use SELECT to play back 2-channel sources in
surround (see page 43).
– Use EXTD SUR. to switch between 5.1 and
6.1-channel playback of multi-channel sources
(see page 42).
– Use DIRECT ST. to play back 2-channel sources in
hi-fi stereo sound (see page 39).
5 SPEAKERS
Turns on or off the set of front speakers connected to the
FRONT A and/or B terminals on the rear panel. Press this
button repeatedly to toggle as follows:
Remote control
Notes
TV MUTE TV INPUT
MUTE
AMP
SOURCE
TV
MENUTITLE
SET MENU
LEVEL
DISPLAYRETURN
BAND
SRCH MODE
ON SCREENXM MEMORY
A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.
ENTER
PRESET/CH
REC
AUDIO
USB
NET RADIO
PC/MCX
STEREO
1
EFFECT
VOLUME
TV VOL TV CH
TRANSMITCODE SET
STANDBY
POWER
POWERPOWER
CD
AVTV
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
CD-R XM
DVD DTV
MD
DOCK USB
CBL
NET
TUNER
V-AUX DVR
STANDARD
5
SPEAKERS
9
MUSIC
2
SELECT
6
ENHANCER
0
ENTERTAIN
3
EXTD SUR.
7
NIGHT
10
MOVIE
4
DIRECT ST.
8
STRAIGHT
ENT.
L
K
0
A
B
C
D
F
E
G
H
I
J
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
9
7
(U.S.A. model)
Note
A on B on
A and B off
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
7 En
INTRODUCTION
6 ENHANCER
Turns on or off the Compressed Music Enhancer mode
(see page 37).
7 LEVEL
Selects the speaker channel to be adjusted and sets the
output level (see page 36).
8 Cursor buttons u / d / j / i, ENTER
Select and adjust the sound field program parameters or
the “SET MENU” parameters.
9 RETURN
Returns to the previous menu level when adjusting the
“SET MENU” parameters.
0 TRANSMIT indicator
Flashes while the remote control is sending infrared
signals.
A STANDBY
Sets this unit to the standby mode (see page 28).
This button is operational only when MASTER ON/OFF on the
front panel is pressed inward to the ON position.
B POWER
Turns on this unit (see page 28).
This button is operational only when MASTER ON/OFF on the
front panel is pressed inward to the ON position.
C SLEEP
Sets the sleep timer (see page 35).
D MULTI CH IN
Selects the component connected to the MULTI CH
INPUT jacks as the input source when using an external
decoder, etc. (see page 38).
E VOLUME +/–
Increases or decreases the volume level.
F Component selector switch
Selects the operation mode of the remote control buttons
in the shaded area.
AMP
Operates this unit.
SOURCE
Operates the component selected with an input
selector button (see page 94).
TV
Operates the TV assigned to either DTV/CBL or
(see page 93).
• To set the remote control codes for other components, see
page 95.
• When you set the remote control codes for both DTV/CBL and
(see page 95), priority is given to the one set for DTV/
CBL.
G MUTE
Mutes the audio output. Press again to restore the audio
output to the previous volume level (see page 34).
H STRAIGHT (EFFECT)
Turns the sound field programs off or on. When the
“STRAIGHT” mode is selected, 2-channel or multi-
channel input signals are output directly from their
respective speakers without effect processing (see
page 39).
I NIGHT
Turns on or off the night listening modes (see page 34).
J SET MENU
Enters “SET MENU” (see page 76).
K DISPLAY
Selects the on-screen display (OSD) mode for your video
monitor (see page 41).
L Network and USB input selector buttons
Select the sub input source of NET/USB (see page 103).
PC/MCX
Selects a PC server or YAMAHA MCX-2000 as the
sub input source of NET/USB.
NET RADIO
Selects the Internet radio as the sub input source of
NET/USB.
USB
Selects a USB memory device or a USB portable
audio player as the sub input source of NET/USB.
• Press NET/USB to select “NET/USB” as the input source
before you press any of the network and USB input selector
buttons stated above to select the corresponding sub input
source of NET/USB.
• When you press any of the network and USB input selector
buttons, the contents previously played for the corresponding
sub input source of NET/USB is automatically played.
Note
Note
Notes
Notes
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
8 En
■ Controlling the TUNER functions
Set the component selector switch to SOURCE and then
press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
4 Numeric buttons
Use numbers 1 through 8 to select preset stations.
7 BAND
Switches the reception band between FM and AM.
8 Cursor buttons u / d / j / i
Press j / i to select a preset station group (A to E) and
u / d to select a preset station number (1 to 8)
(see page 50).
■ Using the remote control
The remote control transmits a directional infrared ray.
Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote
control sensor on this unit during operation.
• Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control.
• Do not drop the remote control.
• Do not leave or store the remote control in the following types
of conditions:
– places of high humidity, such as near a bath
– places of high temperatures, such as near a heater or stove
– places of extremely low temperatures
– dusty places
Notes
ZONE 2
ON/OFF
ZONE
CONTROL
DISPLAYCATEGORY
NEXT
SEARCH MODE
EFFECT
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
FM/AM
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
l PRESET/TUNING/CH h
TUNING MODE
AUTO/MAN'L
INPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT
SPEAKERSPHONES
MAIN ZONE
MASTER
SILENT CINEMA
BA
MULTI CH
INPUT
VOLUME
INPUT
ON OFF
VIDEO L AUDIO R
USBVIDEO AUX
30 30
DOCK USB
TV MUTE TV INPUT
MUTE
AMP
SOURCE
TV
MENUTITLE
SET MENU
LEVEL
DISPLAYRETURN
BAND
SRCH MODE
ON SCREENXM MEMORY
A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.
ENTER
PRESET/CH
REC
AUDIO
USB
NET RADIO
PC/MCX
STEREO
1
EFFECT
VOLUME
TV VOL TV CH
TRANSMITCODE SET
STANDBY
POWER
POWERPOWER
CD
AVTV
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
CD-R XM
DVD DTV
MD
CBL
NET
TUNER
V-AUX DVR
STANDARD
5
SPEAKERS
9
MUSIC
2
SELECT
6
ENHANCER
0
ENTERTAIN
3
EXTD SUR.
7
NIGHT
10
MOVIE
4
DIRECT ST.
8
STRAIGHT
ENT.
ON/OFF
LEVEL
Approximately 6 m (20 ft)
(U.S.A. model)
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
9 En
INTRODUCTION
The XM indicator is only applicable to the U.S.A. and Canada models and the cursor on the left of the XM indicator lights up only when
“XM” is selected as the input source. For details, see “Basic XM Satellite Radio operations” on page 57.
1 Decoder indicators
The respective indicator lights up when any of the
decoders of this unit functions.
The neural indicator is only applicable to the U.S.A. and Canada
models and lights up only when the Neural Surround decoder is
selected (see page 43).
2 ENHANCER indicator
Lights up when the Compressed Music Enhancer mode is
turned on (see page 37).
3 Sound field indicators
Light up to indicate the active DSP sound fields.
4 VIRTUAL indicator
Lights up when Virtual CINEMA DSP is active (see
page 44).
5 Input source indicators
The corresponding cursor lights up to show the currently
selected input source.
6 DOCK indicator
Lights up when you station your iPod in a YAMAHA iPod
universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately)
connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit
(see page 22).
7 SILENT CINEMA indicator
Lights up when headphones are connected and a sound
field program is selected (see page 34).
8 CINEMA DSP indicator
Lights up when you select a CINEMA DSP sound field
program (see page 66).
9 AUTO indicator
Lights up when this unit is in the automatic tuning mode
(see page 46).
0 TUNED indicator
Lights up when this unit is tuned into a station
(see page 46).
A STEREO indicator
Lights up when this unit is receiving a strong signal for an
FM stereo broadcast while the AUTO indicator is lit.
B MEMORY indicator
Flashes to show that a station can be stored (see page 48).
Front panel display
Note
p
DVR
p
DVD
p
CD
p
XM
p
V-AUX
p
DTV/CBL
p
MD/CD-R
p
TUNER
p
NET
USB
96
24
q PL
q EX
q PL
ENHANCER
MATRIX DISCRETE
SILENT CINEMA
ZONE2 NIGHT
DOCK
STANDARD
AUTO
PSHOLD RT
EON
PTYPTY
TUNED
MUTE
VOLUME
MEMORY
SLEEP
VIRTUAL
PCM
q PL x
neural
A B
SP
mS
ft
dB
96/24
HiFi DSP
LFE
LCR
SL SB SR
q
DIGITAL
t
dB
STEREO
CT
2
H
EIGJK LNMPO
Q
D
F
13 45 768 B
0A9C
(Europe model only)
Note
Presence DSP sound field
Listening position
Surround left
DSP sound field
Surround right
DSP sound field
Surround back DSP sound field
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
10 En
C VOLUME level indicator
Indicates the current volume level.
D PCM indicator
Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (Pulse Code
Modulation) digital audio signals.
E STANDARD indicator
Lights up when the “SUR. STANDARD” or “SUR.
ENHANCED” program is selected.
F SP A B indicators
Light up according to the set of front speakers selected.
G Headphones indicator
Lights up when headphones are connected.
H ZONE2 indicator
Lights up when Zone 2 is turned on (see page 99).
I NIGHT indicator
Lights up when you select a night listening mode
(see page 34).
J HiFi DSP indicator
Lights up when you select a HiFi DSP sound field
program (see page 67).
K Multi-information display
Shows the name of the current sound field program and
other information when adjusting or changing settings.
L SLEEP indicator
Lights up while the sleep timer is on (see page 35).
M MUTE indicator
Flashes while the MUTE function is on (see page 34).
N 96/24 indicator
Lights up when a DTS 96/24 signal is input to this unit.
O Input channel indicators
Indicate the channel components of the current digital
input signal.
P LFE indicator
Lights up when the input signal contains the LFE signal.
Q Radio Data System indicators
(Europe model only)
The corresponding indicator lights up to show the type
of the Radio Data System information.
EON
Lights up when the EON data service is being
received.
PTY HOLD
Lights up while searching for the Radio Data System
stations in the PTY SEEK mode.
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
11 En
INTRODUCTION
1 Video component jacks
See pages 18 and 19 for connection information.
2 Audio component jacks
See page 21 for connection information.
3 MULTI CH INPUT jacks
See page 24 for connection information.
4 ZONE 2 OUTPUT jacks
See page 98 for connection information.
These jacks output analog signals only.
5 SUBWOOFER OUTPUT jack
See page 13 for connection information.
6 DIGITAL OUTPUT jack
See page 21 for connection information.
7 DIGITAL INPUT jacks
See pages 19 and 21 for connection information.
8 XM jack (U.S.A. and Canada models only)
See page 54 for connection information.
9 DOCK terminal
Use to connect a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as
YDS-10 sold separately) where your iPod can be
stationed.
See page 22 for connection information.
0 LAN port
Use to connect a network cable for network connections.
See page 23 for connection information.
A COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
See pages 18 and 19 for connection information.
B REMOTE jacks
See page 98 for details.
C CONTROL OUT jack
This is a control expansion terminal for custom
installation.
D Antenna terminals
See page 25 for connection information.
E Speaker terminals
See page 13 for connection information.
F AC OUTLET(S)
Use to supply power to your other audiovisual
components.
See page 26 for details.
■ VOLTAGE SELECTOR
(General model only)
See page 26 for details.
Rear panel
AUDIO AUDIO OUTPUT DIGITAL INPUT
DVD DVD
COAXIAL
DTV/CBLMD/CD-RMD/CD-R
SUB
WOOFER
SUB
WOOFER
SURROUND
FRONT ZONE 2
OUT
(REC)
IN
(PLAY)
MD/
CD-R
CD
DVD
MONITOR OUT
DTV/
CBL
DVD
DVR
COMPONENT VIDEO
P
RPBY
FM ANT
75Ω
UNBAL.
AM
ANT
GND
TUNER SPEAKERS
XM LANDOCK
DTV/CBL
IN OUT
DVR DVD DTV/CBL
IN OUT
DVR
CENTER
DIGITAL
OUTPUT
MULTI CH INPUT
VIDEO S VIDEO
MONITOR
OUT
MONITOR
OUT
FRONT
A
B
OUTIN
REMOTE CONTROL
OUT
+12V
15mA MAX.
SURROUND
CENTER
SURROUND BACK
PRPBY
OPTICAL OPTICAL
0 A87654321
BCD
EF
9
(U.S.A. model)
Note
CONNECTIONS
12 En
The speaker layout below shows the standard ITU-R
*
speaker setting. You can use it to enjoy CINEMA DSP and
multi-channel audio sources.
*
ITU-R is the radio communication sector of the ITU
(International Telecommunication Union).
Front left and right speakers (FL and FR)
The front speakers are used for the main source sound plus
effect sounds. Place these speakers at an equal distance
from the ideal listening position. The distance of each
speaker from each side of the video monitor should be the
same.
Center speaker (C)
The center speaker is for the center channel sounds
(dialog, vocals, etc.). If for some reason it is not practical
to use a center speaker, you can do without it. Best results,
however, are obtained with the full system. Place the
center speaker centrally between the front speakers and as
close to the monitor as possible, such as directly over or
under it.
Surround left and right speakers (SL and SR)
The surround speakers are used for effect and surround
sounds. Place these speakers behind your listening
position, facing slightly inwards, about 1.8 m (6 ft) above
the floor.
Surround back speaker (SB)
The surround back speaker supplements the surround
speakers and provides more realistic front-to-back
transitions. Place this speaker directly behind the listening
position and at the same height as the surround speakers.
Subwoofer (SW)
The use of a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier, such as
the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer
System, is effective not only for reinforcing bass
frequencies from any or all channels, but also for high
fidelity reproduction of the LFE (low-frequency effect)
channel included in Dolby Digital and DTS sources. The
position of the subwoofer is not so critical, because low
bass sounds are not highly directional. But it is better to
place the subwoofer near the front speakers. Turn it
slightly toward the center of the room to reduce wall
reflections.
CONNECTIONS
Placing speakers
SW
FR
FL
SB
SL
SR
C
60˚
30˚
SB
FL
FR
C
SL
SR
SR
80˚
SL
1.8 m (6 ft)
13 En
CONNECTIONS
PREPARATION
Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are faulty,
no sound will be heard from the speakers, and if the polarity of the speaker connections is incorrect, the sound will be
unnatural and lack bass.
• Before connecting the speakers, make sure that this unit is turned off (see page 28).
• Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or do not let them touch any metal part of this
unit. This could damage this unit and/or speakers.
• Use magnetically shielded speakers. If this type of speakers still creates the interference with the
monitor, place the speakers away from the monitor.
• If you are to use 6 ohm speakers, be sure to set “SP IMP.” to “6ΩMIN” before using this unit (see
page 27). 4 ohm speakers can be also used as the front speakers (see page 91).
A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables running side by side. Cables are colored or shaped differently, perhaps with a stripe,
groove or ridge. Connect the striped (grooved, etc.) cable to the “+” (red) terminals of this unit and your speaker. Connect the plain cable
to the “–” (black) terminals.
Connecting speakers
Note
CAUTION
OUTPUT
SUB
WOOFER
SPEAKERS
FRONT
A
B
SURROUND
CENTER SURROUND BACK
1 2 4 57
63
Subwoofer
Center
speaker
Front speakers (A)
Surround back
speaker
LeftRight
LeftRight
Surround speakers
Front
speakers
(B)
(U.S.A. model)
14 En
CONNECTIONS
FRONT terminals
Connect one or two sets of front speakers (1, 2) to these
terminals. If you use only one front speaker system,
connect it to the FRONT A or B terminal.
CENTER terminals
Connect a center speaker (3) to these terminals.
SURROUND terminals
Connect surround speakers (4, 5) to these terminals.
SURROUND BACK terminals
Connect a surround back speaker (6) to these terminals.
SUBWOOFER OUTPUT jack
Connect a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier (7) (such as
the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer
System) to this jack.
7
1
2
6
5
4
3
Speaker layout
15 En
CONNECTIONS
PREPARATION
■ Connecting the speaker cable
1 Remove approximately 10 mm (0.4 in) of
insulation from the end of each speaker
cable and then twist the exposed wires of the
cable together to prevent short circuits.
2 Loosen the knob.
3 Insert one bare wire into the hole on the side
of each terminal.
4 Tighten the knob to secure the wire.
■ Connecting the banana plug
(except Europe model)
The banana plug is a single-pole electrical connector
widely used to terminate speaker cables.
1 Tighten the knob.
2 Insert the banana plug connector into the
end of the corresponding terminal.
10 mm (0.4 in)
Red: positive (+)
Black: negative (–)
Banana plug
Red: positive (+)
Black: negative (–)
16 En
CONNECTIONS
■ Audio jacks
This unit has three types of audio jacks. Connection
depends on the availability of audio jacks on your other
components.
AUDIO jacks
For conventional analog audio signals transmitted via left
and right analog audio cables. Connect red plugs to the
right jacks and white plugs to the left jacks.
DIGITAL AUDIO COAXIAL jacks
For digital audio signals transmitted via coaxial digital
audio cables.
DIGITAL AUDIO OPTICAL jacks
For digital audio signals transmitted via optical digital
audio cables.
• You can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and
DTS bitstreams. When you connect components to both the
COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the signals
input at the COAXIAL jack. All digital input jacks are
compatible with 96-kHz sampling digital signals.
• Pull out the cap from the optical jack before you connect the
fiber optic cable. Do not discard the cap. When you are not
using the optical jack, be sure to put the cap back in place. This
cap protects the jack from dust.
■ Video jacks
This unit has three types of video jacks. Connection
depends on the availability of input jacks on your video
monitor.
VIDEO jacks
For conventional composite video signals transmitted via
composite video cables.
S VIDEO jacks
For S-video signals, separated into the luminance (Y) and
chrominance (C) video signals transmitted on separate
wires of S-video cables.
COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
For component video signals, separated into the
luminance (Y) and chrominance (P
B, PR) video signals
transmitted on separate wires of component video cables.
y
When “VIDEO CONV.” is set to “ON” (see page 86), the video
signals input at the VIDEO and S VIDEO jacks are converted and
output at the VIDEO, S VIDEO and COMPONENT VIDEO
jacks interchangeably.
Information on jacks and cable plugs
VIDEO S VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y P
B
P
R
PB
Y
P
R
S
V
COAXIAL
DIGITAL AUDIO
AUDIO
OPTICAL
DIGITAL AUDIO
R
L
C
O
R
L
Left and right
analog audio
cable plugs
Optical
digital
audio cable
plug
Coaxial
digital audio
cable plug
Composite
video cable
plug
S-video
cable plug
Component
video cable
plugs
Audio jacks and cable plugs Video jacks and cable plugs
(Red)(White) (Orange) (Yellow) (Green) (Blue) (Red)
Notes
17 En
CONNECTIONS
PREPARATION
■ Audio signal flow for AUDIO OUT (REC)
This unit handles digital and analog signals independently. Thus, audio signals input at the analog jacks are output only at the analog
AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks. Likewise, audio signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT (OPTICAL or COAXIAL) jacks are output only at the
DIGITAL OUTPUT jack.
■ Video signal flow for MONITOR OUT
If video signals are input at the COMPONENT VIDEO, S VIDEO and VIDEO jacks simultaneously when “VIDEO CONV.” is set to
“ON”, the priority order of the input signals is as follows:
COMPONENT VIDEO > S VIDEO > VIDEO
Audio and video signal flow
Note
Note
DIGITAL AUDIO
OPTICAL
DIGITAL AUDIO
COAXIAL
AUDIO
RLRL
Digital output
Output
AUDIO OUT (REC)
Input
Analog output
Digital audio
Analog audio
S VIDEO
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
Y P
B
P
R
Y P
B
P
R
Through
Output
(MONITOR OUT)
Input
Video conversion when “VIDEO CONV.” is set to “ON” (see page 86)
Analog video
18 En
CONNECTIONS
Connect your TV to the VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack, the S VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack or the COMPONENT
VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks of this unit.
Do not connect this unit or other components to the AC power supply until all connections between
components are complete.
Connecting a TV
CAUTION
VIDEO S VIDEO
MONITOR
OUT
MONITOR
OUT
MONITOR OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO
PRPBY
PRPB
V
S
Y
TV
(U.S.A. model)
S-video in
Component video in
Video in
19 En
CONNECTIONS
PREPARATION
Connect your DVD player, DVD recorder, VCR or STB (set-top box) using the same type of video connections as those
made for your TV (see page 18). The cable TV receiver and the satellite receiver are examples of the STB.
Do not connect this unit or other components to the AC power supply until all connections between
components are complete.
• When “VIDEO CONV.” is set to “OFF” (see page 86), be sure to make the same type of video connections as those made for your TV
(see page 18). For example, if you connected your TV to the VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack of this unit, connect your other
components to the VIDEO jacks.
• When “VIDEO CONV.” is set to “ON” (see page 86), the converted video signals are output only at the MONITOR OUT jacks. When
recording a source, you must make the same type of video connections between each component.
• To make a digital connection to a component other than the default component assigned to each DIGITAL INPUT or DIGITAL
OUTPUT jack, select the corresponding setting for “OPTICAL OUT”, “OPTICAL IN”, or “COAXIAL IN” in “I/O ASSIGNMENT”
(see page 82).
• If you connect your DVD player to both the DIGITAL INPUT (OPTICAL) and the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jacks, priority is
given to the signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jack.
■ Connecting a DVD player
Connecting a DVD player, a DVD recorder, a VCR or an STB
Notes
CAUTION
AUDIO DIGITAL INPUT
DVD DVD
COAXIAL
DVD DVD
VIDEO S VIDEO
OPTICAL
DVD
COMPONENT VIDEO
P
RPBY
S
P
RPBY
V
C
LR
O
DVD player
Optical audio out
Coaxial audio out
Video out
Audio out
S-video out
Component video out
(U.S.A. model)
20 En
CONNECTIONS
■ Connecting a DVD recorder or a VCR
■ Connecting an STB
AUDIO
IN OUT
DVR
IN OUT
DVR
VIDEO S VIDEO
DVR
COMPONENT VIDEO
PRPBY
V
S
V
LR LR
PRPBY
S
DVD recorder or
VCR
Audio in
Audio out
Video in
Video out
Component video out
S-video in
S-video out
(U.S.A. model)
AUDIO DIGITAL INPUT
DTV/CBL
DTV/CBL DTV/CBL
VIDEO S VIDEO
OPTICAL
DTV/
CBL
COMPONENT VIDEO
P
RPBY
S
P
RPBY
V
LR
O
Cable TV receiver or
satellite receiver
Optical audio out
Component video out
Video out
Audio out
S-video out
(U.S.A. model)
21 En
CONNECTIONS
PREPARATION
Connect your CD player, MD player or tape deck via analog and/or digital connections.
Do not connect this unit or other components to the AC power supply until all connections between
components are complete.
To make a digital connection to a component other than the default component assigned to each DIGITAL INPUT or DIGITAL
OUTPUT jack, select the corresponding setting for “OPTICAL OUT”, “OPTICAL IN”, or “COAXIAL IN” in “I/O ASSIGNMENT”
(see page 82).
Connecting a CD player, an MD player or a tape deck
Note
CAUTION
AUDIO DIGITAL INPUT
MD/CD-RMD/CD-R
OUT
(REC)
IN
(PLAY)
MD/
CD-R
CD
DIGITAL
OUTPUT
OPTICAL OPTICAL
LR
LR LR
O
O
CD player
MD recorder or
tape deck
(U.S.A. model)
Audio out
Audio out
Audio in
Optical audio out
Optical audio in
22 En
CONNECTIONS
This unit is equipped with the DOCK terminal on the rear panel that allows you to connect a YAMAHA iPod universal
dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) where you can station your iPod and control playback of your iPod using the
supplied remote control. Connect a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) to the DOCK
terminal on the rear panel of this unit using its dedicated cable. Once the connection is complete, station your iPod in the
YAMAHA iPod universal dock.
Do not connect this unit or other components to the AC power supply until all connections between
components are complete.
• Only iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini are supported.
• You need a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) and its dedicated cable compatible with the DOCK
terminal of this unit.
• Do not connect any iPod accessories (such as headphones, a wired remote control, or an FM transmitter) to your iPod when it is
stationed in a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately).
• Once your iPod is stationed in a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of
this unit, this unit begins the signal transmission with your iPod.
• Unless your iPod is firmly stationed in a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) connected to the DOCK
terminal of this unit, audio and/or video signals may not be output properly.
• Once the connection between your iPod and this unit is complete, “iPod connected” appears in the front panel display and the DOCK
indicator lights up in the front panel display. If the connection between your iPod and this unit fails, a status message appears in the
front panel display. For a complete list of connection status messages, see the iPod section in “TROUBLESHOOTING” on page 113.
• Only analog audio and video signals of your iPod are input at the DOCK terminal, and the analog audio signals can be output at the
analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks for recording.
• Your iPod battery is automatically charged when your iPod is stationed in a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold
separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit as long as this unit is turned on.
• Depending on the type of iPod, you may need to insert one of the iPod adapters supplied with a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such
as YDS-10 sold separately) into the dock slot before you station your iPod.
Connecting a YAMAHA iPod universal dock
Notes
CAUTION
DOCK
YAMAHA iPod universal dock
(such as YDS-10 sold separately)
(U.S.A. model)
iPod
23 En
CONNECTIONS
PREPARATION
To connect this unit to your network, plug one end of a network cable (CAT-5 or higher straight cable) into the LAN port
of this unit, and plug the other end into one of the LAN ports on your router that supports the DHCP (Dynamic Host
Configuration Protocol) server function. The following diagram shows a connection example where this unit is connected
to one of the LAN ports on a 4-port router. To enjoy music files saved on your PC and YAMAHA MCX-2000 or access
the Internet radio, each device must be connected properly in the network.
If the DHCP server function on your router is disabled, you need to configure the network settings manually (see page 84).
Connecting the network
Note
LAN
LAN
WAN
(U.S.A. model)
Router
PC
Modem
YAMAHA MCX-2000
Internet
YAMAHA MCX-C15
YAMAHA MCX-A10
(with optional
speakers)
Network cable
24 En
CONNECTIONS
This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks
(FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R and
SUBWOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from a
multi-format player, external decoder or sound processor.
Connect the output jacks on your multi-format player,
external decoder or sound processor to the MULTI CH
INPUT jacks. Be sure to match the left and right output
jacks to the left and right input jacks for the front and
surround channels.
Do not connect this unit or other components to
the AC power supply until all connections
between components are complete.
• When you select the component connected to the MULTI CH
INPUT jacks as the input source (see page 38), this unit
automatically turns off the digital sound field processor, and
you cannot select sound field programs.
• This unit does not redirect signals input at the MULTI CH
INPUT jacks to accommodate for missing speakers. We
recommend that you connect at least a 5.1-channel speaker
system before using this feature.
• When headphones are used, only the signals input at the
FRONT L/R jacks are output at the PHONES jack.
Use the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel to connect a
game console, a video camera or a portable audio player to
this unit.
Be sure to turn off the volume of this unit and
other components before making connections.
The audio signals input at the DOCK terminal takes priority over
the ones input at the VIDEO AUX jacks.
Connecting a multi-format player,
an external decoder or a sound
processor
Notes
CAUTION
SUB
WOOFER
SURROUND
FRONT
CENTER
MULTI CH INPUT
L R L R
Multi-format player,
external decoder or
sound processor
Front out
Surround out
Subwoofer out
Center out
Connecting a game console, a
video camera or a portable audio
player
Note
CAUTION
SPEAKERSPHONES
ON/OFF
MAIN ZONE
MASTER
SILENT CINEMA
A
ON OFF
V
ZONE 2
ON/OFF
ZONE
CONTROL
DISPLAYCATEGORY
NEXT
SEARCH MODE
EFFECT
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
FM/AM
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
l PRESET/TUNING/CH h
TUNING MODE
AUTO/MAN'L
INPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT
B
MULTI CH
INPUT
VOLUME
INPUT
LEVEL
VIDEO L AUDIO R
USBVIDEO AUX
VIDEO L AUDIO R
VIDEO AUX
LR
Game console,
video camera or
portable audio player
Audio out
Video out
(U.S.A. model)
25 En
CONNECTIONS
PREPARATION
Both FM and AM indoor antennas are supplied with this
unit. In general, these antennas should provide sufficient
signal strength. Connect each antenna correctly to the
designated terminals.
• Be sure to set the tuner frequency step (General model only)
according to the frequency spacing in your area (see page 92).
• The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit.
• The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an
outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit.
• A properly installed outdoor antenna provides clearer reception
than an indoor one. If you experience poor reception quality,
install an outdoor antenna. Consult the nearest authorized
YAMAHA dealer or service center about outdoor antennas.
■ Connecting the AM loop antenna
1 Set up the AM loop antenna.
2 Press and hold the tab of the AM ANT
terminal.
3 Insert one of the AM loop antenna lead wires
into the AM ANT terminal.
4 Release the tab of the AM ANT terminal back
into place.
5 Repeat steps 2 through 4 to connect the
other lead wire to the GND terminal.
y
Once you have properly connected the AM loop antenna to this
unit, orient the AM loop antenna for the best reception when you
tune into AM stations.
Connecting the FM and AM antennas
Notes
FM ANT
75Ω
UNBAL.
AM
ANT
GND
TUNER
AM loop antenna
(supplied)
Ground (GND terminal)
For maximum safety and
minimum interference,
connect the antenna GND
terminal to a good earth
ground. A good earth ground
is a metal stake driven into
moist earth.
Indoor FM antenna
(supplied)
Outdoor AM antenna
Use a 5 to 10 m (16 to 32 ft) of vinyl-
covered wire extended from a
window.
26 En
CONNECTIONS
Once all connections are complete, plug the power cable into the AC wall outlet.
■ VOLTAGE SELECTOR
(General model only)
The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of
this unit must be set for your local voltage
BEFORE plugging the power cable into the AC
wall outlet. Improper setting of the VOLTAGE
SELECTOR may cause damage to this unit and
create a potential fire hazard.
Rotate the VOLTAGE SELECTOR clockwise or
counterclockwise to the correct position using a
straight slot screwdriver.
Voltages are 110/120/220/230–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz.
■ AC OUTLET(S) (SWITCHED)
Australia model...................................................... 1 outlet
Korea model............................................................... None
Other models......................................................... 2 outlets
Use these outlet(s) to supply power to any connected
components. Connect the power cable of your other
components to these outlet(s). Power to these outlet(s) is
supplied when the main zone or Zone 2 is turned on.
However, power to these outlet(s) is cut off when both the
main zone and Zone 2 are turned off or when MASTER
ON/OFF on the front panel is pressed and released
outward to the OFF position. For information on the
maximum power or the total power consumption of the
components that can be connected to these outlet(s), see
“SPECIFICATIONS” on page 119.
Connecting the power cable
AC OUTLETS
To the AC wall outlet
(U.S.A. model)
CAUTION
230-
240V
VOLTAGE
SELECTOR
Voltage indication
Memory back-up
The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data
from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode.
However, the stored data will be lost in case the power
cable is disconnected from the AC wall outlet or if the
power supply is cut off for more than one week.
27 En
CONNECTIONS
PREPARATION
If you are to use 6 ohm speakers, set “SP IMP.” to
“6ΩMIN” as follows BEFORE using this unit. 4
ohm speakers can be also used as the front
speakers.
1 Make sure this unit is turned off.
See page 28 for details about turning on or off this
unit.
2 Press and hold STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the
front panel and then press MASTER ON/OFF
inward to the ON position to turn on this unit.
This unit turns on, and the advanced setup menu
appears in the front panel display.
3 Rotate the PROGRAM selector on the front
panel to select “SP IMP.”.
The following display appears in the front panel
display.
4 Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the front
panel repeatedly to select “6ΩMIN”.
The following display appears in the front panel
display.
5 Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to
release it outward to the OFF position to save
the new setting and turn off this unit.
The setting you made is reflected next time you turn on this unit.
Setting the speaker impedance
CAUTION
ZONE 2
ON/OFF
ZONE
CONTROL
DISPLAYCATEGORY
NEXT
SEARCH MODE
EFFECT
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
FM/AM
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
l PRESET/TUNING/CH h
TUNING MODE
AUTO/MAN'L
INPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT
SPEAKERSPHONES
ON/OFF
MAIN ZONE
MASTER
SILENT CINEMA
BA
MULTI CH
INPUT
VOLUME
INPUT
ON OFF
VIDEO L AUDIO R
USBVIDEO AUX
32,4
2,5
LEVEL
(U.S.A. model)
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
MASTER
ON OFF
While holding
down
PROGRAM
SP IMP.-8 MIN
Note
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
SP IMP.-6 MIN
MASTER
ON OFF
28 En
CONNECTIONS
When all connections are complete, turn on this unit.
■ Turning on this unit
Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel inward
to the ON position to turn on this unit.
• Press MAIN ZONE ON/OFF on the front panel (or
STANDBY on the remote control) to set the main zone
to the standby mode.
• Press MAIN ZONE ON/OFF on the front panel (or
POWER on the remote control) to turn on the main
zone.
MAIN ZONE ON/OFF on the front panel as well as POWER and
STANDBY on the remote control are operational only when
MASTER ON/OFF is pressed inward to the ON position.
y
For details about turning on or off Zone 2, see page 99
■ Turning off this unit
Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to
release it outward to the OFF position to turn off
this unit.
Turning on and off the power
ZONE 2
ON/OFF
ZONE
CONTROL
DISPLAYCATEGORY
NEXT
SEARCH MODE
EFFECT
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
FM/AM
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
l
PRESET/TUNING/CH
h
TUNING MODE
AUTO/MAN'L
INPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT
SPEAKERSPHONES
ON/OFF
MAIN ZONE
MASTER
SILENT CINEMA
BA
MULTI CH
INPUT
VOLUME
INPUT
ON OFF
VIDEO L AUDIO R
USBVIDEO AUX
LEVEL
AMP
SOURCE
TV
VOLUME
TV VOL TV CH
TRANSMITCODE SET
STANDBY
POWER
POWERPOWER
CD
AVTV
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
CD-R XM
DVD D TV
MD
DOCK USB
CBL
NET
TUNER
V-AU X D VR
(U.S.A. model) (U.S.A. model)
MASTER ON/OFF
MAIN ZONE ON/OFF
STANDBY
POWER
Note
MASTER
ON OFF
Front panel
ON/OFF
MAIN ZONE
STANDBY
Front panel Remote control
or
ON/OFF
MAIN ZONE
POWER
Front panel
or
Remote control
MASTER
ON OFF
Front panel
BASIC SETUP
29 En
PREPARATION
The “BASIC SETUP” feature is a useful way to set up your system quickly and with minimal effort.
• Make sure you disconnect your headphones from this unit.
• If you wish to configure this unit manually using more precise adjustments, use the detailed parameters in “SOUND MENU” (see
page 77).
• Altering any parameters in “BASIC SETUP” resets all parameters manually adjusted in “SOUND MENU” (see page 77).
• Initial settings are indicated in bold under each parameter.
• Press RETURN on the remote control to return to the previous menu level.
1 Set the component selector switch to AMP.
2 Press SET MENU to enter “SET MENU”.
The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD.
3 Press u / d to select “BASIC SETUP”.
4 Press ENTER to enter “BASIC SETUP”.
The following display appears in the OSD.
5 Press u / d to select “ROOM” and then j / i
to select the desired setting.
Select the size of the room where you have installed
your speakers. In general, the room sizes are defined
as follows:
Choices: S, M, L
[U.S.A. and Canada models]
S (small) 16 x 13ft, 200ft
2
(4.8 x 4.0m, 20m
2
)
M (medium) 20 x 16ft, 300ft
2
(6.3 x 5.0m, 30m
2
)
L (large) 26 x 19ft, 450ft
2
(7.9 x 5.8m, 45m
2
)
[Other models]
S (small) 3.6 x 2.8m, 10m
2
M (medium) 4.8 x 4.0m, 20m
2
L (large) 6.3 x 5.0m, 30m
2
BASIC SETUP
Notes
AMP
SOURCE
TV
VOLUME
TV VOL TV CH
TRANSMITCODE SET
STANDBY
POWER
POWERPOWER
CD
AVTV
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
CD-R XM
DVD D TV
MD
DOCK USB
CBL
NET
TUNER
V-AU X D VR
MENUTITLE
SET MENU
LEVEL
DISPLAYRETURN
BAND
SRCH MODE
ON SCREENXM MEMORY
A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.
ENTER
PRESET/CH
REC
AUDI O
STEREO
1
EFFECT
STANDARD
5
SPEAKERS
9
MUSIC
2
SELECT
6
ENHANCER
0
ENTERTAIN
3
EXTD SUR.
7
NIGHT
10
MOVIE
4
DIRECT ST.
8
STRAIGHT
ENT.
1
3-12
2,13
(U.S.A. model)
AMP
SOURCE
TV
MENU
SET MENU
SRCH MODE
SET MENU
.;BASICSETUP
;MANUALSETUP
.;SIGNAL INFO
[ ]/[]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
p
p
A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.
ENTER
PRESET/CH
;BASIC SETUP
.ROOM: S >M L
SUBWOOFER;;;;YES
SPEAKERS;;;;6spk
SETUP:>OK CANCEL
[]/[]:Up/Down
[<]/[>]:Select
p
p
A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.
ENTER
PRESET/CH
;BASIC SETUP
.ROOM: S >M L
SUBWOOFER;;;;YES
SPEAKERS;;;;6spk
SETUP:>OK CANCEL
[]/[]:Up/Down
[<]/[>]:Select
p
p
A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.
ENTER
PRESET/CH
30 En
BASIC SETUP
6 Press d to select “SUBWOOFER” and then
j / i to select the desired setting.
Choices: YES, NONE
• Select “YES” if you have a subwoofer in your
system.
• Select “NONE” if you do not have a subwoofer in
your system.
7 Press d to select “SPEAKERS” and then j / i
to select the number of speakers connected
to this unit.
8 Press d to select “SETUP” and then j / i to
select the desired setting.
Choices: OK, CANCEL
• Select “OK” to apply the settings you made.
• Select “CANCEL” to cancel the setup procedure
without making any changes.
y
You can also press SET MENU to cancel the setup
procedure.
9 Press ENTER to confirm your selection.
If you selected “OK” in step 8, each speaker outputs a
test tone twice in turn. “CHECK:Test Tone” appears
in the OSD for a few seconds and then “CHECK
OK?” appears in the OSD.
y
Check the speaker connections (see page 13) and adjust the
“SPEAKERS” settings back in step 7, if necessary.
Choice Display Speakers
2spk
Front L/R
3spk
Front L/R, Center
4spk
Front L/R, Surround L/R
5spk
Front L/R, Center, Surround L/R
6spk
Front L/R, Center, Surround L/R,
Surround back
A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.
ENTER
PRESET/CH
;BASIC SETUP
ROOM: S >M L
.SUBWOOFER;;;;YES
SPEAKERS;;;;6spk
SETUP:>OK CANCEL
[]/[]:Up/Down
[<]/[>]:Select
p
p
A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.
ENTER
PRESET/CH
;BASIC SETUP
ROOM: S >M L
SUBWOOFER;;;;YES
.SPEAKERS;;;;6spk
SETUP:>OK CANCEL
[]/[]:Up/Down
[<]/[>]:Select
p
p
LL C R
SL SB SR
LL C R
SL SB SR
LL CR
SL SB SR
LL C R
SL SB SR
LL C R
SL SB
SB
SR
LL C R
SL SB SR
A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.
ENTER
PRESET/CH
;BASIC SETUP
ROOM: S >M L
SUBWOOFER;;;;YES
SPEAKERS;;;;6spk
. SETUP:>OK CANCEL
[]/[]:Up/Down
[<]/[>]:Select
p
p
A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.
ENTER
PRESET/CH
;BASIC SETUP
ROOM: S >M L
SUBWOOFER;;;;YES
SPEAKERS;;;;6spk
SETUP:>OK CANCEL
.CHECK:Test Tone
[<]/[>]:Select
;BASIC SETUP
ROOM: S >M L
SUBWOOFER;;;;YES
SPEAKERS;;;;6spk
SETUP:>OK CANCEL
.CHECK OK?;;;;YES
[<]/[>]:Select
31 En
BASIC SETUP
PREPARATION
10 Press j / i to select the desired setting.
Choices: YES, NO
• Select “YES” to complete the setup procedure if
the test tone levels from each speaker were
satisfactory.
• Select “NO” to proceed to the speaker level
adjustment menu in step 12 to balance the output
level of each speaker.
11 Press ENTER to confirm your selection.
• If you selected “YES” in step 10, the setup
procedure is completed and the display returns to
the top “SET MENU” display.
• If you selected “NO” in step 10, the speaker level
adjustment display appears in the front panel
display.
12 Press u / d to select a speaker and then j / i
to adjust the balance.
The selected speaker and the front left speaker (or the
surround left speaker) output a test tone in turn.
•Press i to increase the value.
•Press j to decrease the value.
• Select “FR” to adjust the balance between the front
left and right speakers.
• Select “C” to adjust the balance between the front
left and center speakers.
• Select “SL” to adjust the balance between the front
left and surround left speakers.
• Select “SB” to adjust the balance between the
surround left and surround back speakers.
• Select “SR” to adjust the balance between the
surround left and surround right speakers.
• Select “SWFR” to adjust the balance between the
front left speaker and the subwoofer.
13 Press SET MENU to exit from “BASIC
SETUP”.
;BASIC SETUP
ROOM: S >M L
SUBWOOFER;;;;YES
SPEAKERS;;;;6spk
SETUP:>OK CANCEL
.CHECK OK?;;;;YES
[<]/[>]:Select
A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.
ENTER
PRESET/CH
A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.
ENTER
PRESET/CH
A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.
ENTER
PRESET/CH
.FR;;;;;;;;;;
C;;;;;;;;;;
SL;;;;;;;;;;
;BASIC SETUP
-__________+
MENU
SET MENU
SRCH MODE
PLAYBACK
32 En
Extreme caution should be exercised when you play back CDs encoded in DTS. If you play back a CD
encoded in DTS on a DTS-incompatible CD player, you will only hear some unwanted noise that may
damage your speakers. Check whether your CD player supports CDs encoded in DTS. Also, check the
sound output level of your CD player before you play back a CD encoded in DTS.
1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this
unit.
2 Press SPEAKERS A or B on the front panel
(or set the component selector switch to
AMP and then press SPEAKERS on the
remote control repeatedly) to turn on the set
of front speakers you want to use.
Each time you press SPEAKERS A or B, the
respective set of front speakers are turned on or off.
3 Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel
(or press one of the input selector buttons on
the remote control) to select the desired
input source.
The name of the currently selected input source
appears in the front panel display and in the OSD for
a few seconds.
• To enjoy multi-channel sources in surround, connect the
source component via digital connection and set the input
mode to “AUTO” or “DTS” (see page 35).
• See page 42 for details about surround sound.
4 Start playback on the selected source
component or select a broadcast station.
• Refer to the operating instructions for the source
component.
• See page 46 for details about tuning instructions.
• See page 53 for details about XM Satellite Radio
tuning instructions.
PLAYBACK
CAUTION
ZONE 2
ON/OFF
ZONE
CONTROL
DISPLAYCATEGORY
NEXT
SEARCH MODE
EFFECT
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
FM/AM
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
l
PRESET/TUNING/CH
h
TUNING MODE
AUTO/MAN'L
INPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT
SPEAKERSPHONES
ON/OFF
MAIN ZONE
MASTER
SILENT CINEMA
BA
MULTI CH
INPUT
VOLUME
INPUT
ON OFF
VIDEO L AUDIO R
USBVIDEO AUX
66,7 32 5
LEVEL
TV MUTE TV INPUT
MUTE
MENUTITLE
SET MENU
LEVEL
DISPLAYRETURN
BAND
SRCH MODE
ON SCREENXM MEMORY
A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.
ENTER
PRESET/CH
REC
AUDI O
DISC SKIP
STEREO
1
EFFECT
STANDARD
5
SPEAKERS
9
MUSIC
2
SELECT
6
ENHANCER
0
ENTERTAIN
3
EXTD SUR.
7
NIGHT
10
MOVIE
4
DIRECT ST.
8
STRAIGHT
ENT.
7
5
2
TV MUTE TV INPUT
MUTE
AMP
SOURCE
TV
VOLUME
TV VOL TV CH
TRANSMITCODE SET
STANDBY
POWER
POWERPOWER
CD
AVTV
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
CD-R XM
DVD DTV
MD
DOCK USB
CBL
NET
TUNER
V-AU X D VR
3
2
(U.S.A. model)
(U.S.A. model)
SPEAKERS
BA
SPEAKERS
9
AMP
SOURCE
TV
Front panel
Remote control
or
Notes
CD
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
CD-R XM
DVD DTV
MD
DOCK USB
CBL
NET
TUNER
V-AUX DVR
INPUT
Front panel Remote control
or
DVR
p
DVD CD
XM
V-AUX DTV/CBL
MD/CD-R
TUNER
NET
USB
VOLUME
A
SP
dB
LR
DVD AUTO
Currently selected
input source
Currently selected
input mode
Available input sources
33 En
PLAYBACK
BASIC
OPERATION
5 Rotate VOLUME on the front panel (or press
VOLUME +/– on the remote control) to adjust
the volume to the desired output level.
6 Press TONE CONTROL on the front panel
repeatedly to select “TREBLE” or “BASS”
and then rotate the PROGRAM selector to
adjust the corresponding frequency
response level.
• Select “TREBLE” to adjust the high-frequency
response.
• Select “BASS” to adjust the low-frequency
response.
• Speaker and headphone adjustments are stored
independently.
• When “TONE BYPASS” is set to “AUTO” (see page 81),
and “BASS” and “TREBLE” are set to 0 dB, audio output
automatically bypasses the tone control circuitry of this
unit.
• If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or low-
frequency sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality of
the front speakers may not match that of the other
speakers.
• TONE CONTROL is not effective when the “DIRECT
STEREO” mode (see page 39) is selected or when the
component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is
selected as the input source (see page 38).
7 Rotate the PROGRAM selector on the front
panel (or press one of the sound field
program selector buttons on the remote
control repeatedly) to select the desired
sound field program.
The name of the selected sound field program appears
in the front panel display and in the OSD.
See page 66 for details about sound field programs.
• Choose a sound field program based on your listening
preference, not merely on the name of the program.
• When you select an input source, this unit automatically
selects the last sound field program used with the
corresponding input source.
• Sound field programs cannot be selected when the
component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is
selected as the input source (see page 38).
• Sampling frequencies higher than 48 kHz (except for DTS
96/24 signals) are sampled down to 48 kHz and then sound
field programs are applied.
• To display information about the currently selected input
source in the OSD, see page 40 for details.
Notes
VOLUME
VOLUME
or
Remote control
Front panel
TONE CONTROL
PROGRAM
DVR
p
DVD CD
XM
V-AUX DTV/CBL
MD/CD-R
TUNER
NET
USB
VOLUME
A
SP
dB
LR
TREBLE 0dB
Notes
PROGRAM
STEREO
1
EFFECT
STANDARD
5
SPEAKERS
9
MUSIC
2
SELECT
6
ENHANCER
0
ENTERTAIN
3
EXTD SUR.
7
NIGHT
10
MOVIE
4
DIRECT ST.
8
STRAIGHT
ENT.
Front panel
or
Remote control
DVR
p
DVD CD
XM
V-AUX DTV/CBL
MD/CD-R
TUNER
NET
USB
VOLUME
A
SP
dB
LR
TV Sports
Currently selected
sound field program
USING AUDIO FEATURES
34 En
SILENT CINEMA allows you to enjoy multi-channel
music or movie sound, including Dolby Digital and DTS
sources, through ordinary headphones. SILENT CINEMA
activates automatically whenever you connect headphones
to the PHONES jack while listening to a source with a
CINEMA DSP or HiFi DSP sound field program (see
page 66). When activated, the SILENT CINEMA
indicator lights up in the front panel display.
• SILENT CINEMA does not activate when the component
connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the
input source (see page 38).
• SILENT CINEMA is not effective when the “DIRECT
STEREO” (see page 39), “2ch Stereo” (see page 39) or
“STRAIGHT” mode (see page 39) is selected.
Press MUTE on the remote control to mute the
audio output. Press MUTE again to resume the
audio output.
y
• You can also rotate VOLUME on the front panel or VOLUME
+/– on the remote control to resume the audio output.
• You can adjust the muting level by using the “MUTING TYPE”
parameter in “SOUND MENU” (see page 81).
• The MUTE indicator flashes in the front panel display when the
audio output is muted and disappears from the front panel
display when the audio output is resumed.
If you change the input source or the sound field program with the
remote control while the audio output is being muted, this unit
resumes the audio output.
The night listening modes are designed to improve
listenability at lower volumes or at night. Choose either
“NIGHT:CINEMA” or “NIGHT:MUSIC” depending on
the type of material you are playing.
1 Set the component selector switch to AMP
and then press NIGHT on the remote control
repeatedly to select “NIGHT:CINEMA” or
“NIGHT:MUSIC”.
Choices: NIGHT:CINEMA, NIGHT:MUSIC, OFF
• Select “NIGHT:CINEMA” when watching films to
reduce the dynamic range of film soundtracks and
make dialog easier to hear at lower volumes.
• Select “NIGHT:MUSIC” when listening to music
sources to preserve ease-of-listening for all sounds.
• Select “OFF” if you do not want to use this feature.
y
When a night listening mode is selected, the NIGHT
indicator lights up in the front panel display.
2 Press j / i on the remote control to adjust the
effect level while “NIGHT:CINEMA” or
“NIGHT:MUSIC” is displayed in the front
panel display.
Choices: MIN, MID, MAX
• Select “MIN” for minimum compression.
• Select “MID” for standard compression.
• Select “MAX” for maximum compression.
USING AUDIO FEATURES
Using SILENT CINEMA
Notes
Muting the audio output
Note
MUTE
Selecting the night listening mode
NIGHT
10
AMP
SOURCE
TV
A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.
ENTER
PRESET/CH
Remote control
Effect.Lvl:MID
35 En
USING AUDIO FEATURES
BASIC
OPERATION
y
“NIGHT:CINEMA” and “NIGHT:MUSIC” adjustments are
stored independently.
• You cannot use the night listening modes in the following
cases:
– when the “DIRECT STEREO” mode (see page 39) is
selected.
– when the component connected to the MULTI CH
INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see
page 38).
– when headphones are connected to the PHONES jack.
• The effectiveness of the night listening modes may vary
depending on the input source and surround sound settings
you use.
This unit comes with a variety of input jacks. Do the
following to select the type of input signals you want to
use.
y
• We recommend setting “INPUT MODE” to “AUTO” in most
cases.
• You can adjust the default input mode of this unit by using the
“INPUT MODE” parameter in “INPUT MENU” (see page 83).
• To play DTS-encoded CDs when using a digital audio
connection, be sure to set “INPUT MODE” to “DTS”.
• DTS decoding may not be performed correctly depending on
the player even if you make a digital connection between this
unit and the player.
1 Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel
to select the desired input source.
2 Press INPUT MODE on the front panel
repeatedly to select the desired input mode.
AUTO Automatically selects input signals in
the following order:
(1) Digital signals
(2) Analog signals
DTS Selects only digital signals encoded in
DTS. If no DTS signals are input, no
sound is output.
ANALOG Selects only analog signals. If no
analog signals are input, no sound is
output.
When “INPUT MODE” is set to “AUTO”, this unit
automatically switches to the appropriate decoder if a Dolby
Digital or DTS signal is detected.
Use this feature to automatically set this unit to the
standby mode after a certain amount of time. The sleep
timer is useful when you are going to sleep while this unit
is playing or recording a source. The sleep timer also
automatically turns off any external components
connected to AC OUTLET(S) (see page 26).
1 Press one of the input selector buttons on
the remote control to select the desired input
source.
2 Start playback on the selected source
component or select a broadcast station.
• Refer to the operating instructions for the source
component.
• See page 46 for details about tuning instructions.
• See page 53 for details about XM Satellite Radio
tuning instructions.
Notes
Selecting the input mode
Notes
INPUT
INPUT MODE
DVR
p
DVD CD
XM
V-AUX DTV/CBL
MD/CD-R
TUNER
NET
USB
VOLUME
A
SP
dB
LR
DVD AUTO
Currently selected
input source
Currently selected
input mode
Available input sources
Note
Using the sleep timer
CD
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
CD-R XM
DVD DTV
MD
DOCK USB
CBL
NET
TUNER
V-AUX DVR
36 En
USING AUDIO FEATURES
3 Press SLEEP on the remote control
repeatedly to set the amount of time.
Each time you press SLEEP, the front panel display
changes as shown below.
The SLEEP indicator flashes while you are switching
the amount of time for the sleep timer. Once the sleep
timer is set, the SLEEP indicator lights up in the front
panel display, and the display returns to the selected
sound field program.
4 To cancel the sleep timer, press SLEEP on
the remote control repeatedly until “SLEEP
OFF” appears in the front panel display.
The SLEEP indicator turns off, and “SLEEP OFF”
disappears from the front panel display after a few
seconds.
y
The sleep timer setting can also be canceled by pressing
MAIN ZONE ON/OFF on the front panel (or STANDBY on
the remote control) to set the main zone to the standby
mode.
You can adjust the output level of each speaker while
listening to a music source. This is also possible when
playing sources input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks.
This operation will override the level adjustments made in
“BASIC SETUP” (see page 29) and “SPEAKER LEVEL” (see
page 79).
1 Set the component selector switch to AMP
and then press LEVEL on the remote control
repeatedly to select the speaker you want to
adjust.
• Select “FRONT L” to adjust the front left speaker
output level.
• Select “CENTER” to adjust the center speaker
output level.
• Select “FRONT R” to adjust the front right speaker
output level.
• Select “SUR. R” to adjust the surround right
speaker output level.
• Select “SUR. B” to adjust the surround back
speaker output level.
• Select “SUR. L” to adjust the surround left speaker
output level.
• Select “SWFR” to adjust the subwoofer output
level.
y
Once you press LEVEL on the remote control, you can also
select the speaker by pressing u / d.
SLEEP
SLEEP 90min
SLEEP 60minSLEEP 30minSLEEP OFF
SLEEP 120min
DVR DVD
p
CD
XM
V-AUX DTV/CBL
MD/CD-R
TUNER
NET
USB
VOLUME
SLEEP
A
SP
dB
LR
SLEEP 120min
Flashes
DVR DVD
p
CD
XM
V-AUX DTV/CBL
MD/CD-R
TUNER
NET
USB
VOLUME
SLEEP
A
SP
dB
LR
STRAIGHT
Lights up
SLEEP
DVR DVD
p
CD
XM
V-AUX DTV/CBL
MD/CD-R
TUNER
NET
USB
VOLUME
A
SP
dB
LR
SLEEP OFF
Adjusting the speaker level
Note
TV MUTE TV INPUT
MUTE
AMP
SOURCE
TV
MENUTITLE
SET MENU
LEVEL
DISPLAYRETURN
BAND
SRCH MODE
ON SCREENXM MEMORY
A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.
ENTER
PRESET/CH
REC
AUDIO
DISC SKIP
STEREO
1
EFFECT
VOLUME
TV VOL TV CH
STANDARD
5
SPEAKERS
9
MUSIC
2
SELECT
6
ENHANCER
0
ENTERTAIN
3
EXTD SUR.
7
NIGHT
10
MOVIE
4
DIRECT ST.
8
STRAIGHT
ENT.
2
3
1
1
(U.S.A. model)
AMP
SOURCE
TV
TITLE
LEVEL
BAND
37 En
USING AUDIO FEATURES
BASIC
OPERATION
2 Press j / i on the remote control to adjust the
speaker output level.
• Press i to increase the value.
• Press j to decrease the value.
Control range: –10 dB to +10 dB
y
This operation can also be performed using the control buttons on
the front panel. Press NEXT on the front panel repeatedly to
select the speaker channel whose output level you want to adjust
and then press LEVEL on the front panel to adjust the output
level.
Compression artifacts (such as the MP3 format) are
created by a lossy compression scheme where the audio is
resampled to lower the bitrate and to remove sounds that
are indistinguishable to typical human hearing. The
Compressed Music Enhancer feature of this unit enhances
your listening experience by regenerating the missing
harmonics in a compression artifact. As a result, flattened
complexity due to the loss of high-frequency fidelity as
well as lack of bass due to the loss of low-frequency bass
is compensated, providing the improved performance of
the overall sound system.
• The Compressed Music Enhancer mode is compatible with the
PCM signals (48 kHz), the analog 2-channel input sources and
the music data input at the USB port or the LAN port.
• The Compressed Music Enhancer mode is not effective with
any of the sound field programs.
• When the Compressed Music Enhancer mode is turned on while
an incompatible input source is being played back, “Not
Available” appears in the front panel display and in the OSD.
• When the input source is changed to an incompatible input
source while the Compressed Music Enhancer mode is turned
on, the Compressed Music Enhancer mode is automatically
turned off and the incompatible input source is played back in
2-channel or 6-channel stereo.
y
The ENHANCER indicator lights up in the front panel display
when one of the Compressed Music Enhancer modes is selected.
A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.
ENTER
PRESET/CH
Selecting the Compressed Music
Enhancer mode
Notes
38 En
USING AUDIO FEATURES
1 Set the component selector switch to AMP
and then press ENHANCER on the remote
control repeatedly to select the desired
Compressed Music Enhancer mode.
The following display appears in the OSD and the
ENHANCER indicator lights up in the front panel
display.
Choices: 2ch Enhancer, 6ch Enhancer,
Off (previously selected sound field
program)
• Select “2ch Enhancer” to play back compression
artifacts in 2-channel stereo.
• Select “6ch Enhancer” to play back compression
artifacts in 6-channel stereo.
• Select Off (previously selected sound field
program) to turn off the Compressed Music
Enhancer mode.
y
You can also switch between “2ch Enhancer” and “6ch
Enhancer” by pressing j / i on the remote control when the
arrow is located on the left of “2ch Enhancer” or “6ch
Enhancer” in the OSD.
2 Press d once and then j / i on the remote
control to select the desired effect level.
Choices: HIGH, LOW
• Select “HIGH” for a high effect level.
• Select “LOW” for a low effect level.
Set the effect level to “HIGH” or “LOW” according to the
characteristics of a source. The high-frequency signals of
some sources may be emphasized too much. In this case, set
the effect level to “LOW”.
Use this feature to select the component connected to the
MULTI CH INPUT jacks (see page 24) as the input
source.
Press MULTI CH INPUT on the front panel (or
MULTI CH IN on the remote control) so that
“MULTI CH INPUT” appears in the front panel
display.
When “MULTI CH INPUT” is shown in the front panel display,
no other source can be played. To select another input source with
the INPUT selector on the front panel (or one of the input selector
buttons), press MULTI CH INPUT (or MULTI CH IN on the
remote control) so that “MULTI CH INPUT” disappears from the
front panel display.
Note
ENHANCER
0
MUSIC ENHANCER
. 2ch Enhancer
LOW >HIGH
ENHANCER
AMP
SOURCE
TV
Lights up
A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.
ENTER
PRESET/CH
MUSIC ENHANCER
2ch Enhancer
. LOW >HIGH
Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT
component
Note
MULTI CH
INPUT
MULTI CH IN
Front panel
Remote control
or
MULTI CH INPUT
39 En
USING AUDIO FEATURES
BASIC
OPERATION
You can mix down multi-channel sources to 2 channels
and enjoy playback in 2-channel stereo.
Set the component selector switch to AMP and
then press STEREO on the remote control
repeatedly to select “2ch Stereo”.
y
• You can use a subwoofer with this program when “LFE/BASS
OUT” is set to “SWFR” or “BOTH” (see page 78).
• You can also select the “2ch Stereo” mode by rotating the
PROGRAM selector on the front panel.
When this unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode, 2-channel
stereo sources are output from only the front left and right
speakers. Multi-channel sources are decoded straight into
the appropriate channels without any additional effect
processing.
1 Set the component selector switch to AMP
and then press STRAIGHT on the remote
control to select “STRAIGHT”.
2 To deactivate the “STRAIGHT” mode, press
STRAIGHT on the remote control again so
that “STRAIGHT” disappears from the front
panel display.
The sound effect is turned back on.
y
You can also select the “STRAIGHT” mode by pressing
STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the front panel.
The “DIRECT STEREO” mode allows sources to bypass
the decoders and DSP processors of this unit so that you
can enjoy pure hi-fi sound from 2-channel PCM and
analog sources.
Set the component selector switch to AMP and
then press DIRECT ST. on the remote control to
select “DIRECT STEREO”.
• To avoid unexpected noise, do not play CDs encoded in DTS
when the “DIRECT STEREO” mode is selected.
• When multi-channel signals (Dolby Digital and DTS) are input,
this unit automatically switches to the corresponding analog
input. When “DTS” is selected as the input mode (see page 35),
no sound will be output.
• No sound will be output from the subwoofer.
• “TONE CONTROL” (see page 33) and “SOUND MENU” (see
page 77) settings (except for speaker level settings) are not
effective.
• The front panel display automatically dims.
y
You can also select the “DIRECT STEREO” mode by rotating the
PROGRAM selector on the front panel.
Enjoying multi-channel sources in
2-channel stereo
Enjoying unprocessed input
sources
STEREO
1
AMP
SOURCE
TV
2ch Stereo
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
ENT.
AMP
SOURCE
TV
STRAIGHT
Enjoying pure hi-fi stereo sound
Notes
AMP
SOURCE
TV
DIRECT ST.
8
DIRECT STEREO
USING VIDEO FEATURES
40 En
You can display the format, sampling frequency, channel,
bit rate and flag data of the current input signal.
1 Set the component selector switch to AMP
and then press SET MENU on the remote
control.
The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD.
2 Press d repeatedly to select “SIGNAL INFO”
and then press ENTER.
The following information about the input source
appears in the OSD.
Signal format FORMAT
Signal format display. When this unit cannot detect a
digital signal, it automatically switches to analog
input.
Display status: Analog, Digital, DolbyD, DTS, MP3,
PCM, WMA, ---
“---” appears when this unit cannot detect any signals.
Sampling frequency SAMPLING
The number of samples per second taken from a
continuous signal to make a discrete signal.
Display status: 8kHz, 11kHz, 12kHz, 16kHz,
22.05kHz, 24kHz, 32kHz, 44.1kHz,
48kHz, 64kHz, 88.2kHz, 96kHz, ---
“---” appears when this unit cannot detect the sampling
frequency.
Channel CHANNEL
The number of source channels in the input signal
(front/surround/LFE). For example, a multi-channel
soundtrack with 3 front channels, 2 surround
channels and LFE, is displayed as “3/2/0.1”.
“---” appears when there is no source channel available.
Bit rate BITRATE
The number of bits passing a given point per second.
“---” appears when this unit cannot detect the bit rate.
Flag FLAG
Flag data encoded in DTS, Dolby Digital, or PCM
signals that cue this unit to automatically switch
decoders.
3 Press SET MENU on the remote control again
to exit from “SET MENU”.
USING VIDEO FEATURES
Displaying the input source
information
SET MENU
.;BASICSETUP
;MANUALSETUP
.;SIGNAL INFO
[ ]/[]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
p
p
AMP
SOURCE
TV
MENU
SET MENU
SRCH MODE
;SIGNAL INFO
FORMAT PCM
SAMPLING 48kHz
CHANNEL 2/0/---
BITRATE ---
FLAG NONE
[RETURN]:Exit
A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.
ENTER
PRESET/CH
A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.
ENTER
PRESET/CH
Note
Note
Note
Note
MENU
SET MENU
SRCH MODE
41 En
USING VIDEO FEATURES
BASIC
OPERATION
You can display the operating information of this unit on a
video monitor. If you display the “SET MENU” and sound
field program parameter settings on a video monitor, it is
much easier to see the available options and parameters
than it is to read the information in the front panel display.
1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this
unit.
2 Set the component selector switch to AMP
and then press DISPLAY on the remote
control repeatedly to toggle between the
OSD modes.
The OSD mode changes in the following order.
Full display
Fully shows the sound field program parameter
settings as well as the contents of the front panel
display.
Short display
Briefly shows the contents of the front panel display
at the bottom of the screen each time you operate this
unit.
Display off
No information is displayed except for the “SET
MENU” screen.
y
You can display a gray background in the OSD when there is not
video signal being input by setting “GRAY BACK” in “OPTION
MENU” to “AUTO” (see page 87).
• The OSD signal is not output at the DVR OUT jacks and will
not be recorded.
• You must set “VIDEO CONV.” in “OPTION MENU” to “ON”
(see page 86) to display the OSD.
• To display the OSD with the component video signals output at
the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks, set the
OSD mode to the full display mode.
• When “GRAY BACK” in “OPTION MENU” is set to “OFF”
(see page 87), the OSD may not be displayed correctly
depending on the conditions of the picture.
You can combine a video image from a video source with
sound from an audio source. For example, you can enjoy
listening to classical music while viewing beautiful
scenery from the video source on the video monitor.
Press the input selector buttons on the remote
control to select a video source and then an
audio source.
y
If you want to enjoy an audio source input at the MULTI CH
INPUT jacks together with a video source, first select the video
source and then press MULTI CH INPUT on the front panel (or
MULTI CH IN on the remote control) to select the component
connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks as the input source
(see page 38).
Selecting the OSD mode
DISPLAY
ON SCREEN
AMP
SOURCE
TV
Full display
Short display
Display off
P02 MUSIC
. Pop/Rock
DSP LEVEL;;;;0dB
P.INIT.DLY;;21ms
P.ROOM SIZE;;1.0
S.INIT.DLY;;25ms
S.ROOM SIZE;;1.0
P02 MUSIC
Pop/Rock
Full display Short display
Notes
Playing video sources in the
background
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
CD CD-R
DVD DTV
MD
DOCK USB
CBL
TUNER
V-AUX DVR
XMCD CD-R
DVD DTV
MD
CBL
NET
TUNER
V-AUX DVR
Audio sources
Video sources
ENJOYING SURROUND SOUND
42 En
If you connected a surround back speaker, use this feature
to enjoy 6.1-channel playback for multi-channel sources
using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx, Dolby Digital EX or
DTS-ES decoders.
1 Set the component selector switch to AMP
and then press EXTD SUR. on the remote
control repeatedly to switch between 5.1 and
6.1-channel playback.
2 Press j / i repeatedly to select a decoder
while “PLIIxMusic” (etc.) is displayed.
Auto AUTO
When a signal flag that can be recognized by this unit is
input, this unit selects the optimum decoder to play back
the signal in 6.1 channels.
If this unit cannot recognize the flag or no flag is present
in the input signal, it cannot automatically be played in 6.1
channels.
Decoders
You can select from the following decoders depending on
the format of the source you are playing.
Off OFF
Decoders are not used to create 6.1 channels.
• Some 6.1-channel compatible discs do not have a signal flag
that can be automatically detected by this unit. When playing
these kinds of discs in 6.1 channels, select a decoder manually
from “PLIIxMusic”, “EX/ES” or “EX”.
• 6.1-channel playback is not possible even if you press EXTD
SUR. in the following cases:
– when “CENTER SP” (see page 78), “SUR. L/R SP” (see
page 78) or “SUR. B SP” (see page 78) is set to “NONE”.
– when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT
jacks is being played.
– when the source being played does not contain surround left
and right channel signals.
– when a Dolby Digital KARAOKE source is being played.
– when the “2ch Stereo” (see page 39) or “DIRECT STEREO”
(see page 39) mode is selected.
• When this unit is turned off, this setting will be reset to
“AUTO”.
• The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “SUR. B SP” is
set to “NONE” (see page 78).
ENJOYING SURROUND SOUND
Enjoying multi-channel sources in
6.1-channel surround
EXTD SUR.
7
AMP
SOURCE
TV
A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.
ENTER
PRESET/CH
Decoder Functions
PLIIxMusic
Plays back Dolby Digital or DTS signals
in 6.1 channels using the Pro Logic IIx
music decoder.
EX/ES
Plays back Dolby Digital or DTS signals
in 6.1 channels using the Dolby Digital
EX or DTS-ES decoder.
EX
Plays back Dolby Digital or DTS signals
in 6.1 channels using the Dolby Digital
EX decoder.
Notes
43 En
ENJOYING SURROUND SOUND
BASIC
OPERATION
Signals input from 2-channel sources can also be played
back on multi-channels.
1 Set the component selector switch to AMP
and then press STANDARD on the remote
control repeatedly to switch between the
“SUR. STANDARD” and “SUR. ENHANCED”
programs or press MOVIE to select the
“MOVIE THEATER” program.
2 Press SELECT on the remote control
repeatedly to select the desired decoder.
You can select from the following modes depending
on the type of source you are playing and your
personal preference.
y
You can also select a decoder by pressing j / i on the remote
control while the decoder type is displayed in the front panel
display.
• The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “SUR. B SP” is
set to “NONE” (see page 78).
• The Neural Surround decoder is compatible with the PCM
signals (32 kHz, 44.1 kHz and 48 kHz) and the analog 2-
channel input sources.
• The Neural Surround decoder is not effective with any of the
sound field programs.
• When Neural Surround-incompatible signals are being input
while the Neural Surround decoder is selected, multi-channel
sources are decoded straight into the appropriate channels
without any additional effect processing and the Neural
Surround-incompatible PCM signals are played back in
2-channel stereo.
Enjoying 2-channel sources in
surround
AMP
SOURCE
TV
STANDARD
5
MOVIE
4
or
SELECT
6
SUR. STANDARD Functions
PRO LOGIC
Dolby Pro Logic processing for any
sources
PLII Movie
Dolby Pro Logic II processing for
movie sources
PLII Music
Dolby Pro Logic II processing for
music sources
PLII Game
Dolby Pro Logic II processing for
game sources
PLIIx Movie
Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for
movie sources
PLIIx Music
Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for
music sources
PLIIx Game
Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for
game sources
Neo:6 Cinema
DTS processing for movie sources
Neo:6 Music
DTS processing for music sources
Neural Sur.
Neural Surround processing for any
sources
(U.S.A. and Canada models only)
SUR. ENHANCED
or
MOVIE THEATER
Functions
PRO LOGIC
Dolby Pro Logic processing for any
sources
PLII Movie
Dolby Pro Logic II processing for
movie sources
PLIIx Movie
Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for
movie sources
Neo:6 Cinema
DTS processing for movie sources
Notes
44 En
ENJOYING SURROUND SOUND
Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy the CINEMA
DSP programs without surround speakers. It creates
virtual speakers to reproduce the natural sound field.
If you set “SUR. L/R SP”
to “NONE” (see page 78),
Virtual CINEMA DSP activates automatically whenever
you select a CINEMA DSP sound field program (see
page 66).
Virtual CINEMA DSP will not activate even when “SUR. L/R
SP” is set to “NONE” (see page 78) in the following cases:
– when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT
jacks is selected as the input source (see page 38).
– when headphones are connected to the PHONES jack.
– when the “DIRECT STEREO” (see page 39), “2ch Stereo”
(see page 39) or “STRAIGHT” mode (see page 39) is
selected.
Using Virtual CINEMA DSP
Note
RECORDING
45 En
BASIC
OPERATION
Recording adjustments and other operations are performed from the recording components. Refer to the operating
instructions for those components.
The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Attempting to digitally record the DTS bitstream will result in
noise being recorded. Therefore, if you want to use this unit to record sources encoded in DTS, the
following considerations and adjustments need to be made. To play DTS-encoded DVDs and CDs
(when using a digital audio connection) on your DTS-compatible player, follow its operating
instructions to make a setting so that the analog signal will be output from the player.
• When this unit is set to the standby mode, you cannot record between other components connected to this unit.
• The settings of TONE CONTROL (see page 33), VOLUME, the speaker level (see page 79) and the sound field programs (see
page 66) do not affect the recorded material.
• The source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks of this unit cannot be recorded.
• S-video and composite video signals pass independently through the video circuits of this unit. Therefore, when recording or dubbing
video signals input from a video source component that provides only an S-video or a composite video signal, you can record only an
S-video or a composite video signal on your VCR.
• Digital signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT jacks are not output at the analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks for recording. Likewise,
analog signals input at the AUDIO IN jacks are not output at the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack. Therefore, if your source component is
connected to provide only digital or analog signals, you can only record digital or analog signals.
• A given input source is not output on the same OUT (REC) channel.
• Check the copyright laws in your country to record from CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may infringe copyright
laws.
• The XM Satellite Radio (U.S.A. and Canada models only) signals cannot be output at the AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks.
• The analog audio signals input at the DOCK terminal can be output at the analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks for recording.
y
Do a test recording before you start an actual recording.
1 Turn on all the connected components.
2 Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel
(or press one of the input selector buttons on
the remote control) to select the source
component you want to record from.
3 Start playback on the selected source
component or select a broadcast station.
4 Start recording on the recording component.
RECORDING
Notes
If you play back a video source that uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the picture
itself may be disturbed due to those signals.
CAUTION
ZONE 2
ON/OFF
ZONE
CONTROL
DISPLAYCATEGORY
NEXT
SEARCH MODE
EFFECT
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
FM/AM
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
l PRESET/TUNING/CH h
TUNING MODE
AUTO/MAN'L
INPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT
SPEAKERSPHONES
ON/OFF
MAIN ZONE
MASTER
SILENT CINEMA
BA
MULTI CH
INPUT
VOLUME
INPUT
ON OFF
VIDEO L AUDIO R
USBVIDEO AUX
2
LEVEL
AMP
SOURCE
TV
VOLUME
TV VOL TV CH
TRANSMITCODE SET
STANDBY
POWER
POWERPOWER
CD
AVTV
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
CD-R XM
DVD D TV
MD
DOCK USB
CBL
NET
TUNER
V-AU X D VR
2
(U.S.A. model)
(U.S.A. model)
INPUT
CD
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
CD-R XM
DVD DTV
MD
DOCK USB
CBL
NET
TUNER
V-AUX DVR
or
Front panel Remote control
FM/AM TUNING
46 En
There are 2 tuning methods: automatic and manual. Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are strong and
there is no interference. If the signal from the station you want to select is weak, tune into it manually. You can also use
the automatic and manual preset tuning features to store up to 40 stations (A1 to E8: 8 preset station numbers in each of
the 5 preset station groups). Furthermore, you can recall any preset stations and exchange the assignment of two preset
stations with each other.
Orient the connected FM and AM antennas for the best reception.
Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are
strong and there is no interference.
1 Rotate the INPUT selector to select “TUNER”
as the input source.
2 Press FM/AM to select the reception band.
“FM” or “AM” appears in the front panel display.
3 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L) so that
the AUTO indicator lights up in the front
panel display.
If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning
is not possible. Press PRESET/TUNING to turn the
colon (:) off.
4 Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h once to
begin automatic tuning.
When this unit is tuned into a station, the TUNED
indicator lights up and the frequency of the received
station is shown in the front panel display.
•Press h to tune into a higher frequency.
•Press l to tune into a lower frequency.
FM/AM TUNING
Note
Automatic tuning
ZONE 2
ON/OFF
ZONE
CONTROL
DISPLAYCATEGORY
NEXT
SEARCH MODE
EFFECT
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
FM/AM
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
l PRESET/TUNING/CH h
TUNING MODE
AUTO/MAN'L
INPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT
SPEAKERSPHONES
ON/OFF
MAIN ZONE
MASTER
SILENT CINEMA
BA
MULTI CH
INPUT
VOLUME
INPUT
ON OFF
VIDEO L AUDIO R
USBVIDEO AUX
3 312 4
LEVEL
(U.S.A. model)
INPUT
Front panel
FM/AM
or
AM
FM
DISPLAY
TUNING MODE
AUTO/MAN'L
DVR DVD CD
XM
V-AUX DTV/CBL
MD/CD-R
p
TUNER
NET
USB
AUTO TUNED
VOLUME
A
SP
dB
LR
A AM 1440 kHz
Lights upNo colon (:)
SEARCH MODE
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
DVR DVD CD
XM
V-AUX DTV/CBL
MD/CD-R
p
TUNER
NET
USB
AUTO TUNED
VOLUME
A
SP
dB
LR
A AM 1530 kHz
l PRESET/TUNING/CH h
LEVEL
Lights up
47 En
FM/AM TUNING
BASIC
OPERATION
If the signal received from the station you want to select is
weak, tune into it manually.
Manually tuning into an FM station automatically switches the
tuner to monaural reception to increase the signal quality.
1 Rotate the INPUT selector to select “TUNER”
as the input source.
2 Press FM/AM to select the reception band.
“FM” or “AM” appears in the front panel display.
3 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L) so that
the AUTO indicator disappears from the front
panel display.
If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning
is not possible. Press PRESET/TUNING to turn the
colon (:) off.
4 Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h to tune
into the desired station manually.
Hold down the button to continue searching.
Manual tuning
Note
ZONE 2
ON/OFF
ZONE
CONTROL
DISPLAYCATEGORY
NEXT
SEARCH MODE
EFFECT
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
FM/AM
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
l PRESET/TUNING/CH h
TUNING MODE
AUTO/MAN'L
INPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT
SPEAKERSPHONES
ON/OFF
MAIN ZONE
MASTER
SILENT CINEMA
BA
MULTI CH
INPUT
VOLUME
INPUT
ON OFF
VIDEO L AUDIO R
USBVIDEO AUX
3 312 4
LEVEL
(U.S.A. model)
INPUT
Front panel
FM/AM
or
AM
FM
DISPLAY
TUNING MODE
AUTO/MAN'L
DVR DVD CD
XM
V-AUX DTV/CBL
MD/CD-R
p
TUNER
NET
USB
TUNED
VOLUME
A
SP
dB
LR
A AM 1440 kHz
No colon (:)
SEARCH MODE
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
l PRESET/TUNING/CH h
LEVEL
48 En
FM/AM TUNING
You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store
FM stations with strong signals up to 40 (A1 to E8: 8
preset station numbers in each of the 5 preset station
groups) of those stations in order. You can then recall any
preset station easily by selecting the preset station number.
1 Rotate the INPUT selector to select “TUNER”
as the input source.
2 Press FM/AM to select “FM” as the reception
band.
“FM” appears in the front panel display.
3 Press and hold MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM)
for more than 3 seconds.
The preset station number as well as the MEMORY
and AUTO indicators flashes. After approximately 5
seconds, automatic presetting starts from the current
frequency and proceeds toward the higher
frequencies.
When automatic preset tuning is completed, the front
panel display shows the frequency of the last preset
station.
y
You can specify the preset number from which this unit
stores FM stations and/or begins tuning toward lower
frequencies. For details, see “Automatic preset tuning
options” on page 49.
• Any stored station data existing under a preset station
number is cleared when you store a new station under the
same preset station number.
• If the number of received stations does not reach 40 (E8),
automatic preset tuning automatically stops after
searching for all the available stations.
• Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored
automatically by automatic preset tuning. If the station
you want to store is weak in signal strength, tune into it
manually and store it as described in “Manual preset
tuning” on page 49.
Automatic preset tuning
ZONE 2
ON/OFF
ZONE
CONTROL
DISPLAYCATEGORY
NEXT
SEARCH MODE
EFFECT
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
FM/AM
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
l PRESET/TUNING/CH h
TUNING MODE
AUTO/MAN'L
INPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT
SPEAKERSPHONES
ON/OFF
MAIN ZONE
MASTER
SILENT CINEMA
BA
MULTI CH
INPUT
VOLUME
INPUT
ON OFF
VIDEO L AUDIO R
USBVIDEO AUX
132
LEVEL
(U.S.A. model)
INPUT
Front panel
FM/AM
FM
Notes
DVR DVD CD
XM
V-AUX DTV/CBL
MD/CD-R
p
TUNER
NET
USB
AUTO TUNED
VOLUME
MEMORY
A
SP
dB
LR
A1:FM 87.5 MHz
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
Flashes
Flash
49 En
FM/AM TUNING
BASIC
OPERATION
■ Automatic preset tuning options
You can specify the preset number from which this unit
stores FM stations and/or begins tuning toward lower
frequencies.
First carry out steps 1 through 3 in “Automatic preset tuning” on
page 48.
• Press A/B/C/D/E and then PRESET/TUNING/
CH l / h to select the preset station number
under which the first station will be stored.
Automatic preset tuning stops when stations have all
been stored up to E8.
• Press PRESET/TUNING so that the colon (:)
disappears from the front panel display and
then press PRESET/TUNING/CH l to begin
tuning toward lower frequencies.
You can also store up to 40 stations (A1 to E8: 8 preset
station numbers in each of the 5 preset station groups)
manually.
1 Tune into a station automatically or manually.
See pages 46 and 47 for tuning instructions.
When this unit is tuned into a station, the front panel
display shows the frequency of the station received.
2 Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM).
The MEMORY indicator flashes in the front panel
display for approximately 5 seconds.
3 Press A/B/C/D/E repeatedly to select a preset
station group (A to E) while the MEMORY
indicator is flashing.
The selected preset station group letter appears.
Check that the colon (:) appears in the front panel
display.
Note
CATEGORY
NEXT
A/B/C/D/E
l PRESET/TUNING/CH h
LEVEL
SEARCH MODE
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
l PRESET/TUNING/CH h
LEVEL
Manual preset tuning
ZONE 2
ON/OFF
ZONE
CONTROL
DISPLAYCATEGORY
NEXT
SEARCH MODE
EFFECT
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
FM/AM
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
l PRESET/TUNING/CH h
TUNING MODE
AUTO/MAN'L
INPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT
SPEAKERSPHONES
ON/OFF
MAIN ZONE
MASTER
SILENT CINEMA
BA
MULTI CH
INPUT
VOLUME
INPUT
ON OFF
VIDEO L AUDIO R
USBVIDEO AUX
43 2,5
LEVEL
(U.S.A. model)
DVR DVD CD
XM
V-AUX DTV/CBL
MD/CD-R
p
TUNER
NET
USB
TUNED
VOLUME
A
SP
dB
LR
A AM 630 kHz
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
MEMORY
Flashes
CATEGORY
NEXT
A/B/C/D/E
DVR DVD CD
XM
V-AUX DTV/CBL
MD/CD-R
p
TUNER
NET
USB
TUNED
VOLUME
MEMORY
A
SP
dB
LR
C :AM 630 kHz
Preset station
group
Flashes
Colon (:)
50 En
FM/AM TUNING
4 Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h to select a
preset station number (1 to 8) while the
MEMORY indicator is flashing.
• Press h to select a higher preset station number.
• Press l to select a lower preset station number.
5 Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) while the
MEMORY indicator is flashing.
The station band and frequency appear in the front
panel display with the preset station group and
number you have selected. The MEMORY indicator
disappears from the front panel display.
6 Repeat steps 1 through 5 to store other
stations.
• Any stored station data existing under a preset station
number is cleared when you store a new station under the
same preset station number.
• The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along
with the station frequency.
You can tune into any desired station simply by selecting
the preset station group and number under which it was
stored.
y
When performing this operation with the remote control, set the
component selector switch to SOURCE and then press TUNER
to select “TUNER” as the input source.
1 Press A/B/C/D/E on the front panel (or A-E/
CAT. j / i on the remote control) to select the
desired preset station group (A to E).
The preset station group letter appears in the front
panel display and changes each time you press the
button.
Notes
l PRESET/TUNING/CH h
LEVEL
DVR DVD CD
XM
V-AUX DTV/CBL
MD/CD-R
p
TUNER
NET
USB
TUNED
VOLUME
MEMORY
A
SP
dB
LR
C3:AM 630 kHz
Preset station number
Flashes
DVR DVD CD
XM
V-AUX DTV/CBL
MD/CD-R
p
TUNER
NET
USB
TUNED
VOLUME
A
SP
dB
LR
C3:AM 630 kHz
The displayed station has been stored as C3.
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
Selecting preset stations
ZONE 2
ON/OFF
ZONE
CONTROL
DISPLAYCATEGORY
NEXT
SEARCH MODE
EFFECT
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
FM/AM
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
l PRESET/TUNING/CH h
TUNING MODE
AUTO/MAN'L
INPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT
SPEAKERSPHONES
ON/OFF
MAIN ZONE
MASTER
SILENT CINEMA
BA
MULTI CH
INPUT
VOLUME
INPUT
ON OFF
VIDEO L AUDIO R
USBVIDEO AUX
2
1
LEVEL
MENUTITLE
SET MENU
LEVEL
DISPLAYRETURN
BAND
SRCH MODE
ON SCREENXM MEMORY
A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.
ENTER
PRESET/CH
REC
STEREO
1
EFFECT
STANDARD
5
SPEAKERS
9
MUSIC
2
SELECT
6
ENHANCER
0
ENTERTAIN
3
EXTD SUR.
7
NIGHT
10
MOVIE
4
DIRECT ST.
8
STRAIGHT
ENT.
2
1
(U.S.A. model)
(U.S.A. model)
CATEGORY
NEXT
A/B/C/D/E
A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.
ENTER
PRESET/CH
or
Front panel
Remote control
51 En
FM/AM TUNING
BASIC
OPERATION
2 Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h on the
front panel (or PRESET/CH u / d on the
remote control) to select the desired preset
station number (1 to 8).
The preset station group and number appear in the
front panel display along with the station band and
frequency.
You can exchange the assignments of two preset stations
with each other. The example below describes the
procedure to exchange preset station “E1” with “A5”.
1 Select preset station “E1” using A/B/C/D/E
and PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h.
See “Selecting preset stations” on page 50.
2 Press and hold EDIT for more than 3
seconds.
“E1” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front
panel display.
l PRESET/TUNING/CH h
LEVEL
DVR DVD CD
XM
V-AUX DTV/CBL
MD/CD-R
p
TUNER
NET
USB
TUNED
VOLUME
A
SP
dB
LR
E1:FM 87.5 MHz
A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.
ENTER
PRESET/CH
or
Front panel
Remote control
Exchanging preset stations
ZONE 2
ON/OFF
ZONE
CONTROL
DISPLAYCATEGORY
NEXT
SEARCH MODE
EFFECT
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
FM/AM
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
l PRESET/TUNING/CH h
TUNING MODE
AUTO/MAN'L
INPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT
SPEAKERSPHONES
ON/OFF
MAIN ZONE
MASTER
SILENT CINEMA
BA
MULTI CH
INPUT
VOLUME
INPUT
ON OFF
VIDEO L AUDIO R
USBVIDEO AUX
2,4 1,3
LEVEL
(U.S.A. model)
SEARCH MODE
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
DVR DVD CD
XM
V-AUX DTV/CBL
MD/CD-R
p
TUNER
NET
USB
TUNED
VOLUME
MEMORY
A
SP
dB
LR
E1:FM 87.5 MHz
Flashes
Flashes
52 En
FM/AM TUNING
3 Select preset station “A5” using A/B/C/D/E
and PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h.
“A5” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front
panel display.
See “Selecting preset stations” on page 50.
4 Press EDIT again.
“EDIT E1–A5” appears in the front panel display and
the assignments of the two preset stations are
exchanged.
DVR DVD CD
XM
V-AUX DTV/CBL
MD/CD-R
p
TUNER
NET
USB
TUNED
VOLUME
MEMORY
A
SP
dB
LR
A5:FM 90.6 MHz
CATEGORY
NEXT
A/B/C/D/E
l PRESET/TUNING/CH h
LEVEL
Flashes
Flashes
DVR DVD CD
XM
V-AUX DTV/CBL
MD/CD-R
p
TUNER
NET
USB
TUNED
VOLUME
A
SP
dB
LR
EDIT E1-A5
SEARCH MODE
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
XM® SATELLITE RADIO TUNING
53 En
BASIC
OPERATION
XM Satellite Radio is the satellite radio service with millions of listeners across the United States and Canada,
broadcasting live daily. The XM Satellite Radio channel lineup includes over 160 digital channels of choice from coast to
coast: 67 commercial-free music channels, featuring hip hop to opera, classical to country, bluegrass to blues; 33
channels of premier sports, talk, comedy, children’s and entertainment programming; and more than 20 channels of the
traffic and weather information for major metropolitan areas nationwide.
Because XM Satellite Radio is a subscription service, you will need to set up an account and activate service with XM
using your XM Satellite Radio ID number. To check your ID number, follow “Activating XM Satellite Radio” on
page 56. For further information on XM Satellite Radio services, visit the XM Satellite Radio website at
“http://www.xmradio.com/” (for residents in the United States) or “http://www.xmradio.ca/” (for residents in Canada).
This unit is equipped with the Neural Surround decoder (U.S.A. and Canada models only) that plays back the surround
sound content of the XM Satellite Radio broadcasts in multi-channels, resulting in a full surround sound experience.
• The XM Satellite Radio service is only available in the 48 contiguous United States (not available in Alaska and Hawaii) and Canada.
• XM Passport System and monthly subscription are sold separately. For details, visit the XM Satellite Radio website at “http://
www.xmradio.com/” (for residents in the United States) or “http://www.xmradio.ca/” (for residents in Canada).
• For information on obtaining XM Passport System, visit the XM Satellite Radio website at
“http://www.xmradio.com/” (for residents in the United States) or “http://www.xmradio.ca/” (for residents in Canada), or consult your
local retailer that sells XM Ready products.
• To ensure the optimal reception of the XM Satellite Radio signals, XM Passport System must be placed at or near a southerly facing
window with no obstacles in the path to the sky. You can mount it indoors or outdoors.
■ Information from XM Satellite Radio Inc.
XM monthly service subscription sold separately. XM Passport and XM Passport Home Dock required to receive XM
service (sold separately). Installation costs and other fees and taxes, including a one-time activation fee may apply.
Subscription fee is consumer only. All fees and programming subject to change. Channels with frequent explicit
language are indicated with an “XL”. Channel blocking is available for XM radio receivers by calling “1-800-XM-
RADIO (1-800-967-2346)” (for residents in the United States) or “1-877-GET-XMSR (1-877-438-9677)” (for residents
in Canada). Subscriptions subject to Customer Agreement available at “http://www.xmradio.com/” (for residents in the
United States) or “http://www.xmradio.ca/” (for residents in Canada). XM service only available in the 48 continuous
United States and Canada. “XM Ready” is a trademark of XM Satellite Radio Inc. © 2006 XM Satellite Radio Inc. All
rights reserved.
XM
®
SATELLITE RADIO TUNING
Notes
54 En
XM® SATELLITE RADIO TUNING
Connect XM Passport and XM Passport Home Dock (sold separately) to the XM jack on the rear panel of this unit. For
details, see the operating instructions provided with XM Passport System.
Connecting XM Passport System
XM
XM Passport and
XM Passport Home Dock
(sold separately)
(U.S.A. model)
55 En
XM® SATELLITE RADIO TUNING
BASIC
OPERATION
The following controls are available only when “XM” is selected as the input source. Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel (or
set the component selector switch to SOURCE and then press XM on the remote control) to select “XM” as the input source.
■ Front panel functions
1 SEARCH MODE
Changes the search mode between the All Channel
Search, Category Search, and Preset Search modes
(see page 58).
2 CATEGORY
(All Channel Search mode)
Changes the channel category while staying in the All
Channel Search mode.
(Category Search mode)
Changes the channel category.
(Preset Search mode)
Changes the preset channel group (A to E).
3 PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h
(All Channel Search mode)
Searches for a channel within all channels. Press and hold
for quick search.
(Category Search mode)
Searches for a channel within the selected category. Press
and hold for quick search.
(Preset Search mode)
Changes the preset channel number (1 to 8).
4 MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM)
Stores a preset channel in the memory (see page 62).
5 DISPLAY
Displays the XM Satellite Radio information such as
channel number, channel name, category, artist name, or
song title displayed in the front panel display or in the
OSD (see page 63).
■ Remote control functions
1 XM
Selects “XM” as the input source.
2 Numeric buttons
(All Channel Search or Category Search mode)
Use 1 to 9 and 0 to enter a channel number directly.
(Preset Search mode)
Use 1 to 8 to enter a preset channel number directly.
3 Cursor buttons u / d / j / i
(All Channel Search mode)
Press A-E/CAT. j / i to change the channel category.
Press PRESET/CH u / d to search for a channel within
all channels. Press and hold for quick search.
(Category Search mode)
Press A-E/CAT. j / i to change the channel category.
Press PRESET/CH u / d to search for a channel within
the selected category. Press and hold for quick search.
(Preset Search mode)
Press A-E/CAT. j / i to change the preset channel group
(A to E).
Press PRESET/CH u / d to change the preset channel
number (1 to 8).
4 XM MEMORY
Stores a preset channel in the memory (see page 62).
5 ENT.
Confirms an entered channel number in the Direct
Number Access mode (see page 61).
6 SRCH MODE
Changes the search mode between the All Channel
Search, Category Search, and Preset Search modes
(see page 58).
7 DISPLAY
Displays the XM Satellite Radio information such as
channel number, channel name, category, artist name, or
song title displayed in the front panel display or in the
OSD (see page 63).
XM Satellite Radio controls and functions
Note
DISPLAYCATEGORY
NEXT
SEARCH MODE
EFFECT
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
FM/AM
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
A/B/C/D/E
l PRESET/TUNING/CH h
TUNING MODE
AUTO/MAN'L
INPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT
SPEAKERS
BA
MULTI CH
INPUT
INPUT
12345
LEVEL
(U.S.A. model)
TV MUTE TV INPUT
MUTE
MENUTITLE
SET MENU
LEVEL
DISPLAYRETURN
BAND
SRCH MODE
ON SCREENXM MEMORY
A- E/ CAT. A- E/ CAT.
ENTER
PRESET/CH
REC
STEREO
1
EFFECT
STANDARD
5
SPEAKERS
9
MUSIC
2
SELECT
6
ENHANCER
0
ENTERTAIN
3
EXTD SUR.
7
NIGHT
10
MOVIE
4
DIRECT ST.
8
STRAIGHT
ENT.
AMP
SOURCE
TV
VOLUME
TV VOL TV CH
TRANSMITCODE SET
STANDBY
POWER
POWERPOWER
CD
AVTV
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
CD-R XM
DVD DTV
MD
DOCK USB
CBL
NET
TUNER
V-A UX DVR
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
(U.S.A. model)Set to SOURCE.
56 En
XM® SATELLITE RADIO TUNING
To sign up for an account with the XM Satellite Radio
service, an XM Satellite Radio ID number is required.
Follow the procedure below to check your ID number, and
then visit the website or call toll-free with a major credit
card handy for signing up.
For residents in the United States
URL: http://activate.xmradio.com/
Toll-free: 1-800-XM-RADIO (1-800-967-2346)
For residents in Canada
URL: https://activate.xmradio.ca/on-line-activation/
activation.jsp
Toll-free: 1-877-GET-XMSR (1-877-438-9677)
1 Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel
(or set the component selector switch to
SOURCE and then press XM on the remote
control) to select “XM” as the input source.
The cursor on the left of the XM indicator lights up in
the front panel display.
2 Check the XM Satellite Radio reception level
and adjust the orientation of XM Passport
System for a better percentage of the
reception level.
y
You can display the XM Satellite Radio reception level by
using the “XM ANTENNA” parameter in “OPTION
MENU” (see page 89).
• If “CHECK ANTENNA” appears in the front panel
display, XM Passport System may not be connected to the
XM jack on the rear panel of this unit properly. See
“Connecting XM Passport System” on page 54 and check
the connection.
• The “XM ANTENNA” parameter in “OPTION MENU”
(see page 89) cannot be adjusted by using the remote
control. Instead, you need to adjust the orientation of XM
Passport System connected to the XM jack of this unit for
a better percentage of the reception level.
3 Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h on the
front panel (or PRESET/CH u / d on the
remote control) to select channel “0”.
You cannot select channel “0” if the All Channel Search
mode (see page 58) is not selected.
4 Check the XM Satellite Radio ID number
displayed in the front panel display and write
it down.
ID:_____________________________________
Activating XM Satellite Radio
ZONE 2
ON/OFF
ZONE
CONTROL
DISPLAYCATEGORY
NEXT
SEARCH MODE
EFFECT
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
FM/AM
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
l PRESET/TUNING/CH h
TUNING MODE
AUTO/MAN'L
INPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT
SPEAKERSPHONES
ON/OFF
MAIN ZONE
MASTER
SILENT CINEMA
BA
MULTI CH
INPUT
VOLUME
INPUT
ON OFF
VIDEO L AUDIO R
USBVIDEO AUX
13
LEVEL
(U.S.A. model)
INPUT
XM
AMP
SOURCE
TV
or
Remote control
Front panel
DVR DVD CD
p
XM
V-AUX DTV/CBL
MD/CD-R
TUNER
NET
USB
VOLUME
A
SP
dB
LR
XM RADIO
Lights up
Notes
Note
l PRESET/TUNING/CH h
LEVEL
A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.
ENTER
PRESET/CH
Remote control
Front panel
or
57 En
XM® SATELLITE RADIO TUNING
BASIC
OPERATION
1 Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel
(or set the component selector switch to
SOURCE and then press XM on the remote
control) to select “XM” as the input source.
The cursor on the left of the XM indicator lights up in
the front panel display and the XM Satellite Radio
information (such as channel number, channel name,
category, artist name, or song title) for the currently
selected channel appears in the front panel display.
y
When you select “XM” as the input source, this unit
automatically recalls the previously selected channel.
The XM Satellite Radio signals cannot be output at the
AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks.
2 Search for a channel by using one of the XM
Satellite Radio search modes.
See “Selecting the XM Satellite Radio search mode”
on page 58 for details.
y
• You can use the Neural Surround decoder to enjoy the
surround sound content of the XM Satellite Radio
broadcasts in multi-channels (see page 43).
• You can set the XM Satellite Radio preset channels (see
page 62).
• You can display the XM Satellite Radio information in the
front panel display or in the OSD (see page 63).
Basic XM Satellite Radio
operations
TV MUTE TV INPUT
MUTE
AMP
SOURCE
TV
STEREO
VOLUME
TV VOL TV CH
CD
AVTV
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
CD-R XM
DVD DTV
MD
DOCK USB
CBL
NET
TUNER
V-A UX DVR
MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE
1
1
(U.S.A. model)
ZONE 2
ON/OFF
ZONE
CONTROL
DISPLAYCATEGORY
NEXT
SEARCH MODE
EFFECT
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
FM/AM
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
l PRESET/TUNING/CH h
TUNING MODE
AUTO/MAN'L
INPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT
SPEAKERSPHONES
ON/OFF
MAIN ZONE
MASTER
SILENT CINEMA
BA
MULTI CH
INPUT
VOLUME
INPUT
ON OFF
VIDEO L AUDIO R
USBVIDEO AUX
1
LEVEL
(U.S.A. model)
DVR DVD CD
p
XM
V-AUX DTV/CBL
MD/CD-R
TUNER
NET
USB
VOLUME
A
SP
dB
LR
[001] Preview
Lights up
XM
AMP
SOURCE
TV
Remote control
INPUT
or
Front panel
Note
58 En
XM® SATELLITE RADIO TUNING
You can search for the desired channel using one of the
three search modes (All Channel Search, Category Search,
and Preset Search modes). You can also enter the channel
number directly to select the desired channel by using the
Direct Number Access mode (see page 61).
■ All Channel Search mode
1 Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel
(or set the component selector switch to
SOURCE and then press XM on the remote
control) to select “XM” as the input source.
2 Press SEARCH MODE on the front panel (or
SRCH MODE on the remote control)
repeatedly to select “ALL CH SEARCH”.
3 Press CATEGORY on the front panel (or
A-E/CAT. j / i on the remote control)
repeatedly to change the channel category.
4 Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h on the
front panel (or PRESET/CH u / d on the
remote control) repeatedly to search for a
channel within all channels.
y
You can search for a channel quickly by pressing and
holding PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h on the front panel
(or PRESET/CH u / d on the remote control).
Selecting the XM Satellite Radio
search mode
ZONE 2
ON/OFF
ZONE
CONTROL
DISPLAYCATEGORY
NEXT
SEARCH MODE
EFFECT
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
FM/AM
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
l
PRESET/TUNING/CH
h
TUNING MODE
AUTO/MAN'L
INPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT
SPEAKERSPHONES
ON/OFF
MAIN ZONE
MASTER
SILENT CINEMA
BA
MULTI CH
INPUT
VOLUME
INPUT
ON OFF
1234
LEVEL
VIDEO L AUDIO R
USBVIDEO AUX
(U.S.A. model)
MENUTITLE
SET MENU
LEVEL
DISPLAYRETURN
BAND
SRCH MODE
ON SCREENXM MEMORY
A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.
ENTER
PRESET/CH
REC
STEREO
1
EFFECT
STANDARD
5
SPEAKERS
9
MUSIC
2
SELECT
6
ENHANCER
0
ENTERTAIN
3
EXTD SUR.
7
NIGHT
10
MOVIE
4
DIRECT ST.
8
STRAIGHT
ENT.
TV MUTE TV INPUT
MUTE
AMP
SOURCE
TV
STEREO
VOLUME
TV VOL TV CH
CD
AVTV
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
CD-R XM
DVD DTV
MD
DOCK USB
CBL
NET
TUNER
V-A UX DVR
MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE
3-4
2
1
1
(U.S.A. model)
INPUT
XM
AMP
SOURCE
TV
or
Remote control
Front panel
DVR DVD CD
p
XM
V-AUX DTV/CBL
MD/CD-R
TUNER
NET
USB
VOLUME
A
SP
dB
LR
ALL CH SEARCH
SEARCH MODE
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
MENU
SET MENU
SRCH MODE
or
Front panel Remote control
CATEGORY
NEXT
A/B/C/D/E
A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.
ENTER
PRESET/CH
Front panel Remote control
or
l PRESET/TUNING/CH h
LEVEL
A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.
ENTER
PRESET/CH
Remote control
Front panel
or
59 En
XM® SATELLITE RADIO TUNING
BASIC
OPERATION
■ Category Search mode
1 Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel
(or set the component selector switch to
SOURCE and then press XM on the remote
control) to select “XM” as the input source.
2 Press SEARCH MODE on the front panel (or
SRCH MODE on the remote control)
repeatedly to select “CAT SEARCH”.
3 Press CATEGORY on the front panel (or
A-E/CAT. j / i on the remote control)
repeatedly to change the channel category.
4 Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h on the
front panel (or PRESET/CH u / d on the
remote control) repeatedly to search for a
channel within the selected channel
category.
y
You can search for a channel quickly by pressing and
holding PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h on the front panel
(or PRESET/CH u / d on the remote control).
ZONE 2
ON/OFF
ZONE
CONTROL
DISPLAYCATEGORY
NEXT
SEARCH MODE
EFFECT
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
FM/AM
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
l
PRESET/TUNING/CH
h
TUNING MODE
AUTO/MAN'L
INPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT
SPEAKERSPHONES
ON/OFF
MAIN ZONE
MASTER
SILENT CINEMA
BA
MULTI CH
INPUT
VOLUME
INPUT
ON OFF
1234
LEVEL
VIDEO L AUDIO R
USBVIDEO AUX
(U.S.A. model)
MENUTITLE
SET MENU
LEVEL
DISPLAYRETURN
BAND
SRCH MODE
ON SCREENXM MEMORY
A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.
ENTER
PRESET/CH
REC
STEREO
1
EFFECT
STANDARD
5
SPEAKERS
9
MUSIC
2
SELECT
6
ENHANCER
0
ENTERTAIN
3
EXTD SUR.
7
NIGHT
10
MOVIE
4
DIRECT ST.
8
STRAIGHT
ENT.
TV MUTE TV INPUT
MUTE
AMP
SOURCE
TV
STEREO
VOLUME
TV VOL TV CH
CD
AVTV
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
CD-R XM
DVD DTV
MD
DOCK USB
CBL
NET
TUNER
V-A UX DVR
MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE
3-4
2
1
1
(U.S.A. model)
INPUT
XM
AMP
SOURCE
TV
or
Remote control
Front panel
DVR DVD CD
p
XM
V-AUX DTV/CBL
MD/CD-R
TUNER
NET
USB
VOLUME
A
SP
dB
LR
CAT SEARCH
SEARCH MODE
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
MENU
SET MENU
SRCH MODE
or
Front panel Remote control
CATEGORY
NEXT
A/B/C/D/E
A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.
ENTER
PRESET/CH
Front panel
Remote control
or
l PRESET/TUNING/CH h
LEVEL
A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.
ENTER
PRESET/CH
Remote control
Front panel
or
60 En
XM® SATELLITE RADIO TUNING
■ Preset Search mode
Prior to selecting a preset channel in the Preset Search
mode, you must preset XM Satellite Radio channels. For
details, see “Setting the XM Satellite Radio preset
channels” on page 62.
y
All preset channels (A1 to E8) recalls “001 Preview” by the initial
factory setting.
1 Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel
(or set the component selector switch to
SOURCE and then press XM on the remote
control) to select “XM” as the input source.
2 Press SEARCH MODE on the front panel (or
SRCH MODE on the remote control)
repeatedly to select “PRESET SEARCH”.
3 Press CATEGORY on the front panel (or
A-E/CAT. j / i on the remote control)
repeatedly to change the preset channel
group (A to E).
4 Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h on the
front panel (or PRESET/CH u / d on the
remote control) repeatedly to change the
preset channel number (1 to 8).
y
You can also select the preset channel number directly by
pressing the numeric buttons (1 to 8) on the remote control.
ZONE 2
ON/OFF
ZONE
CONTROL
DISPLAYCATEGORY
NEXT
SEARCH MODE
EFFECT
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
FM/AM
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
l
PRESET/TUNING/CH
h
TUNING MODE
AUTO/MAN'L
INPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT
SPEAKERSPHONES
ON/OFF
MAIN ZONE
MASTER
SILENT CINEMA
BA
MULTI CH
INPUT
VOLUME
INPUT
ON OFF
1234
LEVEL
VIDEO L AUDIO R
USBVIDEO AUX
(U.S.A. model)
MENUTITLE
SET MENU
LEVEL
DISPLAYRETURN
BAND
SRCH MODE
ON SCREENXM MEMORY
A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.
ENTER
PRESET/CH
REC
STEREO
1
EFFECT
STANDARD
5
SPEAKERS
9
MUSIC
2
SELECT
6
ENHANCER
0
ENTERTAIN
3
EXTD SUR.
7
NIGHT
10
MOVIE
4
DIRECT ST.
8
STRAIGHT
ENT.
TV MUTE TV INPUT
MUTE
AMP
SOURCE
TV
STEREO
VOLUME
TV VOL TV CH
CD
AVTV
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
CD-R XM
DVD DTV
MD
USBDOCK
CBL
NET
TUNER
V-A UX DVR
MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE
3-4
2
1
1
(U.S.A. model)
INPUT
XM
AMP
SOURCE
TV
or
Remote control
Front panel
DVR DVD CD
p
XM
V-AUX DTV/CBL
MD/CD-R
TUNER
NET
USB
VOLUME
A
SP
dB
LR
PRESET SEARCH
SEARCH MODE
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
MENU
SET MENU
SRCH MODE
or
Front panel Remote control
CATEGORY
NEXT
A/B/C/D/E
A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.
ENTER
PRESET/CH
Front panel
Remote control
or
l PRESET/TUNING/CH h
LEVEL
A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.
ENTER
PRESET/CH
Remote control
Front panel
or
61 En
XM® SATELLITE RADIO TUNING
BASIC
OPERATION
■ Direct Number Access mode
1 Set the component selector switch to
SOURCE and then press XM on the remote
control to select “XM” as the input source.
2 Press SRCH MODE on the remote control
repeatedly to select “ALL CH SEARCH” or
“CAT SEARCH”.
3 Press the numeric buttons on the remote
control to enter the desired three-digit
channel number.
For example, to enter the number 123, press the
numeric buttons as shown below.
The display changes as follows.
Press the numeric buttons and ENT. on the
remote control to enter the desired one-digit
or two-digit channel number.
For example, to enter the number 12, press the
numeric buttons as shown below.
y
• Instead of pressing ENT. to tune into the channel
immediately, you can wait a few seconds until this unit
confirms the entered channel number.
• If no button is pressed within a few seconds after you enter
a one-digit or two-digit number, this unit automatically
confirms the entered channel number.
• Pressing a button other than the numeric buttons or ENT.
cancels the Direct Number Access mode procedure.
MENUTITLE
SET MENU
LEVEL
DISPLAYRETURN
BAND
SRCH MODE
ON SCREENXM MEMORY
A- E/ CAT. A- E/ CAT.
ENTER
PRESET/CH
REC
STEREO
1
EFFECT
STANDARD
5
SPEAKERS
9
MUSIC
2
SELECT
6
ENHANCER
0
ENTERTAIN
3
EXTD SUR.
7
NIGHT
10
MOVIE
4
DIRECT ST.
8
STRAIGHT
ENT.
TV MUTE TV INPUT
MUTE
AMP
SOURCE
TV
STEREO
VOLUME
TV VOL TV CH
CD
AVTV
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
CD-R XM
DVD DTV
MD
DOCK USB
CBL
NET
TUNER
V-A UX DVR
MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE
1
1
3
3
2
(U.S.A. model)
XM
AMP
SOURCE
TV
MENU
SET MENU
SRCH MODE
DVR DVD CD
p
XM
V-AUX DTV/CBL
MD/CD-R
TUNER
NET
USB
VOLUME
A
SP
dB
LR
ALL CH SEARCH
DVR DVD CD
p
XM
V-AUX DTV/CBL
MD/CD-R
TUNER
NET
USB
VOLUME
A
SP
dB
LR
CAT SEARCH
or
STEREO
1
MUSIC
2
ENTERTAIN
3
DVR DVD CD
p
XM
V-AUX DTV/CBL
MD/CD-R
TUNER
NET
USB
VOLUME
A
SP
dB
LR
<XM> -12
DVR DVD CD
p
XM
V-AUX DTV/CBL
MD/CD-R
TUNER
NET
USB
VOLUME
A
SP
dB
LR
<XM>123
DVR DVD CD
p
XM
V-AUX DTV/CBL
MD/CD-R
TUNER
NET
USB
VOLUME
A
SP
dB
LR
<XM> --1
STEREO
1
MUSIC
2
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
ENT.
62 En
XM® SATELLITE RADIO TUNING
You can use this feature to store up to 40 XM Satellite
Radio channels (A1 to E8: 8 preset channel numbers in
each of the 5 preset channel groups). You can then recall
any preset channel easily by selecting the preset channel
group and number as described in “Preset Search mode”
on page 60.
1 Search for a channel you want to set as a
preset channel by using one of the XM
Satellite Radio search modes.
See “Selecting the XM Satellite Radio search mode”
on page 58 for details.
2 Press MEMORY on the front panel (or XM
MEMORY on the remote control).
The MEMORY indicator flashes in the front panel
display for approximately 5 seconds.
You must proceed to and carry out steps 3 through 5 while
the MEMORY indicator is flashing in the front panel
display.
3 Press CATEGORY on the front panel (or
A-E/CAT. j / i on the remote control)
repeatedly to select a preset channel group
(A to E) while the MEMORY indicator is
flashing.
The preset channel group letter appears in the front
panel display.
Setting the XM Satellite Radio
preset channels
ZONE 2
ON/OFF
ZONE
CONTROL
DISPLAYCATEGORY
NEXT
SEARCH MODE
EFFECT
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
FM/AM
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
l
PRESET/TUNING/CH
h
TUNING MODE
AUTO/MAN'L
INPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT
SPEAKERSPHONES
ON/OFF
MAIN ZONE
MASTER
SILENT CINEMA
BA
MULTI CH
INPUT
VOLUME
INPUT
ON OFF
3 2,54
LEVEL
VIDEO L AUDIO R
USBVIDEO AUX
(U.S.A. model)
MENUTITLE
SET MENU
LEVEL
DISPLAYRETURN
BAND
SRCH MODE
ON SCREENXM MEMORY
A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.
ENTER
PRESET/CH
REC
STEREO
1
EFFECT
STANDARD
5
SPEAKERS
9
MUSIC
2
SELECT
6
ENHANCER
0
ENTERTAIN
3
EXTD SUR.
7
NIGHT
10
MOVIE
4
DIRECT ST.
8
STRAIGHT
ENT.
2,5
3-4
(U.S.A. model)
DVR DVD CD
p
XM
V-AUX DTV/CBL
MD/CD-R
TUNER
NET
USB
VOLUME
A
SP
dB
LR
[043] XMU
Currently selected channel number
Note
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
MEMORY
RETURN
XM MEMORY
Flashes
or
Front panel Remote control
DVR DVD CD
p
XM
V-AUX DTV/CBL
MD/CD-R
TUNER
NET
USB
VOLUME
MEMORY
A
SP
dB
LR
C [043] XMU
Currently selected preset channel group
CATEGORY
NEXT
A/B/C/D/E
A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.
ENTER
PRESET/CH
Front panel
Remote control
or
Flashes
63 En
XM® SATELLITE RADIO TUNING
BASIC
OPERATION
4 Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h on the
front panel (or PRESET/CH u / d on the
remote control) repeatedly to select a preset
channel number (1 to 8) while the MEMORY
indicator is flashing.
The preset channel number appears in the front panel
display.
5 Press MEMORY on the front panel (or XM
MEMORY on the remote control) to set the
selected XM Satellite Radio channel as a
preset channel while the MEMORY indicator
is flashing.
A colon (:) appears next to the preset channel number
for confirmation, and the MEMORY indicator turns
off in the front panel display.
Once you set a new preset channel, the one previously
stored in the same preset channel group and number is
cleared.
You can display the XM Satellite Radio information (such
as channel number, channel name, category, artist name,
or song title) for the currently selected channel in the front
panel display or in the OSD.
If a status message or an error message appears in the front panel
display or in the OSD, see the “XM Satellite Radio (U.S.A. and
Canada models only)” section in “TROUBLESHOOTING” on
page 112 for appropriate remedies.
■ Displaying the XM Satellite Radio
information in the front panel display
Press DISPLAY on the front panel or on the
remote control repeatedly to toggle between the
following XM Satellite Radio information display
modes.
Note
DVR DVD CD
p
XM
V-AUX DTV/CBL
MD/CD-R
TUNER
NET
USB
VOLUME
MEMORY
A
SP
dB
LR
C5 [043] XMU
Currently selected preset channel number
l PRESET/TUNING/CH h
LEVEL
A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.
ENTER
PRESET/CH
Remote control
Front panel
or
Flashes
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
RETURN
XM MEMORY
Front panel
Remote control
or
DVR DVD CD
p
XM
V-AUX DTV/CBL
MD/CD-R
TUNER
NET
USB
VOLUME
A
SP
dB
LR
C5:[043] XMU
Colon (:)
Displaying the XM Satellite Radio
information
Note
ZONE 2
ON/OFF
ZONE
CONTROL
DISPLAYCATEGORY
NEXT
SEARCH MODE
EFFECT
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
FM/AM
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
l
PRESET/TUNING/CH
h
TUNING MODE
AUTO/MAN'L
INPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT
SPEAKERSPHONES
ON/OFF
MAIN ZONE
MASTER
SILENT CINEMA
BA
MULTI CH
INPUT
VOLUME
INPUT
ON OFF
LEVEL
VIDEO L AUDIO R
USBVIDEO AUX
(U.S.A. model)
TV MUTE TV INPUT
MUTE
MENUTITLE
SET MENU
LEVEL
DISPLAYRETURN
BAND
SRCH MODE
ON SCREENXM MEMORY
A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.
ENTER
PRESET/CH
REC
STEREO
1
EFFECT
STANDARD
5
SPEAKERS
9
MUSIC
2
SELECT
6
ENHANCER
0
ENTERTAIN
3
EXTD SUR.
7
NIGHT
10
MOVIE
4
DIRECT ST.
8
STRAIGHT
ENT.
(U.S.A. model)
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
TUNING MODE
AUTO/MAN'L
DISPLAY
ON SCREEN
Channel number / name
Channel category
Artist name / Song title
or
Front panel
Remote control
64 En
XM® SATELLITE RADIO TUNING
When the channel number / name is displayed:
When the channel category is displayed:
When the artist name / song title is displayed:
y
• The front panel display can indicate up to 14 alphanumeric
characters at once. You can set whether to display the XM
Satellite Radio information in the front panel display in a
continuous manner or by 14 alphanumeric characters at once by
using the “FL SCROLL” parameter in “OPTION MENU” (see
page 87).
• If the XM Satellite Radio information contains a character that
cannot be recognized by this unit, the character will be
displayed with a space.
If you press DISPLAY while the XM Satellite Radio information
display is scrolling from right to left in the front panel display, the
XM Satellite Radio information display mode toggles as
described above.
■ Displaying the XM Satellite Radio
information in the OSD
Press DISPLAY on the front panel or on the
remote control.
The following screen is displayed in the OSD.
y
• To turn off the OSD, press and hold DISPLAY on the front
panel (or on the remote control).
• You can select the amount of time while the XM Satellite Radio
information is displayed in the OSD by using the “ON
SCREEN” parameter in “OPTION MENU” (see page 87).
• To hold the XM Satellite Radio information screen, press
ENTER on the remote control while it is being displayed in the
OSD.
• The XM Satellite Radio information screen on hold is released
if you press ENTER on the remote control again or if you
change the XM Satellite Radio channel.
• This unit can save up to two XM Satellite Radio information
screens for future reference. To view the previous two XM
Satellite Radio information screens, press TITLE on the remote
control repeatedly while the current XM Satellite Radio
information screen is being on hold.
Note
DVR DVD CD
p
XM
V-AUX DTV/CBL
MD/CD-R
TUNER
NET
USB
VOLUME
A
SP
dB
LR
[043] XMU
DVR DVD CD
p
XM
V-AUX DTV/CBL
MD/CD-R
TUNER
NET
USB
VOLUME
A
SP
dB
LR
<CAT>Rock
DVR DVD CD
p
XM
V-AUX DTV/CBL
MD/CD-R
TUNER
NET
USB
VOLUME
A
SP
dB
LR
Coldplay / Spe
XM INFORMATION
ALL CH SEARCH
XM :043
CHAN :XMU
CAT :Rock
NAME :Coldplay
TITLE :Speed of sound
.( Coldplay / Spe )
[]/[]:CHANNEL
[<]/[>]:CATEGORY
p
p
DISPLAY
TUNING MODE
AUTO/MAN'L
DISPLAY
ON SCREEN
Front panel
Remote control
or
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS
65 En
SOUND FIELD
PROGRAMS
What really creates the rich, full tones of a live instrument are the multiple reflections from the walls of the room. In
addition to making the sound live, these reflections enable us to tell where the player is situated as well as the size and
shape of the room in which we are sitting.
■ Elements of a sound field
There are two distinct types of sound reflections that combine to make up the sound field in addition to the direct sound
coming straight to our ears from the player’s instrument.
Early reflections
Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly (50 ms to 100 ms after the direct sound), after reflecting from one
surface only (for example, from a wall or the ceiling). Early reflections actually add clarity to the direct sound.
Reverberations
These are caused by reflections from more than one surface (for example, from the walls, and the ceiling) so numerous
that they merge together to form a continuous sonic afterglow. They are non-directional and lessen the clarity of the direct
sound.
Direct sound, early reflections and subsequent reverberations taken together help us to determine the subjective size and
shape of the room, and it is this information that the digital sound field processor reproduces in order to create sound
fields.
If you could create the appropriate early reflections and subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you would be
able to create your own listening environment. The acoustics in your room could be changed to those of a concert hall, a
dance floor, or a room with virtually any size at all. This ability to create sound fields at will is exactly what YAMAHA
has done with the digital sound field processor.
• Choose a sound field program based on your listening preference, not merely on the name of the program.
• When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects the last sound field program used with the corresponding input source.
• Sound field programs cannot be selected when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input
source (see page 38).
• Sampling frequencies higher than 48 kHz (except for DTS 96/24 signals) are sampled down to 48 kHz and then sound field programs
are applied.
■ Front panel operations
Rotate the PROGRAM selector on the front panel.
The name of the selected sound field program appears in
the front panel display and in the OSD.
■ Remote control operations
Set the component selector switch to AMP and
then press one of the sound field program
selector buttons on the remote control
repeatedly.
The name of the selected sound field program appears in
the front panel display and in the OSD.
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS
Selecting sound field programs
Notes
ZONE 2
ON/OFF
ZONE
CONTROL
DISPLAYCATEGORY
NEXT
SEARCH MODE
EFFECT
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
FM/AM
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
l
PRESET/TUNING/CH
h
TUNING MODE
AUTO/MAN'L
INPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT
SPEAKERSPHONES
ON/OFF
MAIN ZONE
MASTER
SILENT CINEMA
BA
MULTI CH
INPUT
VOLUME
INPUT
ON OFF
LEVEL
VIDEO L AUDIO R
USBVIDEO AUX
(U.S.A. model)
PROGRAM selector
TV MUTE TV INPUT
MUTE
AMP
SOURCE
TV
PRESET/CH
STEREO
1
EFFECT
VOLUME
TV VOL TV CH
STANDARD
5
SPEAKERS
9
MUSIC
2
SELECT
6
ENHANCER
0
ENTERTAIN
3
EXTD SUR.
7
NIGHT
10
MOVIE
4
DIRECT ST.
8
STRAIGHT
ENT.
(U.S.A. model)
AMP
Sound field program
selector buttons
66 En
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS
This unit is equipped with a variety of precise digital decoders that allow you to enjoy multi-channel playback from
almost any stereo or multi-channel sound source. This unit is also equipped with a YAMAHA digital sound field
processing (DSP) chip containing several sound field programs which you can use to enhance your playback experience.
y
The YAMAHA CINEMA DSP modes are compatible with all Dolby Digital, DTS, and Dolby Surround sources. Set “INPUT MODE”
to “AUTO” (see page 35) to enable this unit to automatically switch to the appropriate digital decoder according to the input signal.
• The DSP sound field programs of this unit are recreations of real-world acoustic environments made from precise measurements taken
in the actual concert hall, music venue, movie theater, etc. Thus, you may notice variations in the strength of the reflections coming
from the front, back, left and right.
• Choose a sound field program based on your listening preference, not merely on the name of the program itself.
■ For movie/video sources
You can select from the following sound fields when playing movie or video sources. The sound fields marked “MULTI”
can be used with multi-channel sources, like DVD, digital TV, etc. Those marked “2-CH” can be used with 2-channel
stereo sources like TV programs, video tapes, etc.
y
Rotate the PROGRAM selector on the front panel (or set the component selector switch to AMP and then press one of the sound field
program selector buttons on the remote control) to select the desired sound field program (see page 65).
Sound field program descriptions
Notes
Remote
control
button
Sound field program Features Sources
1
STEREO
2ch Stereo
Downmixes multi-channel sources to 2 channels or plays back 2-channel
sources as they are.
MULTI
2-CH
2
MUSIC
Pop/Rock
CINEMA DSP processing. This program creates an enthusiastic atmosphere
where you can feel as if you are in an actual jazz or rock concert.
3
ENTERTAINMENT
TV Sports
CINEMA DSP processing. This program reproduces the sound environment of a
large concert hall using the surround sound field to enhance your experience of
watching various TV programs such as news, variety shows, music programs or
sports programs.
ENTERTAINMENT
Mono Movie
CINEMA DSP processing. This program reproduces monaural video sources
(such as old movies) at the optimum reverberation level to create sound depth
using only the presence sound field.
ENTERTAINMENT
Game
CINEMA DSP processing. This program adds a deep and spatial feeling to
video game sounds.
67 En
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS
SOUND FIELD
PROGRAMS
■ For music sources
You can select from the following sound fields when playing music sources, like CD, FM/AM broadcasting, tapes, etc.
y
Rotate the PROGRAM selector on the front panel (or set the component selector switch to AMP and then press one of the sound field
program selector buttons on the remote control) to select the desired sound field program (see page 65).
4
MOVIE THEATER
Spectacle
CINEMA DSP processing. This program reproduces the extremely wide sound
field of a 70-mm movie theater in detail, making both the video and the sound
field incredibly real. This is ideal for any kind of video source encoded in Dolby
Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS, especially large-scale movie productions.
MULTI
2-CH
MOVIE THEATER
Sci-Fi
CINEMA DSP processing. This program reproduces dialog and sound effects in
the latest sound form for science fiction films, thus creating a broad and
expansive cinematic space amid silence. You can enjoy science fiction films
encoded in Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS in a virtual-space sound field
employing the most advanced techniques.
MOVIE THEATER
Adventure
CINEMA DSP processing. This program reproduces the sound design of the
newest 70-mm and multi-channel soundtrack films similar to the sound field of
the newest movie theaters, so the reverberations of the sound field itself are
restrained as much as possible.
MOVIE THEATER
General
CINEMA DSP processing. This program reproduces sounds from 70-mm and
multi-channel soundtrack films characterized by soft and extensive sound field.
5
SUR. STANDARD
Standard processing for the selected decoder.
SUR. ENHANCED
Enhanced processing for the selected decoder.
Remote
control
button
Sound field program Features Sources
Remote
control
button
Sound field program Features Sources
1
STEREO
2ch Stereo
Plays back 2-channel sources.
2-CH
STEREO
6ch Stereo
Plays back 2-channel sources from all speakers in 6.1 channels, providing a
larger sound field ideal for background music at parties, etc.
2
MUSIC
Hall in Vienna
HiFi DSP processing. This program reproduces a classic shoe-box type concert
hall with approximately 1700 seats. Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely
complex reflections which produce a very full, rich sound.
MULTI
2-CH
MUSIC
The Bttm Line
HiFi DSP processing. This program reproduces the stage front in “The Bottom
Line”, a famous New York jazz club where 300 people can be seated.
MUSIC
The Roxy Thtr
HiFi DSP processing. This program reproduces the dynamic rock music
environment of “The Roxy Theatre”, one of the hottest rock clubs in L.A. The
listener’s imaginary seat is at the center-left of the hall.
3
ENTERTAINMENT
Disco
HiFi DSP processing. This program reproduces the acoustic environment of a
lively disco in the heart of a big city to create a highly concentrated and
energetic sound.
5
SUR. STANDARD
Standard processing for the selected decoder.
SUR. ENHANCED
Enhanced processing for the selected decoder.
68 En
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS
You can enjoy good quality sound with the initial factory
settings. Although you do not have to change the initial
factory settings, you can change some of the parameters to
better suit the input source or your listening room.
• Use the “PARAM. INI” feature in “OPTION MENU” to
initialize the parameters of each sound field program within a
sound field program group (see page 88).
• When you set a sound field parameter to a value other than the
initial factory settings, an asterisk mark (*) appears by the
sound field parameter name in the OSD.
• You cannot change the sound field parameter values when
“MEMORY GUARD” in “OPTION MENU” is set to “ON”
(see page 87). If you want to change the sound field parameter
values, set “MEMORY GUARD” to “OFF”.
y
• For details about the function and control range of each sound
field parameter, see page 69.
• Repeat steps 3 and 4 as necessary to change other sound field
program parameter settings.
• The available sound field parameters for some of the sound field
programs may be displayed on more than one page in the OSD.
In this case, press u / d to scroll through pages.
• If you press and hold j / i to change the sound field parameter
value, the initial factory settings are shown momentarily in the
front panel display.
1 Set the component selector switch to AMP.
2 Turn on the video monitor and then press
DISPLAY on the remote control.
The following display is shown in the OSD.
3 Press one of the sound field program
selector buttons repeatedly to select the
desired sound field program you want to
adjust.
4 Press u / d to select the desired sound field
parameter and then j / i to change the
selected sound field parameter value.
•Press i to increase the value.
•Press j to decrease the value.
Changing sound field parameter
settings
Notes
AMP
SOURCE
TV
VOLUME
TV VOL TV CH
TRANSMITCODE SET
STANDBY
POWER
POWERPOWER
CD
AVTV
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
CD-R XM
DVD DTV
MD
DOCK USB
CBL
NET
TUNER
V-AU X D VR
TV MUTE TV INPUT
MUTE
MENUTITLE
SET MENU
LEVEL
DISPLAYRETURN
BAND
SRCH MODE
ON SCREENXM MEMORY
A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.
ENTER
PRESET/CH
REC
AUDI O
STEREO
1
EFFECT
STANDARD
5
SPEAKERS
9
MUSIC
2
SELECT
6
ENHANCER
0
ENTERTAIN
3
EXTD SUR.
7
NIGHT
10
MOVIE
4
DIRECT ST.
8
STRAIGHT
ENT.
2
4
1
3
(U.S.A. model)
AMP
SOURCE
TV
DISPLAY
ON SCREEN
P02 MUSIC
. Pop/Rock
DSP LEVEL;;;;0dB
P.INIT.DLY;;21ms
P.ROOM SIZE;;1.0
S.INIT.DLY;;25ms
S.ROOM SIZE;;1.0
Sound field program category
Sound field parameters Sound field parameter
values
Cursor
STEREO
1
EFFECT
STANDARD
5
SPEAKERS
9
MUSIC
2
SELECT
6
ENHANCER
0
ENTERTAIN
3
EXTD SUR.
7
NIGHT
10
MOVIE
4
DIRECT ST.
8
STRAIGHT
ENT.
A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.
ENTER
PRESET/CH
69 En
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS
SOUND FIELD
PROGRAMS
■ Sound field parameter descriptions
You can adjust the values of certain digital sound field parameters so that the sound fields are recreated accurately in your
listening room. Not all of the following parameters are found in every program.
y
To change sound field parameter settings to suit your listening environment, see page 68 for details.
Sound field parameter Features
DSP LEVEL
DSP level. Adjusts the level of all the DSP effect sounds within a narrow range. Depending on
the acoustics of your listening room, you may want to increase or decrease the DSP effect level
relative to the level of the direct sound.
Control range: –6 dB to +3 dB
INIT.DLY
P.INIT.DLY
S.INIT.DLY
SB INI.DLY
Initial delay. Presence, surround, and surround back initial delays. Changes the apparent distance
from the source sound by adjusting the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection
heard by the listener. The smaller the value, the closer the sound source seems to the listener. The
larger the value, the farther it seems. For a small room, set to a small value. For a large room, set
to a large value.
Control range: 1 to 99 ms (INIT.DLY and P.INIT.DLY)
1 to 49 ms (S.INIT.DLY and SB INI.DLY)
Source sound
Early
reflections
Time
Time
Time
Delay
Delay
Delay
Sound source
Reflection face
Level
Small value = 1 ms Large value = 99 ms
Level
Level
70 En
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS
ROOM SIZE
P.ROOM SIZE
S.ROOM SIZE
SB ROOM SIZE
Room size. Presence, surround, and surround back room sizes. Adjusts the apparent size of the
surround sound field. The larger the value, the larger the surround sound field becomes. As the
sound is repeatedly reflected around a room, the larger the hall is, the longer the time between
the original reflected sound and the subsequent reflections. By controlling the time between the
reflected sounds, you can change the apparent size of the virtual venue. Changing this parameter
from one to two doubles the apparent length of the room.
Control range: 0.1 to 2.0
LIVENESS
S.LIVENESS
SB LIVENESS
Liveness. Surround and surround back liveness. Adjusts the reflectivity of the virtual walls in the
hall by changing the rate at which the early reflections decay. The early reflections of a sound
source decay much faster in a room with acoustically absorbent wall surfaces than in one which
has highly reflective surfaces. A room with acoustically absorbent surfaces is referred to as
“dead”, while a room with highly reflective surfaces is referred to as “live”. This parameter lets
you adjust the early reflection decay rate and thus the “liveness” of the room.
Control range: 0 to 10
Sound field parameter Features
Level
Level
Level
Time Time Time
Source sound
Early
reflections
Small value = 0.1
Large value = 2.0
Sound source
Source sound
Level
Level
Level
Dead
Live
Time
Time Time
Small reflected
sound
Large reflected
sound
Small value = 0 Large value = 10
71 En
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS
SOUND FIELD
PROGRAMS
REV.TIME
Reverberation time. Adjusts the amount of time taken for the dense, subsequent reverberation
sound to decay by 60 dB at 1 kHz. This changes the apparent size of the acoustic environment
over an extremely wide range. Set a longer reverberation time for “dead” sources and listening
room environments, and a shorter time for “live” sources and listening room environments.
Control range: 1.0 to 5.0 s
REV.DELAY
Reverberation delay. Adjusts the time difference between the beginning of the direct sound and
the beginning of the reverberation sound. The larger the value, the later the reverberation sound
begins. A later reverberation sound makes you feel as if you are in a larger acoustic environment.
Control range: 0 to 250 ms
Sound field parameter Features
Reverberation
Reverberation
60 dB 60 dB 60 dB
Source sound
REV.TIME
REV.TIME
REV.TIME
Sound source
Short
reverberation
Long
reverberation
Small value = 1.0 s Large value = 5.0 s
Early reflections
(dB)
60 dB
Level
Source sound
Reverberation
REV.TIME
REV.DELAY
Time
72 En
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS
REV.LEVEL
Reverberation level. Adjusts the volume of the reverberation sound. The larger the value, the
stronger the reverberation becomes.
Control range: 0 to 100%
2ch Stereo
DIRECT
2-channel stereo direct. Bypasses the decoders and DSP processors of this unit for pure hi-fi
stereo sound when playing 2-channel analog sources.
Choices: AUTO, OFF
y
• The “AUTO” setting bypasses the decoders and DSP processors only when “BASS” and
“TREBLE” are set to 0 dB (see page 33).
• When multi-channel signals (Dolby Digital and DTS) are input, they are downmixed to 2
channels and output from the front left and right speakers.
• The low-frequency signals input from the front left and right speakers are redirected to the
subwoofer in the following cases:
– “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “BOTH” (see page 78).
– “FRONT SP” is set to “SMALL” (see page 77) and “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “SWFR”
(see page 78).
6ch Stereo
CT LEVEL
SL LEVEL
SR LEVEL
SB LEVEL
6-channel stereo center, surround left, surround right and surround back levels. Adjusts the
volume level of each channel in the 6-channel stereo mode.
Control range: 0 to 100%
Sound field parameter Features
Source sound
Level
REV. LEVEL
Time
73 En
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS
SOUND FIELD
PROGRAMS
y
The “PRO LOGIC IIx Music”, “PRO LOGIC II Music”, and “DTS Neo:6 Music” parameters can be set only when “SUR.
STANDARD” is selected. Set the component selector switch to AMP and then press STANDARD on the remote control repeatedly to
select “SUR. STANDARD” (see page 43).
PRO LOGIC IIx Music
PRO LOGIC II Music
PANORAMA
Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music panorama. Sends stereo signals to the surround
speakers as well as the front speakers for a wraparound effect.
Choices: OFF, ON
PRO LOGIC IIx Music
PRO LOGIC II Music
DIMENSION
Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music dimension. Adjusts the sound field either towards
the front or towards the rear.
Control range: –3 (towards the rear) to +3 (towards the front)
Initial setting: STD (standard)
PRO LOGIC IIx Music
PRO LOGIC II Music
CENTER WIDTH
Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music center width. Moves the center channel output
completely towards the center speaker or towards the front left and right speakers. A larger value
moves the center channel output towards the front left and right speakers.
Control range: 0 (center channel sound is output only from the center speaker) to
7 (center channel sound is output only from the front left and right speakers)
Initial setting: 3
DTS Neo:6 Music
C.IMAGE
DTS Neo:6 Music center image. Adjusts the front left and right channel output relative to the
center channel to make the center channel more or less dominant as necessary.
Control range: 0.0 to 1.0
Initial setting: 0.3
Sound field parameter Features
SET MENU
74 En
You can use the following parameters in “SET MENU” to adjust a variety of system settings and customize the way this
unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening
environment.
■ Basic setup BASIC SETUP
Use this feature to set up your system quickly and with minimal effort (see page 29).
■ Manual setup MANUAL SETUP
Use this feature to manually adjust speaker and system parameters.
Sound menu 1 SOUND MENU
Use this menu to manually adjust any speaker settings, alter the quality and tone of the sound output by the system or
compensate for video signal processing delays when using LCD monitors or projectors.
Input menu 2 INPUT MENU
Use this menu to manually reassign the input/output jacks, select the input mode or rename the input source.
SET MENU
Parameter Features Page
A)SPEAKER SET
Selects the size of each speaker, the speakers for low-frequency signal output, and the
crossover frequency.
77
B)SPEAKER LEVEL
Adjusts the output level of each speaker.
79
C)SP DISTANCE
Adjusts the delay time of each speaker.
80
D)CENTER GEQ
Adjusts the tonal quality of the center speaker.
80
E)LFE LEVEL
Adjusts the output level of the LFE channel for Dolby Digital or DTS signals.
80
F)DYNAMIC RANGE
Adjusts the dynamic range of Dolby Digital or DTS signals.
81
G)AUDIO SET
Adjusts the muting level, audio delay and tone bypass settings.
81
Parameter Features Page
A)I/O ASSIGNMENT
Assigns the input/output jacks of this unit according to the component to be used.
82
B)INPUT MODE
Selects the initial input mode of the source.
83
C)INPUT RENAME
Changes the name of the input source.
83
D)VOLUME TRIM
Adjusts the output volume of each jack.
84
75 En
SET MENU
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Network and USB menu 3 NET/USB MENU
Use this menu to manually adjust the network and USB system parameters.
Option menu 4 OPTION MENU
Use this menu to manually adjust the optional system parameters.
The “XM RADIO SET” parameter is only applicable to the U.S.A. and Canada models.
■ Signal information SIGNAL INFO
Use this feature to check audio signal information (see page 40).
Parameter Features Page
A)NETWORK
Configures the network settings automatically or manually.
84
B)PLAY STYLE
Adjusts the playback style.
85
C)INFORMATION
Displays the network system information.
86
Parameter Features Page
A)DISPLAY SET
Adjusts the brightness of the display and converts video signals. Sets the OSD display time as
well as the front panel display scrolling mode.
86
B)MEMORY GUARD
Locks sound field program parameters and other “SET MENU” settings.
87
C)PARAM. INI
Initializes the parameters of a group of sound field programs.
88
D)MULTI ZONE SET
Specifies the location of the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals.
88
E)XM RADIO SET
Displays the current reception level of XM Passport System.
89
Note
76 En
SET MENU
Use the remote control to access and adjust each
parameter.
y
• You can change the “SET MENU” parameters while this unit is
reproducing sound.
• If you press one of the sound field program selector buttons
during the “SET MENU” operation, the “SET MENU”
operation is canceled.
• Repeat the following procedure to select and adjust each
parameter setting.
• Press RETURN to return to the previous menu level.
You cannot change some “SET MENU” parameters when
“NIGHT:CINEMA” or “NIGHT:MUSIC” is selected as the night
listening mode (see page 34).
1 Set the component selector switch to AMP
and then press SET MENU to enter “SET
MENU”.
The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD.
2 Press u / d to select “MANUAL SETUP”.
3 Press ENTER to enter “MANUAL SETUP”.
The “MANUAL SETUP” display appears in the
OSD.
4 Press u / d repeatedly and then press
ENTER to select and enter the desired menu.
The following displays are examples where “SOUND
MENU” is selected.
Using SET MENU
Note
MENUTITLE
SET MENU
LEVEL
DISPLAYRETURN
BAND
SRCH MODE
ON SCREENXM MEMORY
A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.
ENTER
PRESET/CH
REC
STEREO
1
EFFECT
STANDARD
5
SPEAKERS
9
MUSIC
2
SELECT
6
ENHANCER
0
ENTERTAIN
3
EXTD SUR.
7
NIGHT
10
MOVIE
4
DIRECT ST.
8
STRAIGHT
ENT.
TV MUTE TV INPUT
MUTE
AMP
SOURCE
TV
STEREO
VOLUME
TV VOL TV CH
CD
AVTV
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
CD-R XM
DVD DTV
MD
DOCK USB
CBL
NET
TUNER
V-A UX DVR
MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE
1
2-6
1,7
(U.S.A. model)
MENU
SET MENU
SRCH MODE
SET MENU
.;BASICSETUP
;MANUALSETUP
.;SIGNAL INFO
[ ]/[]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
p
p
AMP
SOURCE
TV
SET MENU
;BASICSETUP
.;MANUALSETUP
.;SIGNAL INFO
[ ]/[]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
p
p
A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.
ENTER
PRESET/CH
;MANUAL SETUP
.1SOUNDMENU
2INPUTMENU
3NET/USBMENU
4OPTIONMENU
[]/[]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
p
p
A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.
ENTER
PRESET/CH
.A)SPEAKERSET
B)SPEAKERLEVEL
C)SPDISTANCE
D)CENTER GEQ
[]/[]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
1 SOUND
MENU 1/2
p
p
.E)LFE LEVEL
F)DYNAMIC RANGE
G)AUDIO SET
[]/[]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
1 SOUND
MENU 2/2
p
p
A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.
ENTER
PRESET/CH
A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.
ENTER
PRESET/CH
77 En
SET MENU
ADVANCED
OPERATION
5 Press u / d repeatedly and then press
ENTER to select and enter the desired
submenu.
The following display is an example where
“SPEAKER LEVEL” is selected.
6 Press u / d to select the desired parameter
and then j / i to change the parameter
settings.
• Press i to increase the value.
• Press j to decrease the value.
7 Press SET MENU to exit from “SET MENU”.
Use this menu to manually adjust any speaker settings or
compensate for video signal processing delays when using
LCD monitors or projectors.
■ Speaker settings A)SPEAKER SET
Use this feature to manually adjust any speaker settings.
y
If you are not satisfied with the bass sounds from your speakers,
you can change these settings according to your preference.
Front speakers FRONT SP
Choices: SMALL, LARGE
• Select “SMALL” (small) if you have small front
speakers that do not reproduce low-frequency signals
effectively. The low-frequency signals of the front left
and right channels are directed to the speakers selected
in “LFE/BASS OUT” (see page 78).
• Select “LARGE” (large) if you have large front
speakers that reproduce low-frequency signals
effectively. All the front left and right channel signals
are directed to the front left and right speakers.
If “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “FRNT” (see page 78), the LFE
signals found in Dolby Digital or DTS sources, the low-frequency
signals of the front left and right channels, and the low-frequency
signals of other speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) are all
directed to the front left and right speakers regardless of the
“FRONT SP” setting.
Memory back-up
The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data
from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode.
However, the stored data will be lost in case the power
cable is disconnected from the AC wall outlet or if the
power supply is cut off for more than one week.
.FL;;;;;;;;;;
FR;;;;;;;;;;
C;;;;;;;;;;
B)SPEAKER
LEVEL
-__________+
A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.
ENTER
PRESET/CH
A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.
ENTER
PRESET/CH
A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.
ENTER
PRESET/CH
A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.
ENTER
PRESET/CH
MENU
SET MENU
SRCH MODE
1 SOUND MENU
Note
.A)SPEAKERSET
B)SPEAKERLEVEL
C)SPDISTANCE
D)CENTER GEQ
[]/[]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
1 SOUND
MENU 1/2
p
p
.E)LFE LEVEL
F)DYNAMIC RANGE
G)AUDIO SET
[]/[]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
1 SOUND
MENU 2/2
p
p
SMALL>LARGE
FRONT SP
78 En
SET MENU
Center speaker CENTER SP
Choices: NONE, SML, LRG
• Select “NONE” (none) if you did not connect a center
speaker. The center channel signals are directed to the
front left and right speakers.
• Select “SML” (small) if you have a small center
speaker that does not reproduce low-frequency signals
effectively. The low-frequency signals of the center
channel are directed to the speakers selected in “LFE/
BASS OUT”.
• Select “LRG” (large) if you have a large center speaker
that reproduces low-frequency signals effectively. All
the center channel signals are directed to the center
speaker.
Surround left/right speakers SUR. L/R SP
Choices: NONE, SML, LRG
• Select “NONE” (none) if you did not connect surround
speakers. This unit is set to the Virtual CINEMA DSP
mode (see page 44) and “SUR. B SP” is automatically
set to “NONE”.
• Select “SML” (small) if you have small surround left
and right speakers that do not reproduce low-frequency
signals effectively. The low-frequency signals of the
surround left and right channels are directed to the
speakers selected in “LFE/BASS OUT”.
• Select “LRG” (large) if you have large surround left
and right speakers that reproduce low-frequency
signals effectively. All the surround channel signals are
directed to the surround left and right speakers.
Surround back speakers SUR. B SP
Choices: NONE, SML, LRG
• Select “NONE” (none) if you did not connect a
surround back speaker. The surround back channel
signals are directed to the surround left and right
speakers.
• Select “SML” (small) if you have a small surround
back speaker that does not reproduce low-frequency
signals effectively. The low-frequency signals of the
surround back channel are directed to the speakers
selected in “LFE/BASS OUT”.
• Select “LRG” (large) if you have a large surround back
speaker that reproduces low-frequency signals
effectively. All the surround back channel signals are
directed to the surround back speaker.
Bass out LFE/BASS OUT
Use this feature to select the speakers that output the LFE
(low-frequency effect) and the low-frequency signals.
Choices: SWFR, FRNT, BOTH
• Select “SWFR” (subwoofer) if you connected a
subwoofer. The LFE signals as well as the low-
frequency signals of other speakers set to “SML” (or
“SMALL”) are directed to the subwoofer.
• Select “FRNT” (front) if you did not connect a
subwoofer. The LFE signals, the low-frequency signals
of the front left and right channels, and the low-
frequency signals of other speakers set to “SML” (or
“SMALL”) are all directed to the front left and right
speakers regardless of the “FRONT SP” setting (see
page 77).
• Select “BOTH” (both) if you connected a subwoofer.
The low-frequency signals of any source are output
from the subwoofer. The LFE signals as well as the
low-frequency signals of other speakers set to “SML”
(or “SMALL”) are directed to the subwoofer. The low-
frequency signals of the front left and right channels
are directed to the front left and right speakers and the
subwoofer regardless of the “FRONT SP” setting (see
page 77).
NONE>SMLLRG
CENTER SP
NONE>SMLLRG
SUR. L/R SP
NONE>SML LRG
SUR. B SP
SWFRFRNT>BOTH
LFE/BASS OUT
79 En
SET MENU
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Crossover CROSSOVER
Use this feature to select a crossover frequency of all the
speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) or to “NONE” in
“SPEAKER SET” (see pages 77 and 78). All frequencies
below the selected frequency will be sent to the subwoofer
or to the speakers set to “LRG” (or “LARGE”) in
“SPEAKER SET” (see pages 77 and 78).
Choices: 40Hz, 60Hz, 80Hz, 90Hz, 100Hz, 110Hz,
120Hz, 160Hz, 200Hz
Subwoofer phase SUBWOOFER PHASE
Use this feature to switch the phase of your subwoofer if
bass sounds are lacking or unclear.
Choices: NORMAL, REVERSE
• Select “NORMAL” if you do not want to reverse the
phase of your subwoofer.
• Select “REVERSE” to reverse the phase of your
subwoofer.
■ Speaker level B)SPEAKER LEVEL
Use this feature to manually balance the speaker levels
between the front left or surround left speakers and each
speaker selected in “SPEAKER SET” (see page 77).
Control range: –10.0 to +10.0 dB
Control step: 1.0 dB
Initial setting: 0 dB
• Select “FL” to adjust the balance of the front left
speaker.
• Select “FR” to adjust the balance of the front right
speaker.
• Select “C” to adjust the balance of the center speaker.
• Select “SL” to adjust the balance of the surround left
speaker.
• Select “SR” to adjust the balance of the surround right
speaker.
• Select “SB” to adjust the balance of the surround back
speaker.
• Select “SWFR” to adjust the balance of the subwoofer.
“C”, “SL”, “SR”, “SB” and “SWFR” cannot be adjusted if
“CENTER SP” (see page 78), “SUR. L/R SP” (see page 78),
“SUR. B SP” (see page 78) and “LFE/BASS OUT” (see page 78)
are set to “NONE” respectively.
FREQ;;;80Hz
CROSSOVER
>NORMALREVERSE
02ASUBWOOFER PHASE
Note
.FL;;;;;;;;;;
FR;;;;;;;;;;
C;;;;;;;;;;
B)SPEAKER
LEVEL
-__________+
80 En
SET MENU
■ Speaker distance C)SP DISTANCE
Use this feature to manually adjust the distance of each
speaker and the delay applied to the respective channel.
Ideally, each speaker should be the same distance from the
main listening position. However, this is not possible in
most home situations. Thus, a certain amount of delay
must be applied to the sound from each speaker so that all
sounds will arrive at the listening position at the same
time.
Unit UNIT
Choices: meters (m), feet (ft)
Initial setting:
[U.S.A. and Canada models]: feet (ft)
[Other models]: meters (m)
• Select “meters” to adjust speaker distances in meters.
• Select “feet” to adjust speaker distances in feet.
Speaker distances
Control range: 0.30 to 24.00 m (1.0 to 80.0 ft)
Control step: 0.10 m (0.5 ft)
• Select “FRONT L” to adjust the distance of the front
left speaker.
Initial setting: 3.00 m (10.0 ft)
• Select “FRONT R” to adjust the distance of the front
right speaker.
Initial setting: 3.00 m (10.0 ft)
• Select “CENTER” to adjust the distance of the center
speaker.
Initial setting: 3.00 m (10.0 ft)
• Select “SUR. L” to adjust the distance of the surround
left speaker.
Initial setting: 3.00 m (10.0 ft)
• Select “SUR. R” to adjust the distance of the surround
right speaker.
Initial setting: 3.00 m (10.0 ft)
• Select “SUR. B” to adjust the distance of the surround
back speaker.
Initial setting: 2.10 m (7.0 ft)
• Select “SWFR” to adjust the distance of the subwoofer.
Initial setting: 3.00 m (10.0 ft)
“CENTER”, “SUR.L”, “SUR.R”, “SUR.B” and “SWFR” cannot
be adjusted if “CENTER SP” (see page 78), “SUR. L/R SP” (see
page 78), “SUR. B SP” (see page 78) and “LFE/BASS OUT” (see
page 78) are set to “NONE” respectively.
■ Center graphic equalizer D)CENTER GEQ
Use this feature to adjust the built-in 5-frequency band
(100Hz, 300Hz, 1kHz, 3kHz and 10kHz) graphic
equalizer for the center channel so that the tonal quality of
the center speaker matches that of the front speakers. You
can make adjustments while listening to the currently
selected source component or a test tone.
Control range: –6 to +6 dB
Control step: 0.5 dB
Initial setting: 0 dB
Test tone TEST
Choices: OFF, ON
• Select “OFF” to stop test tones and output the currently
selected source component.
• Select “ON” to output test tones from the front left and
center speakers, and adjust the tonal quality of the
center speaker.
y
Press u / d to select a frequency band and j / i to adjust the
selected frequency band.
■ Low-frequency effect level E)LFE LEVEL
Use this feature to adjust the output level of the LFE (low-
frequency effect) channel according to the capacity of
your subwoofer or headphones. The LFE channel carries
low-frequency special effects which are only added to
certain scenes. This setting is effective only when this unit
decodes Dolby Digital or DTS signals.
Control range: –20 to 0 dB
Control step: 1 dB
Speaker SPEAKER
Adjusts the speaker LFE level.
Headphone HEADPHONE
Adjusts the headphone LFE level.
Depending on the settings of “LFE/BASS OUT” (see page 78),
some signals may not be output at the SUBWOOFER OUTPUT
jack.
Note
. UNIT;;;;;;;;feet
FRONTL;;;10.0ft
FRONTR;;;10.0ft
CENTER;;;;10.0ft
[]/[]:Up/Down
[<]/[>]:Adjust
C)SP
DISTANCE
p
p
Note
.TEST>OFFON
100Hz ;;;;;; 0dB
300Hz ;;;;;; 0dB
1kHz ;;;;;; 0dB
3kHz ;;;;;; 0dB
10kHz ;;;;;; 0dB
[]/[]:Up/Down
[<]/[>]:Adjust
D)CENTER GEQ
-______+
p
p
.SPEAKER;;;;;;0dB
HEADPHONE;;;;0dB
[]/[]:Up/Down
[<]/[>]:Adjust
E)LFE
LEVEL
p
p
81 En
SET MENU
ADVANCED
OPERATION
■ Dynamic range F)DYNAMIC RANGE
Use this feature to select the amount of dynamic range
compression to be applied to your speakers or
headphones. This setting is effective only when this unit is
decoding Dolby Digital and DTS signals.
Speaker SP
Adjusts the speaker compression.
Headphone HP
Adjusts the headphone compression.
Choices: MIN, STD, MAX
• Select “MIN” (minimum) if you regularly listen at low
volume levels.
• Select “STD” (standard) for general use.
• Select “MAX” (maximum) to preserve the greatest
amount of dynamic range.
■ Audio settings G)AUDIO SET
Use this feature to adjust the overall audio settings of this
unit.
Muting type MUTING TYPE
Use this feature to adjust how much the mute function
reduces the output volume (see page 34).
Choices: FULL, –20dB
• Select “FULL” to completely mute all the audio
output.
• Select “–20dB” to reduce the current volume by 20 dB.
Audio delay AUDIO DELAY
Use this feature to delay the sound output and synchronize
it with the video image. This may be necessary when
using certain LCD monitors or projectors.
Control range: 0 to 160 ms
Control step: 1 ms
Tone bypass TONE BYPASS
Use this feature to select whether audio output bypasses
tone control circuitry when “TREBLE” and “BASS” are
set to 0 dB (see page 33).
Choices: AUTO, OFF
• Select “AUTO” if you want signals to bypass tone
control circuitry to provide the purest signal possible.
• Select “OFF” if you do not want signals to bypass tone
control circuitry.
.SP:MINSTD>MAX
HP:MINSTD>MAX
[]/[]:Up/Down
[<]/[>]:Select
F)DYNAMIC RANGE
p
p
.MUTING TYPE;FULL
AUDIO DELAY;;0ms
TONE BYPASS;AUTO
[]/[]:Up/Down
[<]/[>]:Select
G)AUDIO SET
p
p
82 En
SET MENU
Use this menu to reassign the input/output jacks, select the
input mode or rename the input source.
■ Input/output assignment
A)I/O ASSIGNMENT
Use this feature to assign the input/output jacks according
to the component to be used if the initial settings of this
unit do not correspond to your needs. Change the
following parameters to reassign the respective jacks and
effectively connect more components.
Once the input/output jacks are reassigned, you can select
the corresponding component by using the INPUT
selector on the front panel (or the input selector buttons on
the remote control).
For COMPONENT VIDEO jacks A, B and C
CMPNT-V INPUT [A]
CMPNT-V INPUT [B]
CMPNT-V INPUT [C]
Choices: [A] DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR
[B] DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR
[C] DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR
For OPTICAL OUTPUT jack 1 OPTICAL OUT (1)
Choices: CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX,
DVR
For OPTICAL INPUT jacks 2, 3 and 4
OPTICAL IN (2)
OPTICAL IN (3)
OPTICAL IN (4)
Choices: (2) CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX,
DVR
(3) CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX,
DVR
(4) CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX,
DVR
For COAXIAL INPUT jack 5 COAXIAL IN (5)
Choices: (5) CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX,
DVR
• You cannot select a specific item more than once for the same
type of jack.
• When you connect a component to both the DIGITAL INPUT
(COAXIAL) and DIGITAL INPUT (OPTICAL) jacks, priority
is given to the signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT
(COAXIAL) jack.
2 INPUT MENU
.A)I/OASSIGNMENT
B)INPUTMODE
C)INPUTRENAME
D)VOLUME TRIM
[]/[]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
2
INPUT
MENU
p
p
.[A];;;;;DVD
(DVD)
[B];;;;;DTV/CBL
(DTV/CBL)
[C];;;;; DVR
( DVR )
CMPNT-V
INPUT
.(1);;;;;MD/CD-R
(MD/CD-R )
OPTICAL
OUT
Notes
.(2);;;;;MD/CD-R
(MD/CD-R)
(3);;;;; DVD
(DVD )
(4);;;;;DTV/CBL
(DTV/CBL )
OPTICAL
IN
.(5);;;;; DVD
( DVD )
COAXIAL
IN
83 En
SET MENU
ADVANCED
OPERATION
■ Input mode B)INPUT MODE
Use this feature to set this unit to reset “INPUT MODE”
back to “AUTO” (see page 35) regardless of the previous
setting or to recall the last input mode (“AUTO”, “DTS”,
or “ANALOG”) used for that source whenever you turn on
this unit.
Choices: AUTO, LAST
• Select “AUTO” to reset “INPUT MODE” back to
“AUTO” (see page 35) regardless of the previous
setting whenever you turn on this unit. This unit
automatically selects input signals in the following
order:
(1) Digital signals
(2) Analog signals
• Select “LAST” to set this unit to automatically recall
the last input mode (“AUTO”, “DTS”, or “ANALOG”)
used for that source whenever you turn on this unit.
■ Input rename C)INPUT RENAME
Use this feature to change the name of the input source
that appears in the OSD and in the front panel display.
1 Press one of the input selector buttons on
the remote control to select the input source
you want to change the name of.
2 Press j / i on the remote control to place the
“_” (underscore) under the space or the
character you want to edit.
3 Press u / d to select the character you want
to use and then press j / i to move to the
next space.
• You can use up to 8 characters for each input.
•Press d to change the character in the following order, or
press u to go in the reverse order:
A to Z, a space, 0 to 9, a space, a to z, a space, symbols (#,
*, +, –, etc.)
4 Repeat steps 1 through 3 to rename each
input source.
5 Press ENTER on the remote control to exit
from “INPUT RENAME”.
>AUTOLAST
[<]/[>]:Select
[ENTER]:Return
B)INPUT
MODE
DVD-> DVD
[<]/[>]:Position
[]/[]:Chara.
C)INPUT
RENAME
p
p
CD
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
CD-R XM
DVD DTV
MD
DOCK USB
CBL
NET
TUNER
V-AUX DVR
Notes
A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.
ENTER
PRESET/CH
A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.
ENTER
PRESET/CH
A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.
ENTER
PRESET/CH
A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.
ENTER
PRESET/CH
84 En
SET MENU
■ Volume trim D)VOLUME TRIM
Use this feature to adjust the level of the signal input at
each jack. This is useful if you want to balance the level of
each input source to avoid sudden changes in volume
when switching between input sources.
Choices: CD, MD/CD-R, TUNER, DVD, DTV/CBL,
V-AUX, DOCK, DVR, PC/MCX, USB, NET
RADIO, MULTI CH IN
Control range: –6.0 to +6.0 dB
Control step: 1.0 dB
Initial setting: 0.0 dB
Use this menu to adjust the network and USB system
parameters.
■ Network settings A)NETWORK
Use this feature to view the network parameters (IP
address, etc.) or to change them manually.
The above display is an example.
DHCP DHCP
When this parameter is set to “ON”, network parameters
for “IP”, “SUBNET”, “GATEWAY”, “DNS (P)” and
“DNS (S)” obtained from a DHCP enabled router are
displayed. If DHCP server function is not available, set
this parameter to “OFF” to configure the network
parameters manually.
Choices: ON, OFF
IP address IP
Use this parameter to specify an IP address assigned to
this unit. This value must not duplicate the one used for
other devices in the target network.
Subnet mask SUBNET
Use this parameter to specify the subnet mask value
assigned to this unit.
y
For most of the cases, the subnet mask value can be set as
“255.255.255.0”.
Default gateway GATEWAY
Use this parameter to specify the IP address of the default
gateway.
DVD
DVD-> 0.0dB
[<]/[>]:Adjust
[RETURN]:Exit
D)VOLUME TRIM
3 NET/USB MENU
Note
.A)NETWORK
B)PLAY STYLE
C)INFORMATION
[]/[]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
3
NET/USB
MENU
p
p
. DHCP ON
IP 192.168.000.002
SUBNET 255.255.255.000
GATEWAY 192.168.000.001
DNS (P) 192.168.000.001
DNS (S) 000.000.000.000
SET >CANCEL
[]/[]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
A)NETWORK
p
p
85 En
SET MENU
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Primary DNS server DNS (P)
Secondary DNS server DNS (S)
Use this parameter to specify the IP address of the primary
and secondary DNS (Domain Name System) servers.
If you have only one DNS address, enter the DNS address in
“DNS (P)”. If you have two or more DNS addresses, enter one of
them in “DNS (P)” and another in “DNS (S)”.
1 Press u / d on the remote control repeatedly
and then press ENTER to select and enter
the desired network parameter.
When “DHCP” is set to “ON”, you cannot select and adjust
any other network settings. To specify the other parameters,
you need to first set “DHCP” to “OFF”.
2
To specify the parameter, press
u
/
d
repeatedly
to change the number and press
j
/
i
to select
the digit to change.
3 Press ENTER to confirm the parameter.
4 Repeat steps 1 through 3 to configure each
network parameter.
5 Select “SET” and then press ENTER to finish
configuration.
In case you have changed your network configuration, you may
need to reconfigure the network settings again.
y
You can reset the network settings of this unit to the initial factory
settings by using “N-RESET” in the advanced setup menu (see
page 91).
■ Playback styles B)PLAY STYLE
Use this feature to adjust the playback style according to
your preference. You can shuffle songs in a random order
or repeat one specific song or a sequence of songs.
Repeat REPEAT
Use this feature to set this unit to repeat one song or a
sequence of songs.
Choices: OFF, SINGLE, ALL
• Select “OFF” to deactivate this feature.
• Select “SINGLE” to set this unit to repeat one song.
• Select “ALL” to set this unit to repeat a sequence of
songs.
• When “REPEAT” is set to a setting other than “OFF”, the
highlighted letter “R” appears in the top right corner of the
playback status screen while one song or a sequence of songs
are being repeated.
• If “REPEAT” is set to “SINGLE”, the setting will be reset to
“OFF” when both the main zone and Zone 2 are turned off.
Shuffle SHUFFLE
Use this feature to set this unit to play songs or albums in a
random order.
Choices: OFF, ON
• Select “OFF” to deactivate this feature.
• Select “ON” to set this unit to play songs or albums in a
random order.
When “SHUFFLE” is set to “ON”, the highlighted letter “S”
appears in the top right corner of the playback status screen while
songs or albums are being shuffled.
Note
Note
Note
Notes
Note
.REPEAT;;;;;;;OFF
SHUFFLE;;;;;;OFF
[]/[]:Up/Down
[<]/[>]:Select
B)PLAY STYLE
p
p
86 En
SET MENU
■ Network information C)INFORMATION
Use this feature to display the network system
information.
The above display is an example.
MAC (Media Access Control) address
MAC ADDRESS
This information displays the MAC address that is
assigned to this unit.
Status STATUS
This information displays the current link status of the
network.
Display status: 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX,
FULL-DUPLEX, HALF-DUPLEX,
NO LINK
“NO LINK” appears when network connection is not made.
Use this menu to adjust the optional system parameters.
■ Display settings A)DISPLAY SET
Dimmer DIMMER
Use this feature to adjust the brightness of the front panel
display.
Control range: – 4 to 0
Control step: 1
•Press j to make the front panel display dimmer.
•Press i to make the front panel display brighter.
Video conversion VIDEO CONV.
Use this feature to set whether to convert the video signals
input at the VIDEO and S VIDEO jacks.
Choices: ON, OFF
• Select “ON” to convert composite and S-video signals
interchangeably and up-convert composite and S-video
signals to component video signals.
• Select “OFF” not to convert any signals.
• The converted video signals are only output at the MONITOR
OUT jacks. When recording a video source, you must make the
same type of video connections between each component.
• When composite video or S-video signals from a VCR are
converted to component video signals, the picture quality may
suffer depending on your VCR.
• You must set “VIDEO CONV.” to “ON” to display the OSD.
• Unconventional signals input at the composite video or S-video
jacks cannot be converted or may be output abnormally. In such
cases, set “VIDEO CONV.” to “OFF”.
Note
Note
MAC ADDRESS
XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX
STATUS
10BASE-T
FULL-DUPLEX
[ENTER]:Return
C)INFORMATION
4 OPTION MENU
Notes
.A)DISPLAYSET
B)MEMORYGUARD
C)PARAM.INI
D)MULTI ZONESET
[]/[]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
4
OPTION
MENU 1/2
p
p
.E)XM RADIO SET
[]/[]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
4
OPTION
MENU 2/2
p
p
.DIMMER;;;;;;;;;0
VIDEOCONV.;;;ON
OSD SHIFT;;;;;;0
GRAY BACK;;;AUTO
[]/[]:Up/Down
[<]/[>]:Select
A)DISPLAY
SET
p
p
.ON SCREEN;;;;10s
FL SCROLL;;;CONT
[]/[]:Up/Down
[<]/[>]:Select
A)DISPLAY
SET
p
p
87 En
SET MENU
ADVANCED
OPERATION
OSD shift OSD SHIFT
Use this feature to adjust the vertical position of the OSD.
Control range: –5 (upward) to +5 (downward)
Control step: 1
Initial setting: 0
•Press j to raise the position of the OSD.
•Press i to lower the position of the OSD.
Gray back GRAY BACK
Use this feature to display a gray background in the OSD
when there is no video signal being input.
Choices: AUTO, OFF
• Select “AUTO” to display a gray background in the
OSD when there is no video signal being input.
• Select “OFF” not to display any background in the
OSD.
• Depending on the video signals being input or the system
setting of your video monitor (NTSC or PAL), the OSD may be
displayed abnormally. In such cases, set “GRAY BACK” to
“OFF”.
• Even when “GRAY BACK” is set to “OFF”, the OSD may not
be displayed correctly depending on the conditions of the
picture.
On-screen display time ON SCREEN
Use this feature to set the amount of time to display the
XM Satellite Radio information, iPod menu or NET/USB
menu in the OSD after you perform a certain operation.
Choices: ON, 10s, 30s
• Select “ON” to display the OSD unceasingly during an
operation.
• Select “10s” to turn off the OSD 10 seconds after you
perform a certain operation.
• Select “30s” to turn off the OSD 30 seconds after you
perform a certain operation.
Front panel display scroll FL SCROLL
Use this feature to set whether to display the information
(such as song title or channel name) in the front panel
display in a continuous manner or by the first 14
alphanumeric characters after scrolling all characters once
when “XM”, “DOCK” or “NET/USB” is selected as the
input source.
Choices: CONT, ONCE
• Select “CONT” to display the operation status in the
front panel display in a continuous manner.
• Select “ONCE” to display the operation status in the
front panel display by the first 14 alphanumeric
characters after scrolling all characters once.
■ Memory guard B)MEMORY GUARD
Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to DSP
program parameter values and other system settings.
Choices: OFF, ON
• Select “OFF” to turn off the “MEMORY GUARD”
feature.
• Select “ON” to protect:
– DSP program parameters
– all “SET MENU” items
– all speaker levels
When “MEMORY GUARD” is set to “ON”, you cannot select
and adjust any other “SET MENU” items.
Notes
Note
>OFFON
[<]/[>]:Select
[ENTER]:Return
B)MEMORY
GUARD
88 En
SET MENU
■ Parameter initialization C)PARAM. INI
Use this feature to initialize the parameters of each sound
field program within a sound field program group. When
you initialize a sound field program group, all of the
parameter values within that group revert to their initial
factory settings.
Press the corresponding sound field program selector
buttons on the remote control to select the sound
field
program that you want to initialize.
An asterisk (*) appears to the left of the sound field
program names that have been changed from their initial
factory settings.
Choices: STEREO, MUSIC, ENTERTAINMENT,
MOVIE THEATER, STANDARD
• You cannot automatically revert to the previous parameter
settings once you initialize a sound field program group.
• You cannot separately initialize individual sound field
programs.
• You cannot initialize any sound field program groups when
“MEMORY GUARD” is set to “ON” (see page 87).
■ Zone set D)MULTI ZONE SET
Use this feature to specify the location of speakers
connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals of this unit.
Speaker B setting SP B
Use this feature to select the location of the front speakers
connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals.
Choices: FRONT, ZONE B
• Select “FRONT” to turn on or off SPEAKERS A and B
when the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B
terminals are set in the main zone.
• Select “ZONE B” if the speakers connected to the
SPEAKERS B terminals are set in another zone. If
SPEAKERS A is turned off and SPEAKERS B is
turned on, all the speakers including the subwoofer in
the main zone are muted and this unit outputs sound at
the SPEAKERS B terminals only.
• If you connect headphones to the PHONES jack of this unit, the
sound is output from both headphones and the SPEAKERS B
terminals when “SP B” is set to “ZONE B”.
• If a DSP program is selected when “SP B” is set to “ZONE B”,
this unit automatically enters the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode
(see page 44).
Notes
STEREO
*MUSIC
ENTERTAINMENT
MOVIE THEATER
*STANDARD
Press DSP key
C)PARAM.
INI
Notes
.SPB;;;;;;;FRONT
[<]/[>]:Select
[ENTER]:Return
D)MULTI ZONE
SET
89 En
SET MENU
ADVANCED
OPERATION
■ XM Radio setting E)XM RADIO SET
(U.S.A. and Canada models only)
Radio antenna XM ANTENNA
Use this feature to check the current reception level of XM
Passport System connected to the XM jack of this unit
(see page 54). For the best reception, orient XM Passport
System so that a value of 60% or more is displayed here.
Display status: NONE, 0 to 100%
•
“
NONE
” is displayed if XM Passport System is not connected to
this unit. In this case, check the antenna connections (see page 54).
• The “XM ANTENNA” parameter cannot be adjusted by using
the remote control. Instead, you need to adjust the orientation of
XM Passport System connected to the XM jack of this unit for a
better percentage of the reception level.
Notes
E)XM RADIO SET
.XM ANTENNA;;NONE
[ENTER]:Return
ADVANCED SETUP
90 En
This unit has additional menus that are displayed in the front panel display. The advanced setup menu offers additional
operations to adjust and customize the way this unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each
parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening environment.
• The settings you make are reflected next time you press MASTER ON/OFF inward to the ON position to turn on this unit (see
page 28).
• Only MASTER ON/OFF, STRAIGHT (EFFECT) and the PROGRAM selector are effective while you are using the advanced setup
menu.
• All the other operations cannot be made while you are using the advanced setup menu.
• The advanced setup menu is only available in the front panel display.
1 Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to
release it outward to the OFF position to turn
off this unit.
2 Press and hold STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the
front panel, and then press MASTER ON/OFF
inward to the ON position to turn on this unit.
This unit turns on, and the advanced setup menu
appears in the front panel display.
3 Rotate the PROGRAM selector on the front
panel to select the parameter you want to
adjust.
The name of the selected parameter appears in the
front panel display.
See page 91 for a complete list of available
parameters.
4 Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the front
panel repeatedly to change the selected
parameter setting.
5 Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to
release it outward to the OFF position to save
the new setting and turn off this unit.
y
The settings you made are reflected next time you turn on this
unit.
ADVANCED SETUP
Notes
ZONE 2
ON/OFF
ZONE
CONTROL
DISPLAYCATEGORY
NEXT
SEARCH MODE
EFFECT
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
FM/AM
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
l PRESET/TUNING/CH h
TUNING MODE
AUTO/MAN'L
INPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT
SPEAKERSPHONES
ON/OFF
MAIN ZONE
MASTER
SILENT CINEMA
BA
MULTI CH
INPUT
VOLUME
INPUT
ON OFF
VIDEO L AUDIO R
USBVIDEO AUX
1-2,5 2,4 3
LEVEL
(U.S.A. model)
MASTER
ON OFF
MASTER
ON OFF
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
While holding
down
PROGRAM
SP IMP.-8 MIN
Currently selected
parameter setting
Currently selected
parameter
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
MASTER
ON OFF
91 En
ADVANCED SETUP
ADVANCED
OPERATION
■ Speaker impedance SP IMP.
Use this feature to set the speaker impedance of this unit
so that it matches that of your speakers.
Choices: 8ΩMIN, 6ΩMIN
• Select “8ΩMIN” to set the speaker impedance to 8 Ω .
• Select “6ΩMIN” to set the speaker impedance to 6 Ω .
*
The Canada model cannot use two separate speaker systems
(A and B) simultaneously when “SP IMP.” is set to “8ΩMIN”.
■ Factory presets PRESET
Use this feature to reset all the parameters of this unit to
the initial factory settings (see page 108).
Choices: CANCEL, RESET
• Select “CANCEL” not to reset any parameters of this
unit.
• Select “RESET” to reset the parameters of this unit.
• This setting completely resets all the parameters of this unit
including the “SET MENU” parameters. However, the
advanced setup menu parameters will not be initialized.
• The initial factory settings are activated next time you turn on
this unit.
■ Network reset N-RESET
Use this feature to reset the network settings of this unit
(see page 84) to the initial factory settings.
Choices: CANCEL, RESET
• Select “CANCEL” not to reset any network settings of
this unit.
• Select “RESET” to reset the network settings of this
unit.
• The initial factory settings are activated next time you turn on
this unit.
• When the network settings are reset, “DHCP” in “NET/USB
MENU” is automatically set to “ON” (see page 84) and the
registered client ID of this unit on your YAMAHA MCX-2000
is cleared (see page 105).
■ Remote control AMP ID REMOTE AMP
Use this feature to set the AMP ID of this unit for remote
control recognition (see page 96).
Choices: ID1, ID2
• Select “ID1” when the remote control AMP ID library
code is set to “00001”.
• Select “ID2” when the remote control AMP ID library
code is set to “00002”.
You need to set the corresponding remote control AMP library
code for the remote control (see page 96).
SP IMP. Speaker Impedance level
8ΩMIN
Front
If you use one set (A or B),
the impedance of each
speaker must be 8 Ω or
higher.
If you use two sets (A and
B), the impedance of each
speaker must be 16 Ω or
higher.
*
Center
The impedance of each
speaker must be 8 Ω or
higher.
Surround
Surround back
6ΩMIN
Front
If you use one set (A or B),
the impedance of each
speaker must be 4 Ω or
higher.
If you use two sets (A and
B), the impedance of each
speaker must be 8 Ω or
higher.
Center
The impedance of each
speaker must be 6 Ω or
higher.
Surround
Surround back
Notes
Notes
Note
92 En
ADVANCED SETUP
■ Remote control TUNER ID REMOTE TUN
Use this feature to set the TUNER ID of this unit for
remote control recognition (see page 96).
Choices: ID1, ID2
• Select “ID1” when the remote control TUNER ID
library code is set to “81916”.
• Select “ID2” when the remote control TUNER ID
library code is set to “81917”.
You need to set the corresponding remote control TUNER library
code for the remote control (see page 96).
■ Remote control XM ID REMOTE XM
(U.S.A. and Canada models only)
Use this feature to set the XM ID of this unit for remote
control recognition (see page 97).
Choices: ID1, ID2
• Select “ID1” when the remote control XM ID library
code is set to “81918”.
• Select “ID2” when the remote control XM ID library
code is set to “81919”.
You need to set the corresponding remote control XM library
code for the remote control (see page 97).
■ Tuner frequency step TU
(General model only)
Use this feature to set the tuner frequency step according
to the frequency spacing in your area.
Choices: AM10/FM100, AM9/FM50
• Select “AM10/FM100” for North, Central and South
America.
• Select “AM9/FM50” for all other areas.
Note
Note
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
93 En
ADVANCED
OPERATION
In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can also operate other audiovisual components made by YAMAHA
and other manufacturers. To control your TV or other components, you must set the appropriate remote control code for
each input source (see page 95).
■ Controlling this unit
Set the component selector switch to AMP to control this
unit.
*1
These buttons always control this unit regardless of the
component selector switch position.
*2
These buttons control this unit only when the component
selector switch is set to AMP.
■ Controlling a TV
Set the component selector switch to TV to control your
TV. To control your TV, you must set the appropriate
remote control code for DTV/CBL or (see page 95).
When you set the remote control codes for both
DTV/CBL and , priority is given to the one set for
DTV/CBL.
*1
These buttons always control your TV regardless of the
component selector switch position.
*2
These buttons control your TV only when the component
selector switch is set to TV. For details, see the “Digital TV/
Cable TV” column on page 94.
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
Controlling this unit, a TV, or other components
Notes
TV MUTE TV INPUT
MUTE
AMP
SOURCE
TV
MENUTITLE
SET MENU
LEVEL
DISPLAYRETURN
BAND
SRCH MODE
ON SCREENXM MEMORY
A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.
ENTER
PRESET/CH
REC
AUDIO
USB
NET RADIO
PC/MCX
STEREO
1
EFFECT
VOLUME
TV VOL TV CH
TRANSMITCODE SET
STANDBY
POWER
POWERPOWER
CD
AVTV
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
CD-R XM
DVD DTV
MD
DOCK USB
CBL
NET
TUNER
V-AU X DV R
STANDARD
5
SPEAKERS
9
MUSIC
2
SELECT
6
ENHANCER
0
ENTERTAIN
3
EXTD SUR.
7
NIGHT
10
MOVIE
4
DIRECT ST.
8
STRAIGHT
ENT.
*1
*2
(U.S.A. model)
Notes
Remote control Digital TV/Cable TV
TV POWER Turns on or off the power.
TV VOL +/–
Increases or decreases the volume
level.
TV CH +/– Changes the channel number.
TV MUTE Mutes the audio output.
TV INPUT Changes the input source.
TV MUTE TV INPUT
MUTE
AMP
SOURCE
TV
MENUTITLE
SET MENU
LEVEL
DISPLAYRETURN
BAND
SRCH MODE
ON SCREENXM MEMORY
A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.
ENTER
PRESET/CH
REC
AUDIO
USB
NET RADIO
PC/MCX
STEREO
1
EFFECT
VOLUME
TV VOL TV CH
TRANSMITCODE SET
STANDBY
POWER
POWERPOWER
CD
AVTV
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
CD-R XM
DVD DTV
MD
DOCK USB
CBL
NET
TUNER
V-AU X DV R
STANDARD
5
SPEAKERS
9
MUSIC
2
SELECT
6
ENHANCER
0
ENTERTAIN
3
EXTD SUR.
7
NIGHT
10
MOVIE
4
DIRECT ST.
8
STRAIGHT
ENT.
*1
*2
(U.S.A. model)
94 En
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
■ Controlling other components
Set the component selector switch to SOURCE to control
other components selected with the input selector buttons
or . You must set the appropriate remote control code
for each input source (see page 95). The following table
shows the function of each control button used to control
other components assigned to each input selector button
and . Be advised that some buttons may not correctly
operate the selected component.
*1
This button is operational only when the original remote control supplied with the component has a POWER button.
*2
These buttons control your VCR or DVD recorder only when you set the appropriate remote control code for DVR (see page 95).
*3
When you use this button to record a source, press it twice repeatedly to prevent a malfunction.
*4
Press and hold to search backward or forward.
*5
Press and hold to store your favorite Internet radio stations with bookmarks (see page 106).
*6
These buttons are not operational when the Internet radio is selected as the sub input source of NET/USB.
TV MUTE TV INPUT
MUTE
AMP
SOURCE
TV
STEREO
1
VOLUME
TV VOL TV CH
TRANSMITCODE SET
STANDBY
POWER
POWERPOWER
CD
AVTV
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
CD-R XM
DVD DTV
MD
DOCK USB
CBL
NET
TUNER
V-A UX DV R
MUSIC
2
ENTERTAIN
3
MOVIE
4
UU
U
MENUTITLE
SET MENU
LEVEL
DISPLAYRETURN
BAND
SRCH MODE
ON SCREENXM MEMORY
A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.
ENTER
PRESET/CH
REC
AUDIO
USB
NET RADIO
PC/MCX
STEREO
1
EFFECT
STANDARD
5
SPEAKERS
9
MUSIC
2
SELECT
6
ENHANCER
0
ENTERTAIN
3
EXTD SUR.
7
NIGHT
10
MOVIE
4
DIRECT ST.
8
STRAIGHT
ENT.
2
3
4
7
9
5
6
8
1
(U.S.A. model)
Remote control
DVD player/
recorder
VCR
Digital TV/
Cable TV
LD/CD player
MD/CD
recorder
Tuner
iPod
®
PC/MCX-2000/
Internet radio/
USB
1 AV P OW E R
Power *1 Power *1 Power *2 Power *1 Power *1
2 1-9, 0, +10
Numeric
buttons
Numeric
buttons
Numeric
buttons
Numeric
buttons
Numeric
buttons
Preset stations
(1-8)
3 TITLE
Title Band Bookmark *5
4 PRESET/CH
u
Up VCR channel up Up
Preset up
(1-8)
Up Up
PRESET/CH
d
Down
VCR channel
down
Down
Preset down
(1-8)
Down Down
A-E/CAT. j Left Left
Preset down
(A-E)
Previous menu Previous menu
A-E/CAT. i Right Right
Preset up
(A-E)
Subsequent
menu
Subsequent
menu
ENTER Enter Enter
Subsequent
menu
Subsequent
menu
5 RETURN
Return Return
6 REC
Disc skip
(player)
Rec (recorder)
*3
Rec *3 Rec *2*3
Disc skip
(CD player) Rec *3 Select PC/MCX
p Play Play Play *2 Play Play Play Play
w
Search
backward
Search
backward
Search
backward *2
Search
backward
Search
backward
Search
backward *4
Select
NET RADIO
f
Search
forward
Search
forward
Search
forward *2
Search
forward
Search
forward
Search
forward *4
Select USB
AUDIO Audio Audio Audio *2
Sound
(LD player)
e Pause Pause Pause *2 Pause Pause Pause
b
Skip
backward
Skip
backward
Skip
backward *2
Skip
backward
Skip
backward
Skip
backward
Skip
backward *6
a
Skip
forward
Skip
forward
Skip
forward *2
Skip
forward
Skip
forward
Skip
forward
Skip
forward *6
s Stop Stop Stop *2 Stop Stop Stop Stop
7 ENT.
Title/Index Enter Enter
Chapter/Time
(LD player)
Index
(CD player)
Index
8 MENU
Menu Menu Previous menu Previous menu
9 DISPLAY
Display Display Display Display Display Display Display
Notes
95 En
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
ADVANCED
OPERATION
You can control your TV and other components by setting
the appropriate remote control code for each input source.
For a complete list of available remote control codes, refer
to “LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at the end of
this manual.
The following table shows the default component in the
“Library (component category)” column and the remote
control code for each input source.
Remote Control Code Default Settings
You may not be able to operate your YAMAHA component even
if a YAMAHA remote control code is initially set as listed above.
In this case, try setting other YAMAHA remote control codes.
1 Press one of the input selector buttons or
to select the component you want to set
up.
2 Press CODE SET using a ballpoint pen or a
similar object.
The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control
flashes twice.
3 Press the numeric buttons (0 to 9) to enter
the five-digit remote control code for the
component to be used.
The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control
flashes twice, and the remote control code for the
selected component is set.
y
To clear the remote control code previously set for the selected
component, enter the code number “9980”.
• If the manufacturer of your component has more than one code,
try each of them until you find the correct one.
• If you do not press any buttons within 30 seconds in step 3, the
setup process is canceled. If this happens, repeat the setup
procedure.
Setting the remote control code
Input
source
Library
(component
category)
Manufacturer
Default
code
CD CD YAMAHA 61907
MD/CD-R
MD YAMAHA 70888
XM TUNER YAMAHA 81918
DVD DVD YAMAHA 40539
DTV/
CBL
–––
TUNER TUNER YAMAHA 81916
V-AUX/
DOCK
OTHER AUDIO
ACCESSORIES
(iPod)
YAMAHA 81981
DVR DVR YAMAHA 51544
NET/
USB
OTHER AUDIO
ACCESSORIES
(NET/USB)
YAMAHA 81982
–––
Note
Notes
CD
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
CD-R XM
DVD DTV
MD
DOCK USB
CBL
NET
TUNER
V-AUX DVR
TRANSMIT
CODE SET
Flashes
STEREO
1
EFFECT
STANDARD
5
SPEAKERS
9
MUSIC
2
SELECT
6
ENHANCER
0
ENTERTAIN
3
EXTD SUR.
7
NIGHT
10
MOVIE
4
DIRECT ST.
8
STRAIGHT
ENT.
TRANSMIT
Flashes
96 En
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
You can operate multiple YAMAHA receivers or
amplifiers in the same room with the supplied remote
control simultaneously. Set the appropriate library code to
select and operate the desired component with the
supplied remote control.
■ Setting remote control AMP ID library
codes
Select one of the following codes to set the remote control
AMP ID library code for the component you want to use.
1 Press CODE SET using a ballpoint pen or a
similar object.
The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control
flashes twice.
2 Press the numeric buttons to enter the code
number “00001” or “00002”.
The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control
flashes twice, and the AMP ID library code is
changed.
*1
The remote control setting
*2
The setting of this unit (see page 91)
• You need to set the corresponding remote control AMP ID
of this unit in the advanced setup (see page 91).
• When using multiple YAMAHA receivers/amplifiers, you
may be able to operate the other components
simultaneously with the default code setting. In this case,
set one of the alternative codes to operate this unit
separately.
■ Setting remote control TUNER ID library
codes
Select one of the following codes to set the remote control
TUNER ID library code for the component you want to
use.
1 Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input
source.
2 Press CODE SET using a ballpoint pen or a
similar object.
The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control
flashes twice.
3 Press the numeric buttons to enter the code
number “81916” or “81917”.
The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control
flashes twice, and the TUNER ID library code is
changed.
*1
The remote control setting
*2
The setting of this unit (see page 92)
• You need to set the corresponding remote control TUNER
ID of this unit in the advanced setup (see page 92).
• When using multiple YAMAHA receivers/amplifiers, you
may be able to operate the other components
simultaneously with the default code setting. In this case,
set one of the alternative codes to operate this unit
separately.
Setting library codes
AMP ID
library code
*1
Function
Remote
control AMP
ID *2
00001
(initial setting)
To operate this unit using
the default code.
ID1
(initial setting)
00002
To operate this unit using
an alternative code.
ID2
Notes
TRANSMIT
CODE SET
Flashes
STEREO
1
EFFECT
STANDARD
5
SPEAKERS
9
MUSIC
2
SELECT
6
ENHANCER
0
ENTERTAIN
3
EXTD SUR.
7
NIGHT
10
MOVIE
4
DIRECT ST.
8
STRAIGHT
ENT.
TRANSMIT
Flashes
TUNER ID
library code
*1
Function
Remote
control
TUNER ID *2
81916
(initial setting)
To operate this unit using
the default code.
ID1
(initial setting)
81917
To operate this unit using
an alternative code.
ID2
Notes
TUNER
TRANSMIT
CODE SET
Flashes
STEREO
1
EFFECT
STANDARD
5
SPEAKERS
9
MUSIC
2
SELECT
6
ENHANCER
0
ENTERTAIN
3
EXTD SUR.
7
NIGHT
10
MOVIE
4
DIRECT ST.
8
STRAIGHT
ENT.
TRANSMIT
Flashes
97 En
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
ADVANCED
OPERATION
■ Setting remote control XM ID library
codes (U.S.A. and Canada models only)
Select one of the following codes to set the remote control
XM ID library code for the component you want to use.
1 Press XM to select “XM” as the input source.
2 Press CODE SET using a ballpoint pen or a
similar object.
The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control
flashes twice.
3 Press the numeric buttons to enter the code
number “81918” or “81919”.
The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control
flashes twice, and the XM ID library code is changed.
*1
The remote control setting
*2
The setting of this unit (see page 92)
• You need to set the corresponding remote control XM ID
of this unit in the advanced setup (see page 92).
• When using multiple YAMAHA receivers/amplifiers, you
may be able to operate the other components
simultaneously with the default code setting. In this case,
set one of the alternative codes to operate this unit
separately.
Use this feature to clear all the remote control codes
previously set and reset all of them to the initial factory
settings.
1 Press CODE SET using a ballpoint pen or a
similar object.
The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control
flashes twice.
2 Press the numeric buttons to enter the code
number “9981”.
The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control
flashes twice, and all the remote control codes
previously set are cleared and reset to the initial
factory settings.
y
If you do not press any buttons within 30 seconds after step
2, the clearing process is canceled. In this case, repeat the
clearing procedure.
XM ID
library code
*1
Function
Remote
control XM
ID *2
81918
(initial setting)
To operate this unit using
the default code.
ID1
(initial setting)
81919
To operate this unit using
an alternative code.
ID2
Notes
XM
TRANSMIT
CODE SET
Flashes
STEREO
1
EFFECT
STANDARD
5
SPEAKERS
9
MUSIC
2
SELECT
6
ENHANCER
0
ENTERTAIN
3
EXTD SUR.
7
NIGHT
10
MOVIE
4
DIRECT ST.
8
STRAIGHT
ENT.
TRANSMIT
Flashes
Resetting all remote control codes
TRANSMIT
CODE SET
Flashes
STEREO
1
EFFECT
STANDARD
5
SPEAKERS
9
MUSIC
2
SELECT
6
ENHANCER
0
ENTERTAIN
3
EXTD SUR.
7
NIGHT
10
MOVIE
4
DIRECT ST.
8
STRAIGHT
ENT.
TRANSMIT
Flashes
USING MULTI-ZONE CONFIGURATION
98 En
This unit allows you to configure a multi-zone audio system. The Zone 2 feature allows you to set this unit to reproduce
separate input sources in the main zone and the second zone (Zone 2). You can control this unit from the second zone
using the supplied remote control.
You need the following additional equipment to use the multi-zone functions of this unit:
• An infrared signal receiver in the second zone.
• An infrared signal emitter in the main zone. This emitter transmits the infrared signals from the remote control via the
infrared signal receiver in the second zone to a CD player or a DVD player, etc. in the main zone.
• An amplifier and speakers in the second zone.
y
• Since there are many possible ways to connect and use this unit in a multi-zone configuration, we recommend that you consult with
your nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center about the Zone 2 connections that best meet your requirements.
• Some YAMAHA models are able to connect directly to the REMOTE jacks of this unit. If you own these products, you may not need
to use an infrared signal emitter. Up to 6 YAMAHA components can be connected as shown below.
■ Multi-zone configuration and Zone 2 connections
• When you do not use the main zone, press MAIN ZONE ON/OFF on the front panel to turn off the main zone.
• To avoid unexpected noise, DO NOT USE the Zone 2 feature with CDs encoded in DTS.
USING MULTI-ZONE CONFIGURATION
Only analog signals are sent to the second zone. Any source you want to listen to in the second zone must be
connected to the analog AUDIO IN jacks of this unit.
Connecting Zone 2
Notes
REMOTE OUTREMOTE OUTREMOTE OUT REMOTE OUT
REMOTE INREMOTE INREMOTE IN
REMOTE IN
This unit
YAMAHA
component
YAMAHA
component
Infrared signal
receiver
REMOTE OUT
AUDIO IN
VIDEO IN
MONITOR OUT
SP OUT
REMOTE IN
ZONE 2 OUTPUT
MAIN ZONE
ZONE 2
Infrared signal emitter
DVD player
Amplifier
Remote control
Infrared signal receiver
Second zoneMain zone
This unit
99 En
USING MULTI-ZONE CONFIGURATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
You can select and control Zone 2 by using the control
buttons on the front panel or on the remote control. The
available operations are listed as follows:
• Selecting the input source of Zone 2
• Tuning into FM or AM when “TUNER” is selected as
the input source of Zone 2 (see page 46)
• Tuning into XM Satellite Radio when “XM” is selected
as the input source of Zone 2 (see page 53)
(U.S.A. and Canada models only)
• Enjoying music stored on your iPod stationed in a
YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold
separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this
unit when “V-AUX” is selected as the input source
(see page 101)
y
The volume level and tonal quality of Zone 2 cannot be adjusted.
Adjust the volume control on the amplifier in Zone 2.
• You must complete each step while the ZONE2 indicator is
flashing in the front panel display. Otherwise, the Zone 2 mode
is automatically canceled and this unit returns to the normal
operation mode. In this case, repeat the Zone 2 selection
procedure.
• The Zone 2 control function is operational only when MASTER
ON/OFF on the front panel is pressed inward to the ON
position.
■ Controlling Zone 2 with the front panel
1 Press ZONE 2 ON/OFF to turn on Zone 2.
y
ZONE 2 ON/OFF is operational only when MASTER
ON/OFF on the front panel is pressed inward to the ON
position.
2 Press ZONE CONTROL to control Zone 2.
The ZONE2 indicator flashes in the front panel
display for approximately 5 seconds.
3 Rotate the INPUT selector to select the
desired input source while the ZONE2
indicator is flashing in the front panel
display.
4 Press ZONE 2 ON/OFF to set Zone 2 to the
standby mode.
Controlling Zone 2
Notes
ZONE 2
ON/OFF
ZONE
CONTROL
ZONE2
Flashes
INPUT
ZONE 2
ON/OFF
100 En
USING MULTI-ZONE CONFIGURATION
■ Setting the remote control to the Zone 2
mode
The remote control is originally set to the main mode to control
the main zone. To control Zone 2 with the remote control, you
must first set the remote control to the Zone 2 mode.
1 Press CODE SET using a ballpoint pen or a
similar object.
The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control
flashes twice.
2 Press the numeric buttons to enter the code
number “9992”.
■ Controlling Zone 2 with the remote
control
• The remote control is originally set to the main mode to control
the main zone, and the TRANSMIT indicator on the remote
control is turned off when the remote control is set to the main
mode.
• When the remote control is set to the Zone 2 mode, POWER,
STANDBY, MUTE, and the input selector buttons are set to
control Zone 2. However, the rest of the remote control buttons
remain in the main mode.
• The remote control automatically exits from the Zone 2 mode in
the following cases:
– when you do not make any operations within 10 seconds after
the remote control is set to the Zone 2 mode.
– when you press a remote control button other than POWER,
STANDBY, MUTE, and the input selector buttons.
1 Press and hold POWER or STANDBY and
then press to set the remote control to
the Zone 2 mode.
• Press POWER when the main zone is turned on.
• Press STANDBY when the main zone is turned off.
The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control
lights up while the remote control is set to the Zone 2
mode.
2 Press POWER to turn on Zone 2.
3 Press one of the input selector buttons to
select the desired input source of Zone 2.
y
To mute the audio output of Zone 2, press MUTE on the
remote control. Press MUTE again to resume the audio
output of Zone 2.
4 Press STANDBY to set Zone 2 to the standby
mode.
Note
Notes
TRANSMIT
CODE SET
Flashes
STEREO
1
EFFECT
STANDARD
5
SPEAKERS
9
MUSIC
2
SELECT
6
ENHANCER
0
ENTERTAIN
3
EXTD SUR.
7
NIGHT
10
MOVIE
4
DIRECT ST.
8
STRAIGHT
ENT.
TRANSMIT
Flashes
TRANSMIT
POWER
Lights up
While holding
down
STANDBY
or
POWER
CD
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
CD-R XM
DVD DTV
MD
DOCK USB
CBL
NET
TUNER
V-AUX DVR
MUTE
STANDBY
USING IPOD®
101 En
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Once you have stationed your iPod in a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) connected to
the DOCK terminal of this unit (see page 22), you can enjoy playback of your iPod using the supplied remote control.
You can also use the Compressed Music Enhancer mode of this unit to improve the sound quality of the compression
artifacts (such as the MP3 format) stored on your iPod (see page 37).
• Only iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini are supported.
• Some features may not be compatible depending on the model or the software version of your iPod.
y
• For a complete list of the remote control functions used to control your iPod, see the “iPod” column in “Controlling other
components” on page 94.
• For a complete list of status messages that appear in the front panel display and in the OSD, see the “iPod” section in
“TROUBLESHOOTING” on page 113.
You can control your iPod when “V-AUX” is selected as
the input source. The operations of your iPod can be done
with the aid of the OSD of this unit (menu browse mode)
or without it (simple remote mode).
■ Controlling iPod in the simple remote
mode
You can perform the basic operations of your iPod (play,
stop, skip, etc.) using the supplied remote control without
the aid of the OSD of this unit.
y
• You can view the photos or video clips stored on your iPod.
• Operations can be also done with the controls on your iPod.
■ Controlling iPod in the menu browse
mode
You can perform the advanced operations of your iPod
using the supplied remote control with the aid of the OSD
of this unit. The name of the song being played appears in
the front panel display according to the “FL SCROLL”
parameter in “OPTION MENU” (see page 87). You can
also browse the songs stored on your iPod in the OSD.
Further, you can change or adjust settings for your iPod to
suit your personal preferences.
• Operations cannot be done with the controls on your iPod.
• The YAMAHA logo appears in the display window of your
iPod.
• There are some characters that cannot be displayed in the front
panel display or in the OSD of this unit. Those characters are
replaced with underscores “_”.
• The “Setup” parameters can be changed or adjusted only in the
OSD. Press ENTER on the remote control to toggle between the
“Setup” parameter settings.
• You cannot browse the photos or video clips stored on your
iPod in the OSD. Instead, you must use the controls on your
iPod to select the desired photos or video clips.
USING iPod
®
Notes
Controlling iPod
Notes
102 En
USING iPod®
1 Press DISPLAY on the remote control.
The following display appears in the OSD.
2 Press u / d / j / i on the remote control to
navigate the iPod menu and then press
ENTER to begin playback of the selected
song.
Choices: Playlists (playlists), Artists (artists),
Albums (albums), Songs (songs),
Genres (genres), Composers (composers)
• Playlists > Songs
• Artists > Albums > Songs
• Albums > Songs
• Songs
• Genres > Artists > Albums > Songs
• Composers > Albums > Songs
• Setup > Shuffle, Repeat
Shuffle Shuffle
Use this feature to set this unit to play songs or albums in a
random order.
Choices: Off, Songs, Albums
• Select “Off ” to deactivate this feature.
• Select “Songs” to set this unit to play songs in a
random order.
• Select “Albums” to set this unit to play albums in a
random order.
When “Shuffle” is set to a setting other than “Off ”, the
highlighted letter “S” appears in the top right corner while songs
or albums are being shuffled.
Repeat Repeat
Use this feature to set this unit to repeat one song or a
sequence of songs.
Choices: Off, One, All
• Select “Off ” to deactivate this feature.
• Select “One” to set this unit to repeat one song.
• Select “All” to set this unit to repeat a sequence of
songs.
When “Repeat” is set to a setting other than “Off ”, the
highlighted letter “R” appears in the top right corner while one
song or a sequence of songs are being repeated.
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
Playlists
Artists
Albums
Songs
Genres
Composers
Setup
iPod Top
DISPLAY
ON SCREEN
A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.
ENTER
PRESET/CH
A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT.
ENTER
PRESET/CH
Note
Note
USING NETWORK/USB FEATURES
103 En
ADVANCED
OPERATION
This unit is equipped with network and USB features that allow you to enjoy WAV (PCM format only), MP3 and WMA
files saved on your PC, YAMAHA MCX-2000, USB memory device and USB portable audio player or access the
Internet radio.
• YAMAHA MCX-2000 may not be for sale in some locations.
• For further details about networking, refer to the operation manuals supplied with your network devices. Also refer to technical
reference books, if needed.
• Some WAV, MP3 and WMA files may not be playable or may be noisy when played.
y
• For a complete list of the remote control functions used to control the network and USB features, see the “PC/MCX-2000/Internet
radio/USB” column in “Controlling other components” on page 94.
• For a complete list of status messages that appear in the front panel display and in the OSD, see the “Network and USB” section in
“TROUBLESHOOTING” on page 114.
The following diagram shows the construction of the network and USB menu.
*
Only the available PC servers and MCX-2000 are displayed.
USING NETWORK/USB FEATURES
Notes
Navigating the network and USB menus
Note
NET/USB
PC/MusicCAST
(MCX-2000)
Artists
Albums
Songs
Genres
Popular Stations
New Stations
USB
Recall Play
(MCX-2000
only)
Server* Playlists
Internet Radio
Files/Directories
Help
Locations
Podcasts
Bookmarks
Genres
Selects a song by playlist.
Makes this unit recall play from MCX-2000 or another client. For details,
refer to the instruction manual of MCX-2000.
Selects a song by genre. In addition, you can select an album within the
genre (MCX-2000 only).
Selects a song by album.
Selects a song by artist. In addition, you can select an album within the
artist (MCX-2000 only).
Selects an Internet radio station that has been added to the “Bookmarks” list (see page 106).
Selects an Internet radio station or a Podcast service by location.
Broadcasts voice-assisted guidelines on various topics of the related Internet service.
Selects a file by navigating directories.
Selects an Internet radio station or a Podcast service by genre.
Selects an Internet radio station from the ones that have recently started the service.
Selects an Internet radio station from the list of popular stations.
Selects a Podcast service by location or genre.
Selects a song directly.
104 En
USING NETWORK/USB FEATURES
The following procedure shows the basic steps to navigate
the network and USB menus. See pages 105 and 106 for
details about each sub input source.
“Please wait” may appear whenever it takes time for
communication. This is not a system malfunction. Wait for a
while.
1 Set the component selector switch to
SOURCE and then press NET/USB on the
remote control to select “NET/USB” as the
input source.
The cursor on the left of the NET/USB indicator
lights up in the front panel display, and the contents
previously played for the corresponding sub input
source of NET/USB is automatically played.
2 Press MENU on the remote control to display
the top NET/USB menu.
The following display appears in the OSD.
If any other display appears in the OSD, press MENU
on the remote control repeatedly until the top
NET/USB menu appears.
3 Press u / d to select the desired sub input
source and then press i or ENTER.
y
You can also select the desired sub input source by pressing
the corresponding button on the remote control (see page 7).
4 Press u / d / j / i on the remote control to
select the desired song or Internet radio
station.
•Press u / d to select the desired menu.
•Press i to enter the selected menu.
•Press j to return to the previous menu level.
y
•“i” in the right corner of each menu line indicates that
there is a submenu available in the next menu level.
• You can press ENTER or MENU to enter the selected
menu or to return to the previous menu level.
5 Press ENTER to play the selected song or to
listen to the selected station.
Note
USB
NET
DVR DVD CD
XM
V-AUX DTV/CBL
MD/CD-R
TUNER
p
NET
USB
VOLUME
A
SP
dB
LR
PC/MCX
AMP
SOURCE
TV
Lights up
>
>
>
PC/MusicCAST
Internet Radio
USB
1/3
NET/USB Top
MENU
SET MENU
SRCH MODE
105 En
USING NETWORK/USB FEATURES
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Use this feature to enjoy music files saved on your PC or
YAMAHA MCX-2000. MCX-2000 is a music server that
enhances the concept of YAMAHA exclusive
MusicCAST, a digital music delivery method over a
personal network.
1 Install Windows Media Connect 2.0 on your
PC, or register this unit on your YAMAHA
MCX-2000.
• Refer to “Installing Windows Media Connect 2.0
on your PC” and “Registering this unit on the
YAMAHA MCX-2000” on page 106.
• This procedure is needed only the first time.
2 Turn on your PC or MCX-2000.
The PC server or MCX-2000 is added to the server
list on the submenu of PC/MusicCAST.
3 Select a desired PC server or MCX-2000 to
begin playback.
• YAMAHA MCX-2000 may not be for sale in some locations.
• You can connect this unit to up to 4 PC servers and 1
MCX-2000, and each server must be connected to the same
subnet as this unit.
• Some WAV, MP3 and WMA files on your PC may not be
playable or may be noisy when played.
• (MCX-2000 only) Files marked with an asterisk (*) have not
been converted to MP3 format. You cannot play back such files
immediately unless you set the “Receive PCM Stream” setting
of this unit to “ON” on MCX-2000. For details, refer to the
instruction manual of MCX-2000.
y
• While a song is being played, the time elapsed is displayed at
the bottom of the OSD.
• You can use b / a to skip backward/forward and h / s
to start/stop playback independently from the menu in the OSD.
• You can set the settings for repeat and shuffle mode by using the
“PLAY STYLE” parameters in “NET/USB MENU” (see
page 85).
• You can set whether to display the operation status in the front
panel display in a continuous manner or by the first 14
characters after scrolling all characters once by using “FL
SCROLL” in “OPTION MENU” (see page 87).
■ Installing Windows Media Connect 2.0
on your PC
With Windows Media Connect 2.0, you can play back the
audio files on your PC. For details refer to the documents
of Windows Media Connect 2.0.
1 Install Windows Media Connect 2.0 on your
PC.
You can download the installer of Windows Media
Connect 2.0 from the Microsoft website.
2 Turn on your PC and then share a folder on
the PC.
The Shared folder is added to the server list on the
submenu of PC/MusicCAST.
• Some security software installed on your PC (anti-virus
software, firewall software, etc.) may block the access of this
unit to your PC. In such cases, configure the security software
appropriately.
• If you are using a PC with Windows XP Professional, and the
PC is logging on to a domain, you may not be able to connect
the PC server. In such cases, log on to the local machine instead
of the domain.
Using a PC server or YAMAHA
MCX-2000
Notes
Notes
106 En
USING NETWORK/USB FEATURES
■ Registering this unit on the YAMAHA
MCX-2000
You must register this unit on your YAMAHA MCX-2000
so that this unit can be recognized by your YAMAHA
MCX-2000. For details, refer to the operation manual
supplied with your YAMAHA MCX-2000.
1 Turn off this unit.
2 Set your YAMAHA MCX-2000 to the “Auto
Config” mode.
3 Turn on this unit.
• MCX-2000 is added to the server list on the
submenu of PC/MCX.
• The client ID of this unit appears in the OSD of
your YAMAHA MCX-2000 (shown as CL-
XXXXX), and this completes the automatic
configuration procedure.
• The latter part of the client ID of this unit is same as the last 5
digits of the MAC address of this unit. For details about MAC
address, see page 86.
• To clear the registered client ID of this unit, use the “Manual
Config” mode of your YAMAHA MCX-2000 (refer to the
instruction manual of MCX-2000) and then set “N-RESET” in
the advanced setup menu of this unit to “RESET” (see page 91).
• The client control functions of MCX-2000 over this unit other
than “View Play Info”, “Receive PCM Stream” and “Edit Client
title” are not available. Avoid using these functions as it will
stop the playback on this unit.
Use this feature to listen to Internet radio stations. This
unit uses the vTuner Internet radio station database service
particularly customized for this unit, providing over 2000
radio station database. Further, you can store your favorite
stations with bookmarks.
• This service may be discontinued without notice.
• Some Internet radio stations may not be played even if they are
selected in the NET RADIO menu.
• To listen to the Internet radio, connect this unit to your network
(see page 23).
• A narrowband Internet connection (i.e. 56K modem, ISDN) will
not provide satisfactory results, and a broadband connection is
strongly recommended (i.e. a cable modem, an xDSL modem,
etc.). For detailed information, consult with your ISP.
y
• You can use h / s to start/stop playback independently from
the menu in the OSD.
• “Podcast” is a type of the Internet radio service, and there are a
number of Podcast services available on the Internet. The
Podcast is not a continuous service. That is, this unit stops
playback when an episode of the Podcast ends.
• Some security devices (such as firewall) may block the access
of this unit to Internet radio stations. In such cases, configure
the security settings appropriately.
■ Storing your favorite Internet radio
stations with bookmarks
Use this feature to select your favorite Internet radio
stations quickly.
Press and hold TITLE on the remote control while
the selected Internet radio station service is
being broadcast.
The stored Internet radio station is added to the
“Bookmarks” list (see page 103).
y
To remove the stored station from the list, select the item in the
first level of “Bookmarks” list and then press and hold TITLE on
the remote control.
Notes
Using the Internet radio
Notes
107 En
USING NETWORK/USB FEATURES
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Use this feature to enjoy WAV (PCM format only), MP3
and WMA files saved on your USB memory device or
USB portable audio player connected to the USB port on
the front panel of this unit.
• This unit supports USB mass storage class devices using FAT
16 or FAT 32.
• Only the first partition is displayed in the OSD. You cannot
select files in other partitions.
• Up to 8 levels of directory hierarchy and 500 music files per
directory are recognized.
• Some devices may not work properly even if they meet the
requirements.
• Some WAV, MP3 and WMA files may not be playable or may
be noisy when played.
• When you connect your USB memory device or USB portable
audio player, there may be an about 10 seconds delay.
y
• While a song is being played, the time elapsed is displayed at
the bottom of the OSD.
• You can use b / a to skip backward/forward and h / s
to start/stop playback independently from the menu in the OSD.
• You can set the settings for repeat and shuffle mode by using the
“PLAY STYLE” parameters in “NET/USB MENU” (see
page 85).
• You can set whether to display the operation status in the front
panel display in a continuous manner or by the first 14
characters after scrolling all characters once by using “FL
SCROLL” in “OPTION MENU” (see page 87).
Using a USB memory device or a
USB portable audio player
Notes
RESETTING THE SYSTEM
108 En
Use this feature to reset all the parameters of this unit to the initial factory settings.
• This procedure completely resets all the parameters of this unit including the “SET MENU” parameters. However, the advanced setup
menu parameters will not be initialized.
• The initial factory settings are activated next time you turn on this unit.
y
To cancel the initialization procedure at any time without making any changes, press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to release it
outward to the OFF position.
1 Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to
release it outward to the OFF position to turn
off this unit.
2 Press and hold STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the
front panel and then press MASTER ON/OFF
inward to the ON position to turn on this unit.
This unit turns on, and the advanced setup menu
appears in the front panel display.
3 Rotate the PROGRAM selector on the front
panel to select “PRESET”.
4 Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the front
panel repeatedly to select “RESET”.
y
Select “CANCEL” to cancel the initialization procedure
without making any changes.
5 Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to
release it outward to the OFF position to
confirm your selection and turn off this unit.
RESETTING THE SYSTEM
Notes
ZONE 2
ON/OFF
ZONE
CONTROL
DISPLAYCATEGORY
NEXT
SEARCH MODE
EFFECT
MEMORY
MAN'L/AUTO FM
FM/AM
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
l PRESET/TUNING/CH h
TUNING MODE
AUTO/MAN'L
INPUT MODETONE CONTROLSTRAIGHT
SPEAKERSPHONES
ON/OFF
MAIN ZONE
MASTER
SILENT CINEMA
BA
MULTI CH
INPUT
VOLUME
INPUT
ON OFF
VIDEO L AUDIO R
USBVIDEO AUX
3
1-2,5 2,4
LEVEL
(U.S.A. model)
MASTER
ON OFF
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
MASTER
ON OFF
While holding
down
PROGRAM
PRESET-CANCEL
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
PRESET-RESET
MASTER
ON OFF
TROUBLESHOOTING
109 En
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
Refer to the table below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below
or if the instruction below does not help, turn off this unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized
YAMAHA dealer or service center.
■ General
TROUBLESHOOTING
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
This unit fails to turn
on or enters the
standby mode soon
after the power is
turned on.
The power cable is not connected or the
plug is not completely inserted.
Connect the power cable firmly.
—
The speaker impedance setting is
incorrect.
Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers.
27
The protection circuitry has been
activated.
Make sure that all speaker wire connections on this
unit and on all speakers are secure and that the wire
for each connection does not touch anything other
than its respective connection.
13
This unit has been exposed to a strong
external electric shock (such as lightning
or strong static electricity).
Set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the
power cable, plug it back in after 30 seconds and then
use it normally.
—
No sound Incorrect input or output cable
connections.
Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,
the cables may be defective.
18-24
“INPUT MODE” is set to “DTS” or
“ANALOG”.
Set “INPUT MODE” to “AUTO”.
35
No appropriate input source has been
selected.
Select an appropriate input source with the INPUT
selector on the front panel (or the input selector
buttons on the remote control) and MULTI CH
INPUT on the front panel (or MULTI CH IN on the
remote control).
32, 38
Speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections.
13
The front speakers to be used have not
been selected properly.
Select the set of front speakers with SPEAKERS A or
B on the front panel or SPEAKERS on the remote
control.
32
The volume is turned down. Turn up the volume.
—
The sound is muted. Press MUTE or VOLUME +/– on the remote control
to resume audio output and then adjust the volume.
34
“INPUT MODE” is set to “ANALOG”
while playing a source encoded in DTS.
Set “INPUT MODE” to “AUTO” or “DTS”.
35
Signals this unit cannot reproduce are
being input from a source component,
such as a CD-ROM.
Play a source whose signals can be reproduced by this
unit.
—
No picture The output and input for the picture are
connected to different types of video
jacks.
Set “VIDEO CONV.” to “ON”.
86
110 En
TROUBLESHOOTING
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
The sound suddenly
goes off.
The protection circuitry has been activated
because of a short circuit, etc.
Check that the speaker impedance setting is correct.
27, 91
Check that the speaker wires are not touching each
other and then turn this unit back on.
—
The sleep timer has turned off this unit. Turn on this unit, and play the source again.
—
The sound is muted. Press MUTE or VOLUME +/– on the remote control
to resume audio output.
34
Sound is heard from
the speaker on one
side only.
Incorrect cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,
the cables may be defective.
13
Incorrect settings in “SPEAKER
LEVEL”.
Adjust the “SPEAKER LEVEL” settings.
79
Only the center
speaker outputs
substantial sound.
When playing a monaural source with a
CINEMA DSP program, the source signal
is directed to the center channel, and the
front and surround speakers output effect
sounds.
No sound is heard
from the center
speaker.
“CENTER SP” in “SET MENU” is set to
“NONE”.
Set “CENTER SP” to “SML” or “LRG”.
78
One of the HiFi DSP programs (except for
“6ch Stereo”) has been selected.
Try another sound field program.
65
No sound is heard
from the surround
speakers.
“SUR. L/R SP” in “SET MENU” is set to
“NONE”.
Set “SUR. L/R SP” to “SML” or “LRG”.
78
This unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode
and a monaural source is being played
back.
Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the front panel so
that “STRAIGHT” disappears from the front panel
display.
39
No sound is heard
from the surround
back speaker.
“SUR. L/R SP” in “SET MENU” is set to
“NONE” and “SUR. B SP” is
automatically set to “NONE”.
Set “SUR. L/R SP” and “SUR. B SP” to “SML” or
“LRG”.
78
“SUR. B SP” in “SET MENU” is set to
“NONE”.
Set “SUR. B SP” to “SML” or “LRG”.
78
No sound is heard
from the subwoofer.
“LFE/BASS OUT” in “SET MENU” is
set to “FRNT” when a Dolby Digital or
DTS signal is being played.
Set “LFE/BASS OUT” to “SWFR” or “BOTH”.
78
“LFE/BASS OUT” in “SET MENU” is
set to “SWFR” or “FRNT” when a 2-
channel source is being played.
Set “LFE/BASS OUT” to “BOTH”.
78
The source does not contain low-
frequency signals.
111 En
TROUBLESHOOTING
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
Dolby Digital or DTS
sources cannot be
played. (Dolby Digital
or DTS indicator in
the front panel
display does not light
up.)
The connected component is not set to
output Dolby Digital or DTS digital
signals.
Make an appropriate setting following the operating
instructions for your component.
—
“INPUT MODE” is set to “ANALOG”. Set “INPUT MODE” to “AUTO” or “DTS”.
35
A humming sound is
heard.
Incorrect cable connections. Connect the audio cables firmly. If the problem
persists, the cables may be defective.
—
The volume level
cannot be increased,
or the sound is
distorted.
The component connected to the AUDIO
OUT (REC) jacks of this unit is turned
off.
Turn on the power of the component.
—
The sound effect
cannot be recorded.
It is not possible to record the sound effect
with a recording component.
A source cannot be
recorded by a digital
recording component
connected to the
DIGITAL OUTPUT
jack.
The source component is not connected to
the DIGITAL INPUT jacks of this unit.
Connect the source component to the DIGITAL
INPUT jacks.
19, 21
Some components cannot record the
Dolby Digital or DTS sources.
A source cannot be
recorded by an
analog component
connected to the
AUDIO OUT (REC)
jacks.
The source component is not connected to
the analog AUDIO IN jacks of this unit.
Connect the source component to the analog AUDIO
IN jacks.
21
The sound field
parameters and some
other settings of this
unit cannot be
changed.
“MEMORY GUARD” in “SET MENU”
is set to “ON”.
Set “MEMORY GUARD” to “OFF”.
87
This unit does not
operate properly.
The internal microcomputer has been
frozen by an external electric shock (such
as lightning or excessive static electricity)
or by a power supply with low voltage.
Disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet
and then plug it in again after about 30 seconds.
—
“CHECK SP WIRES”
appears in the front
panel display.
Speaker cables are short-circuited. Make sure all speaker cables are connected correctly.
13
There is noise
interference from
digital or radio
frequency equipment.
This unit is too close to the digital or high-
frequency equipment.
Move this unit further away from such equipment.
—
The picture is
disturbed.
The video source uses scrambled or
encoded signals to prevent dubbing.
This unit suddenly
enters the standby
mode.
The internal temperature becomes too
high and the overheat protection circuitry
has been activated.
Wait about 1 hour for this unit to cool down and then
turn it back on.
—
112 En
TROUBLESHOOTING
■ Tuner
■ XM Satellite Radio (U.S.A. and Canada models only)
If an operation takes longer than usual or an error occurs, one of the following messages may appear in the front panel
display. In this case, read the cause and follow the corresponding remedies.
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
FM
FM stereo reception is
noisy.
The characteristics of FM stereo
broadcasts may cause this problem
when the transmitter is too far away or
the antenna input is poor.
Check the antenna connections.
25
Try using a high-quality directional FM
antenna.
—
Use the manual tuning method.
47
There is distortion, and
clear reception cannot
be obtained even with a
good FM antenna.
There is multi-path interference. Adjust the antenna position to eliminate
multi-path interference.
—
The desired station
cannot be tuned into
with the automatic
tuning method.
The signal is too weak. Use a high-quality directional FM antenna.
—
Use the manual tuning method.
47
Previously preset
stations can no longer
be tuned into.
This unit has been disconnected for a
long period.
Set preset stations.
48, 49
AM
The desired station
cannot be tuned into
with the automatic
tuning method.
The signal is weak or the antenna
connections are loose.
Tighten the AM loop antenna connections
and orient it for the best reception.
—
Use the manual tuning method.
47
There are continuous
crackling and hissing
noises.
Noises result from lightning,
fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats
and other electrical equipment.
Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire.
This will help somewhat, but it is difficult to
eliminate all noise.
—
There are buzzing and
whining noises.
A TV set is being used nearby. Move this unit away from the TV set.
—
Status message Cause Remedy
See
page
CHECK ANTENNA
XM Passport and XM Passport Home
Dock are not connected to the XM jack of
this unit or does not work properly.
Check XM Passport and XM Passport Home Dock
connections and orient them for the best reception
level.
54
UPDATING
The XM user encryption code is being
updated.
Wait until the encryption code is updated.
—
NO SIGNAL
The signal is too weak. Adjust the orientation of the XM Passport System for
the best reception level.
54
LOADING
It takes longer than four seconds for audio
or text data to be decoded.
Wait until the decoding process has finished.
—
OFF AIR
The XM Satellite Radio channel you
selected is not currently broadcasting any
signals.
Check the channel number again or select another
XM Satellite Radio channel.
—
<XM> - - -
The Channel Station ID (SID) is no longer
available.
- - - / - - -
No artist name or song title is available.
<CAT> - - -
No channels are available for the selected
category.
Select another channel category by pressing
CATEGORY on the front panel (or A-E/CAT. j / i on
the remote control) repeatedly.
59
113 En
TROUBLESHOOTING
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
■ Remote control
■ iPod
In case of a transmission error without a status message appearing in the front panel and in the OSD, check the connection to your iPod
(see page 22).
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
The remote control
does not work nor
function properly.
Wrong distance or angle. The remote control functions within a maximum
range of 6 m (20 ft) and no more than 30 degrees off-
axis from the front panel.
8
Direct sunlight or lighting (from an
inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is
striking the remote control sensor of this
unit.
Reposition this unit.
—
The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries.
3
The remote control code is not correctly
set.
Set the remote control code correctly using “LIST OF
REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at the end of this
manual.
95
Try setting another code for the same manufacturer
using “LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at
the end of this manual.
95
The library code of the remote control and
the remote control ID of this unit do not
match.
Match the remote control ID of this unit with the
corresponding remote control library code.
91, 96
Even if the remote control code is
correctly set, there are some models that
do not respond to the remote control.
Note
Status message Cause Remedy
See
page
Loading...
This unit is in the middle of recognizing
the connection with your iPod.
This unit is in the middle of acquiring
song lists from your iPod.
Connect error
There is a problem with the signal path
from your iPod to this unit.
Turn off this unit and reconnect the YAMAHA iPod
universal dock to the DOCK terminal of this unit.
22
Try resetting your iPod.
—
Unknown type
The iPod being used is not supported by
this unit.
Only iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod
mini are supported.
—
iPod connected
Your iPod is properly stationed in a
YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as
YDS-10 sold separately) connected to the
DOCK terminal of this unit, and the
connection between your iPod and this
unit is complete.
Disconnected
Your iPod was removed from a YAMAHA
iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold
separately) connected to the DOCK
terminal of this unit.
Station your iPod back in a YAMAHA iPod universal
dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) connected to
the DOCK terminal of this unit.
22
Unable to play
This unit cannot play back the songs
currently stored on your iPod.
Check that the songs currently stored on your iPod
are playable.
—
Store some other playable music files on your iPod.
—
114 En
TROUBLESHOOTING
■ Network and USB
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
The PC server/MCX-2000/
Internet radio does not
function properly.
The IP address is not set properly. Set the DHCP server function of the router to ON.
Alternately, perform manual configuration
according to the current operating environment.
84
The network cable is not connected. Connect it properly.
23
The music in the PC
server cannot be played
back.
The PC does not have Windows Media
Connect 2.0 installed in it.
Install Windows Media Connect 2.0 in the PC.
—
The music is recorded in a format that
cannot be played on this unit. This unit
cannot play music formats other than
WMA, MP3 and WAV (PCM format).
Also note that it cannot play certain
music files even if these are recorded in
the WMA, MP3 or WAV format.
Play music recorded in a format that this unit is
compatible with.
—
The music is copyright-protected. This unit cannot play copyright-protected music.
—
Windows Media Connect
2.0 cannot be connected.
The Windows XP PC is logging on to a
domain.
Log on to the local machine instead of the
domain.
—
The MusicCAST server
cannot be connected.
You are attempting to connect to
MCX-1000. The MusicCAST server that
can be connected by this unit is
MCX-2000.
Use MCX-2000 or the PC server.
—
Auto Configuration is not executed. Execute “Auto Configure”.
105
The Internet radio cannot
be played.
The firewall of the network device is
activated. The Internet radio can be
played only when it passes through the
port designated by each radio station.
The port number is variable depending
on radio station.
Check the firewall setting of the network device.
—
Connection to the Internet is
disconnected.
Check the configuration of the network device,
and then contact the network connection provider.
—
The music files and
directories in the USB
device cannot be viewed.
The music files and directories are placed
in locations other than the FAT area.
Place music files and directories in the FAT area.
—
You are attempting to browse directory
hierarchies of over 8 levels or a directory
with more than 500 files.
Modify the data structure on your USB device.
—
The USB device cannot
be recognized.
The connected USB device is other than
a USB mass storage class USB memory
device or USB portable audio player.
This unit can recognize only a USB mass storage
class USB memory device or USB portable audio
player. Also note that it cannot recognize certain
USB devices even when they are devices as
described above.
107
Some devices may become easier to recognize
when they are inserted before turning this unit on.
28
“Disconnected” is
displayed even when a
USB device is present.
This unit recognized the USB device as
an illegal device.
Turn this unit off then on again.
28
115 En
TROUBLESHOOTING
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
Status message Cause Remedy
See
page
Please wait
This unit is in the middle of recognizing
the connection with your network.
This is not a system malfunction. Wait for a
while.
—
This unit is in the middle of recognizing
the connection with your USB memory
device or USB portable audio player.
This is not a system malfunction. Wait for a
while.
—
Please wait
(Starting Server)
This unit is in the middle of waking up
MCX-2000 that has been set to the
standby mode.
Wait for approximately 20 seconds.
—
Connect error
There is a problem with the signal path
from your network to this unit.
Check the connection between this unit and the
LAN port on your router or hub.
23
Make sure your router is properly connected and
turned on. Also, make sure your modem is
properly connected and turned on when you are
attempting to listen to Internet radio.
23
Disconnected
Your USB memory device or USB
portable audio player has been
disconnected from the USB port of this
unit.
Check the connection between this unit and your
USB memory device or USB portable audio
player.
—
The PC server or MCX-2000 server
previously connected to this unit no
longer exists.
Connect this unit to the available PC server or
MCX-2000.
105
There is a problem with the signal path
from your USB memory device or USB
portable audio player to this unit.
Turn off this unit and reconnect your USB
memory device or USB portable audio player to
the USB port of this unit.
28
Try resetting your USB memory device or USB
portable audio player.
—
Access error
This unit cannot access your USB
memory device or USB portable audio
player.
Try another USB memory device or USB portable
audio player.
—
There is a problem with the signal path
from your USB memory device or USB
portable audio player to this unit.
Turn off this unit and reconnect your USB
memory device or USB portable audio player to
the USB port of this unit.
28
Try resetting your USB memory device or USB
portable audio player.
—
Unable to play
This unit cannot play back the songs
currently stored on your PC.
Make sure Windows Media Connect 2.0 is
installed on your PC.
—
Check that the songs currently stored on your PC
are playable (MP3, WMA, and WAV).
—
Store some other playable music files (MP3,
WMA, and WAV) on your PC.
—
The network may be overloaded with
heavy traffic, and playback is interrupted.
Try preparing a network exclusively for use with
this unit to separate it from general network
traffic.
—
List updated
The list of the contents stored on your PC
server or MCX-2000 has been updated.
Bookmark ON
The desired Internet radio station has
been added to the “Bookmarks” list.
Bookmark OFF
The stored Internet radio station has been
removed from the “Bookmarks” list.
GLOSSARY
116 En
■ Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives
you completely independent multi-channel audio. With 3
front channels (front L/R and center), and 2 surround
stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides 5 full-range audio
channels. With an additional channel especially for bass
effects, called LFE (Low Frequency Effect), the system
has a total of 5.1-channels (LFE is counted as 0.1
channel). By using 2-channel stereo for the surround
speakers, more accurate moving sound effects and
surround sound environment are possible than with Dolby
Surround. The wide dynamic range from maximum to
minimum volume reproduced by the 5 full-range channels
and the precise sound orientation generated using digital
sound processing provide listeners with unprecedented
excitement and realism. With this unit, any sound
environment from monaural up to a 5.1-channel
configuration can be freely selected for your enjoyment.
■ Dolby Digital EX
Dolby Digital EX creates 6 full-bandwidth output
channels from 5.1-channel sources. This is done using a
matrix decoder that derives 3 surround channels from the
2 in the original recording. For the best results, Dolby
Digital EX should be used with movie sound tracks
recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX. With this
additional channel, you can experience more dynamic and
realistic moving sound especially with scenes with “fly-
over” and “fly-around” effects.
■ Dolby Pro Logic II
Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to
decode vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround sources.
This new technology enables a discrete 5-channel
playback with 2 front left and right channels, 1 center
channel, and 2 surround left and right channels instead of
only 1 surround channel for conventional Pro Logic
technology. There are three modes available: “Music
mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie
sources and “Game mode” for game sources.
■ Dolby Pro Logic IIx
Dolby Pro Logic IIx is a new technology enabling discrete
multi-channel playback from 2-channel or multi-channel
sources. There are three modes available: “Music mode”
for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources (for
2-channel sources only) and “Game mode” for game
sources.
■ Dolby Surround
Dolby Surround uses a 4-channel analog recording system
to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front
left and right channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog
(monaural), and a surround channel for special sound
effects (monaural). The surround channel reproduces
sound within a narrow frequency range. Dolby Surround is
widely used with nearly all video tapes and laser discs,
and in many TV and cable broadcasts as well. The Dolby
Pro Logic decoder built into this unit employs a digital
signal processing system that automatically stabilizes the
volume on each channel to enhance moving sound effects
and directionality.
■ DTS 96/24
DTS 96/24 offers an unprecedented level of audio quality
for multi-channel sound on DVD video, and is fully
backward-compatible with all DTS decoders. “96” refers
to a 96 kHz sampling rate compared to the typical 48 kHz
sampling rate. “24” refers to 24-bit word length. DTS 96/
24 offers sound quality transparent to the original 96/24
master, and 96/24 5.1-channel sound with full-quality full-
motion video for music programs and motion picture
soundtracks on DVD video.
■ DTS (Digital Theater Systems)
Digital Surround
DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog
soundtracks of movies with a 6.1-channel digital sound
track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie
theaters around the world. Digital Theater Systems Inc.
has developed a home theater system so that you can enjoy
the depth of sound and natural spatial representation of
DTS digital surround in your home. This system produces
practically distortion-free 6.1-channel sound (technically,
front left and right, center, surround left and right, and
LFE 0.1 (subwoofer) channels for a total of 5.1 channels).
This unit incorporates a DTS-ES decoder that enables 6.1-
channel reproduction by adding the surround back channel
to the existing 5.1-channel format.
■ ITU-R
ITU-R is the radio communication sector of the ITU
(International Telecommunication Union). ITU-R
recommends a standard speaker placement which is used
in many critical listening rooms, especially for mastering
purposes.
GLOSSARY
Audio information
117 En
GLOSSARY
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
■ LFE 0.1 channel
This channel reproduces low-frequency signals. The
frequency range of this channel is from 20 Hz to 120 Hz.
This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a
low-frequency range compared to the full-range
reproduced by the other 5/6 channels in Dolby Digital or
DTS 5.1/6.1-channel systems.
■ MP3
One of the audio compression methods used by MPEG. It
employs the irreversible compression method, which
achieves a high compression rate by thinning out the data
of hardly audible part to the human ears. It is said to be
capable of compressing the data quantity by about 1/11
(128 kbps) while maintaining a similar audio quality to
music CD.
■ Neo:6
Neo:6 decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6-
channel playback by the specific decoder. It enables
playback with the full-range channels with higher
separation just like digital discrete signal playback. There
are two modes available: “Music mode” for music sources
and “Cinema mode” for movie sources.
■ Neural Surround
Neural Surround
™
represents the latest advancement in
surround technology and has been adopted by XM
Satellite Radio for digital radio broadcast of surround
recordings and live events in surround sound. Neural
Surround
™
employs psychoacoustic frequency domain
processing which allows delivery of a more detailed sound
stage with superior channel separation and localization of
audio elements. System playback is scalable from 5.1 to
7.1 multi-channel surround playback.
■ PCM (Linear PCM)
Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog
audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without
using any compression. This is used as a method of
recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a
technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per
very small unit of time. Standing for “Pulse Code
Modulation”, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and
then modulated for recording.
■ Sampling frequency and number of
quantized bits
When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of
times the signal is sampled per second is called the
sampling frequency, while the degree of fineness when
converting the sound level into a numeric value is called
the number of quantized bits. The range of rates that can
be played back is determined based on the sampling rate,
while the dynamic range representing the sound level
difference is determined by the number of quantized bits.
In principle, the higher the sampling frequency, the wider
the range of frequencies that can be played back, and the
higher the number of quantized bits, the more finely the
sound level can be reproduced.
■ WAV
Windows standard audio file format, which defines the
method of recording the digital data obtained by
converting audio signals. It does not specify the
compression (coding) method so a desired compression
method can be used with it. By default, it is compatible
with the PCM method (no compression) and some
compression methods including the ADPCM method.
■ WMA
An audio compression method developed by Microsoft
Corporation. It employs the irreversible compression
method, which achieves a high compression rate by
thinning out the data of hardly audible part to the human
ears. It is said to be capable of compressing the data
quantity by about 1/22 (64 kbps) while maintaining a
similar audio quality to music CD.
118 En
GLOSSARY
■ Component video signal
With the component video signal system, the video signal
is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the PB
and P
R signals for the chrominance. Color can be
reproduced more faithfully with this system because each
of these signals is independent. The component signal is
also called the “color difference signal” because the
luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal. A
monitor with component input jacks is required in order to
output component signals.
■ Composite video signal
With the composite video signal system, the video signal
is composed of three basic elements of a video picture:
color, brightness and synchronization data. A composite
video jack on a video component transmits these three
elements combined.
■ S-video signal
With the S-video signal system, the video signal normally
transmitted using a pin cable is separated and transmitted
as the Y signal for the luminance and the C signal for the
chrominance through the S-video cable. Using the
S VIDEO jack eliminates video signal transmission loss
and allows recording and playback of even more beautiful
images.
■ CINEMA DSP
Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were
originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect
is best felt in a theater having many speakers designed for
acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as room
size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can
differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are differences in
the sound heard. Based on a wealth of actually measured
data, YAMAHA CINEMA DSP uses YAMAHA original
sound field technology to combine Dolby Pro Logic,
Dolby Digital and DTS systems to provide the audiovisual
experience of movie theater in the listening room of your
own home.
■ SILENT CINEMA
YAMAHA has developed a natural, realistic sound effect
DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for
headphones have been set for each sound field so that
accurate representations of all the sound field programs
can be enjoyed on headphones.
■ Virtual CINEMA DSP
YAMAHA has developed a Virtual CINEMA DSP
algorithm that allows you to enjoy DSP sound field
surround effects even without any surround speakers by
using virtual surround speakers. It is even possible to
enjoy Virtual CINEMA DSP using a minimal two-speaker
system that does not include a center speaker.
Video information Sound field program information
SPECIFICATIONS
119 En
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
AUDIO SECTION
• Minimum RMS Output Power for Front, Center, Surround,
Surround back
20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 Ω ....................................... 95 W
• Maximum Useful Output Power (JEITA)
[China, Korea and General models]
1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 Ω..........................................................135 W
• Dynamic Power (IHF)
8/6/4/2 Ω ........................................................ 130/165/195/240 W
• Maximum Output Power [Europe model]
1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 Ω.........................................................145 W
• IEC Output Power [Europe model]
1 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 Ω.......................................................105 W
• Damping Factor
20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω................................................... 120 or more
• Maximum Input Voltage
CD, etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) .................................. 2.2 V or more
• Frequency Response
CD, etc. .................................................. 10 Hz to 100 kHz, –3 dB
V-AUX ..................................................... 10 Hz to 20 kHz, –3 dB
• Total Harmonic Distortion
CD, etc. to Front L/R (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 50 W, 8 Ω)
............................................................................... 0.06% or less
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)
CD, etc. (250 mV) to Front L/R .......................... 100 dB or more
• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)
Front L/R ............................................................... 150 µV or less
• Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz)
CD (5.1 kΩ terminated) to Front L/R .......... 60 dB/45 dB or more
• Tone Control (Front L/R)
BASS Boost/Cut ..................................................... ±10 dB/60 Hz
TREBLE Boost/Cut .............................................. ±10 dB/20 kHz
• Phones Output .......................................................... 150 mV/100 Ω
• Input Sensitivity/Input Impedance
CD, etc. ................................................................. 200 mV/47 kΩ
MULTI CH INPUT ............................................... 200 mV/47 kΩ
• Rated Output Voltage/Output Impedance
OUT (REC)........................................................... 200 mV/1.2 kΩ
SUBWOOFER ............................................................. 4 V/1.2 kΩ
ZONE 2 OUT ...................................................... 200 mV/1.2 kΩ
• Volume Control........................... Mute/–80 dB to +16 dB/1 dB step
VIDEO SECTION
• Video Format (Gray Back)
[U.S.A., Canada, Korea and General models] ..................... NTSC
[Other models] ........................................................................ PAL
• Video Format (Video Conversion) ................................. NTSC/PAL
• Rated Input Voltage
Composite .................................................................. 1 Vp-p/75 Ω
S-video (Y) ................................................................ 1 Vp-p/75 Ω
S-video (C) .......................................................... 0.286 Vp-p/75 Ω
Component (Y) .......................................................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω
Component (PB, PR) ................................................. 0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω
• Signal to Noise Ratio ................................................ 50 dB or more
• Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT)
Component ............................................... 5 Hz to 60 MHz, –3 dB
FM SECTION
• Tuning Range
[U.S.A. and Canada models] .......................... 87.5 to 107.9 MHz
[General model] ........................ 87.5/87.50 to 108.0/108.00 MHz
[Other models] ............................................ 87.50 to 108.00 MHz
• Usable Sensitivity (IHF) ....................................... 1.0 µV (11.2 dBf)
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)
Mono/Stereo ............................................................. 76 dB/70 dB
• Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz)
Mono/Stereo ................................................................ 0.2%/0.3%
• Stereo Separation (1 kHz) ....................................................... 42 dB
• Frequency Response .......................... 20 Hz to 15 kHz, +0.5, –2 dB
AM SECTION
• Tuning Range
[U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................. 530 to 1710 kHz
[General model] ................................. 530/531 to 1710/1611 kHz
[Other models] ................................................... 531 to 1611 kHz
• Usable Sensitivity ............................................................. 300 µV/m
GENERAL
• Power Supply
[U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................. AC 120 V, 60 Hz
[Australia model] ............................................... AC 240 V, 50 Hz
[China model] ..................................................... AC 220 V, 50 Hz
[Korea model] .................................................... AC 220 V, 60 Hz
[Europe model] ................................................... AC 230 V, 50 Hz
[General model] .............. AC 110/120/220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz
• Power Consumption
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ................................. 350 W/440 VA
[Other models] ................................................................... 360 W
• Standby Power Consumption ...................................... 0.1 W or less
•AC Outlets
[Australia model] ......................................... 1 (100 W maximum)
[U.S.A., Canada and China models] ... 2 (Total 100 W maximum)
[Europe and General models] ............... 2 (Total 50 W maximum)
• Dimensions (W x H x D) ................................. 435 x 171 x 393 mm
(17.1 x 6.7 x 15.5 in)
• Weight .................................................................. 11.7 kg (25.8 lbs)
We Want You Listening For A Lifetime
YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries
Association’s Consumer Electronics Group want you
to get the most out of your equipment by playing it at
a safe level. One that lets the sound come through
loud and clear without annoying blaring or distortion
– and, most importantly, without affecting your
sensitive hearing. Since hearing damage from loud sounds is often
undetectable until it is too late, YAMAHA and the Electronic
Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group recommend
you to avoid prolonged exposure from excessive volume levels.
GPL/LGPL
This product includes software code subject to the GNU General
Public License (GPL) or the GNU Lesser General Public License
(LGPL). The copy, distribution, or change of this software code is
licensed under the terms of the GPL or the LGPL. The source
code is available at the following website:
http://www.global.yamaha.com/download/
The source code is also available on a physical media (such as a
CD-ROM) at actual cost.
Contact: AV products division, YAMAHA CORPORATION,
10-1 Nakazawa-cho, Hamamatsu 430-8650, Japan
In principle, the source code is offered for 3 years from the day of
purchase.
SPECIFICATIONS
APPENDIX-i
■ GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 2, June 1991
Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 59 Temple Place, Suite 330,
Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim
copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
Preamble
The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and
change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your
freedom to share and change free software–to make sure the software is free for all its
users. This General Public License applies to most of the Free Software Foundation’s
software and to any other program whose authors commit to using it. (Some other Free
Software Foundation software is covered by the GNU Library General Public License
instead.) You can apply it to your programs, too.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General
Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute
copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish), that you receive source
code or can get it if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in
new free programs; and that you know you can do these things.
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you
these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights. These restrictions translate to certain
responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it.
For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you
must give the recipients all the rights that you have. You must make sure that they, too,
receive or can get the source code. And you must show them these terms so they know
their rights.
We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and (2) offer you this
license which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the software.
Also, for each author’s protection and ours, we want to make certain that everyone
understands that there is no warranty for this free software. If the software is modified
by someone else and passed on, we want its recipients to know that what they have is
not the original, so that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the
original authors’ reputations.
Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. We wish to avoid
the danger that redistributors of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses,
in effect making the program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any
patent must be licensed for everyone’s free use or not licensed at all.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow.
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND
MODIFICATION
0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed
by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed under the terms of this
General Public License. The “Program”, below, refers to any such program or
work, and a “work based on the Program” means either the Program or any
derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Program
or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into
another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the
term “modification”.) Each licensee is addressed as “you”.
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this
License; they are outside its scope. The act of running the Program is not restricted, and
the output from the Program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on
the Program (independent of having been made by running the Program). Whether that
is true depends on what the Program does.
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program’s source code as you
receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately
publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty;
keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any
warranty; and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License
along with the Program.
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your
option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it, thus
forming a work based on the Program, and copy and distribute such modifications
or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of
these conditions:
a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you
changed the files and the date of any change.
b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in whole or in
part contains or is derived from the Program or any part thereof, to be
licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this
License.
c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run,
you must cause it, when started running for such interactive use in the most
ordinary way, to print or display an announcement including an appropriate
copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that
you provide a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under
these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this License.
(Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but does not normally print
such an announcement, your work based on the Program is not required to
print an announcement.)
These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections
of that work are not derived from the Program, and can be reasonably considered
independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do
not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when
you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the
Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License,
whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each
and every part regardless of who wrote it.
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work
written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the
distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Program.
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with the
Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of a storage or distribution
medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License.
3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, under Section 2)
in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above
provided that you also do one of the following:
a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source
code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on
a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,
b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give any
third party, for a charge no more than your cost of physically performing
source distribution, a complete machine-readable copy of the corresponding
source code, to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a
medium customarily used for software interchange; or,
c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute
corresponding source code. (This alternative is allowed only for
noncommercial distribution and only if you received the program in object
code or executable form with such an offer, in accord with Subsection b
above.)
The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making
modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source code means all the source
code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the
scripts used to control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a
special exception, the source code distributed need not include anything that is normally
distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler,
kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that
component itself accompanies the executable.
If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a
designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same
place counts as distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not
compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program except as
expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify,
sublicense or distribute the Program is void, and will automatically terminate
your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or
rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long
as such parties remain in full compliance.
5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it.
However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Program
or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept
this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Program (or any work
based on the Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and
all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Program or
works based on it.
6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the Program), the
recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy,
distribute or modify the Program subject to these terms and conditions. You may
not impose any further restrictions on the recipients’ exercise of the rights granted
herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to this
License.
7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or
for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you
(whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of
this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you
cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this
License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not
distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit
royalty-free redistribution of the Program by all those who receive copies directly
or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this
License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Program.
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular
circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole
is intended to apply in other circumstances.
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other
property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole
purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system, which is
implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous
contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance
on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or
she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot
impose that choice.
APPENDIX-ii
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence
of the rest of this License.
8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries
either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who
places the Program under this License may add an explicit geographical
distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted
only in or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License
incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License.
9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the
General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in
spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or
concerns.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies a
version number of this License which applies to it and “any later version”, you have the
option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later
version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a
version number of this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free
Software Foundation.
10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose
distribution conditions are different, write to the author to ask for permission. For
software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free
Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will
be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our
free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.
NO WARRANTY
11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS
NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY
APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING
THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE
PROGRAM “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER
EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND
PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE
PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL
NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED
TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER
PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS
PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING
ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE
PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR
DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY
YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO
OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR
OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGES.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs
If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the
public, the best way to achieve this is to make it free software which everyone can
redistribute and change under these terms.
To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest to attach them to the
start of each source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each
file should have at least the “copyright” line and a pointer to where the full notice is
found.
<one line to give the program’s name and a brief idea of what it does.>
Copyright (C) <year> <name of author>
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the
terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software
Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY
WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public
License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with
this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place,
Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA.
Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an
interactive mode:
Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) year name of author Gnomovision comes with
ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type ‘show w’. This is free software, and
you are welcome to redistribute it under certain conditions; type ‘show c’ for details.
The hypothetical commands ‘show w’ and ‘show c’ should show the appropriate parts
of the General Public License. Of course, the commands you use may be called
something other than ‘show w’ and ‘show c’; they could even be mouse-clicks or menu
items–whatever suits your program.
You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if
any, to sign a “copyright disclaimer” for the program, if necessary. Here is a sample;
alter the names:
Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program
‘Gnomovision’ (which makes passes at compilers) written by James Hacker.
<signature of Ty Coon>, 1 April 1989
Ty Coon, President of Vice
This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into
proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine library, you may consider it more
useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the library. If this is what you
want to do, use the GNU Library General Public License instead of this License.
■ GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 2.1, February 1999
Copyright (C) 1991, 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document,
but changing it is not allowed.
[This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL. It also counts as the successor of
the GNU Library Public License, version 2, hence the version number 2.1.]
Preamble
The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change
it. By contrast, the GNU General Public Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to
share and change free software–to make sure the software is free for all its users.
This license, the Lesser General Public License, applies to some specially designated
software packages–typically libraries–of the Free Software Foundation and other
authors who decide to use it. You can use it too, but we suggest you first think carefully
about whether this license or the ordinary General Public License is the better strategy
to use in any particular case, based on the explanations below.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom of use, not price. Our General
Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of
free software (and charge for this service if you wish); that you receive source code or can
get it if you want it; that you can change the software and use pieces of it in new free
programs; and that you are informed that you can do these things.
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid distributors to deny you
these rights or to ask you to surrender these rights. These restrictions translate to certain
responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the library or if you modify it.
For example, if you distribute copies of the library, whether gratis or for a fee, you must
give the recipients all the rights that we gave you. You must make sure that they, too,
receive or can get the source code. If you link other code with the library, you must
provide complete object files to the recipients, so that they can relink them with the
library after making changes to the library and recompiling it. And you must show them
these terms so they know their rights.
We protect your rights with a two-step method: (1) we copyright the library, and (2) we
offer you this license, which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or
modify the library.
To protect each distributor, we want to make it very clear that there is no warranty for
the free library. Also, if the library is modified by someone else and passed on, the
recipients should know that what they have is not the original version, so that the
original author’s reputation will not be affected by problems that might be introduced
by others.
Finally, software patents pose a constant threat to the existence of any free program. We
wish to make sure that a company cannot effectively restrict the users of a free program
by obtaining a restrictive license from a patent holder. Therefore, we insist that any
patent license obtained for a version of the library must be consistent with the full
freedom of use specified in this license.
Most GNU software, including some libraries, is covered by the ordinary GNU General
Public License. This license, the GNU Lesser General Public License, applies to certain
designated libraries, and is quite different from the ordinary General Public License. We
use this license for certain libraries in order to permit linking those libraries into non-
free programs.
When a program is linked with a library, whether statically or using a shared library, the
combination of the two is legally speaking a combined work, a derivative of the original
library. The ordinary General Public License therefore permits such linking only if the
entire combination fits its criteria of freedom. The Lesser General Public License
permits more lax criteria for linking other code with the library.
We call this license the “Lesser” General Public License because it does Less to protect the
user’s freedom than the ordinary General Public License. It also provides other free
software developers Less of an advantage over competing non-free programs. These
disadvantages are the reason we use the ordinary General Public License for many libraries.
However, the Lesser license provides advantages in certain special circumstances.
For example, on rare occasions, there may be a special need to encourage the widest
possible use of a certain library, so that it becomes a de-facto standard. To achieve this,
non-free programs must be allowed to use the library. A more frequent case is that a free
library does the same job as widely used non-free libraries. In this case, there is little to
gain by limiting the free library to free software only, so we use the Lesser General
Public License.
APPENDIX-iii
In other cases, permission to use a particular library in non-free programs enables a
greater number of people to use a large body of free software. For example, permission
to use the GNU C Library in non-free programs enables many more people to use the
whole GNU operating system, as well as its variant, the GNU/Linux operating system.
Although the Lesser General Public License is Less protective of the users’ freedom, it
does ensure that the user of a program that is linked with the Library has the freedom
and the wherewithal to run that program using a modified version of the Library.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow. Pay
close attention to the difference between a “work based on the library” and a “work that
uses the library”. The former contains code derived from the library, whereas the latter
must be combined with the library in order to run.
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND
MODIFICATION
0. This License Agreement applies to any software library or other program which
contains a notice placed by the copyright holder or other authorized party saying
it may be distributed under the terms of this Lesser General Public License (also
called “this License”). Each licensee is addressed as “you”.
A “library” means a collection of software functions and/or data prepared so as to be
conveniently linked with application programs (which use some of those functions and
data) to form executables.
The “Library”, below, refers to any such software library or work which has been
distributed under these terms. A “work based on the Library” means either the Library
or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Library
or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated
straightforwardly into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without
limitation in the term “modification”.)
“Source code” for a work means the preferred form of the work for making
modifications to it. For a library, complete source code means all the source code for all
modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used
to control compilation and installation of the library.
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this
License; they are outside its scope. The act of running a program using the Library is
not restricted, and output from such a program is covered only if its contents constitute
a work based on the Library (independent of the use of the Library in a tool for writing
it). Whether that is true depends on what the Library does and what the program that
uses the Library does.
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library’s complete source
code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and
appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and
disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to
the absence of any warranty; and distribute a copy of this License along with the
Library.
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your
option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion of it, thus
forming a work based on the Library, and copy and distribute such modifications
or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of
these conditions:
a) The modified work must itself be a software library.
b) You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices stating that you
changed the files and the date of any change.
c) You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no charge to all third
parties under the terms of this License.
d) If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a table of data to be
supplied by an application program that uses the facility, other than as an
argument passed when the facility is invoked, then you must make a good
faith effort to ensure that, in the event an application does not supply such
function or table, the facility still operates, and performs whatever part of its
purpose remains meaningful.
(For example, a function in a library to compute square roots has a purpose that is
entirely well-defined independent of the application. Therefore, Subsection 2d requires
that any application-supplied function or table used by this function must be optional: if
the application does not supply it, the square root function must still compute square
roots.)
These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of
that work are not derived from the Library, and can be reasonably considered
independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not
apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you
distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Library, the
distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for
other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of
who wrote it.
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work
written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the
distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Library.
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library with the Library
(or with a work based on the Library) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium
does not bring the other work under the scope of this License.
3. You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Public License
instead of this License to a given copy of the Library. To do this, you must alter all
the notices that refer to this License, so that they refer to the ordinary GNU
General Public License, version 2, instead of to this License. (If a newer version
than version 2 of the ordinary GNU General Public License has appeared, then
you can specify that version instead if you wish.) Do not make any other change
in these notices.
Once this change is made in a given copy, it is irreversible for that copy, so the ordinary
GNU General Public License applies to all subsequent copies and derivative works
made from that copy.
This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of the Library into a
program that is not a library.
4. You may copy and distribute the Library (or a portion or derivative of it, under
Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2
above provided that you accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-
readable source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and
2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange.
If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated
place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place
satisfies the requirement to distribute the source code, even though third parties are not
compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
5. A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the Library, but is
designed to work with the Library by being compiled or linked with it, is called a
“work that uses the Library”. Such a work, in isolation, is not a derivative work of
the Library, and therefore falls outside the scope of this License.
However, linking a “work that uses the Library” with the Library creates an executable
that is a derivative of the Library (because it contains portions of the Library), rather
than a “work that uses the library”. The executable is therefore covered by this License.
Section 6 states terms for distribution of such executables.
When a “work that uses the Library” uses material from a header file that is part of the
Library, the object code for the work may be a derivative work of the Library even
though the source code is not. Whether this is true is especially significant if the work
can be linked without the Library, or if the work is itself a library. The threshold for this
to be true is not precisely defined by law.
If such an object file uses only numerical parameters, data structure layouts and
accessors, and small macros and small inline functions (ten lines or less in length), then
the use of the object file is unrestricted, regardless of whether it is legally a derivative
work. (Executables containing this object code plus portions of the Library will still fall
under Section 6.)
Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library, you may distribute the object code
for the work under the terms of Section 6. Any executables containing that work also
fall under Section 6, whether or not they are linked directly with the Library itself.
6. As an exception to the Sections above, you may also combine or link a “work that
uses the Library” with the Library to produce a work containing portions of the
Library, and distribute that work under terms of your choice, provided that the
terms permit modification of the work for the customer’s own use and reverse
engineering for debugging such modifications.
You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the Library is used in it
and that the Library and its use are covered by this License. You must supply a copy of
this License. If the work during execution displays copyright notices, you must include
the copyright notice for the Library among them, as well as a reference directing the
user to the copy of this License. Also, you must do one of these things:
a) Accompany the work with the complete corresponding machine-readable
source code for the Library including whatever changes were used in the
work (which must be distributed under Sections 1 and 2 above); and, if the
work is an executable linked with the Library, with the complete machine-
readable “work that uses the Library”, as object code and/or source code, so
that the user can modify the Library and then relink to produce a modified
executable containing the modified Library. (It is understood that the user
who changes the contents of definitions files in the Library will not
necessarily be able to recompile the application to use the modified
definitions.)
b) Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with the Library. A
suitable mechanism is one that (1) uses at run time a copy of the library
already present on the user’s computer system, rather than copying library
functions into the executable, and (2) will operate properly with a modified
version of the library, if the user installs one, as long as the modified version
is interface-compatible with the version that the work was made with.
c) Accompany the work with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give
the same user the materials specified in Subsection 6a, above, for a charge no
more than the cost of performing this distribution.
d) If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy from a
designated place, offer equivalent access to copy the above specified
materials from the same place.
e) Verify that the user has already received a copy of these materials or that you
have already sent this user a copy.
For an executable, the required form of the “work that uses the Library” must include
any data and utility programs needed for reproducing the executable from it. However,
as a special exception, the materials to be distributed need not include anything that is
normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components
(compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs,
unless that component itself accompanies the executable.
APPENDIX-iv
It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license restrictions of other
proprietary libraries that do not normally accompany the operating system. Such a
contradiction means you cannot use both them and the Library together in an executable
that you distribute.
7. You may place library facilities that are a work based on the Library side-by-side
in a single library together with other library facilities not covered by this License,
and distribute such a combined library, provided that the separate distribution of
the work based on the Library and of the other library facilities is otherwise
permitted, and provided that you do these two things:
a) Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based on the
Library, uncombined with any other library facilities. This must be distributed
under the terms of the Sections above.
b) Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact that part of it is a
work based on the Library, and explaining where to find the accompanying
uncombined form of the same work.
8. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library except
as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify,
sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library is void, and will automatically
terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received
copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses
terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance.
9. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it.
However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Library
or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept
this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Library (or any work
based on the Library), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and
all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Library or
works based on it.
10. Each time you redistribute the Library (or any work based on the Library), the
recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy,
distribute, link with or modify the Library subject to these terms and conditions.
You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients’ exercise of the
rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third
parties with this License.
11. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or
for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you
(whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of
this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you
cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this
License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not
distribute the Library at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit
royalty-free redistribution of the Library by all those who receive copies directly
or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this
License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Library.
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular
circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply, and the section as a whole
is intended to apply in other circumstances.
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other
property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole
purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system which is
implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous
contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance
on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or
she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot
impose that choice.
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence
of the rest of this License.
12. If the distribution and/or use of the Library is restricted in certain countries either
by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places
the Library under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution
limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or
among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the
limitation as if written in the body of this License.
13. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the
Lesser General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be
similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new
problems or concerns.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Library specifies a version
number of this License which applies to it and “any later version”, you have the option
of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version
published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Library does not specify a license
version number, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software
Foundation.
14. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free programs whose
distribution conditions are incompatible with these, write to the author to ask for
permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation,
write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this.
Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all
derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of
software generally.
NO WARRANTY
15. BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO
WARRANTY FOR THE LIBRARY, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY
APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING
THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE
LIBRARY “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER
EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND
PERFORMANCE OF THE LIBRARY IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE
LIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL
NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
16. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED
TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER
PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS
PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING
ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE
LIBRARY (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA
BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR
THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH
ANY OTHER SOFTWARE), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY
HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
How to Apply These Terms to Your New Libraries
If you develop a new library, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the
public, we recommend making it free software that everyone can redistribute and
change. You can do so by permitting redistribution under these terms (or, alternatively,
under the terms of the ordinary General Public License).
To apply these terms, attach the following notices to the library. It is safest to attach
them to the start of each source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of
warranty; and each file should have at least the “copyright” line and a pointer to where
the full notice is found.
<one line to give the library’s name and a brief idea of what it does.>
Copyright (C) <year> <name of author>
This library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the
terms of the GNU Lesser General Public License as published by the Free
Software Foundation; either version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any
later version.
This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY
WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU Lesser General
Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public License
along with this library; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59
Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA
Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if
any, to sign a “copyright disclaimer” for the library, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter
the names:
Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the library ‘Frob’ (a
library for tweaking knobs) written by James Random Hacker.
<signature of Ty Coon>, 1 April 1990
Ty Coon, President of Vice
That’s all there is to it!
APPENDIX-v
LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES
CABLE TV RECEIVER
ABC 10003, 10008,
10014, 10017,
10033
AMERICAST 10899
BELL & HOWELL
10014
BELL SOUTH 10899
CLEARMASTER
10883
CLEARMAX 10883
COOLMAX 10883
DIGEO 11187
DIGI 10637
DIRECTOR 10476
DUMONT 10637
GENERAL INSTRUMENT
10003, 10276,
10476, 10810
GOLDSTAR 10144
HAMLIN 10009, 10273
I3 MICRO 11602
JERROLD 10003, 10012,
10014, 10276,
10476, 10810
MACOM 10033
MEMOREX 10000
MOTOROLA 10014, 10276,
10476, 10810,
11187, 11254,
11376
MULTITECH 10883
MYRIO 11602
PACE 10008, 10237,
11877
PANASONIC 10000, 10107
PANTHER 10637
PARAGON 10000
PHILIPS 10317, 11305
PIONEER 10144, 10533,
10877, 11877
PULSAR 10000
QUASAR 10000
RADIOSHACK
10883
RCA 11256
REGAL 10273, 10279
RUNCO 10000
SAMSUNG 10144
SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA
10008, 10017,
10477, 10877,
11877
SEJIN 11602
SONY 11006
STARCOM 10003
SUPERCABLE
10276
SUPERMAX 10883
THOMSON 11256
TOCOM 10012
TORX 10003
TOSHIBA 10000
TRISTAR 10883
V2 10883
VIEWMASTER10883
VISION 10883
VORTEX VIEW10883
ZENITH 10000, 10525,
10899
CABLE/PVR
COMBINATION
AMERICAST 10899
DIGEO 11187
GENERAL INSTRUMENT
10476, 10810
JERROLD 10476, 10810
MOTOROLA 10476, 10810,
11187, 11376
PACE 10237, 11877
PIONEER 10877, 11877
RCA 11256
SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA
10877, 11877
SONY 11006
SUPERCABLE
10276
THOMSON 11256
ZENITH 10899
DBS/PVR
COMBINATION
DIRECTV 10099, 10392,
10639, 11076,
11142, 11377,
11392, 11442,
11443, 11444,
11640
DISH NETWORK SYSTEM
10775, 11505
DISHPRO 10775, 11505
ECHOSTAR 10775, 11170,
11505
EXPRESSVU 10775
HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEMS
11142, 11442,
11443, 11444
JVC 11170
MOTOROLA 10869
PHILIPS 11142, 11442
PROSCAN 10392
RCA 11392
SAMSUNG 11442
SONY 10639, 11640
STAR CHOICE
10869
SATELLITE RECEIVER
ALPHASTAR 10772
CHAPARRAL 10053, 10216
CROSSDIGITAL
11109
DIRECTV 10099, 10247,
10392, 10566,
10639, 10724,
10749, 10819,
11076, 11108,
11109, 11142,
11377, 11392,
11414, 11442,
11443, 11444,
11609, 11639,
11640, 11749,
11856
DISH NETWJORK SYSTEM
10775, 11005,
11170, 11505,
11775
DISHPRO 10775, 11005,
11505, 11775
ECHOSTAR 10269, 10280,
10775, 11005,
11170, 11505,
11775
EXPRESSVU 10775, 11775
GE 10392, 10566
GENERAL INSTRUMENT
10869
GOI 10775, 11775
GOODMANS 11246
HISENSE 11535
HITACHI 10819, 11250
HOMECABLE 10238
HTS 10775, 11775
HUGHES 10749, 11442,
11749
HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEMS
10749, 11142,
11442, 11443,
11444, 11749
ILO 11535
IQ 10210
IQ PRISM 10210
JERROLD 10869
JVC 10775, 11170,
11775
LEGEND 10269
LG 11226, 11414
MAGNAVOX 10722, 10724
MEMOREX 10269, 10724
MITSUBISHI 10749
MOTOROLA 10856, 10869
NEC 11270
NEXT LEVEL 10869
PANASONIC 10247, 10701
PAYSAT 10724
PHILIPS 10099, 10722,
10724, 10749,
10819, 11076,
11142, 11442,
11749
PIONEER 11442
PROSCAN 10392, 10566
PROTON 11535
RADIOSHACK
10869
RCA 10143, 10392,
10566, 10855,
11392
REALISTIC 10052
SAMSUNG 11108, 11109,
11142, 11276,
11377, 11442,
11609
SANYO 11219
SONY 10639, 11639,
11640
STAR CHOICE 10869
STS 10210
TIVO 11142, 11442,
11443, 11444
TOSHIBA 10082, 10749,
10790, 10819,
11285, 11749
ULTIMATETV 11392, 11640
UNIDEN 10052, 10074,
10238, 10722,
10724
US DIGITAL 11535
USDTV 11535
VOOM 10869
ZENITH 11856
HDTV DECORDER
ACCURIAN 11653
EPSON 11563, 11650
LG 11415
MACRO IMAGE TECHNOLOGY
11383
MOTOROLA 11363
MYHD 11383
PANASONIC 11120
PIONEER 11010
PRINCETON 10113, 10295
SAMSUNG 11190, 11490
SASEM 11641
SENSORY SCIENCE
11126
SHARP 11010
SYLVANIA 11563
TELEMANN 11604
VIEWSONIC 11329
VIZIO 11126
OTHER VIDEO
ACCESSORIES
ABS 11272
ACCURIAN 11653
ALIENWARE 11272
CYBERPOWER
11272
D-LINK 11554
ECS 11553
EPSON 11563, 11650
GATEWAY 11272
HEWLETT PACKARD
11267, 11272
HOWARD COMPUTERS
11272
HP 11272
HUSH 11272
IBUYPOWER 11272
INTERVIDEO 11393
KEYSPAN 11344
KWORLD 11403
LEADTEK 11614
LG 11415
LINKSYS 11272, 11365
MACRO IMAGE TECHNOLOGY
11383
MEDIA CENTER PC
11272
MICROSOFT 11272
MIND 11272
MOTOROLA 11363
MYHD 11383
NIVEUS MEDIA
11272
NORTHGATE 11272
PANASONIC 11120
PINNACLE SYSTEMS
11268
PIONEER 11010
PRINCETON 10113, 10295
RICAVISION 11272
ROKU 11486
SAMSUNG 11190, 11490
SASEM 11641
SENSORY SCIENCE
11126
SHARP 11010
SMC 11456
SONY 11272, 11324,
11364
STACK 9 11272
STREAMZAP 11309
SYLVANIA 11563
SYSTEMAX 11272
TAGAR SYSTEMS
11272
TELEMANN 11604
TOSHIBA 11272
TOUCH 11272
VIEWSONIC 11272, 11329
VIZIO 11126
VOODOO 11272
ZT GROUP 11272
TV
ADMIRAL 20093, 20463
ADVENT 20761, 20783,
20815, 20817,
20842, 21933
AIKO 20092
AIWA 20701
AKAI 20030, 20060,
20672, 20702,
20812, 21903
ALBATRON 20700, 20843
AMERICA ACTION
20180
APPENDIX-vi
AMPRO 20751
ANAM 20180
AOC 20030
APEX DIGITAL
20156, 20748,
20765, 20767,
20879, 21943
AUDIOVOX 20092, 20180,
20451, 20623,
20802, 20875,
21937, 21951,
21952
AVENTURA 20171
AXION 21937
BELL & HOWELL
20154
BENQ 21032
BOXLIGHT 20893
BRADFORD 20180
BROKSONIC 20180, 20236,
20463, 21929,
21935, 21938
CANDLE 20030
CARNIVALE 20030
CARVER 20054
CELEBRITY 20000
CELERA 20765
CHANGHONG
20765
CITIZEN 20030, 20060,
20092, 21928
CLARION 20180
COMMERCIAL SOLUTIONS
20047, 21447
CONTEC 20180
CRAIG 20180
CROSLEY 20054
CROWN 20180
CURTIS MATHES
20030, 20047,
20054, 20060,
20093, 20145,
20154, 20166,
20451, 20466,
20702, 21147,
21347, 21919
CXC 20180
DAEWOO 20092, 20451,
20623, 20661,
20672, 21661,
21928
DELL 21080, 21178,
21454
DENON 20145, 20511
DUMONT 20017
DURABRAND 20171, 20178,
20180, 20463,
21034
DWIN 20093, 20720,
20774
ELECTROBAND
20000
ELECTROGRAPH
21755
EMERSON 20038, 20154,
20171, 20178,
20180, 20236,
20451, 20463,
20623, 21928,
21929, 21944
ENVISION 20030, 20813
EPSON 20833, 20840
ESA 20171, 20812
FISHER 20154
FUJITSU 20683, 20809,
20853
FUNAI 20171, 20180,
21904
FUTURETECH
20180
GATEWAY 21755, 21756
GE 20047, 20051,
20178, 20451,
21147, 21347,
21447, 21917,
21919, 21922
GIBRALTER 20017, 20030
GO VIDEO 20886
GOLDSTAR 20030, 20178,
21926
GOODMANS 20360
GRUNDIG 20683
GRUNPY 20180
HAIER 21034
HALLMARK 20178
HARLEY DAVIDSON
21904
HARMAN/KARDON
20054
HARVARD 20180
HAVERMY 20093
HELIOS 20865
HELLO KITTY
20451
HISENSE 20748
HITACHI 20038, 20145,
20151, 20413,
21145, 21904,
21960
HYUNDAI 20849
INFINITY 20054
INTEQ 20017
JBL 20054
JCB 20000
JENSEN 20761, 20815,
20817, 21933
JVC 20053, 20069,
20160, 20169,
20731, 21253
KEC 20180
KENWOOD 20030, 20859
KLH 20765, 20767,
21962
KTV 20030, 20180
LG 20178, 20442,
20700, 20856,
21178, 21265
LLOYD'S 21904
LOEWE 20136
LXI 20047, 20054,
20154, 20156,
20178
MAGNASONIC
21928
MAGNAVOX 20030, 20054,
20706, 20802,
21254, 21454,
21904, 21931,
21944
MARANTZ 20030, 20054,
20704, 20854,
20855, 21154,
21454
MATSUSHITA 20250, 20650
MAXENT 21755
MEGAPOWER
20700
MEGATRON 20145, 20178
MEMOREX 20150, 20154,
20178, 20463,
21926
MGA 20030, 20150,
20155, 20178
MIDLAND 20017, 20047,
20051
MITSUBISHI 20014, 20093,
20150, 20155,
20178, 20331,
20358, 20836,
20868, 21250,
21917
MONIVISION 20700, 20843
MOTOROLA 20093
MTC 20030, 20060
MULTITECH 20180
NAD 20156, 20178,
20866
NEC 20030, 20497,
20882, 21704
NETTV 21755
NIKKO 20030, 20092,
20178
NORCENT 20748, 20824
NTC 20092
ONWA 20180
OPTIMUS 20154, 20166,
20250, 20650
OPTOMA 20887
OPTONICA 20093
ORION 20236, 20463,
21463, 21929
PANASONIC 20051, 20226,
20250, 20650,
20863, 21410,
21919, 21941,
21946, 21947
PENNEY 20030, 20047,
20051, 20060,
20156, 20178,
21347, 21919,
21926
PHILCO 20030, 20054
PHILIPS 20054, 20690,
21154, 21454
PILOT 20030
PIONEER 20038, 20166,
20679, 20866
POLAROID 20765, 20865
PORTLAND 20092
PRIMA 20761, 20783,
20815, 20817,
21933
PRINCETON 20700, 20717
PRISM 20051
PROSCAN 20047, 20466,
21347, 21447,
21922
PROTON 20178, 20466
PULSAR 20017
QUASAR 20051, 20250,
20650, 21919
RADIOSHACK
20030, 20047,
20154, 20178,
20180, 21904
RCA 20038, 20047,
20090, 20679,
21047, 21147,
21247, 21347,
21447, 21547,
21917, 21919,
21922, 21948,
21953, 21958
REALISTIC 20030, 20154,
20178, 20180
RUNCO 20017, 20030,
20497, 20603
SAMPO 20030, 21755
SAMSUNG 20030, 20060,
20178, 20587,
20702, 20766,
20812, 20814,
21060, 21903,
21959
SANSUI 20463, 21904,
21929, 21935
SANYO 20088, 20154,
20484, 20799,
20893
SCOTCH 20178
SCOTT 20178, 20180,
20236
SEARS 20047, 20054,
20154, 20156,
20171, 20178,
21904, 21926
SHARP 20093, 20153,
20491, 20688,
20689, 20818,
20851, 21917
SHENG CHIA 20093
SOLE 20813
SONY 20000, 20011,
20080, 20111,
20810, 20834,
20867, 21100,
21904, 21925
SOUNDESIGN
20178, 20180
SOVA 21952
SQUAREVIEW
20171
SSS 20180
STARLITE 20180
STUDIO EXPERIENCE
20843
SUPERSCAN 20093, 20864
SUPREME 20000
SVA 20587, 20748,
20865, 20870,
20871, 20872
SYLVANIA 20030, 20054,
20171, 21931,
21944
SYMPHONIC 20171, 20180,
21904
TANDY 20093
TATUNG 21756
TECHNICS 20051, 20250
TECHVIEW 20847
TECHWOOD 20051
TEKNIKA 20054, 20060,
20092, 20150,
20180
TELEFUNKEN
20702
THOMAS 21904
TMK 20178
TNCI 20017
TOSHIBA 20060, 20154,
20156, 20650,
20832, 20845,
21156, 21256,
21265, 21356,
21656, 21704,
21918, 21935,
21936, 21945
TVS 20463
VECTOR RESEARCH
20030
VICTOR 20053
VIDIKRON 20054
VIDTECH 20178
VIEWSONIC 20857, 20864,
20885, 21755
VIZIO 20864, 20885,
21756
WARDS 20030, 20054,
20080, 20111,
20178, 20866,
21156
WAYCON 20156
WESTINGHOUSE
20451, 20889
WHITE WESTINGHOUSE
20463, 20623
YAMAHA 20030, 20650,
20769, 20833,
20839, 21405,
21406, 21407
ZENITH 20017, 20092,
20178, 20463,
21145, 21904,
21929
APPENDIX-vii
PVR
ABS 31972
ALIENWARE 31972
CYBERPOWER31972
DELL 31972
DIRECTV 30739
GATEWAY 31972
HEWLETT PACKARD
31972
HOWARD COMPUTERS
31972
HP 31972
HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEMS
30739
HUMAX 30739
HUSH 31972
IBUYPOWER 31972
LG 32010
LINKSYS 31972
MEDIA CENTER PC
31972
MICROSOFT 31972
MIND 31972
NIVEUS MEDIA
31972
NORTHGATE 31972
PANASONIC 30616, 31807,
31808, 31809
PHILIPS 30618, 30739
RCA 30880
REPLAYTV 30614, 30616
SONIC BLUE 30614, 30616
SONY 30636, 31972
STACK 9 31972
SYSTEMAX 31972
TAGAR SYSTEMS
31972
TIVO 30618, 30636,
30739
TOSHIBA 31008, 31972
TOUCH 31972
VIEWSONIC 31972
VOODOO 31972
ZT GROUP 31972
VCR
ABS 31972
ADMIRAL 30048, 30209,
30479
AIKO 30278
AIWA 30037
AKAI 30041
ALIENWARE 31972
AMERICA ACTION
30278
AMERICAN HIGH
30035
ASHA 30240
AUDIOVOX 30037, 30278
BEAUMARK 30240
BELL & HOWELL
30104
BROKSONIC 30002, 30121,
30184, 30209,
30479
CALIX 30037
CANON 30035
CARVER 30081
CCE 30072, 30278
CITIZEN 30037, 30278
COLT 30072
CRAIG 30037, 30047,
30072, 30240
CURTIS MATHES
30035, 30041,
30060, 30162
CYBERNEX 30240
CYBERPOWER
31972
DAEWOO 30045, 30278
DELL 31972
DENON 30042
DIRECTV 30739
DURABRAND
30038, 30039
ELECTROHOME
30037, 30043
ELECTROPHONIC
30037
EMEREX 30032
EMERSON 30002, 30037,
30043, 30121,
30184, 30209,
30278, 30479,
30593, 31593
FISHER 30047, 30104
FUJI 30033, 30035
FUNAI 30593, 31593
GATEWAY 31972
GE 30035, 30060,
30240
GO VIDEO 30240, 30432
GOLDSTAR 30037, 30038
HARMAN/KARDON
30038, 30081
HARWOOD 30072
HEWLETT PACKARD
31972
HI-Q 30047
HITACHI 30041, 30042
HOWARD COMPUTERS
31972
HP 31972
HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEMS
30042, 30739
HUMAX 30739, 31988
HUSH 31972
IBUYPOWER 31972
JENSEN 30041
JVC 30041, 30067,
31162
KEC 30037, 30278
KENWOOD 30038, 30041,
30067
KLH 30072
KODAK 30035, 30037
LG 31037, 32010
LINKSYS 31972
LOGIK 30072
LXI 30037
MAGNASONIC
30593
MAGNAVOX 30035, 30039,
30081, 30149,
30563, 30593
MAGNIN 30240
MARANTZ 30035, 30081
MARTA 30037
MATSUSHITA 30035, 30162,
31162
MEDIA CENTER PC
31972
MEI 30035
MEMOREX 30035, 30037,
30039, 30047,
30048, 30104,
30162, 30209,
30240, 30479,
31037, 31162,
31262
MGA 30043, 30240
MGN TECHNOLOGY
30240
MICROSOFT 31972
MIND 31972
MINOLTA 30042
MITSUBISHI 30043, 30067
MOTOROLA 30035, 30048
MTC 30240
MULTITECH 30072
NEC 30038, 30041,
30067, 30104
NIKKO 30037
NIVEUS MEDIA
31972
NOBLEX 30240
NORTHGATE 31972
OLYMPUS 30035
OPTIMUS 30037, 30048,
30104, 30162,
30432, 30593,
31048, 31062,
31162, 31262
ORION 30002, 30184,
30209, 30479
PANASONIC 30035, 30162,
30616, 31062,
31162, 31244,
31262, 31562,
31807, 31808,
31809
PENNEY 30035, 30037,
30038, 30042,
30240
PENTAX 30042
PHILCO 30035
PHILIPS 30035, 30081,
30618, 30739,
31081, 31181
PILOT 30037
PIONEER 30067
POLK AUDIO 30081
PROFITRONIC
30240
PROSCAN 30060
PROTEC 30072
PULSAR 30039
QUASAR 30035, 30162,
31162
RADIOSHACK
31037
RADIX 30037
RANDEX 30037
RCA 30042, 30060,
30149, 30240,
30880
REALISTIC 30035, 30037,
30047, 30048,
30104
REPLAYTV 30614, 30616
RICAVISION 31972
RUNCO 30039
SAMSUNG 30045, 30240,
30739
SANKY 30039, 30048
SANSUI 30041, 30067,
30209, 30479
SANYO 30047, 30104,
30240
SCOTT 30043, 30045,
30121, 30184
SEARS 30035, 30037,
30042, 30047,
30104
SHARP 30048, 30848
SHINTOM 30072
SHOGUN 30240
SINGER 30072
SONIC BLUE 30614, 30616
SONY 30032, 30033,
30035, 30636,
31032, 31972
STACK 9 31972
STS 30042
SYLVANIA 30035, 30043,
30081, 30593,
31593
SYMPHONIC 30593, 31593
SYSTEMAX 31972
TAGAR SYSTEMS
31972
TATUNG 30041
TEAC 30041
TECHNICS 30035, 30162
TEKNIKA 30035, 30037
TIVO 30618, 30636,
30739, 31503
TMK 30240
TOSHIBA 30043, 30045,
30209, 31008,
31972, 31988
TOTEVISION 30037, 30240
TOUCH 31972
UNITECH 30240
VECTOR 30045
VECTOR RESEARCH
30038
VIDEO CONCEPTS
30045
VIDEOMAGIC 30037
VIDEOSONIC 30240
VIEWSONIC 31972
VOODOO 31972
WARDS 30035, 30042,
30047, 30048,
30060, 30072,
30081, 30149,
30240
WHITE WESTINGHOUSE
30072, 30209
XR-1000 30035, 30072
YAMAHA 30038
ZENITH 30033, 30039,
30209, 30479,
31139
ZT GROUP 31972
DVD PLAYER
ADCOM 41094
ADVENT 41016
AIWA 40641
AKAI 40899, 41089
ALCO 40790
ALLEGRO 40869
AMPHION MEDIA WORKS
40872
AMW 40872
APEX DIGITAL
40672, 40717,
40755, 40794,
40796, 40797,
40830, 41004,
41020, 41061,
41100
ASPIRE DIGITAL
41407
AUDIOVOX 40790, 41041,
41071, 41072,
41121, 41122
AXION 41071, 41072
B & K 40655, 40662
BEL CANTO DESIGN
41571
BLAUPUNKT 40717
BLUE PARADE40571
BROKSONIC 40695, 40868
CALIFORNIA AUDIO LABS
40490
CINEVISION 40833, 40869,
40876
CITIZEN 41277
COBY 40778, 40852,
41107, 41177,
41351
CURTIS MATHES
41087
CYBERHOME
40816, 40874,
41023, 41024,
41117
DAEWOO 40705, 40833,
40869, 41169,
41172, 41234,
41242
DAYTEK 40872
DENON 40490
DESAY 41407
DISNEY 40675, 41270
DUAL 41068, 41085
DURABRAND
41127
DVD2000 40521
EMERSON 40591, 40675,
40821, 41268
ENTERPRISE 40591
FUNAI 40675, 41268
GATEWAY 41073, 41077
APPENDIX-viii
GE 40522, 40717,
40815
GO VIDEO 40715, 40741,
40744, 40783,
40833, 40869,
41044, 41075,
41099
GO VISION 41071, 41072
GOLDSTAR 40741
GPX 40699, 40769
GRADIENTE 40490
GREENHILL 40717
GRUNDIG 40539
HARMAN/KARDON
40582, 40702
HITACHI 40573, 40664,
41247
HITEKER 40672
INITIAL 40717
INTEGRA 40571, 40627
JATON 41078
JBL 40702
JENSEN 41016
JSI 41423
JVC 40558, 40623,
40867
JWIN 41049, 41051
KAWASAKI 40790
KENWOOD 40490, 40534,
40682, 40737
KLH 40717, 40790,
41020, 41149,
41261
KONKA 40711
KOSS 40651, 41423
LANDEL 40826
LASONIC 40798, 41173
LECSON 41533
LENOXX 41127
LG 40591, 40741,
40801, 40869
LOEWE 40511
MAGNAVOX 40503, 40539,
40675, 40821
MALATA 40782, 41159
MARANTZ 40539
MCINTOSH 41273, 41533
MEMOREX 40695, 41270
MICROSOFT 40522
MINTEK 40717, 40839
MITSUBISHI 40521, 41521
MOMITSU 41082
MYRYAD 40894
NAD 40591, 40692,
40741
NAKAMICHI 41222
NEC 40785
NESA 40717
NEXT BASE 40826
NORCENT 40872, 41003,
41107, 41265
ONKYO 40503, 40627,
40792, 41627
ORITRON 40651
PANASONIC 40490, 40503,
40632, 40703,
41762
PHILIPS 40503, 40539,
40675, 40854,
41260, 41267,
41354
PIANODISC 41024
PIONEER 40525, 40571,
40632, 41571
POLAROID 41020, 41061
POLK AUDIO 40539
PRIMA 41016
PRINCETON 40674
PROCEED 40672
PROSCAN 40522
PROVISION 40778
QWESTAR 40651
RCA 40522, 40571,
40717, 40790,
40822, 41022,
41132, 41193
RIO 40869
RJTECH 41360
ROTEL 40623, 41178
ROWA 40823
SAMPO 40698, 40752
SAMSUNG 40490, 40573,
40744, 40820,
40899, 41044,
41075
SANSUI 40695
SANYO 40695, 40873
SHARP 40630, 40675,
40752, 41256
SHARPER IMAGE
41117
SHERWOOD 40633, 41043,
41077
SHINSONIC 40533, 40839
SIGMA DESIGNS
40674
SONIC BLUE 40869, 41099
SONY 40533, 40864,
41017, 41033,
41533
SOVA 41122
SUNGALE 41074
SUPERSCAN 40821
SVA 40860, 41105
SYLVANIA 40675, 40821,
41268
SYMPHONIC 40675, 41268
TAG MCLAREN
40894
TEAC 40790, 40809
TECHNICS 40490, 40703
TECHNOSONIC
40730
TECHWOOD 40692
THETA DIGITAL
40571
TOSHIBA 40503, 40695,
41154
TREDEX 40799, 40800,
40803, 40804
URBAN CONCEPTS
40503
US LOGIC 40839
VENTURER 40790
VIZIO 41064, 41226
XBOX 40522
YAMAHA 40490, 40539,
40545, 41543
YAMAKAWA 40872
ZENITH 40503, 40591,
40741, 40869
ZOECE 41265
LD PLAYER
AIWA 40203
CARVER 40064, 40194,
40323
DENON 40059, 40172
DISCO VISION
40023
FUNAI 40203
HARMAN/KARDON
40194
HITACHI 40023
MAGNAVOX 40194, 40217
MARANTZ 40064, 40194
MITSUBISHI 40059
NAD 40059
OPTIMUS 40059
PANASONIC 40204
PHILIPS 40064, 40194
PIONEER 40023, 40059
POLK AUDIO
40194
QUASAR 40204
REALISTIC 40203
SAMSUNG 40323
SEGA 40023
SONY 40193, 40201
TECHNICS 40204
THETA DIGITAL
40194
YAMAHA 40217
DVD RECORDER
APEX DIGITAL
51056
ASPIRE DIGITAL
51168
COBY 51086
CYBERHOME
51129
FUNAI 50675, 51334
GATEWAY 51073, 51158
GO VIDEO 50741, 51158,
51304, 51730
ILO 51348
JVC 51164, 51275
LG 50741
LITEON 51158, 51416,
51440
MAGNAVOX 50646
PANASONIC 50490, 51010,
51011
PHILIPS 50646
PIONEER 50631, 51475,
51476
POLAROID 51086
RCA 50522
SAMSUNG 50490
SENSORY SCIENCE|
51158
SHARP 50675, 51550,
51556, 50630
SONY 51033, 51069,
51070, 51431
SYLVANIA 50675
TOSHIBA 51510
VICTOR 51275
YAMAHA 51544
ZENITH 50741
CD PLAYER
AIWA 60157
ARCAM 60157
BURMESTER 60420
CALIFORNIA AUDIO LABS
60029, 60303
CARVER 60157, 60179
DENON 60003, 60034
DKK 60000
DMX ELECTRONICS
60157
FISHER 60179
GARRARD 60393, 60420
GENEXXA 60032
HARMAN/KARDON
60157
HITACHI 60032
INTEGRA 60101
JVC 60072
KENWOOD 60028, 60190,
60626
KLH 61318, 61372,
61711
KRELL 60157
LINN 60157
MAGNAVOX 60038, 60157
MARANTZ 60029, 60038,
60157, 60180,
60435, 60626
MCINTOSH 60256, 60290,
60660
MCS 60029
MIRO 60000
MISSION 60157
MTC 60420
NSM 60157
ONKYO 60101, 61327
OPTIMUS 60000, 60032,
60087, 60179,
60420, 60468
PANASONIC 60029, 60303,
60388, 60752
PARASOUND 60420
PHILIPS 60157, 60274,
60626
PIONEER 60032, 60468,
61062
POLK AUDIO 60157
PROCEED 60420
PROTON 60157
QED 60157
QUAD 60157
QUASAR 60029
RCA 60032, 60053,
60179, 60420,
60468, 61062
REALISTIC 60179, 60180,
60420
ROTEL 60157, 60420
SAE 60157
SANSUI 60157
SANYO 60087, 60179
SHARP 60180
SHERWOOD 60180
SONIC FRONTIERS
60157
SONY 60000, 60490
SUGDEN 60157
TAG MCLAREN
60157
TASCAM 60420
TEAC 60180, 60378,
60393, 60420
TECHNICS 60029, 60303
VICTOR 60072
WARDS 60053, 60157
YAMAHA 60036, 60490,
61907
CD RECORDER
HARMAN/KARDON
71202
JVC 71294
KENWOOD 70626
KLH 71373
LG 71208
MARANTZ 70626
PHILIPS 70626
PIONEER 71062, 71087
RCA 70053, 70420
SONY 70000, 70100,
71364
TDK 71208
TEAC 70420
YAMAHA 70888, 71292
MD RECORDER
DENON 70873
KENWOOD 70681, 70826
ONKYO 70868
OPTIMUS 71063
PIONEER 71063
SHARP 70861
SHERWOOD 71067
SONY 70490
YAMAHA 70490, 70888,
71909
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA
6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.
YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD.
135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA
YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H.
SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY
YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A.
RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD.
YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND
YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B.
J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN
YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD.
17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA
©
2006 All rights reserved.
RX-N600
Printed in Malaysia WG73890-1
RX-N600
AV Receiver
OWNER’S MANUAL
U
TAPE DECK
AIWA 70029, 70197
CARVER 70029
DENON 70076
HARMAN/KARDON
70029, 70182
JVC 70244, 70273
KENWOOD 70070
MAGNAVOX 70029
MARANTZ 70029
ONKYO 70135, 70282
OPTIMUS 70027, 70220
PANASONIC 70229
PHILIPS 70029
PIONEER 70027, 70099,
70220
POLK AUDIO
70029
RCA 70027, 70220
SANSUI 70029
SONY 70170, 70243,
70291
TECHNICS 70229
VICTOR 70273
WARDS 70027
YAMAHA 70094, 70097,
70524
TUNER
ADC 80531
ADCOM 80616, 81616,
81617
AIWA 80121, 80158,
80189, 81405
AMC 81077
AMPLIFIER TECHNOLOGIES
81584
ANAM 81074, 81609
ARCAM 81189
ATLANTIC TECHNOLOGY
81487
AUDIOTRONIC
81189
AUDIOVOX 81627
B & K 80701, 80820,
80840
BEL CANTO DESIGN
81584
BK 80702
BOSE 81933
BOSTON ACOUSTICS
81918
BRIX 81602
CAPETRONIC 80531
CARVER 80008, 80121,
80189, 80360,
81189
CLASSE 81916
DELPHI 81414
DENON 80121, 81360
EMERSON 80424
FISHER 80219, 80360
FOSGATE 81487
GARRARD 80424
GATEWAY 81567
HARMAN/KARDON
80110, 80189,
80891, 81304
INTEGRA 80135, 81320
JBL 80110
JVC 80074, 81058,
81811
KENWOOD 80027, 80077,
81313, 81569,
81570
KLH 81428
KOSS 80424
LEXICON 81076
LINN 80189
MAGNAVOX 80189, 80531,
81189, 81269
MARANTZ 80039, 80189,
80200, 81189,
81269
MCS 80039, 80346
MICROMEGA 81189
MITSUBISHI 81393
MYRYAD 81189, 81918
NAD 80320
NAKAMICHI 80347, 81313,
81555, 81919
NIRO 81908
ONKYO 80135, 81320
OPTIMUS 80177, 80219,
80531, 80670,
81023, 81074
OUTLAW 81487
OUTLAW AUDIO81487
PANASONIC 80039, 80309,
81308, 81518
PHILIPS 80189, 81189,
81269
PIONEER 80014, 80150,
80531, 80630,
81023
POLK AUDIO 80189, 81414
QUASAR 80039
RCA 80054, 80346,
80360, 80531,
81023, 81074,
81154, 81609
REALISTIC 80163
SAMSUNG 81304
SANSUI 80189, 80346,
81189
SANYO 80219
SCOTT 80163, 80322
SHERWOOD 81077, 81423,
81567, 81918
SIRIUS 81602, 81627,
81811
SONY 80158, 81058,
81406, 81759
SOUNDESIGN
80670
STEREOPHONICS
81023
SUNFIRE 81313
TEAC 80163, 81074
TECHNICS 80039, 80309,
81308, 81518
THORENS 81189
TOSHIBA 80135
VICTOR 80074
WARDS 80014, 80054,
80158, 80189
XM 81406, 81414
YAMAHA 80176, 81176,
81276, 81331,
81375, 81908,
(TUNER ID1) 81916
(TUNER ID2) 81917
(XM ID1) 81918
(XM ID2) 81919
OTHER AUDIO
ACCESSORIES
YAMAHA (iPod) 81981
YAMAHA (NET/USB) 81982
RX-N600_U_cv.fm Page 1 Wednesday, May 24, 2006 4:36 PM
Documenttranscriptie
RX-N600_U_cv.fm Page 1 Wednesday, May 24, 2006 4:36 PM U TAPE DECK TUNER ADC ADCOM 80531 80616, 81616, 81617 AIWA 80121, 80158, 80189, 81405 AMC 81077 AMPLIFIER TECHNOLOGIES 81584 ANAM 81074, 81609 ARCAM 81189 ATLANTIC TECHNOLOGY 81487 MITSUBISHI MYRYAD NAD NAKAMICHI 81393 81189, 81918 80320 80347, 81313, 81555, 81919 NIRO 81908 ONKYO 80135, 81320 OPTIMUS 80177, 80219, 80531, 80670, 81023, 81074 OUTLAW 81487 OUTLAW AUDIO81487 PANASONIC 80039, 80309, 81308, 81518 PHILIPS 80189, 81189, 81269 PIONEER 80014, 80150, 80531, 80630, 81023 POLK AUDIO 80189, 81414 QUASAR 80039 RCA 80054, 80346, 80360, 80531, 81023, 81074, 81154, 81609 REALISTIC 80163 SAMSUNG 81304 SANSUI 80189, 80346, 81189 SANYO 80219 SCOTT 80163, 80322 SHERWOOD 81077, 81423, 81567, 81918 SIRIUS 81602, 81627, 81811 SONY 80158, 81058, 81406, 81759 SOUNDESIGN 80670 STEREOPHONICS 81023 SUNFIRE 81313 TEAC 80163, 81074 TECHNICS 80039, 80309, 81308, 81518 THORENS TOSHIBA VICTOR WARDS 81189 80135 80074 80014, 80054, 80158, 80189 XM 81406, 81414 YAMAHA 80176, 81176, 81276, 81331, 81375, 81908, (TUNER ID1) 81916 (TUNER ID2) 81917 (XM ID1) 81918 (XM ID2) 81919 OTHER AUDIO ACCESSORIES YAMAHA (iPod) 81981 YAMAHA (NET/USB) 81982 RX-N600 AV Receiver © 2006 YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA RX-N600 AIWA 70029, 70197 CARVER 70029 DENON 70076 HARMAN/KARDON 70029, 70182 JVC 70244, 70273 KENWOOD 70070 MAGNAVOX 70029 MARANTZ 70029 ONKYO 70135, 70282 OPTIMUS 70027, 70220 PANASONIC 70229 PHILIPS 70029 PIONEER 70027, 70099, 70220 POLK AUDIO 70029 RCA 70027, 70220 SANSUI 70029 SONY 70170, 70243, 70291 TECHNICS 70229 VICTOR 70273 WARDS 70027 YAMAHA 70094, 70097, 70524 AUDIOTRONIC 81189 AUDIOVOX 81627 B&K 80701, 80820, 80840 BEL CANTO DESIGN 81584 BK 80702 BOSE 81933 BOSTON ACOUSTICS 81918 BRIX 81602 CAPETRONIC 80531 CARVER 80008, 80121, 80189, 80360, 81189 CLASSE 81916 DELPHI 81414 DENON 80121, 81360 EMERSON 80424 FISHER 80219, 80360 FOSGATE 81487 GARRARD 80424 GATEWAY 81567 HARMAN/KARDON 80110, 80189, 80891, 81304 INTEGRA 80135, 81320 JBL 80110 JVC 80074, 81058, 81811 KENWOOD 80027, 80077, 81313, 81569, 81570 KLH 81428 KOSS 80424 LEXICON 81076 LINN 80189 MAGNAVOX 80189, 80531, 81189, 81269 MARANTZ 80039, 80189, 80200, 81189, 81269 MCS 80039, 80346 MICROMEGA 81189 All rights reserved. OWNER’S MANUAL Printed in Malaysia WG73890-1 IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 10 CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. • Explanation of Graphical Symbols The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert you to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert you to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 i 11 Read Instructions – All the safety and operating instructions should be read before the product is operated. Retain Instructions – The safety and operating instructions should be retained for future reference. Heed Warnings – All warnings on the product and in the operating instructions should be adhered to. Follow Instructions – All operating and use instructions should be followed. Cleaning – Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners. Attachments – Do not use attachments not recommended by the product manufacturer as they may cause hazards. Water and Moisture – Do not use this product near water – for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or laundry tub; in a wet basement; or near a swimming pool; and the like. Accessories – Do not place this product on an unstable cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table. The product may fall, causing serious injury to a child or adult, and serious damage to the product. Use only with a cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table recommended by the manufacturer, or sold with the product. Any mounting of the product should follow the manufacturer’s instructions, and should use a mounting accessory recommended by the manufacturer. A product and cart combination should be moved with care. Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven surfaces may cause the product and cart combination to overturn. 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Ventilation – Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation and to ensure reliable operation of the product and to protect it from overheating, and these openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings should never be blocked by placing the product on a bed, sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This product should not be placed in a built-in installation such as a bookcase or rack unless proper ventilation is provided or the manufacturer’s instructions have been adhered to. Power Sources – This product should be operated only from the type of power source indicated on the marking label. If you are not sure of the type of power supply to your home, consult your product dealer or local power company. For products intended to operate from battery power, or other sources, refer to the operating instructions. Grounding or Polarization – This product may be equipped with a polarized alternating current line plug (a plug having one blade wider than the other). This plug will fit into the power outlet only one way. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try reversing the plug. If the plug should still fail to fit, contact your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized plug. Power-Cord Protection – Power-supply cords should be routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon or against them, paying particular attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the product. Lightning – For added protection for this product during a lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for long periods of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent damage to the product due to lightning and power-line surges. Power Lines – An outside antenna system should not be located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other electric light or power circuits, or where it can fall into such power lines or circuits. When installing an outside antenna system, extreme care should be taken to keep from touching such power lines or circuits as contact with them might be fatal. Overloading – Do not overload wall outlets, extension cords, or integral convenience receptacles as this can result in a risk of fire or electric shock. Object and Liquid Entry – Never push objects of any kind into this product through openings as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short-out parts that could result in a fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on the product. Servicing – Do not attempt to service this product yourself as opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Damage Requiring Service – Unplug this product from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the following conditions: a) When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged, b) If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the product, c) If the product has been exposed to rain or water, IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS d) 20 21 22 23 If the product does not operate normally by following the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls that are covered by the operating instructions as an improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage and will often require extensive work by a qualified technician to restore the product to its normal operation, e) If the product has been dropped or damaged in any way, and f) When the product exhibits a distinct change in performance - this indicates a need for service. Replacement Parts – When replacement parts are required, be sure the service technician has used replacement parts specified by the manufacturer or have the same characteristics as the original part. Unauthorized substitutions may result in fire, electric shock, or other hazards. Safety Check – Upon completion of any service or repairs to this product, ask the service technician to perform safety checks to determine that the product is in proper operating condition. Wall or Ceiling Mounting – This unit should be mounted to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the manufacturer. Heat – The product should be situated away from heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other products (including amplifiers) that produce heat. 24 Outdoor Antenna Grounding – If an outside antenna or cable system is connected to the product, be sure the antenna or cable system is grounded so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges. Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, provides information with regard to proper grounding of the mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors, location of antenna discharge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode. EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING MAST ANTENNA LEAD IN WIRE GROUND CLAMP ANTENNA DISCHARGE UNIT (NEC SECTION 810–20) ELECTRIC SERVICE EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS (NEC SECTION 810–21) GROUND CLAMPS Note to CATV system installer: This reminder is provided to call the CATV system installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be connected to the grounding system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as practical. POWER SERVICE GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM (NEC ART 250. PART H) NEC – NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE FCC INFORMATION (for US customers) 1 IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product. 2 IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA. 3 NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning this unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to coaxial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Electronics Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA 90620. The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries. ii CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT. CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference. Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean place – away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration, dust, moisture, and/or cold. Allow ventilation space of at least 30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the left and right, and 20 cm on the back of this unit. Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors, or transformers to avoid humming sounds. Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in an environment with high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. Avoid installing this unit where a foreign object may fall onto this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping or splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place: – other components, as they may cause damage and/or discoloration on the surface of this unit. – burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. – containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and liquid may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to this unit. Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain, etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections are complete. Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat, possibly causing damage. Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords. When disconnecting the power cable from the wall outlet, grasp the plug; do not pull the cord. Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth. Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. YAMAHA will not be held responsible for any damage resulting from use of this unit with a voltage other than specified. To prevent damage by lightning, keep the power cable and outdoor antennas disconnected from a wall outlet or this unit during a lightning storm. Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified YAMAHA service personnel when any service is needed. The cabinet should never be opened for any reasons. When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time (i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. 16 17 18 19 Install this unit near the AC wall outlet where the power cable plug can be reached easily. Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section on common operating errors before concluding that this unit is faulty. Before moving this unit, press MASTER ON/OFF to release it outward to the OFF position to turn off this unit, and then disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet. VOLTAGE SELECTOR (General model only) The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging into the AC wall outlet. Voltages are 110/120/220/230–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz. WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. This unit is not disconnected from the AC power source as long as it is connected to the wall outlet, even if this unit itself is turned off. In this state, this unit is designed to consume a very small quantity of power. FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to wide slot and fully insert. This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. POUR LES CONSOMMATEURS CANADIENS Pour éviter les chocs électriques, introduire la lame la plus large de la fiche dans la borne correspondante de la prise et pousser jusqu’au fond. Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada. IMPORTANT Please record the serial number of this unit in the space below. MODEL: Serial No.: The serial number is located on the rear panel of this unit. Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future reference. COMPLIANCE INFORMATION STATEMENT (DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY PROCEDURE) Responsible Party: Address: Yamaha Electronics Corporation, U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe Avenue Buena Park, CA 90620 Telephone: 714-522-9105 Fax: 714-670-0108 Type of Equipment: AV Receiver Model Name: RX-N600 iii • This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. • Operation is subject to the following conditions: – This device may not cause harmful interference. – This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation. See the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section at the end of this manual if interference to radio reception is suspected. CONTENTS FEATURES............................................................. 2 GETTING STARTED............................................ 3 Supplied accessories .................................................. 3 Installing batteries in the remote control ................... 3 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS ......................... 4 PREPARATION CONNECTIONS .................................................. 12 BASIC OPERATION Connecting XM Passport System ............................ 54 XM Satellite Radio controls and functions.............. 55 Activating XM Satellite Radio ................................ 56 Basic XM Satellite Radio operations....................... 57 Selecting the XM Satellite Radio search mode ....... 58 Setting the XM Satellite Radio preset channels ...... 62 Displaying the XM Satellite Radio information...... 63 SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS .............................65 Selecting sound field programs ............................... 65 Sound field program descriptions............................ 66 Changing sound field parameter settings................. 68 ADVANCED OPERATION SET MENU ............................................................74 Using SET MENU................................................... 76 1 SOUND MENU.................................................... 77 2 INPUT MENU...................................................... 82 3 NET/USB MENU................................................. 84 4 OPTION MENU................................................... 86 ADVANCED SETUP ............................................90 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ...................93 Controlling this unit, a TV, or other components.... 93 Setting the remote control code ............................... 95 Setting library codes ................................................ 96 Resetting all remote control codes........................... 97 USING MULTI-ZONE CONFIGURATION .....98 Using SILENT CINEMA ........................................ 34 Muting the audio output........................................... 34 Selecting the night listening mode........................... 34 Selecting the input mode ......................................... 35 Using the sleep timer ............................................... 35 Adjusting the speaker level...................................... 36 Selecting the Compressed Music Enhancer mode... 37 Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT component......... 38 Enjoying multi-channel sources in 2-channel stereo39 Enjoying unprocessed input sources........................ 39 Enjoying pure hi-fi stereo sound.............................. 39 USING iPod® .......................................................101 Displaying the input source information ................. 40 Selecting the OSD mode.......................................... 41 Playing video sources in the background ................ 41 ENJOYING SURROUND SOUND .................... 42 Enjoying multi-channel sources in 6.1-channel surround ....................................... 42 Enjoying 2-channel sources in surround.................. 43 Using Virtual CINEMA DSP .................................. 44 Controlling iPod .................................................... 101 USING NETWORK/USB FEATURES.............103 Navigating the network and USB menus .............. 103 Using a PC server or YAMAHA MCX-2000......................................................... 105 Using the Internet radio ......................................... 106 Using a USB memory device or a USB portable audio player ............................. 107 RESETTING THE SYSTEM.............................108 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION TROUBLESHOOTING .....................................109 GLOSSARY.........................................................116 Audio information ................................................. 116 Video information.................................................. 118 Sound field program information .......................... 118 SPECIFICATIONS.............................................119 RECORDING ....................................................... 45 1 En ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Connecting Zone 2................................................... 98 Controlling Zone 2................................................... 99 ADVANCED OPERATION PLAYBACK.......................................................... 32 USING AUDIO FEATURES............................... 34 USING VIDEO FEATURES ............................... 40 SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS BASIC SETUP ...................................................... 29 XM® SATELLITE RADIO TUNING.................53 BASIC OPERATION Placing speakers....................................................... 12 Connecting speakers ................................................ 13 Information on jacks and cable plugs ...................... 16 Audio and video signal flow.................................... 17 Connecting a TV...................................................... 18 Connecting a DVD player, a DVD recorder, a VCR or an STB................................................. 19 Connecting a CD player, an MD player or a tape deck....................................................... 21 Connecting a YAMAHA iPod universal dock ........ 22 Connecting the network........................................... 23 Connecting a multi-format player, an external decoder or a sound processor............ 24 Connecting a game console, a video camera or a portable audio player .................................... 24 Connecting the FM and AM antennas ..................... 25 Connecting the power cable..................................... 26 Setting the speaker impedance................................. 27 Turning on and off the power .................................. 28 Automatic tuning ..................................................... 46 Manual tuning.......................................................... 47 Automatic preset tuning........................................... 48 Manual preset tuning ............................................... 49 Selecting preset stations........................................... 50 Exchanging preset stations ...................................... 51 PREPARATION Front panel ................................................................. 4 Remote control........................................................... 6 Front panel display .................................................... 9 Rear panel ................................................................ 11 FM/AM TUNING..................................................46 INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION FEATURES FEATURES Built-in 6-channel power amplifier iPod controlling capability ◆ Minimum RMS output power (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 Ω) Front: 95 W + 95 W Center: 95 W Surround: 95 W + 95 W Surround back: 95 W ◆ DOCK terminal to connect a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately), which supports iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini Sound field programs ◆ Proprietary YAMAHA technology for the creation of sound fields ◆ Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital EX decoder ◆ DTS/DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, Discrete 6.1, DTS Neo:6, DTS 96/24 decoder ◆ Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic II/ Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder ◆ Neural Surround decoder (U.S.A. and Canada models only) ◆ Virtual CINEMA DSP ◆ SILENT CINEMA™ Sophisticated AM/FM tuner ◆ 40-station random and direct preset tuning ◆ Automatic preset tuning ◆ Preset station shifting capability (preset editing) XM Satellite Radio (U.S.A. and Canada models only) ◆ XM Satellite Radio tuning capability (using “XM Passport System” sold separately) ◆ Neural Surround decoder to play back the surround sound content of the XM Satellite Radio broadcasts in multichannels, resulting in a full surround sound experience iPod® Network features ◆ LAN port to connect a PC and YAMAHA MCX-2000 or access the Internet radio via a LAN ◆ DHCP automatic or manual network configuration USB features ◆ USB port to connect a USB memory device or a USB portable audio player Other features ◆ 192-kHz/24-bit D/A converter ◆ OSD (on-screen display) menus that allow you to optimize this unit to suit your individual audiovisual system ◆ 6 additional input jacks for discrete multi-channel input ◆ S-video signal input/output capability ◆ Component video input/output capability (3 COMPONENT VIDEO INs and 1 MONITOR OUT) ◆ Digital video signal conversion (composite video ↔ S-video → component video) capability for monitor out ◆ Optical and coaxial digital audio signal jacks ◆ Sleep timer ◆ Cinema and music night listening modes ◆ Remote control with preset remote control codes, backlighting input selector buttons, and an iPod (stationed in a YAMAHA iPod universal dock connected to the DOCK terminal) controlling capability ◆ Zone 2 custom installation facility ◆ Zone switching capability between the main zone and Zone 2 using ZONE CONTROL ◆ Compressed Music Enhancer mode to improve the sound quality of compression artifacts (such as the MP3 format) to that of a high-quality stereo Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc. “DTS”, “DTS-ES”, “NEO:6”, and “DTS 96/24” are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. Copyright 1996, 2003 Digital Theater Systems, Inc. All right reserved. This receiver supports network connections. “SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of YAMAHA CORPORATION. “iPod” is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. Neural Surround™ name and related logos are trademarks owned by Neural Audio Corporation. The XM name and related logos are registered trademarks of XM Satellite Radio Inc. This unit contains programs licensed under the GNU General Public License and GNU Lesser General Public License. Windows XP, Windows Media Audio, Windows Media Connect are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft corporation in the United States and/or countries. MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson. 2 En GETTING STARTED GETTING STARTED Check that you received all of the following parts. Remote control CODE SET POWER Installing batteries in the remote control AM loop antenna 1 3 TRANSMIT POWER TV AV CD CD-R STANDBY POWER MD SLEEP XM MULTI CH IN CBL DTV TUNER V-AUX DVD DVR NET TV VOL TV CH VOLUME DOCK USB 2 AMP SOURCE TV TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 4 STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST. 5 6 7 8 SPEAKERS ENHANCER NIGHT STRAIGHT 9 0 10 MOVIE ENT. EFFECT PRESET/CH LEVEL TITLE SET MENU MENU SRCH MODE BAND Indoor FM antenna (U.S.A., Canada, China and General models) ENTER A-E/CAT. RETURN DISPLAY XM MEMORY ON SCREEN REC AUDIO PC/MCX NET RADIO 1 Take off the battery compartment cover. 2 Insert the two supplied batteries (AA, R6, UM-3) according to the polarity markings (+ and –) on the inside of the battery compartment. 3 Snap the battery compartment cover back into place. A-E/CAT. USB Batteries (2) (AA, R6, UM-3) Indoor FM antenna (Europe, Australia and Korea models) About this manual • y indicates a tip for your operation. • Some operations can be performed by using either the buttons on the front panel or the ones on the remote control. In case the button names differ between the front panel and the remote control, the button name on the remote control is given in parentheses. • This manual is printed prior to production. Design and specifications are subject to change in part as a result of improvements, etc. In case of differences between the manual and product, the product has priority. Notes • Change all of the batteries if you notice the following conditions: – the operation range of the remote control decreases. – the TRANSMIT indicator does not flash or its light becomes dim. • Do not use an old battery together with a new one. • Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as these different types of batteries may have the same shape and color. • If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before installing new batteries. • Do not throw away batteries with general house waste; dispose of them correctly in accordance with your local regulations. • If the remote control is without batteries for more than 2 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote control, the contents of the memory may be cleared. When the memory is cleared, insert new batteries and set up the remote control code that may have been cleared. 3 En INTRODUCTION Supplied accessories CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Front panel Note The XM Satellite Radio controlling functions in the following buttons (SEARCH MODE, CATEGORY, PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h, MEMORY, and DISPLAY) are only applicable to the U.S.A. and Canada models and are operational only when “XM” is selected as the input source. For details, see “XM Satellite Radio controls and functions” on page 55. 1 3 2 4 5 6 7 8 A 9 0 VOLUME ZONE 2 ON/OFF MASTER PRESET/TUNING EDIT FM/AM A/B/C/D/E l PRESET/TUNING/CH h MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM TUNING MODE AUTO/MAN'L LEVEL NEXT SEARCH MODE ON ZONE CONTROL CATEGORY DISPLAY OFF PROGRAM INPUT MAIN ZONE PHONES SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT VIDEO AUX VIDEO ON/OFF L AUDIO USB R EFFECT SILENT CINEMA (U.S.A. model) B C DE F G H 1 MASTER ON/OFF Turns on or off this unit (see page 28). 2 MAIN ZONE ON/OFF Turns on the main zone or sets it to the standby mode (see page 28). Notes • In the standby mode, this unit consumes a small amount of power in order to receive infrared signals from the remote control. • When you turn on this unit, there will be a 4 to 5-second delay before this unit can reproduce sound. • This button is operational only when MASTER ON/OFF is pressed inward to the ON position. 3 Remote control sensor Receives signals from the remote control (see page 8). 4 Front panel display Shows information about the operational status of this unit (see page 9). 4 En I J K L M 5 A/B/C/D/E, NEXT • Selects one of the 5 preset station groups (A to E) when “TUNER” is selected as the input source (see page 49). • Selects the speaker channel whose output level you want to adjust when “TUNER” is not selected as the input source (see page 36). 6 PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h, LEVEL • Selects one of the 8 preset station numbers (1 to 8) when “TUNER” is selected as the input source. The colon (:) is displayed in the front panel display (see page 50). • Selects the tuning frequency when “TUNER” is selected as the input source. The colon (:) is not displayed in the front panel display (see page 46). • Adjusts the level of the speaker channel selected using NEXT when “TUNER” is not selected as the input source (see page 36). 7 MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) Stores a preset station in the memory. Hold down this button for more than 3 seconds to start automatic preset tuning (see page 48). CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS 9 ZONE 2 ON/OFF Turns on Zone 2 or sets it to the standby mode (see page 99). Note This button is operational only when MASTER ON/OFF is pressed inward to the ON position. 0 ZONE CONTROL Switches the zone you want to control between the main zone and Zone 2 (see page 99). y When Zone 2 is selected, the ZONE2 indicator flashes in the front panel display for approximately 5 seconds. While the indicator is flashing, perform the desired operation. A VOLUME Controls the output level of all audio channels. y This does not affect the AUDIO OUT (REC) level. B PHONES (SILENT CINEMA) jack Outputs audio signals for private listening with headphones (see page 34). Notes • When you connect headphones, no signals are output at the SUBWOOFER OUTPUT jack or the speaker terminals. • All Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals are mixed down to the left and right headphone channels. C SPEAKERS A/B Turns on or off the set of front speakers connected to the FRONT A and/or B terminals on the rear panel each time the corresponding button is pressed. D PRESET/TUNING, EDIT • Switches the function of PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h between selecting preset station numbers and selecting the tuning frequency. • Edits the assignments of preset stations (see page 51). E STRAIGHT (EFFECT) Turns the sound field programs off or on. When the “STRAIGHT” mode is selected, 2-channel or multichannel input signals are output directly from their respective speakers without effect processing (see page 39). F FM/AM Switches the reception band between FM and AM when “TUNER” is selected as the input source (see page 46). G PROGRAM selector Selects sound field programs or adjusts the bass/treble balance in conjunction with TONE CONTROL (see page 33). H TONE CONTROL Adjusts the bass/treble balance of the front left and right speakers in conjunction with the PROGRAM selector (see page 33). I INPUT MODE Selects either digital or analog input signals exclusively or sets this unit to automatically detect the type of input signals and select the corresponding input signals when one component is connected via both digital and analog connections (see page 35). J INPUT selector Selects the desired input source. K MULTI CH INPUT Selects the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks as the input source (see page 38). Note The input source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks takes priority over the source selected with the INPUT selector on the front panel (or the input selector buttons on the remote control). L VIDEO AUX jacks Input audio and video signals from a portable external source such as a game console, a video camera or a portable audio player (see page 24). y To reproduce the source signals input at these jacks, select “V-AUX” as the input source. Note The audio signals input at the DOCK terminal on the rear panel take priority over the ones input at the VIDEO AUX jacks. M USB port Use to connect a USB memory device or a USB portable audio player (see page 107). 5 En INTRODUCTION 8 TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L) Switches between automatic tuning (the AUTO indicator is turned on) and manual tuning (the AUTO indicator is turned off) (see page 46). CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Remote control This section describes the function of each control on the remote control used to control this unit. To operate other components, see “REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES” on page 93. Notes • The operation mode of the remote control buttons in the shaded area below depends on the component selector switch position. Set the component selector switch to AMP to control this unit. To control the TUNER functions, set the component selector switch to SOURCE and then press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source. • The XM Satellite Radio controlling functions in the following buttons (XM, XM MEMORY, SRCH MODE, DISPLAY, cursor buttons u / d / j / i, numeric buttons and ENT.) are only applicable to the U.S.A. and Canada models and are operational only when “XM” is selected as the input source. For details, see “XM Satellite Radio controls and functions” on page 55. 1 2 0 CODE SET A TRANSMIT POWER POWER TV AV CD CD-R STANDBY POWER B MD SLEEP XM 3 DVD C MULTI CH IN CBL D TUNER DTV DOCK USB V-AUX DVR NET AMP SOURCE TV VOL TV CH VOLUME E F TV 4 5 6 7 TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN G 1 2 3 4 SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST. 5 6 7 8 SPEAKERS ENHANCER NIGHT STRAIGHT 9 0 ENT. 10 EFFECT PRESET/CH LEVEL SET MENU TITLE MENU SRCH MODE BAND H I J ENTER A-E/CAT. 9 A-E/CAT. RETURN DISPLAY XM MEMORY ON SCREEN K REC AUDIO PC/MCX NET RADIO Set the component selector switch to AMP to control this unit. 1 Infrared window Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the component you want to operate (see page 8). 2 CODE SET Use to set up remote control codes (see page 95). 3 Input selector buttons Select the input source you want to control. Note The corresponding input selector button for the currently selected input source lights up for approximately 5 seconds after you press any buttons on the remote control, showing which source component is currently being operated. MOVIE STANDARD 8 ■ Controlling this unit USB L 4 Sound field program selector buttons Select sound field programs (see page 65). – Use SELECT to play back 2-channel sources in surround (see page 43). – Use EXTD SUR. to switch between 5.1 and 6.1-channel playback of multi-channel sources (see page 42). – Use DIRECT ST. to play back 2-channel sources in hi-fi stereo sound (see page 39). 5 SPEAKERS Turns on or off the set of front speakers connected to the FRONT A and/or B terminals on the rear panel. Press this button repeatedly to toggle as follows: A on B on A and B off (U.S.A. model) 6 En CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS 6 ENHANCER Turns on or off the Compressed Music Enhancer mode (see page 37). Notes 8 Cursor buttons u / d / j / i, ENTER Select and adjust the sound field program parameters or the “SET MENU” parameters. G MUTE Mutes the audio output. Press again to restore the audio output to the previous volume level (see page 34). 9 RETURN Returns to the previous menu level when adjusting the “SET MENU” parameters. 0 TRANSMIT indicator Flashes while the remote control is sending infrared signals. H STRAIGHT (EFFECT) Turns the sound field programs off or on. When the “STRAIGHT” mode is selected, 2-channel or multichannel input signals are output directly from their respective speakers without effect processing (see page 39). A STANDBY Sets this unit to the standby mode (see page 28). I NIGHT Turns on or off the night listening modes (see page 34). Note J SET MENU Enters “SET MENU” (see page 76). This button is operational only when MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel is pressed inward to the ON position. B POWER Turns on this unit (see page 28). Note This button is operational only when MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel is pressed inward to the ON position. C SLEEP Sets the sleep timer (see page 35). D MULTI CH IN Selects the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks as the input source when using an external decoder, etc. (see page 38). E VOLUME +/– Increases or decreases the volume level. F Component selector switch Selects the operation mode of the remote control buttons in the shaded area. AMP Operates this unit. SOURCE Operates the component selected with an input selector button (see page 94). K DISPLAY Selects the on-screen display (OSD) mode for your video monitor (see page 41). L Network and USB input selector buttons Select the sub input source of NET/USB (see page 103). PC/MCX Selects a PC server or YAMAHA MCX-2000 as the sub input source of NET/USB. NET RADIO Selects the Internet radio as the sub input source of NET/USB. USB Selects a USB memory device or a USB portable audio player as the sub input source of NET/USB. Notes • Press NET/USB to select “NET/USB” as the input source before you press any of the network and USB input selector buttons stated above to select the corresponding sub input source of NET/USB. • When you press any of the network and USB input selector buttons, the contents previously played for the corresponding sub input source of NET/USB is automatically played. TV Operates the TV assigned to either DTV/CBL or (see page 93). 7 En INTRODUCTION 7 LEVEL Selects the speaker channel to be adjusted and sets the output level (see page 36). • To set the remote control codes for other components, see page 95. • When you set the remote control codes for both DTV/CBL and (see page 95), priority is given to the one set for DTV/ CBL. CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS ■ Controlling the TUNER functions ■ Using the remote control Set the component selector switch to SOURCE and then press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source. The remote control transmits a directional infrared ray. Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote control sensor on this unit during operation. 4 Numeric buttons Use numbers 1 through 8 to select preset stations. (U.S.A. model) 7 BAND Switches the reception band between FM and AM. VOLUME 8 Cursor buttons u / d / j / i Press j / i to select a preset station group (A to E) and u / d to select a preset station number (1 to 8) (see page 50). ZONE 2 ON/OFF MASTER FM/AM PRESET/TUNING EDIT A/B/C/D/E l PRESET/TUNING/CH h SEARCH MODE ON MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L ZONE CONTROL LEVEL NEXT CATEGORY DISPLAY OFF PROGRAM INPUT MAIN ZONE PHONES SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT VIDEO AUX VIDEO ON/OFF L AUDIO USB R EFFECT SILENT CINEMA 30 30 CODE SET Approximately 6 m (20 ft) TRANSMIT POWER POWER TV AV CD CD-R STANDBY POWER MD SLEEP XM MULTI CH IN CBL DVD DTV TUNER DOCK USB V-AUX DVR NET TV VOL TV CH VOLUME TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE MUSIC ENTERTAIN AMP SOURCE TV STEREO 1 STANDARD 2 3 SELECT EXTD SUR. MOVIE 4 DIRECT ST. 5 6 7 8 SPEAKERS ENHANCER NIGHT STRAIGHT 9 0 10 ENT. EFFECT PRESET/CH LEVEL SET MENU TITLE MENU SRCH MODE BAND ENTER A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT. RETURN DISPLAY XM MEMORY ON SCREEN REC AUDIO PC/MCX NET RADIO USB Notes • Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control. • Do not drop the remote control. • Do not leave or store the remote control in the following types of conditions: – places of high humidity, such as near a bath – places of high temperatures, such as near a heater or stove – places of extremely low temperatures – dusty places 8 En CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Front panel display 1 2 3 t 5 6 7 8 9 0 A C B pDVR pV-AUX pDTV/CBL pDVD pMD/CD-R pTUNER pCD pXM pNET USB 96 24 MATRIX DISCRETE ENHANCER q EX 4 DOCK VIRTUAL STANDARD SP SILENT CINEMA A B ZONE2 NIGHT AUTO TUNED STEREO MEMORY HiFi DSP PTY HOLD PS PTY RT CT EON SLEEP q DIGITAL q PL PCM neural mS dB E D F G H I J K Note The neural indicator is only applicable to the U.S.A. and Canada models and lights up only when the Neural Surround decoder is selected (see page 43). 2 ENHANCER indicator Lights up when the Compressed Music Enhancer mode is turned on (see page 37). 3 Sound field indicators Light up to indicate the active DSP sound fields. Presence DSP sound field Listening position Surround left DSP sound field Surround right DSP sound field Surround back DSP sound field 4 VIRTUAL indicator Lights up when Virtual CINEMA DSP is active (see page 44). 5 Input source indicators The corresponding cursor lights up to show the currently selected input source. 96/24 LFE L C R SL SB SR L M N Q 1 Decoder indicators The respective indicator lights up when any of the decoders of this unit functions. dB MUTE ft q PL x q PL VOLUME O P (Europe model only) 6 DOCK indicator Lights up when you station your iPod in a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit (see page 22). 7 SILENT CINEMA indicator Lights up when headphones are connected and a sound field program is selected (see page 34). 8 CINEMA DSP indicator Lights up when you select a CINEMA DSP sound field program (see page 66). 9 AUTO indicator Lights up when this unit is in the automatic tuning mode (see page 46). 0 TUNED indicator Lights up when this unit is tuned into a station (see page 46). A STEREO indicator Lights up when this unit is receiving a strong signal for an FM stereo broadcast while the AUTO indicator is lit. B MEMORY indicator Flashes to show that a station can be stored (see page 48). 9 En INTRODUCTION Note The XM indicator is only applicable to the U.S.A. and Canada models and the cursor on the left of the XM indicator lights up only when “XM” is selected as the input source. For details, see “Basic XM Satellite Radio operations” on page 57. CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS C VOLUME level indicator Indicates the current volume level. D PCM indicator Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) digital audio signals. E STANDARD indicator Lights up when the “SUR. STANDARD” or “SUR. ENHANCED” program is selected. F SP A B indicators Light up according to the set of front speakers selected. G Headphones indicator Lights up when headphones are connected. H ZONE2 indicator Lights up when Zone 2 is turned on (see page 99). I NIGHT indicator Lights up when you select a night listening mode (see page 34). J HiFi DSP indicator Lights up when you select a HiFi DSP sound field program (see page 67). K Multi-information display Shows the name of the current sound field program and other information when adjusting or changing settings. L SLEEP indicator Lights up while the sleep timer is on (see page 35). M MUTE indicator Flashes while the MUTE function is on (see page 34). N 96/24 indicator Lights up when a DTS 96/24 signal is input to this unit. O Input channel indicators Indicate the channel components of the current digital input signal. P LFE indicator Lights up when the input signal contains the LFE signal. Q Radio Data System indicators (Europe model only) The corresponding indicator lights up to show the type of the Radio Data System information. EON Lights up when the EON data service is being received. PTY HOLD Lights up while searching for the Radio Data System stations in the PTY SEEK mode. 10 En CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Rear panel 2 AUDIO 3 AUDIO 45 6 MULTI CH INPUT OUTPUT 7 DIGITAL OUTPUT CENTER MD/CD-R DIGITAL INPUT MD/CD-R DVD DTV/CBL 8 9 0 XM DOCK LAN DVD Y IN MD/ OUT (PLAY) CD-R (REC) CD FRONT SURROUND SUB WOOFER ZONE 2 SUB WOOFER OPTICAL OPTICAL A INTRODUCTION 1 PB PR Y PB PR COAXIAL DVR DVD DTV/ CBL DVD DTV/CBL IN DVR OUT VIDEO TUNER AM ANT GND MONITOR OUT DVD IN DTV/CBL DVR OUT S VIDEO MONITOR OUT MONITOR OUT COMPONENT VIDEO SPEAKERS FM ANT 75Ω UNBAL. SURROUND FRONT A REMOTE IN OUT CONTROL OUT +12V 15mA MAX. B CENTER SURROUND BACK (U.S.A. model) B C D E 1 Video component jacks See pages 18 and 19 for connection information. 2 Audio component jacks See page 21 for connection information. 3 MULTI CH INPUT jacks See page 24 for connection information. 4 ZONE 2 OUTPUT jacks See page 98 for connection information. Note These jacks output analog signals only. 5 SUBWOOFER OUTPUT jack See page 13 for connection information. 6 DIGITAL OUTPUT jack See page 21 for connection information. 7 DIGITAL INPUT jacks See pages 19 and 21 for connection information. 8 XM jack (U.S.A. and Canada models only) See page 54 for connection information. 9 DOCK terminal Use to connect a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) where your iPod can be stationed. See page 22 for connection information. F 0 LAN port Use to connect a network cable for network connections. See page 23 for connection information. A COMPONENT VIDEO jacks See pages 18 and 19 for connection information. B REMOTE jacks See page 98 for details. C CONTROL OUT jack This is a control expansion terminal for custom installation. D Antenna terminals See page 25 for connection information. E Speaker terminals See page 13 for connection information. F AC OUTLET(S) Use to supply power to your other audiovisual components. See page 26 for details. ■ VOLTAGE SELECTOR (General model only) See page 26 for details. 11 En CONNECTIONS CONNECTIONS Placing speakers The speaker layout below shows the standard ITU-R* speaker setting. You can use it to enjoy CINEMA DSP and multi-channel audio sources. * ITU-R is the radio communication sector of the ITU (International Telecommunication Union). FL Center speaker (C) The center speaker is for the center channel sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.). If for some reason it is not practical to use a center speaker, you can do without it. Best results, however, are obtained with the full system. Place the center speaker centrally between the front speakers and as close to the monitor as possible, such as directly over or under it. FR C 30˚ SL SR Surround left and right speakers (SL and SR) The surround speakers are used for effect and surround sounds. Place these speakers behind your listening position, facing slightly inwards, about 1.8 m (6 ft) above the floor. 60˚ SL 80˚ SR SB FR SW FL SR C SL SB 1.8 m (6 ft) 12 En Front left and right speakers (FL and FR) The front speakers are used for the main source sound plus effect sounds. Place these speakers at an equal distance from the ideal listening position. The distance of each speaker from each side of the video monitor should be the same. Surround back speaker (SB) The surround back speaker supplements the surround speakers and provides more realistic front-to-back transitions. Place this speaker directly behind the listening position and at the same height as the surround speakers. Subwoofer (SW) The use of a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier, such as the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, is effective not only for reinforcing bass frequencies from any or all channels, but also for high fidelity reproduction of the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel included in Dolby Digital and DTS sources. The position of the subwoofer is not so critical, because low bass sounds are not highly directional. But it is better to place the subwoofer near the front speakers. Turn it slightly toward the center of the room to reduce wall reflections. CONNECTIONS Connecting speakers Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are faulty, no sound will be heard from the speakers, and if the polarity of the speaker connections is incorrect, the sound will be unnatural and lack bass. CAUTION Note A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables running side by side. Cables are colored or shaped differently, perhaps with a stripe, groove or ridge. Connect the striped (grooved, etc.) cable to the “+” (red) terminals of this unit and your speaker. Connect the plain cable to the “–” (black) terminals. Front speakers (A) Right Left Surround speakers Right Left 1 2 4 5 Subwoofer 7 OUTPUT SUB WOOFER SPEAKERS FRONT SURROUND A B CENTER SURROUND BACK (U.S.A. model) Front speakers (B) 3 6 Center speaker Surround back speaker 13 En PREPARATION • Before connecting the speakers, make sure that this unit is turned off (see page 28). • Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or do not let them touch any metal part of this unit. This could damage this unit and/or speakers. • Use magnetically shielded speakers. If this type of speakers still creates the interference with the monitor, place the speakers away from the monitor. • If you are to use 6 ohm speakers, be sure to set “SP IMP.” to “6ΩMIN” before using this unit (see page 27). 4 ohm speakers can be also used as the front speakers (see page 91). CONNECTIONS FRONT terminals Connect one or two sets of front speakers (1, 2) to these terminals. If you use only one front speaker system, connect it to the FRONT A or B terminal. CENTER terminals Connect a center speaker (3) to these terminals. SURROUND terminals Connect surround speakers (4, 5) to these terminals. SURROUND BACK terminals Connect a surround back speaker (6) to these terminals. SUBWOOFER OUTPUT jack Connect a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier (7) (such as the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System) to this jack. 14 En 1 7 2 4 3 5 Speaker layout 6 CONNECTIONS ■ Connecting the speaker cable ■ Connecting the banana plug (except Europe model) 1 The banana plug is a single-pole electrical connector widely used to terminate speaker cables. Remove approximately 10 mm (0.4 in) of insulation from the end of each speaker cable and then twist the exposed wires of the cable together to prevent short circuits. Banana plug 10 mm (0.4 in) 2 PREPARATION 1 Tighten the knob. Loosen the knob. Red: positive (+) Black: negative (–) Red: positive (+) Black: negative (–) 2 3 Insert one bare wire into the hole on the side of each terminal. 4 Tighten the knob to secure the wire. Insert the banana plug connector into the end of the corresponding terminal. 15 En CONNECTIONS Information on jacks and cable plugs Audio jacks and cable plugs DIGITAL AUDIO DIGITAL AUDIO L R COAXIAL OPTICAL (White) (Red) (Orange) L R C AUDIO Left and right Coaxial analog audio digital audio cable plugs cable plug Video jacks and cable plugs VIDEO S VIDEO (Yellow) O V S Optical digital audio cable plug Composite video cable plug S-video cable plug COMPONENT VIDEO Y PB PR (Green) (Blue) (Red) Y PB PR Component video cable plugs ■ Audio jacks ■ Video jacks This unit has three types of audio jacks. Connection depends on the availability of audio jacks on your other components. This unit has three types of video jacks. Connection depends on the availability of input jacks on your video monitor. AUDIO jacks For conventional analog audio signals transmitted via left and right analog audio cables. Connect red plugs to the right jacks and white plugs to the left jacks. VIDEO jacks For conventional composite video signals transmitted via composite video cables. DIGITAL AUDIO COAXIAL jacks For digital audio signals transmitted via coaxial digital audio cables. DIGITAL AUDIO OPTICAL jacks For digital audio signals transmitted via optical digital audio cables. Notes • You can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and DTS bitstreams. When you connect components to both the COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the signals input at the COAXIAL jack. All digital input jacks are compatible with 96-kHz sampling digital signals. • Pull out the cap from the optical jack before you connect the fiber optic cable. Do not discard the cap. When you are not using the optical jack, be sure to put the cap back in place. This cap protects the jack from dust. 16 En S VIDEO jacks For S-video signals, separated into the luminance (Y) and chrominance (C) video signals transmitted on separate wires of S-video cables. COMPONENT VIDEO jacks For component video signals, separated into the luminance (Y) and chrominance (PB, PR) video signals transmitted on separate wires of component video cables. y When “VIDEO CONV.” is set to “ON” (see page 86), the video signals input at the VIDEO and S VIDEO jacks are converted and output at the VIDEO, S VIDEO and COMPONENT VIDEO jacks interchangeably. CONNECTIONS Audio and video signal flow ■ Audio signal flow for AUDIO OUT (REC) Input Output AUDIO OUT (REC) DIGITAL AUDIO COAXIAL Digital audio L R L R Analog audio AUDIO Digital output Analog output Note This unit handles digital and analog signals independently. Thus, audio signals input at the analog jacks are output only at the analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks. Likewise, audio signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT (OPTICAL or COAXIAL) jacks are output only at the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack. ■ Video signal flow for MONITOR OUT Input Y PB Output (MONITOR OUT) PR Y PB PR COMPONENT VIDEO Analog video S VIDEO VIDEO Through Video conversion when “VIDEO CONV.” is set to “ON” (see page 86) Note If video signals are input at the COMPONENT VIDEO, S VIDEO and VIDEO jacks simultaneously when “VIDEO CONV.” is set to “ON”, the priority order of the input signals is as follows: COMPONENT VIDEO > S VIDEO > VIDEO 17 En PREPARATION DIGITAL AUDIO OPTICAL CONNECTIONS Connecting a TV Connect your TV to the VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack, the S VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack or the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks of this unit. CAUTION Do not connect this unit or other components to the AC power supply until all connections between components are complete. (U.S.A. model) Y VIDEO MONITOR OUT MONITOR OUT MONITOR OUT S VIDEO V COMPONENT VIDEO S Y PB PR S-video in Component video in Video in TV 18 En PB PR CONNECTIONS Connecting a DVD player, a DVD recorder, a VCR or an STB Connect your DVD player, DVD recorder, VCR or STB (set-top box) using the same type of video connections as those made for your TV (see page 18). The cable TV receiver and the satellite receiver are examples of the STB. CAUTION Do not connect this unit or other components to the AC power supply until all connections between components are complete. Notes ■ Connecting a DVD player DVD player S O AUDIO C Coaxial audio out V Optical audio out L S-video out R Component video out Video out Audio out Y PR PB (U.S.A. model) DIGITAL INPUT DVD DVD OPTICAL COAXIAL Y DVD PB PR DVD DVD VIDEO S VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO 19 En PREPARATION • When “VIDEO CONV.” is set to “OFF” (see page 86), be sure to make the same type of video connections as those made for your TV (see page 18). For example, if you connected your TV to the VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack of this unit, connect your other components to the VIDEO jacks. • When “VIDEO CONV.” is set to “ON” (see page 86), the converted video signals are output only at the MONITOR OUT jacks. When recording a source, you must make the same type of video connections between each component. • To make a digital connection to a component other than the default component assigned to each DIGITAL INPUT or DIGITAL OUTPUT jack, select the corresponding setting for “OPTICAL OUT”, “OPTICAL IN”, or “COAXIAL IN” in “I/O ASSIGNMENT” (see page 82). • If you connect your DVD player to both the DIGITAL INPUT (OPTICAL) and the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jacks, priority is given to the signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jack. CONNECTIONS ■ Connecting a DVD recorder or a VCR (U.S.A. model) AUDIO Y PB PR DVR DVR OUT IN COMPONENT VIDEO L V V S S-video in R S-video out L Video out Audio in Audio out R DVR OUT S VIDEO Video in IN VIDEO S Y PB PR Component video out DVD recorder or VCR ■ Connecting an STB Cable TV receiver or satellite receiver S O AUDIO Optical audio out V S-video out L Video out R Audio out Component video out Y PB PR (U.S.A. model) DIGITAL INPUT DTV/CBL Y PB PR OPTICAL DTV/ CBL DTV/CBL VIDEO 20 En DTV/CBL S VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO CONNECTIONS Connecting a CD player, an MD player or a tape deck Connect your CD player, MD player or tape deck via analog and/or digital connections. CAUTION Do not connect this unit or other components to the AC power supply until all connections between components are complete. Note CD player Audio out R L (U.S.A. model) DIGITAL OUTPUT MD/CD-R MD/ OUT OPTICAL (PLAY) CD-R (REC) O Audio out R L R L Audio in Optical audio in IN CD DIGITAL INPUT MD/CD-R OPTICAL O Optical audio out AUDIO MD recorder or tape deck 21 En PREPARATION To make a digital connection to a component other than the default component assigned to each DIGITAL INPUT or DIGITAL OUTPUT jack, select the corresponding setting for “OPTICAL OUT”, “OPTICAL IN”, or “COAXIAL IN” in “I/O ASSIGNMENT” (see page 82). CONNECTIONS Connecting a YAMAHA iPod universal dock This unit is equipped with the DOCK terminal on the rear panel that allows you to connect a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) where you can station your iPod and control playback of your iPod using the supplied remote control. Connect a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) to the DOCK terminal on the rear panel of this unit using its dedicated cable. Once the connection is complete, station your iPod in the YAMAHA iPod universal dock. CAUTION Do not connect this unit or other components to the AC power supply until all connections between components are complete. Notes • Only iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini are supported. • You need a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) and its dedicated cable compatible with the DOCK terminal of this unit. • Do not connect any iPod accessories (such as headphones, a wired remote control, or an FM transmitter) to your iPod when it is stationed in a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately). • Once your iPod is stationed in a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit, this unit begins the signal transmission with your iPod. • Unless your iPod is firmly stationed in a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit, audio and/or video signals may not be output properly. • Once the connection between your iPod and this unit is complete, “iPod connected” appears in the front panel display and the DOCK indicator lights up in the front panel display. If the connection between your iPod and this unit fails, a status message appears in the front panel display. For a complete list of connection status messages, see the iPod section in “TROUBLESHOOTING” on page 113. • Only analog audio and video signals of your iPod are input at the DOCK terminal, and the analog audio signals can be output at the analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks for recording. • Your iPod battery is automatically charged when your iPod is stationed in a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit as long as this unit is turned on. • Depending on the type of iPod, you may need to insert one of the iPod adapters supplied with a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) into the dock slot before you station your iPod. iPod YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) (U.S.A. model) DOCK 22 En CONNECTIONS Connecting the network To connect this unit to your network, plug one end of a network cable (CAT-5 or higher straight cable) into the LAN port of this unit, and plug the other end into one of the LAN ports on your router that supports the DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server function. The following diagram shows a connection example where this unit is connected to one of the LAN ports on a 4-port router. To enjoy music files saved on your PC and YAMAHA MCX-2000 or access the Internet radio, each device must be connected properly in the network. Note If the DHCP server function on your router is disabled, you need to configure the network settings manually (see page 84). YAMAHA MCX-C15 Internet WAN YAMAHA MCX-A10 (with optional speakers) PC LAN Modem Router Network cable (U.S.A. model) LAN 23 En PREPARATION YAMAHA MCX-2000 CONNECTIONS Connecting a multi-format player, an external decoder or a sound processor This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R and SUBWOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from a multi-format player, external decoder or sound processor. Connect the output jacks on your multi-format player, external decoder or sound processor to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Be sure to match the left and right output jacks to the left and right input jacks for the front and surround channels. CAUTION Do not connect this unit or other components to the AC power supply until all connections between components are complete. Connecting a game console, a video camera or a portable audio player Use the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel to connect a game console, a video camera or a portable audio player to this unit. CAUTION Be sure to turn off the volume of this unit and other components before making connections. Note The audio signals input at the DOCK terminal takes priority over the ones input at the VIDEO AUX jacks. (U.S.A. model) VOLUME Notes ZONE 2 ON/OFF MASTER PRESET/TUNING EDIT FM/AM L R SUB WOOFER Multi-format player, external decoder or sound processor 24 En AUTO/MAN'L INPUT PHONES SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT VIDEO AUX VIDEO ON/OFF EFFECT SILENT CINEMA VIDEO AUX VIDEO L L AUDIO R R Game console, video camera or portable audio player Center out R SURROUND Subwoofer out Front out L Surround out FRONT TUNING MODE DISPLAY PROGRAM Video out CENTER MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM LEVEL CATEGORY OFF V MULTI CH INPUT l PRESET/TUNING/CH h A/B/C/D/E NEXT SEARCH MODE ON MAIN ZONE Audio out • When you select the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks as the input source (see page 38), this unit automatically turns off the digital sound field processor, and you cannot select sound field programs. • This unit does not redirect signals input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to accommodate for missing speakers. We recommend that you connect at least a 5.1-channel speaker system before using this feature. • When headphones are used, only the signals input at the FRONT L/R jacks are output at the PHONES jack. ZONE CONTROL L AUDIO USB R CONNECTIONS Connecting the FM and AM antennas Both FM and AM indoor antennas are supplied with this unit. In general, these antennas should provide sufficient signal strength. Connect each antenna correctly to the designated terminals. 2 Press and hold the tab of the AM ANT terminal. 3 Insert one of the AM loop antenna lead wires into the AM ANT terminal. 4 Release the tab of the AM ANT terminal back into place. 5 Repeat steps 2 through 4 to connect the other lead wire to the GND terminal. Notes AM loop antenna (supplied) Indoor FM antenna (supplied) TUNER AM ANT GND FM ANT 75Ω UNBAL. Ground (GND terminal) For maximum safety and minimum interference, connect the antenna GND terminal to a good earth ground. A good earth ground is a metal stake driven into moist earth. Outdoor AM antenna Use a 5 to 10 m (16 to 32 ft) of vinylcovered wire extended from a window. ■ Connecting the AM loop antenna 1 Set up the AM loop antenna. y Once you have properly connected the AM loop antenna to this unit, orient the AM loop antenna for the best reception when you tune into AM stations. 25 En PREPARATION • Be sure to set the tuner frequency step (General model only) according to the frequency spacing in your area (see page 92). • The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit. • The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit. • A properly installed outdoor antenna provides clearer reception than an indoor one. If you experience poor reception quality, install an outdoor antenna. Consult the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center about outdoor antennas. CONNECTIONS Connecting the power cable Once all connections are complete, plug the power cable into the AC wall outlet. (U.S.A. model) AC OUTLETS To the AC wall outlet ■ VOLTAGE SELECTOR (General model only) ■ AC OUTLET(S) (SWITCHED) Australia model...................................................... 1 outlet Korea model............................................................... None Other models......................................................... 2 outlets CAUTION The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit must be set for your local voltage BEFORE plugging the power cable into the AC wall outlet. Improper setting of the VOLTAGE SELECTOR may cause damage to this unit and create a potential fire hazard. Rotate the VOLTAGE SELECTOR clockwise or counterclockwise to the correct position using a straight slot screwdriver. Voltages are 110/120/220/230–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz. VOLTAGE SELECTOR 230240V 26 En Voltage indication Use these outlet(s) to supply power to any connected components. Connect the power cable of your other components to these outlet(s). Power to these outlet(s) is supplied when the main zone or Zone 2 is turned on. However, power to these outlet(s) is cut off when both the main zone and Zone 2 are turned off or when MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel is pressed and released outward to the OFF position. For information on the maximum power or the total power consumption of the components that can be connected to these outlet(s), see “SPECIFICATIONS” on page 119. Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode. However, the stored data will be lost in case the power cable is disconnected from the AC wall outlet or if the power supply is cut off for more than one week. CONNECTIONS Setting the speaker impedance CAUTION 4 If you are to use 6 ohm speakers, set “SP IMP.” to “6ΩMIN” as follows BEFORE using this unit. 4 ohm speakers can be also used as the front speakers. Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the front panel repeatedly to select “6ΩMIN”. The following display appears in the front panel display. STRAIGHT 2,5 (U.S.A. model) EFFECT PREPARATION VOLUME ZONE 2 ON/OFF MASTER PRESET/TUNING EDIT FM/AM l PRESET/TUNING/CH h A/B/C/D/E MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM TUNING MODE AUTO/MAN'L LEVEL NEXT SEARCH MODE ON ZONE CONTROL CATEGORY DISPLAY OFF PROGRAM INPUT MAIN ZONE PHONES SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT VIDEO AUX VIDEO ON/OFF L AUDIO SP IMP.-6 MIN USB R EFFECT SILENT CINEMA 5 2,4 3 1 Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to release it outward to the OFF position to save the new setting and turn off this unit. Make sure this unit is turned off. See page 28 for details about turning on or off this unit. MASTER ON 2 Press and hold STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the front panel and then press MASTER ON/OFF inward to the ON position to turn on this unit. This unit turns on, and the advanced setup menu appears in the front panel display. OFF Note The setting you made is reflected next time you turn on this unit. While holding down MASTER STRAIGHT EFFECT 3 ON OFF Rotate the PROGRAM selector on the front panel to select “SP IMP.”. The following display appears in the front panel display. PROGRAM SP IMP.-8 MIN 27 En CONNECTIONS Turning on and off the power When all connections are complete, turn on this unit. MASTER ON/OFF (U.S.A. model) (U.S.A. model) CODE SET STANDBY TRANSMIT POWER POWER TV AV CD CD-R STANDBY POWER POWER VOLUME ZONE 2 ON/OFF ZONE CONTROL MD SLEEP XM MULTI CH IN CBL MASTER PRESET/TUNING EDIT FM/AM A/B/C/D/E l PRESET/TUNING/CH h MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM TUNING MODE AUTO/MAN'L DVD LEVEL NEXT SEARCH MODE ON CATEGORY DTV TUNER V-AUX DVR NET TV VOL TV CH VOLUME DISPLAY DOCK OFF PROGRAM PHONES SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT USB INPUT MAIN ZONE TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT VIDEO AUX VIDEO ON/OFF L AUDIO USB R AMP EFFECT SILENT CINEMA SOURCE TV MAIN ZONE ON/OFF ■ Turning on this unit ■ Turning off this unit Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel inward to the ON position to turn on this unit. Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to release it outward to the OFF position to turn off this unit. MASTER MASTER ON OFF Front panel ON • Press MAIN ZONE ON/OFF on the front panel (or STANDBY on the remote control) to set the main zone to the standby mode. MAIN ZONE STANDBY ON/OFF or Front panel Remote control • Press MAIN ZONE ON/OFF on the front panel (or POWER on the remote control) to turn on the main zone. MAIN ZONE POWER ON/OFF Front panel or Remote control Note MAIN ZONE ON/OFF on the front panel as well as POWER and STANDBY on the remote control are operational only when MASTER ON/OFF is pressed inward to the ON position. y For details about turning on or off Zone 2, see page 99 28 En OFF Front panel BASIC SETUP BASIC SETUP The “BASIC SETUP” feature is a useful way to set up your system quickly and with minimal effort. Notes • Make sure you disconnect your headphones from this unit. • If you wish to configure this unit manually using more precise adjustments, use the detailed parameters in “SOUND MENU” (see page 77). • Altering any parameters in “BASIC SETUP” resets all parameters manually adjusted in “SOUND MENU” (see page 77). • Initial settings are indicated in bold under each parameter. • Press RETURN on the remote control to return to the previous menu level. TRANSMIT POWER TV AV CD CD-R STANDBY POWER MD SLEEP XM DTV 1 4 DIRECT ST. 5 6 7 8 SPEAKERS ENHANCER NIGHT STRAIGHT 9 0 10 EFFECT LEVEL SET MENU TITLE MENU BAND SRCH MODE NET AMP A-E/CAT. SOURCE TV CH Press ENTER to enter “BASIC SETUP”. The following display appears in the OSD. ENT. ENTER TV VOL 4 MOVIE 3 EXTD SUR. PRESET/CH TUNER USB DVR ENTERTAIN 2 SELECT MULTI CH IN CBL DVD DOCK V-AUX MUSIC 1 STANDARD VOLUME A-E/CAT. RETURN DISPLAY XM MEMORY ON SCREEN 2,13 3-12 ;BASIC SETUP PRESET/CH REC TV .ROOM: S >M L SUBWOOFER;;;;YES SPEAKERS;;;;6spk SETUP:>OK CANCEL ENTER AUDIO A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT. p (U.S.A. model) []/[]:Up/Down [<]/[>]:Select Set the component selector switch to AMP. 5 p 1 PREPARATION STEREO CODE SET POWER Press u / d to select “ROOM” and then j / i to select the desired setting. AMP SOURCE PRESET/CH ;BASIC SETUP TV ENTER MENU SRCH MODE p p [ ]/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter Press u / d to select “BASIC SETUP”. PRESET/CH []/[]:Up/Down [<]/[>]:Select p SET MENU .;BASICSETUP ;MANUALSETUP .;SIGNAL INFO SET MENU 3 A-E/CAT. Press SET MENU to enter “SET MENU”. The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD. p 2 A-E/CAT. .ROOM: S >M L SUBWOOFER;;;;YES SPEAKERS;;;;6spk SETUP:>OK CANCEL Select the size of the room where you have installed your speakers. In general, the room sizes are defined as follows: Choices: S, M, L [U.S.A. and Canada models] S (small) 16 x 13ft, 200ft2 (4.8 x 4.0m, 20m2) M (medium) 20 x 16ft, 300ft2 (6.3 x 5.0m, 30m2) L (large) 26 x 19ft, 450ft2 (7.9 x 5.8m, 45m2) [Other models] S (small) 3.6 x 2.8m, 10m2 M (medium) 4.8 x 4.0m, 20m2 L (large) 6.3 x 5.0m, 30m2 ENTER A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT. 29 En BASIC SETUP 6 Press d to select “SUBWOOFER” and then j / i to select the desired setting. PRESET/CH Press d to select “SETUP” and then j / i to select the desired setting. PRESET/CH ;BASIC SETUP ENTER A-E/CAT. 8 A-E/CAT. ROOM: S >M L .SUBWOOFER;;;;YES SPEAKERS;;;;6spk SETUP:>OK CANCEL ;BASIC SETUP ROOM: S >M L SUBWOOFER;;;;YES SPEAKERS;;;;6spk . SETUP:>OK CANCEL ENTER A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT. p p []/[]:Up/Down [<]/[>]:Select Choices: YES, NONE • Select “YES” if you have a subwoofer in your system. • Select “NONE” if you do not have a subwoofer in your system. 7 Press d to select “SPEAKERS” and then j / i to select the number of speakers connected to this unit. PRESET/CH A-E/CAT. Choices: OK, CANCEL • Select “OK” to apply the settings you made. • Select “CANCEL” to cancel the setup procedure without making any changes. y You can also press SET MENU to cancel the setup procedure. 9 Press ENTER to confirm your selection. PRESET/CH ;BASIC SETUP ENTER A-E/CAT. p p []/[]:Up/Down [<]/[>]:Select ROOM: S >M L SUBWOOFER;;;;YES .SPEAKERS;;;;6spk SETUP:>OK CANCEL ENTER A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT. p Choice Display 2spk L C R SL SB SR 30 En 3spk L C R SL SB SR 4spk L C R SL SB SR p []/[]:Up/Down [<]/[>]:Select Speakers If you selected “OK” in step 8, each speaker outputs a test tone twice in turn. “CHECK:Test Tone” appears in the OSD for a few seconds and then “CHECK OK?” appears in the OSD. Front L/R Front L/R, Center ;BASIC SETUP ;BASIC SETUP ROOM: S >M L SUBWOOFER;;;;YES SPEAKERS;;;;6spk SETUP:>OK CANCEL .CHECK:Test Tone ROOM: S >M L SUBWOOFER;;;;YES SPEAKERS;;;;6spk SETUP:>OK CANCEL .CHECK OK?;;;;YES [<]/[>]:Select [<]/[>]:Select Front L/R, Surround L/R y 5spk L C R SL SB SR Front L/R, Center, Surround L/R 6spk L C R SL SB SR Front L/R, Center, Surround L/R, Surround back Check the speaker connections (see page 13) and adjust the “SPEAKERS” settings back in step 7, if necessary. BASIC SETUP 10 Press j / i to select the desired setting. ;BASIC SETUP PRESET/CH ROOM: S >M L SUBWOOFER;;;;YES SPEAKERS;;;;6spk SETUP:>OK CANCEL .CHECK OK?;;;;YES ENTER A-E/CAT. 12 A-E/CAT. Press u / d to select a speaker and then j / i to adjust the balance. The selected speaker and the front left speaker (or the surround left speaker) output a test tone in turn. • Press i to increase the value. • Press j to decrease the value. [<]/[>]:Select 11 ENTER A-E/CAT. PRESET/CH ENTER A-E/CAT. • If you selected “YES” in step 10, the setup procedure is completed and the display returns to the top “SET MENU” display. • If you selected “NO” in step 10, the speaker level adjustment display appears in the front panel display. A-E/CAT. • Select “FR” to adjust the balance between the front left and right speakers. • Select “C” to adjust the balance between the front left and center speakers. • Select “SL” to adjust the balance between the front left and surround left speakers. • Select “SB” to adjust the balance between the surround left and surround back speakers. • Select “SR” to adjust the balance between the surround left and surround right speakers. • Select “SWFR” to adjust the balance between the front left speaker and the subwoofer. Press ENTER to confirm your selection. A-E/CAT. ;BASIC SETUP -__________+ .FR;;;;;;;;;; C;;;;;;;;;; SL;;;;;;;;;; 13 Press SET MENU to exit from “BASIC SETUP”. SET MENU MENU SRCH MODE 31 En PREPARATION Choices: YES, NO • Select “YES” to complete the setup procedure if the test tone levels from each speaker were satisfactory. • Select “NO” to proceed to the speaker level adjustment menu in step 12 to balance the output level of each speaker. PRESET/CH PLAYBACK PLAYBACK CAUTION Extreme caution should be exercised when you play back CDs encoded in DTS. If you play back a CD encoded in DTS on a DTS-incompatible CD player, you will only hear some unwanted noise that may damage your speakers. Check whether your CD player supports CDs encoded in DTS. Also, check the sound output level of your CD player before you play back a CD encoded in DTS. (U.S.A. model) 3 VOLUME ZONE 2 ON/OFF MASTER PRESET/TUNING EDIT FM/AM l PRESET/TUNING/CH h A/B/C/D/E MEMORY TUNING MODE AUTO/MAN'L MAN'L/AUTO FM LEVEL NEXT SEARCH MODE ON ZONE CONTROL Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel (or press one of the input selector buttons on the remote control) to select the desired input source. CATEGORY DISPLAY OFF PROGRAM INPUT MAIN ZONE PHONES SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT VIDEO AUX VIDEO ON/OFF L AUDIO MD USB INPUT R SLEEP EFFECT SILENT CINEMA CD CD-R DVD 6,7 6 3 5 TV MUTE CODE SET TRANSMIT POWER POWER TV AV STEREO STANDBY CD 3 2 CD-R MUTE MUSIC ENTERTAIN 2 3 4 SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST. 5 6 7 8 XM MULTI CH IN DTV TUNER DVR NET 2 SPEAKERS ENHANCER NIGHT STRAIGHT 9 0 USB VOLUME TV TUNER USB DVR NET Remote control The name of the currently selected input source appears in the front panel display and in the OSD for a few seconds. MENU SRCH MODE ENTER A-E/CAT. SOURCE TV CH Front panel SET MENU TITLE BAND AMP TV VOL 7 EFFECT LEVEL DOCK DOCK ENT. 10 PRESET/CH DTV V-AUX SLEEP CBL V-AUX MOVIE 1 STANDARD POWER MD DVD TV INPUT MULTI CH IN CBL or 2 XM 5 Available input sources A-E/CAT. RETURN DISPLAY XM MEMORY ON SCREEN REC AUDIO DISC SKIP TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE NET USB (U.S.A. model) DVR V-AUX DVD 1 2 Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. Press SPEAKERS A or B on the front panel (or set the component selector switch to AMP and then press SPEAKERS on the remote control repeatedly) to turn on the set of front speakers you want to use. Each time you press SPEAKERS A or B, the respective set of front speakers are turned on or off. SPEAKERS A B Front panel or AMP SPEAKERS SOURCE 9 TV Remote control 32 En DTV/CBL pDVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD XM VOLUME SP A Currently selected input source dB AUTO L R Currently selected input mode Notes • To enjoy multi-channel sources in surround, connect the source component via digital connection and set the input mode to “AUTO” or “DTS” (see page 35). • See page 42 for details about surround sound. 4 Start playback on the selected source component or select a broadcast station. • Refer to the operating instructions for the source component. • See page 46 for details about tuning instructions. • See page 53 for details about XM Satellite Radio tuning instructions. PLAYBACK 5 Rotate VOLUME on the front panel (or press VOLUME +/– on the remote control) to adjust the volume to the desired output level. VOLUME or VOLUME 7 Rotate the PROGRAM selector on the front panel (or press one of the sound field program selector buttons on the remote control repeatedly) to select the desired sound field program. The name of the selected sound field program appears in the front panel display and in the OSD. See page 66 for details about sound field programs. PROGRAM Remote control Front panel 6 Press TONE CONTROL on the front panel repeatedly to select “TREBLE” or “BASS” and then rotate the PROGRAM selector to adjust the corresponding frequency response level. Front panel or STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 MOVIE 4 STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST. 5 6 7 8 SPEAKERS ENHANCER NIGHT STRAIGHT 9 0 TONE CONTROL BASIC OPERATION PROGRAM ENT. 10 EFFECT Remote control NET USB DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL pDVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD XM VOLUME SP A TREBLE dB 0dB L R NET USB DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL pDVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD XM VOLUME SP A • Select “TREBLE” to adjust the high-frequency response. • Select “BASS” to adjust the low-frequency response. TV Sports dB L R Currently selected sound field program Notes • Speaker and headphone adjustments are stored independently. • When “TONE BYPASS” is set to “AUTO” (see page 81), and “BASS” and “TREBLE” are set to 0 dB, audio output automatically bypasses the tone control circuitry of this unit. • If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or lowfrequency sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality of the front speakers may not match that of the other speakers. • TONE CONTROL is not effective when the “DIRECT STEREO” mode (see page 39) is selected or when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see page 38). Notes • Choose a sound field program based on your listening preference, not merely on the name of the program. • When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects the last sound field program used with the corresponding input source. • Sound field programs cannot be selected when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see page 38). • Sampling frequencies higher than 48 kHz (except for DTS 96/24 signals) are sampled down to 48 kHz and then sound field programs are applied. • To display information about the currently selected input source in the OSD, see page 40 for details. 33 En USING AUDIO FEATURES USING AUDIO FEATURES Using SILENT CINEMA SILENT CINEMA allows you to enjoy multi-channel music or movie sound, including Dolby Digital and DTS sources, through ordinary headphones. SILENT CINEMA activates automatically whenever you connect headphones to the PHONES jack while listening to a source with a CINEMA DSP or HiFi DSP sound field program (see page 66). When activated, the SILENT CINEMA indicator lights up in the front panel display. Selecting the night listening mode The night listening modes are designed to improve listenability at lower volumes or at night. Choose either “NIGHT:CINEMA” or “NIGHT:MUSIC” depending on the type of material you are playing. 1 Notes • SILENT CINEMA does not activate when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see page 38). • SILENT CINEMA is not effective when the “DIRECT STEREO” (see page 39), “2ch Stereo” (see page 39) or “STRAIGHT” mode (see page 39) is selected. AMP NIGHT SOURCE Choices: NIGHT:CINEMA, NIGHT:MUSIC, OFF • Select “NIGHT:CINEMA” when watching films to reduce the dynamic range of film soundtracks and make dialog easier to hear at lower volumes. • Select “NIGHT:MUSIC” when listening to music sources to preserve ease-of-listening for all sounds. • Select “OFF” if you do not want to use this feature. Press MUTE on the remote control to mute the audio output. Press MUTE again to resume the audio output. y MUTE • You can also rotate VOLUME on the front panel or VOLUME +/– on the remote control to resume the audio output. • You can adjust the muting level by using the “MUTING TYPE” parameter in “SOUND MENU” (see page 81). • The MUTE indicator flashes in the front panel display when the audio output is muted and disappears from the front panel display when the audio output is resumed. 10 TV Muting the audio output y Set the component selector switch to AMP and then press NIGHT on the remote control repeatedly to select “NIGHT:CINEMA” or “NIGHT:MUSIC”. When a night listening mode is selected, the NIGHT indicator lights up in the front panel display. 2 Press j / i on the remote control to adjust the effect level while “NIGHT:CINEMA” or “NIGHT:MUSIC” is displayed in the front panel display. PRESET/CH Note If you change the input source or the sound field program with the remote control while the audio output is being muted, this unit resumes the audio output. ENTER A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT. Remote control Effect.Lvl:MID Choices: MIN, MID, MAX • Select “MIN” for minimum compression. • Select “MID” for standard compression. • Select “MAX” for maximum compression. 34 En USING AUDIO FEATURES y AUTO “NIGHT:CINEMA” and “NIGHT:MUSIC” adjustments are stored independently. Notes DTS • You cannot use the night listening modes in the following cases: – when the “DIRECT STEREO” mode (see page 39) is selected. – when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see page 38). – when headphones are connected to the PHONES jack. • The effectiveness of the night listening modes may vary depending on the input source and surround sound settings you use. ANALOG Automatically selects input signals in the following order: (1) Digital signals (2) Analog signals Selects only digital signals encoded in DTS. If no DTS signals are input, no sound is output. Selects only analog signals. If no analog signals are input, no sound is output. Note When “INPUT MODE” is set to “AUTO”, this unit automatically switches to the appropriate decoder if a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is detected. Using the sleep timer Selecting the input mode This unit comes with a variety of input jacks. Do the following to select the type of input signals you want to use. • We recommend setting “INPUT MODE” to “AUTO” in most cases. • You can adjust the default input mode of this unit by using the “INPUT MODE” parameter in “INPUT MENU” (see page 83). 1 Notes • To play DTS-encoded CDs when using a digital audio connection, be sure to set “INPUT MODE” to “DTS”. • DTS decoding may not be performed correctly depending on the player even if you make a digital connection between this unit and the player. Press one of the input selector buttons on the remote control to select the desired input source. MD CD CD-R Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel to select the desired input source. 2 V-AUX 2 INPUT Press INPUT MODE on the front panel repeatedly to select the desired input mode. MULTI CH IN CBL DVD DTV DOCK 1 SLEEP XM TUNER USB DVR NET Start playback on the selected source component or select a broadcast station. • Refer to the operating instructions for the source component. • See page 46 for details about tuning instructions. • See page 53 for details about XM Satellite Radio tuning instructions. INPUT MODE Available input sources NET USB DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL pDVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD XM VOLUME SP A DVD Currently selected input source dB AUTO L R Currently selected input mode 35 En BASIC OPERATION y Use this feature to automatically set this unit to the standby mode after a certain amount of time. The sleep timer is useful when you are going to sleep while this unit is playing or recording a source. The sleep timer also automatically turns off any external components connected to AC OUTLET(S) (see page 26). USING AUDIO FEATURES 3 Press SLEEP on the remote control repeatedly to set the amount of time. Each time you press SLEEP, the front panel display changes as shown below. SLEEP Adjusting the speaker level You can adjust the output level of each speaker while listening to a music source. This is also possible when playing sources input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Note This operation will override the level adjustments made in “BASIC SETUP” (see page 29) and “SPEAKER LEVEL” (see page 79). SLEEP 120min SLEEP 90min AMP SOURCE TV VOL SLEEP OFF SLEEP 30min SLEEP TV CH 60min TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 4 STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST. 5 6 7 8 SPEAKERS ENHANCER NIGHT STRAIGHT 9 0 V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R SP A TUNER pCD VOLUME PRESET/CH LEVEL TITLE SET MENU MENU SRCH MODE BAND RETURN DISPLAY XM MEMORY ON SCREEN AUDIO L V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD TUNER pCD MD/CD-R SP A (U.S.A. model) R XM VOLUME 2 DISC SKIP 1 SLEEP 3 A-E/CAT. REC dB Flashes DVR ENT. ENTER XM SLEEP SLEEP 120min NET USB 10 MOVIE EFFECT 1 A-E/CAT. DVR 1 TV The SLEEP indicator flashes while you are switching the amount of time for the sleep timer. Once the sleep timer is set, the SLEEP indicator lights up in the front panel display, and the display returns to the selected sound field program. NET USB VOLUME Set the component selector switch to AMP and then press LEVEL on the remote control repeatedly to select the speaker you want to adjust. dB STRAIGHT L R AMP Lights up SOURCE LEVEL TV BAND TITLE 4 To cancel the sleep timer, press SLEEP on the remote control repeatedly until “SLEEP OFF” appears in the front panel display. SLEEP NET USB DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER pCD XM VOLUME SP A SLEEP OFF dB L R The SLEEP indicator turns off, and “SLEEP OFF” disappears from the front panel display after a few seconds. y The sleep timer setting can also be canceled by pressing MAIN ZONE ON/OFF on the front panel (or STANDBY on the remote control) to set the main zone to the standby mode. 36 En • Select “FRONT L” to adjust the front left speaker output level. • Select “CENTER” to adjust the center speaker output level. • Select “FRONT R” to adjust the front right speaker output level. • Select “SUR. R” to adjust the surround right speaker output level. • Select “SUR. B” to adjust the surround back speaker output level. • Select “SUR. L” to adjust the surround left speaker output level. • Select “SWFR” to adjust the subwoofer output level. y Once you press LEVEL on the remote control, you can also select the speaker by pressing u / d. USING AUDIO FEATURES 2 Press j / i on the remote control to adjust the speaker output level. • Press i to increase the value. • Press j to decrease the value. Control range: –10 dB to +10 dB PRESET/CH ENTER A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT. y This operation can also be performed using the control buttons on the front panel. Press NEXT on the front panel repeatedly to select the speaker channel whose output level you want to adjust and then press LEVEL on the front panel to adjust the output level. Selecting the Compressed Music Enhancer mode Compression artifacts (such as the MP3 format) are created by a lossy compression scheme where the audio is resampled to lower the bitrate and to remove sounds that are indistinguishable to typical human hearing. The Compressed Music Enhancer feature of this unit enhances your listening experience by regenerating the missing harmonics in a compression artifact. As a result, flattened complexity due to the loss of high-frequency fidelity as well as lack of bass due to the loss of low-frequency bass is compensated, providing the improved performance of the overall sound system. Notes y The ENHANCER indicator lights up in the front panel display when one of the Compressed Music Enhancer modes is selected. 37 En BASIC OPERATION • The Compressed Music Enhancer mode is compatible with the PCM signals (48 kHz), the analog 2-channel input sources and the music data input at the USB port or the LAN port. • The Compressed Music Enhancer mode is not effective with any of the sound field programs. • When the Compressed Music Enhancer mode is turned on while an incompatible input source is being played back, “Not Available” appears in the front panel display and in the OSD. • When the input source is changed to an incompatible input source while the Compressed Music Enhancer mode is turned on, the Compressed Music Enhancer mode is automatically turned off and the incompatible input source is played back in 2-channel or 6-channel stereo. USING AUDIO FEATURES 1 Set the component selector switch to AMP and then press ENHANCER on the remote control repeatedly to select the desired Compressed Music Enhancer mode. The following display appears in the OSD and the ENHANCER indicator lights up in the front panel display. AMP ENHANCER SOURCE 0 Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT component Use this feature to select the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks (see page 24) as the input source. Press MULTI CH INPUT on the front panel (or MULTI CH IN on the remote control) so that “MULTI CH INPUT” appears in the front panel display. TV MULTI CH INPUT MULTI CH IN or MUSIC ENHANCER . Front panel 2ch Enhancer LOW >HIGH ENHANCER Lights up Choices: 2ch Enhancer, 6ch Enhancer, Off (previously selected sound field program) • Select “2ch Enhancer” to play back compression artifacts in 2-channel stereo. • Select “6ch Enhancer” to play back compression artifacts in 6-channel stereo. • Select Off (previously selected sound field program) to turn off the Compressed Music Enhancer mode. y You can also switch between “2ch Enhancer” and “6ch Enhancer” by pressing j / i on the remote control when the arrow is located on the left of “2ch Enhancer” or “6ch Enhancer” in the OSD. 2 Press d once and then j / i on the remote control to select the desired effect level. PRESET/CH MUSIC ENHANCER . ENTER A-E/CAT. 2ch Enhancer LOW >HIGH A-E/CAT. Choices: HIGH, LOW • Select “HIGH” for a high effect level. • Select “LOW” for a low effect level. Note Set the effect level to “HIGH” or “LOW” according to the characteristics of a source. The high-frequency signals of some sources may be emphasized too much. In this case, set the effect level to “LOW”. 38 En Remote control MULTI CH INPUT Note When “MULTI CH INPUT” is shown in the front panel display, no other source can be played. To select another input source with the INPUT selector on the front panel (or one of the input selector buttons), press MULTI CH INPUT (or MULTI CH IN on the remote control) so that “MULTI CH INPUT” disappears from the front panel display. USING AUDIO FEATURES Enjoying multi-channel sources in 2-channel stereo You can mix down multi-channel sources to 2 channels and enjoy playback in 2-channel stereo. Set the component selector switch to AMP and then press STEREO on the remote control repeatedly to select “2ch Stereo”. Enjoying pure hi-fi stereo sound The “DIRECT STEREO” mode allows sources to bypass the decoders and DSP processors of this unit so that you can enjoy pure hi-fi sound from 2-channel PCM and analog sources. Set the component selector switch to AMP and then press DIRECT ST. on the remote control to select “DIRECT STEREO”. AMP STEREO AMP SOURCE 1 DIRECT ST. SOURCE TV 8 TV 2ch Stereo DIRECT STEREO • You can use a subwoofer with this program when “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “SWFR” or “BOTH” (see page 78). • You can also select the “2ch Stereo” mode by rotating the PROGRAM selector on the front panel. Enjoying unprocessed input sources When this unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode, 2-channel stereo sources are output from only the front left and right speakers. Multi-channel sources are decoded straight into the appropriate channels without any additional effect processing. 1 Set the component selector switch to AMP and then press STRAIGHT on the remote control to select “STRAIGHT”. Notes • To avoid unexpected noise, do not play CDs encoded in DTS when the “DIRECT STEREO” mode is selected. • When multi-channel signals (Dolby Digital and DTS) are input, this unit automatically switches to the corresponding analog input. When “DTS” is selected as the input mode (see page 35), no sound will be output. • No sound will be output from the subwoofer. • “TONE CONTROL” (see page 33) and “SOUND MENU” (see page 77) settings (except for speaker level settings) are not effective. • The front panel display automatically dims. y You can also select the “DIRECT STEREO” mode by rotating the PROGRAM selector on the front panel. AMP STRAIGHT SOURCE ENT. TV EFFECT STRAIGHT 2 To deactivate the “STRAIGHT” mode, press STRAIGHT on the remote control again so that “STRAIGHT” disappears from the front panel display. The sound effect is turned back on. y You can also select the “STRAIGHT” mode by pressing STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the front panel. 39 En BASIC OPERATION y USING VIDEO FEATURES USING VIDEO FEATURES Signal format FORMAT Signal format display. When this unit cannot detect a digital signal, it automatically switches to analog input. Display status: Analog, Digital, DolbyD, DTS, MP3, PCM, WMA, --- Displaying the input source information You can display the format, sampling frequency, channel, bit rate and flag data of the current input signal. 1 Note Set the component selector switch to AMP and then press SET MENU on the remote control. The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD. “---” appears when this unit cannot detect any signals. Sampling frequency SAMPLING The number of samples per second taken from a continuous signal to make a discrete signal. Display status: 8kHz, 11kHz, 12kHz, 16kHz, 22.05kHz, 24kHz, 32kHz, 44.1kHz, 48kHz, 64kHz, 88.2kHz, 96kHz, --- AMP SET MENU SOURCE MENU SRCH MODE TV Note “---” appears when this unit cannot detect the sampling frequency. SET MENU .;BASICSETUP ;MANUALSETUP .;SIGNAL INFO Channel CHANNEL The number of source channels in the input signal (front/surround/LFE). For example, a multi-channel soundtrack with 3 front channels, 2 surround channels and LFE, is displayed as “3/2/0.1”. 2 p p [ ]/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter Note Press d repeatedly to select “SIGNAL INFO” and then press ENTER. The following information about the input source appears in the OSD. PRESET/CH “---” appears when there is no source channel available. Bit rate BITRATE The number of bits passing a given point per second. PRESET/CH Note “---” appears when this unit cannot detect the bit rate. ENTER A-E/CAT. ENTER A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT. ;SIGNAL INFO FORMAT PCM SAMPLING 48kHz CHANNEL 2/0/--BITRATE --FLAG NONE [RETURN]:Exit Flag FLAG Flag data encoded in DTS, Dolby Digital, or PCM signals that cue this unit to automatically switch decoders. A-E/CAT. 3 Press SET MENU on the remote control again to exit from “SET MENU”. SET MENU MENU SRCH MODE 40 En USING VIDEO FEATURES Selecting the OSD mode You can display the operating information of this unit on a video monitor. If you display the “SET MENU” and sound field program parameter settings on a video monitor, it is much easier to see the available options and parameters than it is to read the information in the front panel display. 1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. 2 Set the component selector switch to AMP and then press DISPLAY on the remote control repeatedly to toggle between the OSD modes. The OSD mode changes in the following order. AMP SOURCE ON SCREEN TV Full display You can display a gray background in the OSD when there is not video signal being input by setting “GRAY BACK” in “OPTION MENU” to “AUTO” (see page 87). Notes • The OSD signal is not output at the DVR OUT jacks and will not be recorded. • You must set “VIDEO CONV.” in “OPTION MENU” to “ON” (see page 86) to display the OSD. • To display the OSD with the component video signals output at the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks, set the OSD mode to the full display mode. • When “GRAY BACK” in “OPTION MENU” is set to “OFF” (see page 87), the OSD may not be displayed correctly depending on the conditions of the picture. Playing video sources in the background You can combine a video image from a video source with sound from an audio source. For example, you can enjoy listening to classical music while viewing beautiful scenery from the video source on the video monitor. Press the input selector buttons on the remote control to select a video source and then an audio source. MD Short display CD CD-R SLEEP XM MULTI CH IN CBL DVD Display off DOCK V-AUX Full display Fully shows the sound field program parameter settings as well as the contents of the front panel display. Short display Briefly shows the contents of the front panel display at the bottom of the screen each time you operate this unit. DTV TUNER USB DVR Audio sources NET Video sources y If you want to enjoy an audio source input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks together with a video source, first select the video source and then press MULTI CH INPUT on the front panel (or MULTI CH IN on the remote control) to select the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks as the input source (see page 38). Display off No information is displayed except for the “SET MENU” screen. P02 MUSIC . Pop/Rock DSP LEVEL;;;;0dB P.INIT.DLY;;21ms P.ROOM SIZE;;1.0 S.INIT.DLY;;25ms S.ROOM SIZE;;1.0 Full display P02 MUSIC Pop/Rock Short display 41 En BASIC OPERATION DISPLAY y ENJOYING SURROUND SOUND ENJOYING SURROUND SOUND Enjoying multi-channel sources in 6.1-channel surround If you connected a surround back speaker, use this feature to enjoy 6.1-channel playback for multi-channel sources using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx, Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES decoders. 1 Set the component selector switch to AMP and then press EXTD SUR. on the remote control repeatedly to switch between 5.1 and 6.1-channel playback. Decoders You can select from the following decoders depending on the format of the source you are playing. Decoder Functions Plays back Dolby Digital or DTS signals PLIIxMusic in 6.1 channels using the Pro Logic IIx music decoder. EX/ES Plays back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 6.1 channels using the Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES decoder. EX Plays back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 6.1 channels using the Dolby Digital EX decoder. AMP EXTD SUR. SOURCE 7 TV Off OFF Decoders are not used to create 6.1 channels. Notes 2 Press j / i repeatedly to select a decoder while “PLIIxMusic” (etc.) is displayed. PRESET/CH ENTER A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT. Auto AUTO When a signal flag that can be recognized by this unit is input, this unit selects the optimum decoder to play back the signal in 6.1 channels. If this unit cannot recognize the flag or no flag is present in the input signal, it cannot automatically be played in 6.1 channels. 42 En • Some 6.1-channel compatible discs do not have a signal flag that can be automatically detected by this unit. When playing these kinds of discs in 6.1 channels, select a decoder manually from “PLIIxMusic”, “EX/ES” or “EX”. • 6.1-channel playback is not possible even if you press EXTD SUR. in the following cases: – when “CENTER SP” (see page 78), “SUR. L/R SP” (see page 78) or “SUR. B SP” (see page 78) is set to “NONE”. – when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is being played. – when the source being played does not contain surround left and right channel signals. – when a Dolby Digital KARAOKE source is being played. – when the “2ch Stereo” (see page 39) or “DIRECT STEREO” (see page 39) mode is selected. • When this unit is turned off, this setting will be reset to “AUTO”. • The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “SUR. B SP” is set to “NONE” (see page 78). ENJOYING SURROUND SOUND Enjoying 2-channel sources in surround Signals input from 2-channel sources can also be played back on multi-channels. 1 Set the component selector switch to AMP and then press STANDARD on the remote control repeatedly to switch between the “SUR. STANDARD” and “SUR. ENHANCED” programs or press MOVIE to select the “MOVIE THEATER” program. SUR. STANDARD Functions PRO LOGIC Dolby Pro Logic processing for any sources PLII Movie Dolby Pro Logic II processing for movie sources PLII Music Dolby Pro Logic II processing for music sources PLII Game Dolby Pro Logic II processing for game sources PLIIx Movie Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for movie sources PLIIx Music Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for music sources PLIIx Game Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for game sources Neo:6 Cinema DTS processing for movie sources Neo:6 Music DTS processing for music sources Neural Sur. Neural Surround processing for any sources (U.S.A. and Canada models only) SUR. ENHANCED or MOVIE THEATER Functions STANDARD 5 AMP SOURCE or TV MOVIE 2 Press SELECT on the remote control repeatedly to select the desired decoder. SELECT 6 You can select from the following modes depending on the type of source you are playing and your personal preference. y You can also select a decoder by pressing j / i on the remote control while the decoder type is displayed in the front panel display. PRO LOGIC Dolby Pro Logic processing for any sources PLII Movie Dolby Pro Logic II processing for movie sources PLIIx Movie Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for movie sources Neo:6 Cinema DTS processing for movie sources Notes • The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “SUR. B SP” is set to “NONE” (see page 78). • The Neural Surround decoder is compatible with the PCM signals (32 kHz, 44.1 kHz and 48 kHz) and the analog 2channel input sources. • The Neural Surround decoder is not effective with any of the sound field programs. • When Neural Surround-incompatible signals are being input while the Neural Surround decoder is selected, multi-channel sources are decoded straight into the appropriate channels without any additional effect processing and the Neural Surround-incompatible PCM signals are played back in 2-channel stereo. 43 En BASIC OPERATION 4 ENJOYING SURROUND SOUND Using Virtual CINEMA DSP Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy the CINEMA DSP programs without surround speakers. It creates virtual speakers to reproduce the natural sound field. If you set “SUR. L/R SP” to “NONE” (see page 78), Virtual CINEMA DSP activates automatically whenever you select a CINEMA DSP sound field program (see page 66). Note Virtual CINEMA DSP will not activate even when “SUR. L/R SP” is set to “NONE” (see page 78) in the following cases: – when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see page 38). – when headphones are connected to the PHONES jack. – when the “DIRECT STEREO” (see page 39), “2ch Stereo” (see page 39) or “STRAIGHT” mode (see page 39) is selected. 44 En RECORDING RECORDING Recording adjustments and other operations are performed from the recording components. Refer to the operating instructions for those components. CAUTION The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Attempting to digitally record the DTS bitstream will result in noise being recorded. Therefore, if you want to use this unit to record sources encoded in DTS, the following considerations and adjustments need to be made. To play DTS-encoded DVDs and CDs (when using a digital audio connection) on your DTS-compatible player, follow its operating instructions to make a setting so that the analog signal will be output from the player. Notes y Do a test recording before you start an actual recording. If you play back a video source that uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the picture itself may be disturbed due to those signals. (U.S.A. model) VOLUME ZONE 2 ON/OFF MASTER PRESET/TUNING EDIT FM/AM l PRESET/TUNING/CH h A/B/C/D/E MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM Turn on all the connected components. 2 Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel (or press one of the input selector buttons on the remote control) to select the source component you want to record from. TUNING MODE AUTO/MAN'L LEVEL NEXT SEARCH MODE ON ZONE CONTROL 1 CATEGORY DISPLAY OFF PROGRAM INPUT MAIN ZONE PHONES SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT VIDEO AUX VIDEO ON/OFF L AUDIO USB R EFFECT SILENT CINEMA SLEEP MD INPUT CD 2 CODE SET AV CD CD-R STANDBY POWER MD 2 DTV DTV MULTI CH IN V-AUX TUNER USB DVR NET SLEEP XM Front panel MULTI CH IN CBL DVD DOCK DVD DOCK TRANSMIT POWER TV XM CBL or POWER CD-R Remote control TUNER USB V-AUX DVR NET TV VOL TV CH VOLUME AMP SOURCE 3 Start playback on the selected source component or select a broadcast station. 4 Start recording on the recording component. TV (U.S.A. model) 45 En BASIC OPERATION • When this unit is set to the standby mode, you cannot record between other components connected to this unit. • The settings of TONE CONTROL (see page 33), VOLUME, the speaker level (see page 79) and the sound field programs (see page 66) do not affect the recorded material. • The source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks of this unit cannot be recorded. • S-video and composite video signals pass independently through the video circuits of this unit. Therefore, when recording or dubbing video signals input from a video source component that provides only an S-video or a composite video signal, you can record only an S-video or a composite video signal on your VCR. • Digital signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT jacks are not output at the analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks for recording. Likewise, analog signals input at the AUDIO IN jacks are not output at the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack. Therefore, if your source component is connected to provide only digital or analog signals, you can only record digital or analog signals. • A given input source is not output on the same OUT (REC) channel. • Check the copyright laws in your country to record from CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may infringe copyright laws. • The XM Satellite Radio (U.S.A. and Canada models only) signals cannot be output at the AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks. • The analog audio signals input at the DOCK terminal can be output at the analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks for recording. FM/AM TUNING FM/AM TUNING There are 2 tuning methods: automatic and manual. Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are strong and there is no interference. If the signal from the station you want to select is weak, tune into it manually. You can also use the automatic and manual preset tuning features to store up to 40 stations (A1 to E8: 8 preset station numbers in each of the 5 preset station groups). Furthermore, you can recall any preset stations and exchange the assignment of two preset stations with each other. Note Orient the connected FM and AM antennas for the best reception. Automatic tuning 3 Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are strong and there is no interference. Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L) so that the AUTO indicator lights up in the front panel display. TUNING MODE AUTO/MAN'L (U.S.A. model) DISPLAY VOLUME ZONE 2 ON/OFF MASTER PRESET/TUNING EDIT FM/AM A/B/C/D/E l PRESET/TUNING/CH h MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM TUNING MODE AUTO/MAN'L LEVEL NEXT SEARCH MODE ON ZONE CONTROL CATEGORY DISPLAY OFF PROGRAM INPUT MAIN ZONE PHONES SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT VIDEO AUX VIDEO ON/OFF L AUDIO NET USB USB R DVR 1 DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R pTUNER CD XM VOLUME AUTO TUNED A 3 2 V-AUX SP A EFFECT SILENT CINEMA 4 1 3 dB AM 1440 kHz No colon (:) L R Lights up If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning is not possible. Press PRESET/TUNING to turn the colon (:) off. Rotate the INPUT selector to select “TUNER” as the input source. PRESET/TUNING EDIT INPUT SEARCH MODE 4 Front panel 2 Press FM/AM to select the reception band. “FM” or “AM” appears in the front panel display. Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h once to begin automatic tuning. When this unit is tuned into a station, the TUNED indicator lights up and the frequency of the received station is shown in the front panel display. • Press h to tune into a higher frequency. • Press l to tune into a lower frequency. FM/AM FM or AM l PRESET/TUNING/CH h LEVEL NET USB DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R pTUNER CD AUTO TUNED XM VOLUME SP A A dB AM 1530 kHz Lights up 46 En L R FM/AM TUNING Manual tuning 3 If the signal received from the station you want to select is weak, tune into it manually. Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L) so that the AUTO indicator disappears from the front panel display. TUNING MODE AUTO/MAN'L Note DISPLAY Manually tuning into an FM station automatically switches the tuner to monaural reception to increase the signal quality. (U.S.A. model) NET USB DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R pTUNER CD TUNED XM VOLUME SP A A VOLUME ZONE 2 ON/OFF MASTER PRESET/TUNING EDIT FM/AM A/B/C/D/E l PRESET/TUNING/CH h ON MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM CATEGORY AUTO/MAN'L DISPLAY No colon (:) OFF PROGRAM SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT INPUT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT VIDEO AUX VIDEO ON/OFF L AUDIO USB R If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning is not possible. Press PRESET/TUNING to turn the colon (:) off. EFFECT SILENT CINEMA 3 2 4 1 3 PRESET/TUNING EDIT Rotate the INPUT selector to select “TUNER” as the input source. INPUT SEARCH MODE 4 Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h to tune into the desired station manually. Hold down the button to continue searching. l PRESET/TUNING/CH h LEVEL Front panel 2 Press FM/AM to select the reception band. “FM” or “AM” appears in the front panel display. FM/AM FM or AM 47 En BASIC OPERATION 1 AM 1440 kHz R TUNING MODE MAIN ZONE PHONES dB L LEVEL NEXT SEARCH MODE ZONE CONTROL FM/AM TUNING Automatic preset tuning 3 You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store FM stations with strong signals up to 40 (A1 to E8: 8 preset station numbers in each of the 5 preset station groups) of those stations in order. You can then recall any preset station easily by selecting the preset station number. Press and hold MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) for more than 3 seconds. The preset station number as well as the MEMORY and AUTO indicators flashes. After approximately 5 seconds, automatic presetting starts from the current frequency and proceeds toward the higher frequencies. (U.S.A. model) MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM VOLUME ZONE 2 ON/OFF ZONE CONTROL Flash MASTER PRESET/TUNING EDIT FM/AM A/B/C/D/E l PRESET/TUNING/CH h MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM TUNING MODE AUTO/MAN'L LEVEL NEXT SEARCH MODE ON CATEGORY DISPLAY OFF PROGRAM INPUT MAIN ZONE PHONES SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT VIDEO AUX VIDEO ON/OFF L AUDIO NET USB USB R EFFECT DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R pTUNER AUTO TUNED CD MEMORY A1:FM 87.5 MHz 2 1 XM VOLUME SP A SILENT CINEMA 13 Rotate the INPUT selector to select “TUNER” as the input source. dB L R Flashes When automatic preset tuning is completed, the front panel display shows the frequency of the last preset station. y You can specify the preset number from which this unit stores FM stations and/or begins tuning toward lower frequencies. For details, see “Automatic preset tuning options” on page 49. INPUT Notes Front panel 2 Press FM/AM to select “FM” as the reception band. “FM” appears in the front panel display. FM/AM FM 48 En • Any stored station data existing under a preset station number is cleared when you store a new station under the same preset station number. • If the number of received stations does not reach 40 (E8), automatic preset tuning automatically stops after searching for all the available stations. • Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored automatically by automatic preset tuning. If the station you want to store is weak in signal strength, tune into it manually and store it as described in “Manual preset tuning” on page 49. FM/AM TUNING ■ Automatic preset tuning options You can specify the preset number from which this unit stores FM stations and/or begins tuning toward lower frequencies. Note Manual preset tuning You can also store up to 40 stations (A1 to E8: 8 preset station numbers in each of the 5 preset station groups) manually. First carry out steps 1 through 3 in “Automatic preset tuning” on page 48. (U.S.A. model) • Press A/B/C/D/E and then PRESET/TUNING/ CH l / h to select the preset station number under which the first station will be stored. Automatic preset tuning stops when stations have all been stored up to E8. A/B/C/D/E NEXT VOLUME ZONE 2 ON/OFF MASTER PRESET/TUNING EDIT FM/AM l PRESET/TUNING/CH h A/B/C/D/E MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM NEXT SEARCH MODE ON ZONE CONTROL TUNING MODE AUTO/MAN'L LEVEL CATEGORY DISPLAY OFF PROGRAM INPUT MAIN ZONE PHONES SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT VIDEO AUX VIDEO ON/OFF L AUDIO USB R EFFECT SILENT CINEMA l PRESET/TUNING/CH h LEVEL 3 4 CATEGORY 1 Tune into a station automatically or manually. See pages 46 and 47 for tuning instructions. NET USB DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R pTUNER CD XM VOLUME TUNED SP A PRESET/TUNING EDIT A l PRESET/TUNING/CH h dB AM 630 kHz L R LEVEL SEARCH MODE When this unit is tuned into a station, the front panel display shows the frequency of the station received. 2 Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM). The MEMORY indicator flashes in the front panel display for approximately 5 seconds. MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM MEMORY Flashes 3 Press A/B/C/D/E repeatedly to select a preset station group (A to E) while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. The selected preset station group letter appears. Check that the colon (:) appears in the front panel display. A/B/C/D/E NEXT CATEGORY Flashes NET USB DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R pTUNER TUNED CD MEMORY XM VOLUME SP A C :AM dB 630 kHz L R Preset station Colon (:) group 49 En BASIC OPERATION • Press PRESET/TUNING so that the colon (:) disappears from the front panel display and then press PRESET/TUNING/CH l to begin tuning toward lower frequencies. 2,5 FM/AM TUNING 4 Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h to select a preset station number (1 to 8) while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. • Press h to select a higher preset station number. • Press l to select a lower preset station number. Selecting preset stations You can tune into any desired station simply by selecting the preset station group and number under which it was stored. (U.S.A. model) l PRESET/TUNING/CH h LEVEL VOLUME ZONE 2 ON/OFF MASTER Flashes PRESET/TUNING EDIT FM/AM l PRESET/TUNING/CH h A/B/C/D/E MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM TUNING MODE AUTO/MAN'L LEVEL NEXT SEARCH MODE ON ZONE CONTROL CATEGORY DISPLAY OFF PROGRAM INPUT MAIN ZONE PHONES SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT VIDEO AUX VIDEO ON/OFF NET USB DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R pTUNER TUNED CD USB AUDIO R SILENT CINEMA VOLUME SP A dB C3:AM 630 kHz L R 1 2 Preset station number STEREO 5 L EFFECT XM MEMORY Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. The station band and frequency appear in the front panel display with the preset station group and number you have selected. The MEMORY indicator disappears from the front panel display. MEMORY MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST. 5 6 7 8 SPEAKERS ENHANCER NIGHT STRAIGHT 9 0 10 ENT. EFFECT PRESET/CH LEVEL SET MENU TITLE MENU BAND SRCH MODE 1 ENTER A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT. RETURN DISPLAY XM MEMORY ON SCREEN 2 REC (U.S.A. model) y MAN'L/AUTO FM When performing this operation with the remote control, set the component selector switch to SOURCE and then press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source. NET USB DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R pTUNER CD TUNED 1 XM VOLUME SP A C3:AM dB 630 kHz L R The displayed station has been stored as C3. 6 Press A/B/C/D/E on the front panel (or A-E/ CAT. j / i on the remote control) to select the desired preset station group (A to E). The preset station group letter appears in the front panel display and changes each time you press the button. Repeat steps 1 through 5 to store other stations. PRESET/CH A/B/C/D/E Notes or NEXT ENTER CATEGORY • Any stored station data existing under a preset station number is cleared when you store a new station under the same preset station number. • The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along with the station frequency. 50 En A-E/CAT. Front panel A-E/CAT. Remote control FM/AM TUNING 2 Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h on the front panel (or PRESET/CH u / d on the remote control) to select the desired preset station number (1 to 8). The preset station group and number appear in the front panel display along with the station band and frequency. Exchanging preset stations You can exchange the assignments of two preset stations with each other. The example below describes the procedure to exchange preset station “E1” with “A5”. (U.S.A. model) PRESET/CH VOLUME ZONE 2 ON/OFF MASTER PRESET/TUNING EDIT l PRESET/TUNING/CH h FM/AM MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM TUNING MODE AUTO/MAN'L LEVEL CATEGORY DISPLAY OFF PROGRAM or LEVEL l PRESET/TUNING/CH h A/B/C/D/E NEXT SEARCH MODE ON ZONE CONTROL INPUT MAIN ZONE ENTER PHONES SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT VIDEO AUX VIDEO ON/OFF A-E/CAT. NET USB DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R pTUNER CD TUNED 1,3 1 Select preset station “E1” using A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h. See “Selecting preset stations” on page 50. 2 Press and hold EDIT for more than 3 seconds. “E1” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front panel display. VOLUME dB L USB R R PRESET/TUNING EDIT SEARCH MODE Flashes NET USB DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R pTUNER TUNED CD MEMORY XM VOLUME SP A E1:FM 87.5 MHz dB L R Flashes 51 En BASIC OPERATION E1:FM 87.5 MHz 2,4 XM SP A AUDIO SILENT CINEMA Remote control Front panel L EFFECT A-E/CAT. FM/AM TUNING 3 Select preset station “A5” using A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h. “A5” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front panel display. See “Selecting preset stations” on page 50. l PRESET/TUNING/CH h A/B/C/D/E LEVEL NEXT CATEGORY Flashes NET USB DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R pTUNER TUNED CD XM VOLUME MEMORY SP A dB A5:FM 90.6 MHz L R Flashes 4 Press EDIT again. “EDIT E1–A5” appears in the front panel display and the assignments of the two preset stations are exchanged. PRESET/TUNING EDIT SEARCH MODE NET USB DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R pTUNER TUNED CD XM VOLUME SP A EDIT 52 En dB E1-A5 L R XM® SATELLITE RADIO TUNING XM® SATELLITE RADIO TUNING XM Satellite Radio is the satellite radio service with millions of listeners across the United States and Canada, broadcasting live daily. The XM Satellite Radio channel lineup includes over 160 digital channels of choice from coast to coast: 67 commercial-free music channels, featuring hip hop to opera, classical to country, bluegrass to blues; 33 channels of premier sports, talk, comedy, children’s and entertainment programming; and more than 20 channels of the traffic and weather information for major metropolitan areas nationwide. Because XM Satellite Radio is a subscription service, you will need to set up an account and activate service with XM using your XM Satellite Radio ID number. To check your ID number, follow “Activating XM Satellite Radio” on page 56. For further information on XM Satellite Radio services, visit the XM Satellite Radio website at “http://www.xmradio.com/” (for residents in the United States) or “http://www.xmradio.ca/” (for residents in Canada). This unit is equipped with the Neural Surround decoder (U.S.A. and Canada models only) that plays back the surround sound content of the XM Satellite Radio broadcasts in multi-channels, resulting in a full surround sound experience. Notes ■ Information from XM Satellite Radio Inc. XM monthly service subscription sold separately. XM Passport and XM Passport Home Dock required to receive XM service (sold separately). Installation costs and other fees and taxes, including a one-time activation fee may apply. Subscription fee is consumer only. All fees and programming subject to change. Channels with frequent explicit language are indicated with an “XL”. Channel blocking is available for XM radio receivers by calling “1-800-XMRADIO (1-800-967-2346)” (for residents in the United States) or “1-877-GET-XMSR (1-877-438-9677)” (for residents in Canada). Subscriptions subject to Customer Agreement available at “http://www.xmradio.com/” (for residents in the United States) or “http://www.xmradio.ca/” (for residents in Canada). XM service only available in the 48 continuous United States and Canada. “XM Ready” is a trademark of XM Satellite Radio Inc. © 2006 XM Satellite Radio Inc. All rights reserved. 53 En BASIC OPERATION • The XM Satellite Radio service is only available in the 48 contiguous United States (not available in Alaska and Hawaii) and Canada. • XM Passport System and monthly subscription are sold separately. For details, visit the XM Satellite Radio website at “http:// www.xmradio.com/” (for residents in the United States) or “http://www.xmradio.ca/” (for residents in Canada). • For information on obtaining XM Passport System, visit the XM Satellite Radio website at “http://www.xmradio.com/” (for residents in the United States) or “http://www.xmradio.ca/” (for residents in Canada), or consult your local retailer that sells XM Ready products. • To ensure the optimal reception of the XM Satellite Radio signals, XM Passport System must be placed at or near a southerly facing window with no obstacles in the path to the sky. You can mount it indoors or outdoors. XM® SATELLITE RADIO TUNING Connecting XM Passport System Connect XM Passport and XM Passport Home Dock (sold separately) to the XM jack on the rear panel of this unit. For details, see the operating instructions provided with XM Passport System. XM Passport and XM Passport Home Dock (sold separately) (U.S.A. model) XM 54 En XM® SATELLITE RADIO TUNING XM Satellite Radio controls and functions Note The following controls are available only when “XM” is selected as the input source. Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel (or set the component selector switch to SOURCE and then press XM on the remote control) to select “XM” as the input source. ■ Front panel functions ■ Remote control functions (U.S.A. model) PRESET/TUNING EDIT CODE SET FM/AM A/B/C/D/E MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM CATEGORY POWER TV AV AUTO/MAN'L DISPLAY INPUT 1 CD CD-R STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT POWER SLEEP XM DVD DTV V-AUX 2 MULTI CH IN CBL DOCK SPEAKERS A B STANDBY MD TUNING MODE LEVEL NEXT SEARCH MODE l PRESET/TUNING/CH h TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 4 STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST. 5 6 7 8 SPEAKERS ENHANCER NIGHT STRAIGHT 9 0 TRANSMIT POWER TUNER LEVEL NET TITLE AMP SOURCE TV VOL TV CH VOLUME TV 1 2 3 4 5 MENU 2 CATEGORY (All Channel Search mode) Changes the channel category while staying in the All Channel Search mode. (Category Search mode) Changes the channel category. (Preset Search mode) Changes the preset channel group (A to E). 3 PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (All Channel Search mode) Searches for a channel within all channels. Press and hold for quick search. (Category Search mode) Searches for a channel within the selected category. Press and hold for quick search. (Preset Search mode) Changes the preset channel number (1 to 8). 4 MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) Stores a preset channel in the memory (see page 62). 5 DISPLAY Displays the XM Satellite Radio information such as channel number, channel name, category, artist name, or song title displayed in the front panel display or in the OSD (see page 63). ENTER A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT. RETURN DISPLAY XM MEMORY ON SCREEN 7 REC Set to SOURCE. (U.S.A. model) 1 XM Selects “XM” as the input source. 2 Numeric buttons (All Channel Search or Category Search mode) Use 1 to 9 and 0 to enter a channel number directly. (Preset Search mode) Use 1 to 8 to enter a preset channel number directly. 3 Cursor buttons u / d / j / i (All Channel Search mode) Press A-E/CAT. j / i to change the channel category. Press PRESET/CH u / d to search for a channel within all channels. Press and hold for quick search. (Category Search mode) Press A-E/CAT. j / i to change the channel category. Press PRESET/CH u / d to search for a channel within the selected category. Press and hold for quick search. (Preset Search mode) Press A-E/CAT. j / i to change the preset channel group (A to E). Press PRESET/CH u / d to change the preset channel number (1 to 8). 4 XM MEMORY Stores a preset channel in the memory (see page 62). 5 ENT. Confirms an entered channel number in the Direct Number Access mode (see page 61). 6 SRCH MODE Changes the search mode between the All Channel Search, Category Search, and Preset Search modes (see page 58). 7 DISPLAY Displays the XM Satellite Radio information such as channel number, channel name, category, artist name, or song title displayed in the front panel display or in the OSD (see page 63). 55 En BASIC OPERATION 1 SEARCH MODE Changes the search mode between the All Channel Search, Category Search, and Preset Search modes (see page 58). 3 4 6 SET MENU SRCH MODE BAND EFFECT 5 ENT. EFFECT PRESET/CH USB DVR 10 MOVIE XM® SATELLITE RADIO TUNING Activating XM Satellite Radio 2 To sign up for an account with the XM Satellite Radio service, an XM Satellite Radio ID number is required. Follow the procedure below to check your ID number, and then visit the website or call toll-free with a major credit card handy for signing up. y You can display the XM Satellite Radio reception level by using the “XM ANTENNA” parameter in “OPTION MENU” (see page 89). For residents in the United States URL: http://activate.xmradio.com/ Toll-free: 1-800-XM-RADIO (1-800-967-2346) Notes For residents in Canada URL: https://activate.xmradio.ca/on-line-activation/ activation.jsp Toll-free: 1-877-GET-XMSR (1-877-438-9677) • If “CHECK ANTENNA” appears in the front panel display, XM Passport System may not be connected to the XM jack on the rear panel of this unit properly. See “Connecting XM Passport System” on page 54 and check the connection. • The “XM ANTENNA” parameter in “OPTION MENU” (see page 89) cannot be adjusted by using the remote control. Instead, you need to adjust the orientation of XM Passport System connected to the XM jack of this unit for a better percentage of the reception level. (U.S.A. model) VOLUME ZONE 2 ON/OFF MASTER PRESET/TUNING EDIT FM/AM l PRESET/TUNING/CH h A/B/C/D/E MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM ZONE CONTROL TUNING MODE AUTO/MAN'L LEVEL NEXT SEARCH MODE ON Check the XM Satellite Radio reception level and adjust the orientation of XM Passport System for a better percentage of the reception level. CATEGORY DISPLAY OFF PROGRAM 3 INPUT MAIN ZONE PHONES SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT VIDEO AUX ON/OFF VIDEO L AUDIO USB R EFFECT SILENT CINEMA 3 Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h on the front panel (or PRESET/CH u / d on the remote control) to select channel “0”. 1 PRESET/CH l PRESET/TUNING/CH h 1 Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel (or set the component selector switch to SOURCE and then press XM on the remote control) to select “XM” as the input source. The cursor on the left of the XM indicator lights up in the front panel display. LEVEL or ENTER A-E/CAT. Front panel A-E/CAT. Remote control Note INPUT You cannot select channel “0” if the All Channel Search mode (see page 58) is not selected. 4 Front panel Check the XM Satellite Radio ID number displayed in the front panel display and write it down. or ID:_____________________________________ AMP SOURCE XM TV Remote control Lights up NET USB DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD pXM VOLUME SP A XM RADIO 56 En dB L R XM® SATELLITE RADIO TUNING y Basic XM Satellite Radio operations When you select “XM” as the input source, this unit automatically recalls the previously selected channel. Note (U.S.A. model) The XM Satellite Radio signals cannot be output at the AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks. 2 VOLUME ZONE 2 ON/OFF MASTER PRESET/TUNING EDIT FM/AM l PRESET/TUNING/CH h A/B/C/D/E TUNING MODE AUTO/MAN'L LEVEL NEXT SEARCH MODE ON MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM ZONE CONTROL CATEGORY DISPLAY OFF PROGRAM INPUT MAIN ZONE PHONES SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT VIDEO AUX ON/OFF VIDEO L AUDIO USB R EFFECT SILENT CINEMA Search for a channel by using one of the XM Satellite Radio search modes. See “Selecting the XM Satellite Radio search mode” on page 58 for details. y • You can use the Neural Surround decoder to enjoy the surround sound content of the XM Satellite Radio broadcasts in multi-channels (see page 43). • You can set the XM Satellite Radio preset channels (see page 62). • You can display the XM Satellite Radio information in the front panel display or in the OSD (see page 63). 1 TV AV SLEEP MD CD 1 CD-R XM MULTI CH IN CBL DVD DTV TUNER DOCK USB V-AUX DVR NET TV VOL TV CH VOLUME AMP TV TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN BASIC OPERATION SOURCE 1 MOVIE (U.S.A. model) 1 Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel (or set the component selector switch to SOURCE and then press XM on the remote control) to select “XM” as the input source. The cursor on the left of the XM indicator lights up in the front panel display and the XM Satellite Radio information (such as channel number, channel name, category, artist name, or song title) for the currently selected channel appears in the front panel display. INPUT Front panel or AMP SOURCE XM TV Remote control Lights up NET USB DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD pXM VOLUME SP A [001] Preview dB L R 57 En XM® SATELLITE RADIO TUNING Selecting the XM Satellite Radio search mode 2 Press SEARCH MODE on the front panel (or SRCH MODE on the remote control) repeatedly to select “ALL CH SEARCH”. You can search for the desired channel using one of the three search modes (All Channel Search, Category Search, and Preset Search modes). You can also enter the channel number directly to select the desired channel by using the Direct Number Access mode (see page 61). PRESET/TUNING EDIT SET MENU or MENU SRCH MODE SEARCH MODE Front panel Remote control ■ All Channel Search mode (U.S.A. model) NET USB DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD pXM VOLUME SP A MASTER PRESET/TUNING EDIT FM/AM l PRESET/TUNING/CH h A/B/C/D/E MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM ZONE CONTROL CATEGORY AUTO/MAN'L DISPLAY PROGRAM SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT INPUT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT VIDEO AUX ON/OFF VIDEO L AUDIO USB 3 R EFFECT SILENT CINEMA 2 TV R TUNING MODE OFF MAIN ZONE PHONES L LEVEL NEXT SEARCH MODE ON dB ALL CH SEARCH VOLUME ZONE 2 ON/OFF 3 4 Press CATEGORY on the front panel (or A-E/CAT. j / i on the remote control) repeatedly to change the channel category. 1 PRESET/CH AV A/B/C/D/E MD CD 1 CD-R SLEEP XM DTV DOCK V-AUX TUNER USB DVR MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 or NEXT MULTI CH IN CBL DVD STEREO NET STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST. 5 6 7 8 SPEAKERS ENHANCER NIGHT STRAIGHT 9 0 10 ENTER CATEGORY A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT. ENT. EFFECT AMP PRESET/CH LEVEL SOURCE TV VOL TV CH VOLUME TV 1 TITLE SET MENU MENU SRCH MODE BAND ENTER A-E/CAT. TV MUTE STEREO TV INPUT MUSIC MUTE ENTERTAIN MOVIE A-E/CAT. RETURN DISPLAY XM MEMORY ON SCREEN 2 3-4 REC (U.S.A. model) 1 Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel (or set the component selector switch to SOURCE and then press XM on the remote control) to select “XM” as the input source. Front panel 4 Remote control Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h on the front panel (or PRESET/CH u / d on the remote control) repeatedly to search for a channel within all channels. PRESET/CH l PRESET/TUNING/CH h LEVEL or ENTER A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT. INPUT Front panel Remote control y You can search for a channel quickly by pressing and holding PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h on the front panel (or PRESET/CH u / d on the remote control). Front panel or AMP SOURCE XM TV Remote control 58 En XM® SATELLITE RADIO TUNING ■ Category Search mode 2 (U.S.A. model) Press SEARCH MODE on the front panel (or SRCH MODE on the remote control) repeatedly to select “CAT SEARCH”. VOLUME ZONE 2 ON/OFF MASTER PRESET/TUNING EDIT FM/AM l PRESET/TUNING/CH h A/B/C/D/E MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM PRESET/TUNING EDIT TUNING MODE AUTO/MAN'L SET MENU LEVEL NEXT SEARCH MODE ON ZONE CONTROL CATEGORY PROGRAM MENU or DISPLAY OFF INPUT SRCH MODE MAIN ZONE PHONES SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE SEARCH MODE MULTI CH INPUT VIDEO AUX ON/OFF VIDEO L AUDIO USB R EFFECT Front panel SILENT CINEMA 2 TV 3 4 SLEEP MD 1 CD CD-R XM MULTI CH IN CBL DVD DTV DOCK V-AUX 1 USB DVR STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 SELECT EXTD SUR. STANDARD TUNER NET 6 7 8 ENHANCER NIGHT STRAIGHT 9 0 10 SOURCE TV CH VOLUME TV 1 TITLE MENU SRCH MODE ENTER STEREO TV INPUT MUSIC MUTE ENTERTAIN MOVIE DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD pXM VOLUME dB L R ENT. SET MENU BAND A-E/CAT. TV MUTE DTV/CBL CAT SEARCH EFFECT PRESET/CH LEVEL V-AUX SP A DIRECT ST. 5 SPEAKERS AMP TV VOL DVR NET USB AV Remote control A-E/CAT. RETURN DISPLAY XM MEMORY ON SCREEN 2 3-4 3 Press CATEGORY on the front panel (or A-E/CAT. j / i on the remote control) repeatedly to change the channel category. (U.S.A. model) A/B/C/D/E 1 or NEXT Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel (or set the component selector switch to SOURCE and then press XM on the remote control) to select “XM” as the input source. A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT. Remote control Front panel 4 INPUT ENTER CATEGORY Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h on the front panel (or PRESET/CH u / d on the remote control) repeatedly to search for a channel within the selected channel category. Front panel PRESET/CH or AMP l PRESET/TUNING/CH h SOURCE XM LEVEL or ENTER A-E/CAT. TV A-E/CAT. Remote control Front panel Remote control y You can search for a channel quickly by pressing and holding PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h on the front panel (or PRESET/CH u / d on the remote control). 59 En BASIC OPERATION PRESET/CH REC XM® SATELLITE RADIO TUNING ■ Preset Search mode Prior to selecting a preset channel in the Preset Search mode, you must preset XM Satellite Radio channels. For details, see “Setting the XM Satellite Radio preset channels” on page 62. 2 Press SEARCH MODE on the front panel (or SRCH MODE on the remote control) repeatedly to select “PRESET SEARCH”. PRESET/TUNING EDIT y SET MENU or All preset channels (A1 to E8) recalls “001 Preview” by the initial factory setting. MENU SRCH MODE SEARCH MODE Front panel Remote control (U.S.A. model) NET USB VOLUME ZONE 2 ON/OFF ZONE CONTROL DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD pXM VOLUME SP A MASTER PRESET/TUNING EDIT FM/AM l PRESET/TUNING/CH h A/B/C/D/E SEARCH MODE ON MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L CATEGORY DISPLAY OFF PROGRAM dB PRESET SEARCH LEVEL NEXT L R INPUT MAIN ZONE PHONES SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT VIDEO AUX ON/OFF VIDEO L AUDIO USB R EFFECT SILENT CINEMA 3 2 TV AV CD CD-R 3 4 SLEEP STEREO 1 2 3 4 MULTI CH IN STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST. 5 6 7 8 SPEAKERS ENHANCER NIGHT STRAIGHT 9 0 MD 1 XM CBL DVD DTV DOCK V-AUX TUNER USB DVR 1 NET MUSIC ENTERTAIN 10 Press CATEGORY on the front panel (or A-E/CAT. j / i on the remote control) repeatedly to change the preset channel group (A to E). MOVIE PRESET/CH A/B/C/D/E ENT. EFFECT AMP PRESET/CH LEVEL SOURCE TV VOL TV CH VOLUME TV 1 SET MENU TITLE MENU BAND SRCH MODE ENTER A-E/CAT. TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE A-E/CAT. RETURN DISPLAY XM MEMORY ON SCREEN or NEXT 2 3-4 ENTER CATEGORY A-E/CAT. Remote control Front panel REC A-E/CAT. (U.S.A. model) 4 1 Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel (or set the component selector switch to SOURCE and then press XM on the remote control) to select “XM” as the input source. Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h on the front panel (or PRESET/CH u / d on the remote control) repeatedly to change the preset channel number (1 to 8). PRESET/CH INPUT l PRESET/TUNING/CH h LEVEL or ENTER A-E/CAT. Front panel Front panel A-E/CAT. Remote control or y AMP SOURCE XM TV Remote control 60 En You can also select the preset channel number directly by pressing the numeric buttons (1 to 8) on the remote control. XM® SATELLITE RADIO TUNING ■ Direct Number Access mode 3 TV AV 1 CD CD-R XM MULTI CH IN CBL DVD DTV DOCK 3 DVR ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST. 5 6 7 8 SPEAKERS ENHANCER NIGHT STRAIGHT 9 0 TUNER USB V-AUX MUSIC STEREO SLEEP MD NET 3 2 ENT. 10 EFFECT AMP PRESET/CH SET MENU LEVEL SOURCE TV VOL TV CH VOLUME TV 1 TITLE MENU SRCH MODE BAND ENTER A-E/CAT. TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE A-E/CAT. RETURN DISPLAY XM MEMORY ON SCREEN Press the numeric buttons on the remote control to enter the desired three-digit channel number. For example, to enter the number 123, press the numeric buttons as shown below. STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 REC (U.S.A. model) The display changes as follows. 1 Set the component selector switch to SOURCE and then press XM on the remote control to select “XM” as the input source. NET USB DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD pXM VOLUME SP A dB <XM> --1 L R AMP SOURCE XM NET USB TV DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD pXM VOLUME dB <XM> -12 2 Press SRCH MODE on the remote control repeatedly to select “ALL CH SEARCH” or “CAT SEARCH”. NET USB DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD L MD/CD-R TUNER CD pXM R VOLUME SP A dB <XM>123 SET MENU MENU L R SRCH MODE NET USB DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD pXM VOLUME SP A dB ALL CH SEARCH L R or NET USB DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD pXM STEREO MUSIC 1 2 STRAIGHT ENT. VOLUME SP A CAT SEARCH Press the numeric buttons and ENT. on the remote control to enter the desired one-digit or two-digit channel number. For example, to enter the number 12, press the numeric buttons as shown below. EFFECT dB L R y • Instead of pressing ENT. to tune into the channel immediately, you can wait a few seconds until this unit confirms the entered channel number. • If no button is pressed within a few seconds after you enter a one-digit or two-digit number, this unit automatically confirms the entered channel number. • Pressing a button other than the numeric buttons or ENT. cancels the Direct Number Access mode procedure. 61 En BASIC OPERATION SP A XM® SATELLITE RADIO TUNING Setting the XM Satellite Radio preset channels 2 You can use this feature to store up to 40 XM Satellite Radio channels (A1 to E8: 8 preset channel numbers in each of the 5 preset channel groups). You can then recall any preset channel easily by selecting the preset channel group and number as described in “Preset Search mode” on page 60. Press MEMORY on the front panel (or XM MEMORY on the remote control). The MEMORY indicator flashes in the front panel display for approximately 5 seconds. MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM or RETURN XM MEMORY Front panel Remote control (U.S.A. model) VOLUME ZONE 2 ON/OFF MASTER PRESET/TUNING EDIT FM/AM l PRESET/TUNING/CH h A/B/C/D/E SEARCH MODE TUNING MODE AUTO/MAN'L MEMORY LEVEL NEXT ON MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM ZONE CONTROL CATEGORY DISPLAY Flashes OFF PROGRAM INPUT MAIN ZONE PHONES SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT VIDEO AUX VIDEO ON/OFF L AUDIO USB R EFFECT SILENT CINEMA Note 3 4 STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST. 5 6 7 8 SPEAKERS ENHANCER NIGHT STRAIGHT 9 0 10 You must proceed to and carry out steps 3 through 5 while the MEMORY indicator is flashing in the front panel display. 2,5 3 ENT. EFFECT PRESET/CH LEVEL TITLE SET MENU MENU SRCH MODE BAND 3-4 ENTER A-E/CAT. 2,5 A-E/CAT. RETURN DISPLAY XM MEMORY ON SCREEN REC (U.S.A. model) Press CATEGORY on the front panel (or A-E/CAT. j / i on the remote control) repeatedly to select a preset channel group (A to E) while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. The preset channel group letter appears in the front panel display. PRESET/CH 1 Search for a channel you want to set as a preset channel by using one of the XM Satellite Radio search modes. See “Selecting the XM Satellite Radio search mode” on page 58 for details. A/B/C/D/E or NEXT CATEGORY ENTER A-E/CAT. Remote control Front panel NET USB DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD pXM VOLUME SP A [043] XMU dB L Flashes R NET USB Currently selected channel number A-E/CAT. DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD pXM MEMORY C dB [043] XMU Currently selected preset channel group 62 En VOLUME SP A L R XM® SATELLITE RADIO TUNING 4 Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h on the front panel (or PRESET/CH u / d on the remote control) repeatedly to select a preset channel number (1 to 8) while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. The preset channel number appears in the front panel display. Displaying the XM Satellite Radio information You can display the XM Satellite Radio information (such as channel number, channel name, category, artist name, or song title) for the currently selected channel in the front panel display or in the OSD. (U.S.A. model) PRESET/CH l PRESET/TUNING/CH h VOLUME ZONE 2 ON/OFF or LEVEL ZONE CONTROL ENTER A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT. MASTER PRESET/TUNING EDIT FM/AM l PRESET/TUNING/CH h A/B/C/D/E MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM TUNING MODE AUTO/MAN'L LEVEL NEXT SEARCH MODE ON CATEGORY DISPLAY OFF PROGRAM INPUT MAIN ZONE PHONES SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT VIDEO AUX ON/OFF VIDEO L AUDIO USB R EFFECT SILENT CINEMA Front panel Remote control Flashes DVR NET USB V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R DISPLAY CD pXM TUNER MEMORY VOLUME dB C5 [043] XMU L TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 4 STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST. R Currently selected preset channel number 5 6 7 8 SPEAKERS ENHANCER NIGHT STRAIGHT 9 0 10 ENT. EFFECT PRESET/CH LEVEL TITLE SET MENU MENU SRCH MODE BAND 5 MOVIE BASIC OPERATION SP A ENTER Press MEMORY on the front panel (or XM MEMORY on the remote control) to set the selected XM Satellite Radio channel as a preset channel while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. A colon (:) appears next to the preset channel number for confirmation, and the MEMORY indicator turns off in the front panel display. A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT. RETURN DISPLAY XM MEMORY ON SCREEN DISPLAY REC (U.S.A. model) Note If a status message or an error message appears in the front panel display or in the OSD, see the “XM Satellite Radio (U.S.A. and Canada models only)” section in “TROUBLESHOOTING” on page 112 for appropriate remedies. MEMORY ■ Displaying the XM Satellite Radio information in the front panel display MAN'L/AUTO FM RETURN or XM MEMORY Front panel NET USB Remote control DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD pXM VOLUME SP A C5:[043] XMU Press DISPLAY on the front panel or on the remote control repeatedly to toggle between the following XM Satellite Radio information display modes. dB L R TUNING MODE AUTO/MAN'L Channel number / name Colon (:) Note Once you set a new preset channel, the one previously stored in the same preset channel group and number is cleared. DISPLAY Front panel or Channel category DISPLAY ON SCREEN Remote control Artist name / Song title 63 En XM® SATELLITE RADIO TUNING When the channel number / name is displayed: NET USB DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD pXM VOLUME SP A dB [043] XMU L R ■ Displaying the XM Satellite Radio information in the OSD Press DISPLAY on the front panel or on the remote control. The following screen is displayed in the OSD. When the channel category is displayed: TUNING MODE AUTO/MAN'L DISPLAY or NET USB DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD pXM SP A Front panel dB <CAT>Rock L DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD pXM Coldplay / Spe XM INFORMATION dB L R p y • The front panel display can indicate up to 14 alphanumeric characters at once. You can set whether to display the XM Satellite Radio information in the front panel display in a continuous manner or by 14 alphanumeric characters at once by using the “FL SCROLL” parameter in “OPTION MENU” (see page 87). • If the XM Satellite Radio information contains a character that cannot be recognized by this unit, the character will be displayed with a space. Note If you press DISPLAY while the XM Satellite Radio information display is scrolling from right to left in the front panel display, the XM Satellite Radio information display mode toggles as described above. 64 En p ALL CH SEARCH XM :043 CHAN :XMU CAT :Rock NAME :Coldplay TITLE :Speed of sound .( Coldplay / Spe ) []/[]:CHANNEL [<]/[>]:CATEGORY VOLUME SP A Remote control R When the artist name / song title is displayed: NET USB ON SCREEN DISPLAY VOLUME y • To turn off the OSD, press and hold DISPLAY on the front panel (or on the remote control). • You can select the amount of time while the XM Satellite Radio information is displayed in the OSD by using the “ON SCREEN” parameter in “OPTION MENU” (see page 87). • To hold the XM Satellite Radio information screen, press ENTER on the remote control while it is being displayed in the OSD. • The XM Satellite Radio information screen on hold is released if you press ENTER on the remote control again or if you change the XM Satellite Radio channel. • This unit can save up to two XM Satellite Radio information screens for future reference. To view the previous two XM Satellite Radio information screens, press TITLE on the remote control repeatedly while the current XM Satellite Radio information screen is being on hold. SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS What really creates the rich, full tones of a live instrument are the multiple reflections from the walls of the room. In addition to making the sound live, these reflections enable us to tell where the player is situated as well as the size and shape of the room in which we are sitting. ■ Elements of a sound field There are two distinct types of sound reflections that combine to make up the sound field in addition to the direct sound coming straight to our ears from the player’s instrument. Early reflections Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly (50 ms to 100 ms after the direct sound), after reflecting from one surface only (for example, from a wall or the ceiling). Early reflections actually add clarity to the direct sound. Reverberations These are caused by reflections from more than one surface (for example, from the walls, and the ceiling) so numerous that they merge together to form a continuous sonic afterglow. They are non-directional and lessen the clarity of the direct sound. Direct sound, early reflections and subsequent reverberations taken together help us to determine the subjective size and shape of the room, and it is this information that the digital sound field processor reproduces in order to create sound fields. If you could create the appropriate early reflections and subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you would be able to create your own listening environment. The acoustics in your room could be changed to those of a concert hall, a dance floor, or a room with virtually any size at all. This ability to create sound fields at will is exactly what YAMAHA has done with the digital sound field processor. Selecting sound field programs • Choose a sound field program based on your listening preference, not merely on the name of the program. • When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects the last sound field program used with the corresponding input source. • Sound field programs cannot be selected when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see page 38). • Sampling frequencies higher than 48 kHz (except for DTS 96/24 signals) are sampled down to 48 kHz and then sound field programs are applied. ■ Front panel operations ■ Remote control operations (U.S.A. model) AMP AMP SOURCE TV VOL TV CH VOLUME TV VOLUME ZONE 2 ON/OFF MASTER PRESET/TUNING EDIT FM/AM A/B/C/D/E l PRESET/TUNING/CH h MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM NEXT SEARCH MODE ON ZONE CONTROL TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE AUTO/MAN'L STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN DISPLAY 1 2 3 4 STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST. TUNING MODE LEVEL CATEGORY MOVIE OFF PROGRAM INPUT MAIN ZONE PHONES SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT VIDEO AUX VIDEO ON/OFF L AUDIO USB R 5 6 7 8 SPEAKERS ENHANCER NIGHT STRAIGHT 9 0 Sound field program selector buttons EFFECT SILENT CINEMA 10 ENT. EFFECT PRESET/CH (U.S.A. model) PROGRAM selector Rotate the PROGRAM selector on the front panel. The name of the selected sound field program appears in the front panel display and in the OSD. Set the component selector switch to AMP and then press one of the sound field program selector buttons on the remote control repeatedly. The name of the selected sound field program appears in the front panel display and in the OSD. 65 En SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS Notes SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS Sound field program descriptions This unit is equipped with a variety of precise digital decoders that allow you to enjoy multi-channel playback from almost any stereo or multi-channel sound source. This unit is also equipped with a YAMAHA digital sound field processing (DSP) chip containing several sound field programs which you can use to enhance your playback experience. y The YAMAHA CINEMA DSP modes are compatible with all Dolby Digital, DTS, and Dolby Surround sources. Set “INPUT MODE” to “AUTO” (see page 35) to enable this unit to automatically switch to the appropriate digital decoder according to the input signal. Notes • The DSP sound field programs of this unit are recreations of real-world acoustic environments made from precise measurements taken in the actual concert hall, music venue, movie theater, etc. Thus, you may notice variations in the strength of the reflections coming from the front, back, left and right. • Choose a sound field program based on your listening preference, not merely on the name of the program itself. ■ For movie/video sources You can select from the following sound fields when playing movie or video sources. The sound fields marked “MULTI” can be used with multi-channel sources, like DVD, digital TV, etc. Those marked “2-CH” can be used with 2-channel stereo sources like TV programs, video tapes, etc. y Rotate the PROGRAM selector on the front panel (or set the component selector switch to AMP and then press one of the sound field program selector buttons on the remote control) to select the desired sound field program (see page 65). Remote control button Sound field program Features 1 STEREO 2ch Stereo Downmixes multi-channel sources to 2 channels or plays back 2-channel sources as they are. 2 MUSIC Pop/Rock CINEMA DSP processing. This program creates an enthusiastic atmosphere where you can feel as if you are in an actual jazz or rock concert. ENTERTAINMENT TV Sports CINEMA DSP processing. This program reproduces the sound environment of a large concert hall using the surround sound field to enhance your experience of watching various TV programs such as news, variety shows, music programs or sports programs. ENTERTAINMENT Mono Movie CINEMA DSP processing. This program reproduces monaural video sources (such as old movies) at the optimum reverberation level to create sound depth using only the presence sound field. ENTERTAINMENT Game CINEMA DSP processing. This program adds a deep and spatial feeling to video game sounds. 3 66 En Sources MULTI 2-CH SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS Remote control button Sound field program Features MOVIE THEATER Spectacle CINEMA DSP processing. This program reproduces the extremely wide sound field of a 70-mm movie theater in detail, making both the video and the sound field incredibly real. This is ideal for any kind of video source encoded in Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS, especially large-scale movie productions. MOVIE THEATER Sci-Fi CINEMA DSP processing. This program reproduces dialog and sound effects in the latest sound form for science fiction films, thus creating a broad and expansive cinematic space amid silence. You can enjoy science fiction films encoded in Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS in a virtual-space sound field employing the most advanced techniques. MOVIE THEATER Adventure CINEMA DSP processing. This program reproduces the sound design of the newest 70-mm and multi-channel soundtrack films similar to the sound field of the newest movie theaters, so the reverberations of the sound field itself are restrained as much as possible. MOVIE THEATER General CINEMA DSP processing. This program reproduces sounds from 70-mm and multi-channel soundtrack films characterized by soft and extensive sound field. SUR. STANDARD Standard processing for the selected decoder. SUR. ENHANCED Enhanced processing for the selected decoder. 4 Sources MULTI 2-CH 5 ■ For music sources You can select from the following sound fields when playing music sources, like CD, FM/AM broadcasting, tapes, etc. y Rotate the PROGRAM selector on the front panel (or set the component selector switch to AMP and then press one of the sound field program selector buttons on the remote control) to select the desired sound field program (see page 65). Sound field program Features STEREO 2ch Stereo Plays back 2-channel sources. STEREO 6ch Stereo Plays back 2-channel sources from all speakers in 6.1 channels, providing a larger sound field ideal for background music at parties, etc. MUSIC Hall in Vienna HiFi DSP processing. This program reproduces a classic shoe-box type concert hall with approximately 1700 seats. Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely complex reflections which produce a very full, rich sound. MUSIC The Bttm Line HiFi DSP processing. This program reproduces the stage front in “The Bottom Line”, a famous New York jazz club where 300 people can be seated. MUSIC The Roxy Thtr HiFi DSP processing. This program reproduces the dynamic rock music environment of “The Roxy Theatre”, one of the hottest rock clubs in L.A. The listener’s imaginary seat is at the center-left of the hall. ENTERTAINMENT Disco HiFi DSP processing. This program reproduces the acoustic environment of a lively disco in the heart of a big city to create a highly concentrated and energetic sound. SUR. STANDARD Standard processing for the selected decoder. SUR. ENHANCED Enhanced processing for the selected decoder. 2-CH 1 2 3 Sources MULTI 2-CH 5 67 En SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS Remote control button SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS Changing sound field parameter settings 2 Turn on the video monitor and then press DISPLAY on the remote control. The following display is shown in the OSD. You can enjoy good quality sound with the initial factory settings. Although you do not have to change the initial factory settings, you can change some of the parameters to better suit the input source or your listening room. DISPLAY ON SCREEN Notes • Use the “PARAM. INI” feature in “OPTION MENU” to initialize the parameters of each sound field program within a sound field program group (see page 88). • When you set a sound field parameter to a value other than the initial factory settings, an asterisk mark (*) appears by the sound field parameter name in the OSD. • You cannot change the sound field parameter values when “MEMORY GUARD” in “OPTION MENU” is set to “ON” (see page 87). If you want to change the sound field parameter values, set “MEMORY GUARD” to “OFF”. Sound field program category P02 Cursor MUSIC . Pop/Rock DSP LEVEL;;;;0dB P.INIT.DLY;;21ms P.ROOM SIZE;;1.0 S.INIT.DLY;;25ms S.ROOM SIZE;;1.0 Sound field parameters Sound field parameter values y • For details about the function and control range of each sound field parameter, see page 69. • Repeat steps 3 and 4 as necessary to change other sound field program parameter settings. • The available sound field parameters for some of the sound field programs may be displayed on more than one page in the OSD. In this case, press u / d to scroll through pages. • If you press and hold j / i to change the sound field parameter value, the initial factory settings are shown momentarily in the front panel display. CODE SET POWER TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 SELECT EXTD SUR. Press one of the sound field program selector buttons repeatedly to select the desired sound field program you want to adjust. STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST. 5 6 7 8 SPEAKERS ENHANCER NIGHT STRAIGHT 9 0 TRANSMIT POWER TV AV CD CD-R STANDBY POWER STANDARD MD SLEEP DTV 3 DIRECT ST. 5 6 7 8 SPEAKERS ENHANCER NIGHT STRAIGHT 9 0 10 XM MULTI CH IN CBL DVD 3 10 ENT. EFFECT ENT. TUNER EFFECT DOCK USB PRESET/CH LEVEL 1 V-AUX DVR NET SET MENU TITLE MENU BAND SRCH MODE AMP ENTER SOURCE TV VOL TV CH A-E/CAT. VOLUME TV A-E/CAT. RETURN DISPLAY XM MEMORY ON SCREEN REC 4 2 AUDIO (U.S.A. model) 1 Set the component selector switch to AMP. 4 Press u / d to select the desired sound field parameter and then j / i to change the selected sound field parameter value. • Press i to increase the value. • Press j to decrease the value. PRESET/CH AMP SOURCE TV ENTER A-E/CAT. 68 En A-E/CAT. SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS ■ Sound field parameter descriptions You can adjust the values of certain digital sound field parameters so that the sound fields are recreated accurately in your listening room. Not all of the following parameters are found in every program. y To change sound field parameter settings to suit your listening environment, see page 68 for details. Sound field parameter DSP LEVEL Features DSP level. Adjusts the level of all the DSP effect sounds within a narrow range. Depending on the acoustics of your listening room, you may want to increase or decrease the DSP effect level relative to the level of the direct sound. Control range: –6 dB to +3 dB Initial delay. Presence, surround, and surround back initial delays. Changes the apparent distance from the source sound by adjusting the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection heard by the listener. The smaller the value, the closer the sound source seems to the listener. The larger the value, the farther it seems. For a small room, set to a small value. For a large room, set to a large value. Control range: 1 to 99 ms (INIT.DLY and P.INIT.DLY) 1 to 49 ms (S.INIT.DLY and SB INI.DLY) Source sound Level Level Early reflections Level INIT.DLY P.INIT.DLY S.INIT.DLY SB INI.DLY Time Time Time Delay Delay Delay SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS Sound source Reflection face Small value = 1 ms Large value = 99 ms 69 En SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS Sound field parameter ROOM SIZE P.ROOM SIZE S.ROOM SIZE SB ROOM SIZE Features Room size. Presence, surround, and surround back room sizes. Adjusts the apparent size of the surround sound field. The larger the value, the larger the surround sound field becomes. As the sound is repeatedly reflected around a room, the larger the hall is, the longer the time between the original reflected sound and the subsequent reflections. By controlling the time between the reflected sounds, you can change the apparent size of the virtual venue. Changing this parameter from one to two doubles the apparent length of the room. Control range: 0.1 to 2.0 Time Early reflections Level Level Level Source sound Time Time Sound source Small value = 0.1 LIVENESS S.LIVENESS SB LIVENESS Large value = 2.0 Liveness. Surround and surround back liveness. Adjusts the reflectivity of the virtual walls in the hall by changing the rate at which the early reflections decay. The early reflections of a sound source decay much faster in a room with acoustically absorbent wall surfaces than in one which has highly reflective surfaces. A room with acoustically absorbent surfaces is referred to as “dead”, while a room with highly reflective surfaces is referred to as “live”. This parameter lets you adjust the early reflection decay rate and thus the “liveness” of the room. Control range: 0 to 10 Source sound Time Small reflected sound Small value = 0 70 En Level Dead Level Level Live Time Time Large reflected sound Large value = 10 SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS Sound field parameter REV.TIME Features Reverberation time. Adjusts the amount of time taken for the dense, subsequent reverberation sound to decay by 60 dB at 1 kHz. This changes the apparent size of the acoustic environment over an extremely wide range. Set a longer reverberation time for “dead” sources and listening room environments, and a shorter time for “live” sources and listening room environments. Control range: 1.0 to 5.0 s Source sound Reverberation Reverberation Early reflections 60 dB REV.TIME Sound source 60 dB REV.TIME Short reverberation REV.TIME Long reverberation Small value = 1.0 s Large value = 5.0 s Reverberation delay. Adjusts the time difference between the beginning of the direct sound and the beginning of the reverberation sound. The larger the value, the later the reverberation sound begins. A later reverberation sound makes you feel as if you are in a larger acoustic environment. Control range: 0 to 250 ms SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS Level REV.DELAY 60 dB Source sound (dB) 60 dB Reverberation Time REV.DELAY REV.TIME 71 En SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS Sound field parameter REV.LEVEL Features Reverberation level. Adjusts the volume of the reverberation sound. The larger the value, the stronger the reverberation becomes. Level Control range: 0 to 100% Source sound REV. LEVEL Time 2ch Stereo DIRECT 2-channel stereo direct. Bypasses the decoders and DSP processors of this unit for pure hi-fi stereo sound when playing 2-channel analog sources. Choices: AUTO, OFF y • The “AUTO” setting bypasses the decoders and DSP processors only when “BASS” and “TREBLE” are set to 0 dB (see page 33). • When multi-channel signals (Dolby Digital and DTS) are input, they are downmixed to 2 channels and output from the front left and right speakers. • The low-frequency signals input from the front left and right speakers are redirected to the subwoofer in the following cases: – “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “BOTH” (see page 78). – “FRONT SP” is set to “SMALL” (see page 77) and “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “SWFR” (see page 78). 6ch Stereo CT LEVEL SL LEVEL SR LEVEL SB LEVEL 72 En 6-channel stereo center, surround left, surround right and surround back levels. Adjusts the volume level of each channel in the 6-channel stereo mode. Control range: 0 to 100% SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS Sound field parameter Features PRO LOGIC IIx Music PRO LOGIC II Music PANORAMA Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music panorama. Sends stereo signals to the surround speakers as well as the front speakers for a wraparound effect. PRO LOGIC IIx Music PRO LOGIC II Music DIMENSION Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music dimension. Adjusts the sound field either towards the front or towards the rear. Choices: OFF, ON Control range: –3 (towards the rear) to +3 (towards the front) Initial setting: STD (standard) PRO LOGIC IIx Music PRO LOGIC II Music CENTER WIDTH Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music center width. Moves the center channel output completely towards the center speaker or towards the front left and right speakers. A larger value moves the center channel output towards the front left and right speakers. Control range: 0 (center channel sound is output only from the center speaker) to 7 (center channel sound is output only from the front left and right speakers) Initial setting: 3 DTS Neo:6 Music C.IMAGE DTS Neo:6 Music center image. Adjusts the front left and right channel output relative to the center channel to make the center channel more or less dominant as necessary. Control range: 0.0 to 1.0 Initial setting: 0.3 y 73 En SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS The “PRO LOGIC IIx Music”, “PRO LOGIC II Music”, and “DTS Neo:6 Music” parameters can be set only when “SUR. STANDARD” is selected. Set the component selector switch to AMP and then press STANDARD on the remote control repeatedly to select “SUR. STANDARD” (see page 43). SET MENU SET MENU You can use the following parameters in “SET MENU” to adjust a variety of system settings and customize the way this unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening environment. ■ Basic setup BASIC SETUP Use this feature to set up your system quickly and with minimal effort (see page 29). ■ Manual setup MANUAL SETUP Use this feature to manually adjust speaker and system parameters. Sound menu 1 SOUND MENU Use this menu to manually adjust any speaker settings, alter the quality and tone of the sound output by the system or compensate for video signal processing delays when using LCD monitors or projectors. Parameter Features Page A)SPEAKER SET Selects the size of each speaker, the speakers for low-frequency signal output, and the crossover frequency. 77 B)SPEAKER LEVEL Adjusts the output level of each speaker. 79 C)SP DISTANCE Adjusts the delay time of each speaker. 80 D)CENTER GEQ Adjusts the tonal quality of the center speaker. 80 E)LFE LEVEL Adjusts the output level of the LFE channel for Dolby Digital or DTS signals. 80 F)DYNAMIC RANGE Adjusts the dynamic range of Dolby Digital or DTS signals. 81 G)AUDIO SET Adjusts the muting level, audio delay and tone bypass settings. 81 Input menu 2 INPUT MENU Use this menu to manually reassign the input/output jacks, select the input mode or rename the input source. Parameter Features Page A)I/O ASSIGNMENT Assigns the input/output jacks of this unit according to the component to be used. 82 B)INPUT MODE Selects the initial input mode of the source. 83 C)INPUT RENAME Changes the name of the input source. 83 D)VOLUME TRIM Adjusts the output volume of each jack. 84 74 En SET MENU Network and USB menu 3 NET/USB MENU Use this menu to manually adjust the network and USB system parameters. Parameter Features Page A)NETWORK Configures the network settings automatically or manually. 84 B)PLAY STYLE Adjusts the playback style. 85 C)INFORMATION Displays the network system information. 86 Option menu 4 OPTION MENU Use this menu to manually adjust the optional system parameters. Parameter Features Page A)DISPLAY SET Adjusts the brightness of the display and converts video signals. Sets the OSD display time as well as the front panel display scrolling mode. 86 B)MEMORY GUARD Locks sound field program parameters and other “SET MENU” settings. 87 C)PARAM. INI Initializes the parameters of a group of sound field programs. 88 D)MULTI ZONE SET Specifies the location of the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals. 88 E)XM RADIO SET Displays the current reception level of XM Passport System. 89 Note The “XM RADIO SET” parameter is only applicable to the U.S.A. and Canada models. ■ Signal information SIGNAL INFO Use this feature to check audio signal information (see page 40). ADVANCED OPERATION 75 En SET MENU Using SET MENU 2 Press u / d to select “MANUAL SETUP”. Use the remote control to access and adjust each parameter. TV AV CD CD-R MUSIC STEREO MD SLEEP 3 4 EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST. 5 6 7 8 SPEAKERS ENHANCER NIGHT STRAIGHT 9 0 ENTER A-E/CAT. USB A-E/CAT. DVR NET 10 [ ]/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p 2 SELECT TUNER DOCK V-AUX MOVIE 1 STANDARD p MULTI CH IN DTV SET MENU ;BASICSETUP .;MANUALSETUP .;SIGNAL INFO XM CBL DVD ENTERTAIN PRESET/CH ENT. EFFECT 1 AMP SOURCE TV VOL TV CH PRESET/CH LEVEL TITLE SET MENU MENU SRCH MODE BAND VOLUME TV ENTER A-E/CAT. TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN A-E/CAT. RETURN DISPLAY XM MEMORY ON SCREEN 1,7 2-6 3 REC MOVIE (U.S.A. model) Press ENTER to enter “MANUAL SETUP”. The “MANUAL SETUP” display appears in the OSD. y ;MANUAL SETUP PRESET/CH ENTER 4 Note You cannot change some “SET MENU” parameters when “NIGHT:CINEMA” or “NIGHT:MUSIC” is selected as the night listening mode (see page 34). A-E/CAT. Press u / d repeatedly and then press ENTER to select and enter the desired menu. The following displays are examples where “SOUND MENU” is selected. PRESET/CH 1 Set the component selector switch to AMP and then press SET MENU to enter “SET MENU”. The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD. p A-E/CAT. .1SOUNDMENU 2INPUTMENU 3NET/USBMENU 4OPTIONMENU []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p • You can change the “SET MENU” parameters while this unit is reproducing sound. • If you press one of the sound field program selector buttons during the “SET MENU” operation, the “SET MENU” operation is canceled. • Repeat the following procedure to select and adjust each parameter setting. • Press RETURN to return to the previous menu level. PRESET/CH ENTER A-E/CAT. ENTER A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT. AMP SET MENU SOURCE MENU 1 SOUND MENU 1/2 1 SOUND MENU 2/2 SRCH MODE TV p 76 En p p [ ]/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter .E)LFE LEVEL F)DYNAMIC RANGE G)AUDIO SET []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p SET MENU .;BASICSETUP ;MANUALSETUP .;SIGNAL INFO p p .A)SPEAKERSET B)SPEAKERLEVEL C)SPDISTANCE D)CENTER GEQ []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter SET MENU 5 Press u / d repeatedly and then press ENTER to select and enter the desired submenu. The following display is an example where “SPEAKER LEVEL” is selected. PRESET/CH Use this menu to manually adjust any speaker settings or compensate for video signal processing delays when using LCD monitors or projectors. 1 SOUND MENU 1/2 PRESET/CH ENTER p A-E/CAT. 1 SOUND MENU 2/2 .E)LFE LEVEL F)DYNAMIC RANGE G)AUDIO SET []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p A-E/CAT. p A-E/CAT. .A)SPEAKERSET B)SPEAKERLEVEL C)SPDISTANCE D)CENTER GEQ []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p ENTER A-E/CAT. 1 SOUND MENU ■ Speaker settings A)SPEAKER SET B)SPEAKER LEVEL Use this feature to manually adjust any speaker settings. -__________+ .FL;;;;;;;;;; FR;;;;;;;;;; C;;;;;;;;;; y If you are not satisfied with the bass sounds from your speakers, you can change these settings according to your preference. Front speakers FRONT SP Choices: SMALL, LARGE 6 Press u / d to select the desired parameter and then j / i to change the parameter settings. • Press i to increase the value. • Press j to decrease the value. PRESET/CH ENTER A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT. Press SET MENU to exit from “SET MENU”. SET MENU • Select “SMALL” (small) if you have small front speakers that do not reproduce low-frequency signals effectively. The low-frequency signals of the front left and right channels are directed to the speakers selected in “LFE/BASS OUT” (see page 78). • Select “LARGE” (large) if you have large front speakers that reproduce low-frequency signals effectively. All the front left and right channel signals are directed to the front left and right speakers. MENU SRCH MODE Note Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode. However, the stored data will be lost in case the power cable is disconnected from the AC wall outlet or if the power supply is cut off for more than one week. If “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “FRNT” (see page 78), the LFE signals found in Dolby Digital or DTS sources, the low-frequency signals of the front left and right channels, and the low-frequency signals of other speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) are all directed to the front left and right speakers regardless of the “FRONT SP” setting. 77 En ADVANCED OPERATION 7 SMALL>LARGE PRESET/CH ENTER A-E/CAT. FRONT SP SET MENU Center speaker CENTER SP Choices: NONE, SML, LRG Surround back speakers SUR. B SP Choices: NONE, SML, LRG SUR. B SP CENTER SP NONE>SML LRG NONE>SMLLRG • Select “NONE” (none) if you did not connect a center speaker. The center channel signals are directed to the front left and right speakers. • Select “SML” (small) if you have a small center speaker that does not reproduce low-frequency signals effectively. The low-frequency signals of the center channel are directed to the speakers selected in “LFE/ BASS OUT”. • Select “LRG” (large) if you have a large center speaker that reproduces low-frequency signals effectively. All the center channel signals are directed to the center speaker. Surround left/right speakers Choices: NONE, SML, LRG SUR. L/R SP • Select “NONE” (none) if you did not connect a surround back speaker. The surround back channel signals are directed to the surround left and right speakers. • Select “SML” (small) if you have a small surround back speaker that does not reproduce low-frequency signals effectively. The low-frequency signals of the surround back channel are directed to the speakers selected in “LFE/BASS OUT”. • Select “LRG” (large) if you have a large surround back speaker that reproduces low-frequency signals effectively. All the surround back channel signals are directed to the surround back speaker. Bass out LFE/BASS OUT Use this feature to select the speakers that output the LFE (low-frequency effect) and the low-frequency signals. Choices: SWFR, FRNT, BOTH SUR. L/R SP LFE/BASS OUT NONE>SMLLRG SWFRFRNT>BOTH • Select “NONE” (none) if you did not connect surround speakers. This unit is set to the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode (see page 44) and “SUR. B SP” is automatically set to “NONE”. • Select “SML” (small) if you have small surround left and right speakers that do not reproduce low-frequency signals effectively. The low-frequency signals of the surround left and right channels are directed to the speakers selected in “LFE/BASS OUT”. • Select “LRG” (large) if you have large surround left and right speakers that reproduce low-frequency signals effectively. All the surround channel signals are directed to the surround left and right speakers. 78 En • Select “SWFR” (subwoofer) if you connected a subwoofer. The LFE signals as well as the lowfrequency signals of other speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) are directed to the subwoofer. • Select “FRNT” (front) if you did not connect a subwoofer. The LFE signals, the low-frequency signals of the front left and right channels, and the lowfrequency signals of other speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) are all directed to the front left and right speakers regardless of the “FRONT SP” setting (see page 77). • Select “BOTH” (both) if you connected a subwoofer. The low-frequency signals of any source are output from the subwoofer. The LFE signals as well as the low-frequency signals of other speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) are directed to the subwoofer. The lowfrequency signals of the front left and right channels are directed to the front left and right speakers and the subwoofer regardless of the “FRONT SP” setting (see page 77). SET MENU Crossover CROSSOVER Use this feature to select a crossover frequency of all the speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) or to “NONE” in “SPEAKER SET” (see pages 77 and 78). All frequencies below the selected frequency will be sent to the subwoofer or to the speakers set to “LRG” (or “LARGE”) in “SPEAKER SET” (see pages 77 and 78). Choices: 40Hz, 60Hz, 80Hz, 90Hz, 100Hz, 110Hz, 120Hz, 160Hz, 200Hz ■ Speaker level B)SPEAKER LEVEL Use this feature to manually balance the speaker levels between the front left or surround left speakers and each speaker selected in “SPEAKER SET” (see page 77). Control range: –10.0 to +10.0 dB Control step: 1.0 dB Initial setting: 0 dB B)SPEAKER LEVEL -__________+ .FL;;;;;;;;;; FR;;;;;;;;;; C;;;;;;;;;; CROSSOVER FREQ;;;80Hz Subwoofer phase SUBWOOFER PHASE Use this feature to switch the phase of your subwoofer if bass sounds are lacking or unclear. Choices: NORMAL, REVERSE 02ASUBWOOFER PHASE >NORMALREVERSE • Select “NORMAL” if you do not want to reverse the phase of your subwoofer. • Select “REVERSE” to reverse the phase of your subwoofer. • Select “FL” to adjust the balance of the front left speaker. • Select “FR” to adjust the balance of the front right speaker. • Select “C” to adjust the balance of the center speaker. • Select “SL” to adjust the balance of the surround left speaker. • Select “SR” to adjust the balance of the surround right speaker. • Select “SB” to adjust the balance of the surround back speaker. • Select “SWFR” to adjust the balance of the subwoofer. Note “C”, “SL”, “SR”, “SB” and “SWFR” cannot be adjusted if “CENTER SP” (see page 78), “SUR. L/R SP” (see page 78), “SUR. B SP” (see page 78) and “LFE/BASS OUT” (see page 78) are set to “NONE” respectively. ADVANCED OPERATION 79 En SET MENU ■ Speaker distance C)SP DISTANCE Use this feature to manually adjust the distance of each speaker and the delay applied to the respective channel. Ideally, each speaker should be the same distance from the main listening position. However, this is not possible in most home situations. Thus, a certain amount of delay must be applied to the sound from each speaker so that all sounds will arrive at the listening position at the same time. ■ Center graphic equalizer D)CENTER GEQ Use this feature to adjust the built-in 5-frequency band (100Hz, 300Hz, 1kHz, 3kHz and 10kHz) graphic equalizer for the center channel so that the tonal quality of the center speaker matches that of the front speakers. You can make adjustments while listening to the currently selected source component or a test tone. Control range: –6 to +6 dB Control step: 0.5 dB Initial setting: 0 dB C)SP DISTANCE D)CENTER GEQ p Unit UNIT Choices: meters (m), feet (ft) Initial setting: [U.S.A. and Canada models]: feet (ft) [Other models]: meters (m) • Select “meters” to adjust speaker distances in meters. • Select “feet” to adjust speaker distances in feet. y Press u / d to select a frequency band and j / i to adjust the selected frequency band. ■ Low-frequency effect level E)LFE LEVEL Use this feature to adjust the output level of the LFE (lowfrequency effect) channel according to the capacity of your subwoofer or headphones. The LFE channel carries low-frequency special effects which are only added to certain scenes. This setting is effective only when this unit decodes Dolby Digital or DTS signals. Control range: –20 to 0 dB Control step: 1 dB E)LFE LEVEL .SPEAKER;;;;;;0dB HEADPHONE;;;;0dB []/[]:Up/Down [<]/[>]:Adjust p Note “CENTER”, “SUR.L”, “SUR.R”, “SUR.B” and “SWFR” cannot be adjusted if “CENTER SP” (see page 78), “SUR. L/R SP” (see page 78), “SUR. B SP” (see page 78) and “LFE/BASS OUT” (see page 78) are set to “NONE” respectively. Test tone TEST Choices: OFF, ON • Select “OFF” to stop test tones and output the currently selected source component. • Select “ON” to output test tones from the front left and center speakers, and adjust the tonal quality of the center speaker. p Speaker distances Control range: 0.30 to 24.00 m (1.0 to 80.0 ft) Control step: 0.10 m (0.5 ft) • Select “FRONT L” to adjust the distance of the front left speaker. Initial setting: 3.00 m (10.0 ft) • Select “FRONT R” to adjust the distance of the front right speaker. Initial setting: 3.00 m (10.0 ft) • Select “CENTER” to adjust the distance of the center speaker. Initial setting: 3.00 m (10.0 ft) • Select “SUR. L” to adjust the distance of the surround left speaker. Initial setting: 3.00 m (10.0 ft) • Select “SUR. R” to adjust the distance of the surround right speaker. Initial setting: 3.00 m (10.0 ft) • Select “SUR. B” to adjust the distance of the surround back speaker. Initial setting: 2.10 m (7.0 ft) • Select “SWFR” to adjust the distance of the subwoofer. Initial setting: 3.00 m (10.0 ft) 0dB 0dB 0dB 0dB 0dB p .TEST>OFFON -______+ 100Hz ;;;;;; 300Hz ;;;;;; 1kHz ;;;;;; 3kHz ;;;;;; 10kHz ;;;;;; []/[]:Up/Down [<]/[>]:Adjust p p . UNIT;;;;;;;;feet FRONTL;;;10.0ft FRONTR;;;10.0ft CENTER;;;;10.0ft []/[]:Up/Down [<]/[>]:Adjust Speaker SPEAKER Adjusts the speaker LFE level. Headphone HEADPHONE Adjusts the headphone LFE level. Note Depending on the settings of “LFE/BASS OUT” (see page 78), some signals may not be output at the SUBWOOFER OUTPUT jack. 80 En SET MENU ■ Dynamic range F)DYNAMIC RANGE Use this feature to select the amount of dynamic range compression to be applied to your speakers or headphones. This setting is effective only when this unit is decoding Dolby Digital and DTS signals. ■ Audio settings G)AUDIO SET Use this feature to adjust the overall audio settings of this unit. G)AUDIO SET F)DYNAMIC RANGE p []/[]:Up/Down [<]/[>]:Select p .SP:MINSTD>MAX HP:MINSTD>MAX .MUTING TYPE;FULL AUDIO DELAY;;0ms TONE BYPASS;AUTO p p []/[]:Up/Down [<]/[>]:Select Speaker SP Adjusts the speaker compression. Headphone HP Adjusts the headphone compression. Choices: MIN, STD, MAX • Select “MIN” (minimum) if you regularly listen at low volume levels. • Select “STD” (standard) for general use. • Select “MAX” (maximum) to preserve the greatest amount of dynamic range. Muting type MUTING TYPE Use this feature to adjust how much the mute function reduces the output volume (see page 34). Choices: FULL, –20dB • Select “FULL” to completely mute all the audio output. • Select “–20dB” to reduce the current volume by 20 dB. Audio delay AUDIO DELAY Use this feature to delay the sound output and synchronize it with the video image. This may be necessary when using certain LCD monitors or projectors. Control range: 0 to 160 ms Control step: 1 ms Tone bypass TONE BYPASS Use this feature to select whether audio output bypasses tone control circuitry when “TREBLE” and “BASS” are set to 0 dB (see page 33). Choices: AUTO, OFF • Select “AUTO” if you want signals to bypass tone control circuitry to provide the purest signal possible. • Select “OFF” if you do not want signals to bypass tone control circuitry. ADVANCED OPERATION 81 En SET MENU 2 INPUT MENU Use this menu to reassign the input/output jacks, select the input mode or rename the input source. 2 INPUTMENU p p .A)I/OASSIGNMENT B)INPUTMODE C)INPUTRENAME D)VOLUME TRIM []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter For OPTICAL INPUT jacks 2, 3 and 4 OPTICAL IN (2) OPTICAL IN (3) OPTICAL IN (4) Choices: (2) CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR (3) CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR (4) CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR OPTICALIN ■ Input/output assignment A)I/O ASSIGNMENT Use this feature to assign the input/output jacks according to the component to be used if the initial settings of this unit do not correspond to your needs. Change the following parameters to reassign the respective jacks and effectively connect more components. Once the input/output jacks are reassigned, you can select the corresponding component by using the INPUT selector on the front panel (or the input selector buttons on the remote control). For COMPONENT VIDEO jacks A, B and C CMPNT-V INPUT [A] CMPNT-V INPUT [B] CMPNT-V INPUT [C] Choices: [A] DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR [B] DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR [C] DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR CMPNT-VINPUT .[A];;;;;DVD (DVD) [B];;;;;DTV/CBL (DTV/CBL) [C];;;;; DVR ( DVR ) For OPTICAL OUTPUT jack 1 OPTICAL OUT (1) Choices: CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR OPTICALOUT .(1);;;;;MD/CD-R (MD/CD-R ) 82 En .(2);;;;;MD/CD-R (MD/CD-R) (3);;;;; DVD (DVD ) (4);;;;;DTV/CBL (DTV/CBL ) For COAXIAL INPUT jack 5 COAXIAL IN (5) Choices: (5) CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR COAXIALIN .(5);;;;; ( DVD DVD ) Notes • You cannot select a specific item more than once for the same type of jack. • When you connect a component to both the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) and DIGITAL INPUT (OPTICAL) jacks, priority is given to the signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jack. SET MENU ■ Input mode B)INPUT MODE Use this feature to set this unit to reset “INPUT MODE” back to “AUTO” (see page 35) regardless of the previous setting or to recall the last input mode (“AUTO”, “DTS”, or “ANALOG”) used for that source whenever you turn on this unit. Choices: AUTO, LAST 2 Press j / i on the remote control to place the “_” (underscore) under the space or the character you want to edit. PRESET/CH ENTER B)INPUTMODE A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT. >AUTOLAST [<]/[>]:Select [ENTER]:Return 3 • Select “AUTO” to reset “INPUT MODE” back to “AUTO” (see page 35) regardless of the previous setting whenever you turn on this unit. This unit automatically selects input signals in the following order: (1) Digital signals (2) Analog signals • Select “LAST” to set this unit to automatically recall the last input mode (“AUTO”, “DTS”, or “ANALOG”) used for that source whenever you turn on this unit. C)INPUTRENAME ENTER ENTER A-E/CAT. • You can use up to 8 characters for each input. • Press d to change the character in the following order, or press u to go in the reverse order: A to Z, a space, 0 to 9, a space, a to z, a space, symbols (#, *, +, –, etc.) 4 Repeat steps 1 through 3 to rename each input source. 5 Press ENTER on the remote control to exit from “INPUT RENAME”. PRESET/CH ENTER A-E/CAT. CD CD-R DTV DOCK V-AUX A-E/CAT. SLEEP XM MULTI CH IN CBL DVD A-E/CAT. Notes Press one of the input selector buttons on the remote control to select the input source you want to change the name of. MD A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT. TUNER USB DVR NET 83 En ADVANCED OPERATION 1 p p [<]/[>]:Position []/[]:Chara. PRESET/CH PRESET/CH ■ Input rename C)INPUT RENAME Use this feature to change the name of the input source that appears in the OSD and in the front panel display. DVD-> DVD Press u / d to select the character you want to use and then press j / i to move to the next space. SET MENU 3 NET/USB MENU Use this menu to adjust the network and USB system parameters. 3 NET/USBMENU .A)NETWORK B)PLAY STYLE C)INFORMATION p []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p ■ Volume trim D)VOLUME TRIM Use this feature to adjust the level of the signal input at each jack. This is useful if you want to balance the level of each input source to avoid sudden changes in volume when switching between input sources. Choices: CD, MD/CD-R, TUNER, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DOCK, DVR, PC/MCX, USB, NET RADIO, MULTI CH IN Control range: –6.0 to +6.0 dB Control step: 1.0 dB Initial setting: 0.0 dB D)VOLUME TRIM DVD DVD-> 0.0dB [<]/[>]:Adjust [RETURN]:Exit ■ Network settings A)NETWORK Use this feature to view the network parameters (IP address, etc.) or to change them manually. A)NETWORK p p . DHCP ON IP 192.168.000.002 SUBNET 255.255.255.000 GATEWAY 192.168.000.001 DNS (P) 192.168.000.001 DNS (S) 000.000.000.000 SET >CANCEL []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter Note The above display is an example. DHCP DHCP When this parameter is set to “ON”, network parameters for “IP”, “SUBNET”, “GATEWAY”, “DNS (P)” and “DNS (S)” obtained from a DHCP enabled router are displayed. If DHCP server function is not available, set this parameter to “OFF” to configure the network parameters manually. Choices: ON, OFF IP address IP Use this parameter to specify an IP address assigned to this unit. This value must not duplicate the one used for other devices in the target network. Subnet mask SUBNET Use this parameter to specify the subnet mask value assigned to this unit. y For most of the cases, the subnet mask value can be set as “255.255.255.0”. Default gateway GATEWAY Use this parameter to specify the IP address of the default gateway. 84 En SET MENU Primary DNS server DNS (P) Secondary DNS server DNS (S) Use this parameter to specify the IP address of the primary and secondary DNS (Domain Name System) servers. ■ Playback styles B)PLAY STYLE Use this feature to adjust the playback style according to your preference. You can shuffle songs in a random order or repeat one specific song or a sequence of songs. Note B)PLAY STYLE If you have only one DNS address, enter the DNS address in “DNS (P)”. If you have two or more DNS addresses, enter one of them in “DNS (P)” and another in “DNS (S)”. Note When “DHCP” is set to “ON”, you cannot select and adjust any other network settings. To specify the other parameters, you need to first set “DHCP” to “OFF”. 2 To specify the parameter, press u / d repeatedly to change the number and press j / i to select the digit to change. 3 Press ENTER to confirm the parameter. 4 Repeat steps 1 through 3 to configure each network parameter. 5 Select “SET” and then press ENTER to finish configuration. Note In case you have changed your network configuration, you may need to reconfigure the network settings again. You can reset the network settings of this unit to the initial factory settings by using “N-RESET” in the advanced setup menu (see page 91). Repeat REPEAT Use this feature to set this unit to repeat one song or a sequence of songs. Choices: OFF, SINGLE, ALL • Select “OFF” to deactivate this feature. • Select “SINGLE” to set this unit to repeat one song. • Select “ALL” to set this unit to repeat a sequence of songs. Notes • When “REPEAT” is set to a setting other than “OFF”, the highlighted letter “R” appears in the top right corner of the playback status screen while one song or a sequence of songs are being repeated. • If “REPEAT” is set to “SINGLE”, the setting will be reset to “OFF” when both the main zone and Zone 2 are turned off. Shuffle SHUFFLE Use this feature to set this unit to play songs or albums in a random order. Choices: OFF, ON • Select “OFF” to deactivate this feature. • Select “ON” to set this unit to play songs or albums in a random order. Note When “SHUFFLE” is set to “ON”, the highlighted letter “S” appears in the top right corner of the playback status screen while songs or albums are being shuffled. 85 En ADVANCED OPERATION y []/[]:Up/Down [<]/[>]:Select p Press u / d on the remote control repeatedly and then press ENTER to select and enter the desired network parameter. p 1 .REPEAT;;;;;;;OFF SHUFFLE;;;;;;OFF SET MENU ■ Network information C)INFORMATION Use this feature to display the network system information. C)INFORMATION 4 OPTIONMENU 1/2 4 OPTIONMENU 2/2 .E)XM RADIO SET p .A)DISPLAYSET B)MEMORYGUARD C)PARAM.INI D)MULTI ZONESET []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p p Note Use this menu to adjust the optional system parameters. p MAC ADDRESS XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX STATUS 10BASE-T FULL-DUPLEX [ENTER]:Return 4 OPTION MENU ■ Display settings A)DISPLAY SET The above display is an example. []/[]:Up/Down [<]/[>]:Select p “NO LINK” appears when network connection is not made. p Note A)DISPLAYSET .ON SCREEN;;;;10s FL SCROLL;;;CONT p Status STATUS This information displays the current link status of the network. Display status: 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX, FULL-DUPLEX, HALF-DUPLEX, NO LINK A)DISPLAYSET .DIMMER;;;;;;;;;0 VIDEOCONV.;;;ON OSD SHIFT;;;;;;0 GRAY BACK;;;AUTO []/[]:Up/Down [<]/[>]:Select p MAC (Media Access Control) address MAC ADDRESS This information displays the MAC address that is assigned to this unit. Dimmer DIMMER Use this feature to adjust the brightness of the front panel display. Control range: – 4 to 0 Control step: 1 • Press j to make the front panel display dimmer. • Press i to make the front panel display brighter. Video conversion VIDEO CONV. Use this feature to set whether to convert the video signals input at the VIDEO and S VIDEO jacks. Choices: ON, OFF • Select “ON” to convert composite and S-video signals interchangeably and up-convert composite and S-video signals to component video signals. • Select “OFF” not to convert any signals. Notes • The converted video signals are only output at the MONITOR OUT jacks. When recording a video source, you must make the same type of video connections between each component. • When composite video or S-video signals from a VCR are converted to component video signals, the picture quality may suffer depending on your VCR. • You must set “VIDEO CONV.” to “ON” to display the OSD. • Unconventional signals input at the composite video or S-video jacks cannot be converted or may be output abnormally. In such cases, set “VIDEO CONV.” to “OFF”. 86 En SET MENU OSD shift OSD SHIFT Use this feature to adjust the vertical position of the OSD. Control range: –5 (upward) to +5 (downward) Control step: 1 Initial setting: 0 • Press j to raise the position of the OSD. • Press i to lower the position of the OSD. Gray back GRAY BACK Use this feature to display a gray background in the OSD when there is no video signal being input. Choices: AUTO, OFF • Select “AUTO” to display a gray background in the OSD when there is no video signal being input. • Select “OFF” not to display any background in the OSD. Notes Front panel display scroll FL SCROLL Use this feature to set whether to display the information (such as song title or channel name) in the front panel display in a continuous manner or by the first 14 alphanumeric characters after scrolling all characters once when “XM”, “DOCK” or “NET/USB” is selected as the input source. Choices: CONT, ONCE • Select “CONT” to display the operation status in the front panel display in a continuous manner. • Select “ONCE” to display the operation status in the front panel display by the first 14 alphanumeric characters after scrolling all characters once. ■ Memory guard B)MEMORY GUARD Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to DSP program parameter values and other system settings. Choices: OFF, ON • Depending on the video signals being input or the system setting of your video monitor (NTSC or PAL), the OSD may be displayed abnormally. In such cases, set “GRAY BACK” to “OFF”. • Even when “GRAY BACK” is set to “OFF”, the OSD may not be displayed correctly depending on the conditions of the picture. On-screen display time ON SCREEN Use this feature to set the amount of time to display the XM Satellite Radio information, iPod menu or NET/USB menu in the OSD after you perform a certain operation. Choices: ON, 10s, 30s • Select “ON” to display the OSD unceasingly during an operation. • Select “10s” to turn off the OSD 10 seconds after you perform a certain operation. • Select “30s” to turn off the OSD 30 seconds after you perform a certain operation. B)MEMORYGUARD >OFFON [<]/[>]:Select [ENTER]:Return • Select “OFF” to turn off the “MEMORY GUARD” feature. • Select “ON” to protect: – DSP program parameters – all “SET MENU” items – all speaker levels Note When “MEMORY GUARD” is set to “ON”, you cannot select and adjust any other “SET MENU” items. ADVANCED OPERATION 87 En SET MENU ■ Parameter initialization C)PARAM. INI ■ Zone set D)MULTI ZONE SET Use this feature to initialize the parameters of each sound field program within a sound field program group. When you initialize a sound field program group, all of the parameter values within that group revert to their initial factory settings. Press the corresponding sound field program selector buttons on the remote control to select the sound field program that you want to initialize. An asterisk (*) appears to the left of the sound field program names that have been changed from their initial factory settings. Choices: STEREO, MUSIC, ENTERTAINMENT, MOVIE THEATER, STANDARD Use this feature to specify the location of speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals of this unit. C)PARAM.INI STEREO *MUSIC ENTERTAINMENT MOVIE THEATER *STANDARD Press DSP key Notes • You cannot automatically revert to the previous parameter settings once you initialize a sound field program group. • You cannot separately initialize individual sound field programs. • You cannot initialize any sound field program groups when “MEMORY GUARD” is set to “ON” (see page 87). 88 En D)MULTI ZONESET .SPB;;;;;;;FRONT [<]/[>]:Select [ENTER]:Return Speaker B setting SP B Use this feature to select the location of the front speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals. Choices: FRONT, ZONE B • Select “FRONT” to turn on or off SPEAKERS A and B when the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals are set in the main zone. • Select “ZONE B” if the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals are set in another zone. If SPEAKERS A is turned off and SPEAKERS B is turned on, all the speakers including the subwoofer in the main zone are muted and this unit outputs sound at the SPEAKERS B terminals only. Notes • If you connect headphones to the PHONES jack of this unit, the sound is output from both headphones and the SPEAKERS B terminals when “SP B” is set to “ZONE B”. • If a DSP program is selected when “SP B” is set to “ZONE B”, this unit automatically enters the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode (see page 44). SET MENU ■ XM Radio setting E)XM RADIO SET (U.S.A. and Canada models only) E)XM RADIO SET .XM ANTENNA;;NONE [ENTER]:Return Radio antenna XM ANTENNA Use this feature to check the current reception level of XM Passport System connected to the XM jack of this unit (see page 54). For the best reception, orient XM Passport System so that a value of 60% or more is displayed here. Display status: NONE, 0 to 100% Notes • “NONE” is displayed if XM Passport System is not connected to this unit. In this case, check the antenna connections (see page 54). • The “XM ANTENNA” parameter cannot be adjusted by using the remote control. Instead, you need to adjust the orientation of XM Passport System connected to the XM jack of this unit for a better percentage of the reception level. ADVANCED OPERATION 89 En ADVANCED SETUP ADVANCED SETUP This unit has additional menus that are displayed in the front panel display. The advanced setup menu offers additional operations to adjust and customize the way this unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening environment. Notes • The settings you make are reflected next time you press MASTER ON/OFF inward to the ON position to turn on this unit (see page 28). • Only MASTER ON/OFF, STRAIGHT (EFFECT) and the PROGRAM selector are effective while you are using the advanced setup menu. • All the other operations cannot be made while you are using the advanced setup menu. • The advanced setup menu is only available in the front panel display. (U.S.A. model) 3 VOLUME ZONE 2 ON/OFF MASTER PRESET/TUNING EDIT FM/AM A/B/C/D/E l PRESET/TUNING/CH h MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM TUNING MODE AUTO/MAN'L LEVEL NEXT SEARCH MODE ON ZONE CONTROL CATEGORY DISPLAY OFF PROGRAM INPUT MAIN ZONE PHONES SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT VIDEO AUX VIDEO ON/OFF L AUDIO USB R EFFECT SILENT CINEMA Rotate the PROGRAM selector on the front panel to select the parameter you want to adjust. The name of the selected parameter appears in the front panel display. See page 91 for a complete list of available parameters. PROGRAM 1-2,5 1 2,4 3 Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to release it outward to the OFF position to turn off this unit. Currently selected parameter Currently selected parameter setting MASTER SP IMP.-8 MIN ON 2 OFF Press and hold STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the front panel, and then press MASTER ON/OFF inward to the ON position to turn on this unit. This unit turns on, and the advanced setup menu appears in the front panel display. 4 Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the front panel repeatedly to change the selected parameter setting. STRAIGHT While holding down STRAIGHT EFFECT MASTER 5 EFFECT ON OFF Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to release it outward to the OFF position to save the new setting and turn off this unit. MASTER ON OFF y The settings you made are reflected next time you turn on this unit. 90 En ADVANCED SETUP ■ Speaker impedance SP IMP. Use this feature to set the speaker impedance of this unit so that it matches that of your speakers. Choices: 8ΩMIN, 6ΩMIN • Select “8ΩMIN” to set the speaker impedance to 8 Ω . • Select “6ΩMIN” to set the speaker impedance to 6 Ω . SP IMP. Speaker Impedance level If you use one set (A or B), the impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. Front If you use two sets (A and B), the impedance of each speaker must be 16 Ω or higher.* 8ΩMIN Center Surround The impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. Surround back If you use one set (A or B), the impedance of each speaker must be 4 Ω or higher. Front If you use two sets (A and B), the impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. 6ΩMIN Center Surround The impedance of each speaker must be 6 Ω or higher. Surround back The Canada model cannot use two separate speaker systems (A and B) simultaneously when “SP IMP.” is set to “8ΩMIN”. Notes • This setting completely resets all the parameters of this unit including the “SET MENU” parameters. However, the advanced setup menu parameters will not be initialized. • The initial factory settings are activated next time you turn on this unit. ■ Network reset N-RESET Use this feature to reset the network settings of this unit (see page 84) to the initial factory settings. Choices: CANCEL, RESET • Select “CANCEL” not to reset any network settings of this unit. • Select “RESET” to reset the network settings of this unit. Notes • The initial factory settings are activated next time you turn on this unit. • When the network settings are reset, “DHCP” in “NET/USB MENU” is automatically set to “ON” (see page 84) and the registered client ID of this unit on your YAMAHA MCX-2000 is cleared (see page 105). ■ Remote control AMP ID REMOTE AMP Use this feature to set the AMP ID of this unit for remote control recognition (see page 96). Choices: ID1, ID2 • Select “ID1” when the remote control AMP ID library code is set to “00001”. • Select “ID2” when the remote control AMP ID library code is set to “00002”. Note You need to set the corresponding remote control AMP library code for the remote control (see page 96). 91 En ADVANCED OPERATION * ■ Factory presets PRESET Use this feature to reset all the parameters of this unit to the initial factory settings (see page 108). Choices: CANCEL, RESET • Select “CANCEL” not to reset any parameters of this unit. • Select “RESET” to reset the parameters of this unit. ADVANCED SETUP ■ Remote control TUNER ID REMOTE TUN Use this feature to set the TUNER ID of this unit for remote control recognition (see page 96). Choices: ID1, ID2 • Select “ID1” when the remote control TUNER ID library code is set to “81916”. • Select “ID2” when the remote control TUNER ID library code is set to “81917”. Note You need to set the corresponding remote control TUNER library code for the remote control (see page 96). ■ Remote control XM ID REMOTE XM (U.S.A. and Canada models only) Use this feature to set the XM ID of this unit for remote control recognition (see page 97). Choices: ID1, ID2 • Select “ID1” when the remote control XM ID library code is set to “81918”. • Select “ID2” when the remote control XM ID library code is set to “81919”. Note You need to set the corresponding remote control XM library code for the remote control (see page 97). ■ Tuner frequency step TU (General model only) Use this feature to set the tuner frequency step according to the frequency spacing in your area. Choices: AM10/FM100, AM9/FM50 • Select “AM10/FM100” for North, Central and South America. • Select “AM9/FM50” for all other areas. 92 En REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can also operate other audiovisual components made by YAMAHA and other manufacturers. To control your TV or other components, you must set the appropriate remote control code for each input source (see page 95). Controlling this unit, a TV, or other components ■ Controlling this unit ■ Controlling a TV Set the component selector switch to AMP to control this unit. Set the component selector switch to TV to control your TV. To control your TV, you must set the appropriate remote control code for DTV/CBL or (see page 95). When you set the remote control codes for both DTV/CBL and , priority is given to the one set for DTV/CBL. CODE SET TRANSMIT POWER POWER TV AV STANDBY POWER MD SLEEP CD-R CD XM MULTI CH IN CBL DVD TUNER DTV DOCK USB V-AUX DVR CODE SET NET AMP *1 TRANSMIT POWER POWER TV AV CD CD-R SOURCE TV VOL TV CH STANDBY POWER MD VOLUME TV SLEEP XM MULTI CH IN CBL DVD TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST. 5 6 7 8 *1 TUNER DTV DOCK USB V-AUX DVR NET TV VOL TV CH VOLUME AMP SPEAKERS ENHANCER 9 0 NIGHT 10 STRAIGHT PRESET/CH TV ENT. EFFECT LEVEL SOURCE SET MENU TITLE MENU BAND SRCH MODE *2 TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 4 STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST. 5 6 7 8 SPEAKERS ENHANCER NIGHT STRAIGHT 9 0 MOVIE ENTER A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT. RETURN DISPLAY XM MEMORY ON SCREEN REC 10 AUDIO PC/MCX NET RADIO ENT. EFFECT PRESET/CH USB SET MENU LEVEL TITLE MENU BAND SRCH MODE *2 ENTER A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT. RETURN DISPLAY XM MEMORY ON SCREEN REC AUDIO PC/MCX NET RADIO USB (U.S.A. model) ADVANCED OPERATION Notes *1 These buttons always control this unit regardless of the component selector switch position. *2 These buttons control this unit only when the component selector switch is set to AMP. (U.S.A. model) Notes *1 These buttons always control your TV regardless of the component selector switch position. Remote control *2 Digital TV/Cable TV TV POWER Turns on or off the power. TV VOL +/– Increases or decreases the volume level. TV CH +/– Changes the channel number. TV MUTE Mutes the audio output. TV INPUT Changes the input source. These buttons control your TV only when the component selector switch is set to TV. For details, see the “Digital TV/ Cable TV” column on page 94. 93 En REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ■ Controlling other components Set the component selector switch to SOURCE to control other components selected with the input selector buttons or . You must set the appropriate remote control code for each input source (see page 95). The following table shows the function of each control button used to control other components assigned to each input selector button and . Be advised that some buttons may not correctly operate the selected component. U 1 CODE SET POWER TRANSMIT POWER TV AV CD CD-R STANDBY POWER MD DTV DOCK TUNER USB V-AUX DVR NET AMP SOURCE TV VOL TV CH U MUSIC ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 4 STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST. VOLUME 5 6 7 8 ENHANCER NIGHT STRAIGHT 9 0 10 3 4 5 TV INPUT MUTE MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 PRESET/CH LEVEL TITLE SET MENU MENU SRCH MODE BAND 7 8 ENTER A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT. RETURN DISPLAY XM MEMORY ON SCREEN 9 REC 6 TV MUTE ENT. EFFECT TV STEREO MOVIE SPEAKERS MULTI CH IN CBL DVD 2 SLEEP XM U STEREO AUDIO PC/MCX NET RADIO USB (U.S.A. model) Remote control DVD player/ recorder VCR Digital TV/ Cable TV LD/CD player MD/CD recorder Tuner iPod® PC/MCX-2000/ Internet radio/ USB 1 2 AV POWER Power *1 Power *1 Power *2 Power *1 Power *1 1-9, 0, +10 Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons 3 4 TITLE Title PRESET/CH u Up VCR channel up Up Preset up (1-8) Up Up PRESET/CH d Down VCR channel down Down Preset down (1-8) Down Down A-E/CAT. j Left Left Preset down (A-E) Previous menu Previous menu Preset up (A-E) Subsequent menu Subsequent menu Subsequent menu Subsequent menu 5 6 7 Band A-E/CAT. i Right Right ENTER Enter Enter RETURN Return Return REC Disc skip (player) Rec (recorder) *3 Rec *3 Rec *2*3 Disc skip (CD player) Bookmark *5 Rec *3 Select PC/MCX p Play Play Play *2 Play Play Play Play w Search backward Search backward Search backward *2 Search backward Search backward Search backward *4 Select NET RADIO f Search forward Search forward Search forward *2 Search forward Search forward Search forward *4 Select USB AUDIO Audio Audio Audio *2 Sound (LD player) e Pause Pause Pause *2 Pause Pause Pause b Skip backward Skip backward Skip backward *2 Skip backward Skip backward Skip backward Skip backward *6 a Skip forward Skip forward Skip forward *2 Skip forward Skip forward Skip forward Skip forward *6 s Stop Stop Stop *2 Stop Stop Stop Stop Enter Chapter/Time (LD player) Index (CD player) Index Previous menu Previous menu Display Display Display Display ENT. Title/Index 8 9 Preset stations (1-8) MENU Menu DISPLAY Display Enter Menu Display Display Notes *1 This button is operational only when the original remote control supplied with the component has a POWER button. These buttons control your VCR or DVD recorder only when you set the appropriate remote control code for DVR (see page 95). *3 When you use this button to record a source, press it twice repeatedly to prevent a malfunction. *4 Press and hold to search backward or forward. *5 Press and hold to store your favorite Internet radio stations with bookmarks (see page 106). *6 These buttons are not operational when the Internet radio is selected as the sub input source of NET/USB. *2 94 En REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Setting the remote control code 1 You can control your TV and other components by setting the appropriate remote control code for each input source. For a complete list of available remote control codes, refer to “LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at the end of this manual. Press one of the input selector buttons or to select the component you want to set up. MD CD CD-R SLEEP XM MULTI CH IN CBL DVD The following table shows the default component in the “Library (component category)” column and the remote control code for each input source. DTV DOCK V-AUX TUNER USB DVR NET Remote Control Code Default Settings 2 Input source Library (component category) Manufacturer Default code CD CD YAMAHA 61907 MD/CD-R MD YAMAHA 70888 XM TUNER YAMAHA 81918 DVD DVD YAMAHA 40539 DTV/ CBL – – – TUNER TUNER YAMAHA 81916 V-AUX/ DOCK OTHER AUDIO ACCESSORIES (iPod) YAMAHA 81981 DVR DVR YAMAHA 51544 Press CODE SET using a ballpoint pen or a similar object. The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control flashes twice. TRANSMIT CODE SET Flashes 3 Press the numeric buttons (0 to 9) to enter the five-digit remote control code for the component to be used. The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control flashes twice, and the remote control code for the selected component is set. STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 MOVIE 4 STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST. 5 6 7 8 SPEAKERS ENHANCER NIGHT STRAIGHT 9 0 TRANSMIT NET/ USB YAMAHA – – 81982 You may not be able to operate your YAMAHA component even if a YAMAHA remote control code is initially set as listed above. In this case, try setting other YAMAHA remote control codes. Flashes ENT. EFFECT – Note 10 y To clear the remote control code previously set for the selected component, enter the code number “9980”. Notes • If the manufacturer of your component has more than one code, try each of them until you find the correct one. • If you do not press any buttons within 30 seconds in step 3, the setup process is canceled. If this happens, repeat the setup procedure. 95 En ADVANCED OPERATION OTHER AUDIO ACCESSORIES (NET/USB) REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ■ Setting remote control TUNER ID library codes Setting library codes You can operate multiple YAMAHA receivers or amplifiers in the same room with the supplied remote control simultaneously. Set the appropriate library code to select and operate the desired component with the supplied remote control. Select one of the following codes to set the remote control TUNER ID library code for the component you want to use. 1 ■ Setting remote control AMP ID library codes Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source. TUNER Select one of the following codes to set the remote control AMP ID library code for the component you want to use. 1 Press CODE SET using a ballpoint pen or a similar object. The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control flashes twice. 2 Press CODE SET using a ballpoint pen or a similar object. The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control flashes twice. TRANSMIT CODE SET TRANSMIT CODE SET Flashes Flashes 2 Press the numeric buttons to enter the code number “00001” or “00002”. The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control flashes twice, and the AMP ID library code is changed. 3 Press the numeric buttons to enter the code number “81916” or “81917”. The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control flashes twice, and the TUNER ID library code is changed. STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST. STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST. 5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8 SPEAKERS ENHANCER NIGHT STRAIGHT SPEAKERS ENHANCER NIGHT STRAIGHT 9 0 9 0 10 ENT. TRANSMIT Flashes Function 00001 To operate this unit using (initial setting) the default code. 00002 *1 *2 To operate this unit using an alternative code. ENT. Flashes EFFECT EFFECT AMP ID library code *1 10 TRANSMIT Remote control AMP ID *2 TUNER ID library code *1 ID1 (initial setting) 81916 To operate this unit using (initial setting) the default code. 81917 ID2 The remote control setting The setting of this unit (see page 91) *1 *2 Function To operate this unit using an alternative code. Remote control TUNER ID *2 ID1 (initial setting) ID2 The remote control setting The setting of this unit (see page 92) Notes Notes • You need to set the corresponding remote control AMP ID of this unit in the advanced setup (see page 91). • When using multiple YAMAHA receivers/amplifiers, you may be able to operate the other components simultaneously with the default code setting. In this case, set one of the alternative codes to operate this unit separately. • You need to set the corresponding remote control TUNER ID of this unit in the advanced setup (see page 92). • When using multiple YAMAHA receivers/amplifiers, you may be able to operate the other components simultaneously with the default code setting. In this case, set one of the alternative codes to operate this unit separately. 96 En REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ■ Setting remote control XM ID library codes (U.S.A. and Canada models only) Select one of the following codes to set the remote control XM ID library code for the component you want to use. 1 Press XM to select “XM” as the input source. Resetting all remote control codes Use this feature to clear all the remote control codes previously set and reset all of them to the initial factory settings. 1 XM 2 Press CODE SET using a ballpoint pen or a similar object. The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control flashes twice. TRANSMIT CODE SET Press the numeric buttons to enter the code number “81918” or “81919”. The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control flashes twice, and the XM ID library code is changed. STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST. 5 6 7 8 SPEAKERS ENHANCER NIGHT STRAIGHT 9 0 10 ENT. Function 81919 *1 *2 To operate this unit using an alternative code. Press the numeric buttons to enter the code number “9981”. The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control flashes twice, and all the remote control codes previously set are cleared and reset to the initial factory settings. STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 4 STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST. 5 6 7 8 SPEAKERS ENHANCER NIGHT STRAIGHT 9 0 10 MOVIE ENT. TRANSMIT Flashes EFFECT Flashes y If you do not press any buttons within 30 seconds after step 2, the clearing process is canceled. In this case, repeat the clearing procedure. Remote control XM ID *2 ADVANCED OPERATION 81918 To operate this unit using (initial setting) the default code. Flashes TRANSMIT EFFECT XM ID library code *1 TRANSMIT CODE SET 2 Flashes 3 Press CODE SET using a ballpoint pen or a similar object. The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control flashes twice. ID1 (initial setting) ID2 The remote control setting The setting of this unit (see page 92) Notes • You need to set the corresponding remote control XM ID of this unit in the advanced setup (see page 92). • When using multiple YAMAHA receivers/amplifiers, you may be able to operate the other components simultaneously with the default code setting. In this case, set one of the alternative codes to operate this unit separately. 97 En USING MULTI-ZONE CONFIGURATION USING MULTI-ZONE CONFIGURATION This unit allows you to configure a multi-zone audio system. The Zone 2 feature allows you to set this unit to reproduce separate input sources in the main zone and the second zone (Zone 2). You can control this unit from the second zone using the supplied remote control. Only analog signals are sent to the second zone. Any source you want to listen to in the second zone must be connected to the analog AUDIO IN jacks of this unit. Connecting Zone 2 You need the following additional equipment to use the multi-zone functions of this unit: • An infrared signal receiver in the second zone. • An infrared signal emitter in the main zone. This emitter transmits the infrared signals from the remote control via the infrared signal receiver in the second zone to a CD player or a DVD player, etc. in the main zone. • An amplifier and speakers in the second zone. y • Since there are many possible ways to connect and use this unit in a multi-zone configuration, we recommend that you consult with your nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center about the Zone 2 connections that best meet your requirements. • Some YAMAHA models are able to connect directly to the REMOTE jacks of this unit. If you own these products, you may not need to use an infrared signal emitter. Up to 6 YAMAHA components can be connected as shown below. REMOTE IN REMOTE IN REMOTE OUT Infrared signal receiver REMOTE OUT REMOTE IN REMOTE OUT YAMAHA component This unit REMOTE IN REMOTE OUT YAMAHA component ■ Multi-zone configuration and Zone 2 connections Main zone Second zone ZONE 2 OUTPUT SP OUT Amplifier MONITOR OUT DVD player Remote control AUDIO IN VIDEO IN This unit MAIN ZONE ZONE 2 Infrared signal receiver Infrared signal emitter REMOTE OUT REMOTE IN Notes • When you do not use the main zone, press MAIN ZONE ON/OFF on the front panel to turn off the main zone. • To avoid unexpected noise, DO NOT USE the Zone 2 feature with CDs encoded in DTS. 98 En USING MULTI-ZONE CONFIGURATION Controlling Zone 2 You can select and control Zone 2 by using the control buttons on the front panel or on the remote control. The available operations are listed as follows: • Selecting the input source of Zone 2 • Tuning into FM or AM when “TUNER” is selected as the input source of Zone 2 (see page 46) • Tuning into XM Satellite Radio when “XM” is selected as the input source of Zone 2 (see page 53) (U.S.A. and Canada models only) • Enjoying music stored on your iPod stationed in a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit when “V-AUX” is selected as the input source (see page 101) 2 Press ZONE CONTROL to control Zone 2. The ZONE2 indicator flashes in the front panel display for approximately 5 seconds. ZONE CONTROL ZONE2 Flashes 3 Rotate the INPUT selector to select the desired input source while the ZONE2 indicator is flashing in the front panel display. INPUT y The volume level and tonal quality of Zone 2 cannot be adjusted. Adjust the volume control on the amplifier in Zone 2. Notes • You must complete each step while the ZONE2 indicator is flashing in the front panel display. Otherwise, the Zone 2 mode is automatically canceled and this unit returns to the normal operation mode. In this case, repeat the Zone 2 selection procedure. • The Zone 2 control function is operational only when MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel is pressed inward to the ON position. 4 Press ZONE 2 ON/OFF to set Zone 2 to the standby mode. ZONE 2 ON/OFF ■ Controlling Zone 2 with the front panel 1 Press ZONE 2 ON/OFF to turn on Zone 2. ZONE 2 ON/OFF ADVANCED OPERATION y ZONE 2 ON/OFF is operational only when MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel is pressed inward to the ON position. 99 En USING MULTI-ZONE CONFIGURATION ■ Setting the remote control to the Zone 2 mode 1 Note The remote control is originally set to the main mode to control the main zone. To control Zone 2 with the remote control, you must first set the remote control to the Zone 2 mode. 1 Press CODE SET using a ballpoint pen or a similar object. The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control flashes twice. Press and hold POWER or STANDBY and then press to set the remote control to the Zone 2 mode. • Press POWER when the main zone is turned on. • Press STANDBY when the main zone is turned off. The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control lights up while the remote control is set to the Zone 2 mode. POWER While holding down TRANSMIT or TRANSMIT CODE SET Lights up STANDBY Flashes 2 Press the numeric buttons to enter the code number “9992”. STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST. 5 6 7 8 SPEAKERS ENHANCER NIGHT STRAIGHT 9 0 10 ENT. 2 Press POWER to turn on Zone 2. POWER TRANSMIT Flashes 3 EFFECT Press one of the input selector buttons to select the desired input source of Zone 2. ■ Controlling Zone 2 with the remote control MD CD SLEEP CD-R XM MULTI CH IN CBL Notes • The remote control is originally set to the main mode to control the main zone, and the TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control is turned off when the remote control is set to the main mode. • When the remote control is set to the Zone 2 mode, POWER, STANDBY, MUTE, and the input selector buttons are set to control Zone 2. However, the rest of the remote control buttons remain in the main mode. • The remote control automatically exits from the Zone 2 mode in the following cases: – when you do not make any operations within 10 seconds after the remote control is set to the Zone 2 mode. – when you press a remote control button other than POWER, STANDBY, MUTE, and the input selector buttons. DVD DTV TUNER DOCK V-AUX USB DVR y To mute the audio output of Zone 2, press MUTE on the remote control. Press MUTE again to resume the audio output of Zone 2. MUTE 4 Press STANDBY to set Zone 2 to the standby mode. STANDBY 100 En NET USING IPOD® USING iPod® Once you have stationed your iPod in a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit (see page 22), you can enjoy playback of your iPod using the supplied remote control. You can also use the Compressed Music Enhancer mode of this unit to improve the sound quality of the compression artifacts (such as the MP3 format) stored on your iPod (see page 37). Notes • Only iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini are supported. • Some features may not be compatible depending on the model or the software version of your iPod. y • For a complete list of the remote control functions used to control your iPod, see the “iPod” column in “Controlling other components” on page 94. • For a complete list of status messages that appear in the front panel display and in the OSD, see the “iPod” section in “TROUBLESHOOTING” on page 113. Controlling iPod You can control your iPod when “V-AUX” is selected as the input source. The operations of your iPod can be done with the aid of the OSD of this unit (menu browse mode) or without it (simple remote mode). ■ Controlling iPod in the simple remote mode You can perform the basic operations of your iPod (play, stop, skip, etc.) using the supplied remote control without the aid of the OSD of this unit. y • You can view the photos or video clips stored on your iPod. • Operations can be also done with the controls on your iPod. ■ Controlling iPod in the menu browse mode You can perform the advanced operations of your iPod using the supplied remote control with the aid of the OSD of this unit. The name of the song being played appears in the front panel display according to the “FL SCROLL” parameter in “OPTION MENU” (see page 87). You can also browse the songs stored on your iPod in the OSD. Further, you can change or adjust settings for your iPod to suit your personal preferences. Notes 101 En ADVANCED OPERATION • Operations cannot be done with the controls on your iPod. • The YAMAHA logo appears in the display window of your iPod. • There are some characters that cannot be displayed in the front panel display or in the OSD of this unit. Those characters are replaced with underscores “_”. • The “Setup” parameters can be changed or adjusted only in the OSD. Press ENTER on the remote control to toggle between the “Setup” parameter settings. • You cannot browse the photos or video clips stored on your iPod in the OSD. Instead, you must use the controls on your iPod to select the desired photos or video clips. USING iPod® 1 Press DISPLAY on the remote control. The following display appears in the OSD. iPod Top Playlists Artists Albums Songs Genres Composers Setup DISPLAY ON SCREEN > > > > > > > Shuffle Shuffle Use this feature to set this unit to play songs or albums in a random order. Choices: Off, Songs, Albums • Select “Off ” to deactivate this feature. • Select “Songs” to set this unit to play songs in a random order. • Select “Albums” to set this unit to play albums in a random order. Note 2 Press u / d / j / i on the remote control to navigate the iPod menu and then press ENTER to begin playback of the selected song. PRESET/CH PRESET/CH ENTER A-E/CAT. ENTER A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT. A-E/CAT. When “Shuffle” is set to a setting other than “Off ”, the highlighted letter “S” appears in the top right corner while songs or albums are being shuffled. Repeat Repeat Use this feature to set this unit to repeat one song or a sequence of songs. Choices: Off, One, All • Select “Off ” to deactivate this feature. • Select “One” to set this unit to repeat one song. • Select “All” to set this unit to repeat a sequence of songs. Note Choices: Playlists (playlists), Artists (artists), Albums (albums), Songs (songs), Genres (genres), Composers (composers) • Playlists > Songs • Artists > Albums > Songs • Albums > Songs • Songs • Genres > Artists > Albums > Songs • Composers > Albums > Songs • Setup > Shuffle, Repeat 102 En When “Repeat” is set to a setting other than “Off ”, the highlighted letter “R” appears in the top right corner while one song or a sequence of songs are being repeated. USING NETWORK/USB FEATURES USING NETWORK/USB FEATURES This unit is equipped with network and USB features that allow you to enjoy WAV (PCM format only), MP3 and WMA files saved on your PC, YAMAHA MCX-2000, USB memory device and USB portable audio player or access the Internet radio. Notes • YAMAHA MCX-2000 may not be for sale in some locations. • For further details about networking, refer to the operation manuals supplied with your network devices. Also refer to technical reference books, if needed. • Some WAV, MP3 and WMA files may not be playable or may be noisy when played. y • For a complete list of the remote control functions used to control the network and USB features, see the “PC/MCX-2000/Internet radio/USB” column in “Controlling other components” on page 94. • For a complete list of status messages that appear in the front panel display and in the OSD, see the “Network and USB” section in “TROUBLESHOOTING” on page 114. Navigating the network and USB menus The following diagram shows the construction of the network and USB menu. NET/USB PC/MusicCAST (MCX-2000) Server* Playlists Selects a song by playlist. Artists Selects a song by artist. In addition, you can select an album within the artist (MCX-2000 only). Albums Selects a song by album. Songs Selects a song directly. Genres Selects a song by genre. In addition, you can select an album within the genre (MCX-2000 only). Recall Play Makes this unit recall play from MCX-2000 or another client. For details, refer to the instruction manual of MCX-2000. (MCX-2000 only) USB Bookmarks Selects an Internet radio station that has been added to the “Bookmarks” list (see page 106). Locations Selects an Internet radio station or a Podcast service by location. Genres Selects an Internet radio station or a Podcast service by genre. New Stations Selects an Internet radio station from the ones that have recently started the service. Popular Stations Selects an Internet radio station from the list of popular stations. Podcasts Selects a Podcast service by location or genre. Help Broadcasts voice-assisted guidelines on various topics of the related Internet service. Files/Directories Selects a file by navigating directories. Note * Only the available PC servers and MCX-2000 are displayed. 103 En ADVANCED OPERATION Internet Radio USING NETWORK/USB FEATURES The following procedure shows the basic steps to navigate the network and USB menus. See pages 105 and 106 for details about each sub input source. 2 Note “Please wait” may appear whenever it takes time for communication. This is not a system malfunction. Wait for a while. 1 Press MENU on the remote control to display the top NET/USB menu. The following display appears in the OSD. If any other display appears in the OSD, press MENU on the remote control repeatedly until the top NET/USB menu appears. NET/USB Set the component selector switch to SOURCE and then press NET/USB on the remote control to select “NET/USB” as the input source. The cursor on the left of the NET/USB indicator lights up in the front panel display, and the contents previously played for the corresponding sub input source of NET/USB is automatically played. SET MENU MENU 1/3 3 You can also select the desired sub input source by pressing the corresponding button on the remote control (see page 7). NET TV 4 Lights up DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD XM VOLUME SP A PC/MCX Press u / d to select the desired sub input source and then press i or ENTER. y USB pNET USB > > > SRCH MODE AMP SOURCE Top PC/MusicCAST Internet Radio USB dB L R Press u / d / j / i on the remote control to select the desired song or Internet radio station. • Press u / d to select the desired menu. • Press i to enter the selected menu. • Press j to return to the previous menu level. y • “i” in the right corner of each menu line indicates that there is a submenu available in the next menu level. • You can press ENTER or MENU to enter the selected menu or to return to the previous menu level. 5 104 En Press ENTER to play the selected song or to listen to the selected station. USING NETWORK/USB FEATURES Using a PC server or YAMAHA MCX-2000 Use this feature to enjoy music files saved on your PC or YAMAHA MCX-2000. MCX-2000 is a music server that enhances the concept of YAMAHA exclusive MusicCAST, a digital music delivery method over a personal network. 1 Install Windows Media Connect 2.0 on your PC, or register this unit on your YAMAHA MCX-2000. • Refer to “Installing Windows Media Connect 2.0 on your PC” and “Registering this unit on the YAMAHA MCX-2000” on page 106. • This procedure is needed only the first time. 2 Turn on your PC or MCX-2000. The PC server or MCX-2000 is added to the server list on the submenu of PC/MusicCAST. 3 Select a desired PC server or MCX-2000 to begin playback. ■ Installing Windows Media Connect 2.0 on your PC With Windows Media Connect 2.0, you can play back the audio files on your PC. For details refer to the documents of Windows Media Connect 2.0. 1 Install Windows Media Connect 2.0 on your PC. You can download the installer of Windows Media Connect 2.0 from the Microsoft website. 2 Turn on your PC and then share a folder on the PC. The Shared folder is added to the server list on the submenu of PC/MusicCAST. Notes • Some security software installed on your PC (anti-virus software, firewall software, etc.) may block the access of this unit to your PC. In such cases, configure the security software appropriately. • If you are using a PC with Windows XP Professional, and the PC is logging on to a domain, you may not be able to connect the PC server. In such cases, log on to the local machine instead of the domain. Notes ADVANCED OPERATION • YAMAHA MCX-2000 may not be for sale in some locations. • You can connect this unit to up to 4 PC servers and 1 MCX-2000, and each server must be connected to the same subnet as this unit. • Some WAV, MP3 and WMA files on your PC may not be playable or may be noisy when played. • (MCX-2000 only) Files marked with an asterisk (*) have not been converted to MP3 format. You cannot play back such files immediately unless you set the “Receive PCM Stream” setting of this unit to “ON” on MCX-2000. For details, refer to the instruction manual of MCX-2000. y • While a song is being played, the time elapsed is displayed at the bottom of the OSD. • You can use b / a to skip backward/forward and h / s to start/stop playback independently from the menu in the OSD. • You can set the settings for repeat and shuffle mode by using the “PLAY STYLE” parameters in “NET/USB MENU” (see page 85). • You can set whether to display the operation status in the front panel display in a continuous manner or by the first 14 characters after scrolling all characters once by using “FL SCROLL” in “OPTION MENU” (see page 87). 105 En USING NETWORK/USB FEATURES ■ Registering this unit on the YAMAHA MCX-2000 You must register this unit on your YAMAHA MCX-2000 so that this unit can be recognized by your YAMAHA MCX-2000. For details, refer to the operation manual supplied with your YAMAHA MCX-2000. 1 Turn off this unit. Using the Internet radio Use this feature to listen to Internet radio stations. This unit uses the vTuner Internet radio station database service particularly customized for this unit, providing over 2000 radio station database. Further, you can store your favorite stations with bookmarks. Notes 2 Set your YAMAHA MCX-2000 to the “Auto Config” mode. 3 Turn on this unit. • MCX-2000 is added to the server list on the submenu of PC/MCX. • The client ID of this unit appears in the OSD of your YAMAHA MCX-2000 (shown as CLXXXXX), and this completes the automatic configuration procedure. Notes • The latter part of the client ID of this unit is same as the last 5 digits of the MAC address of this unit. For details about MAC address, see page 86. • To clear the registered client ID of this unit, use the “Manual Config” mode of your YAMAHA MCX-2000 (refer to the instruction manual of MCX-2000) and then set “N-RESET” in the advanced setup menu of this unit to “RESET” (see page 91). • The client control functions of MCX-2000 over this unit other than “View Play Info”, “Receive PCM Stream” and “Edit Client title” are not available. Avoid using these functions as it will stop the playback on this unit. • This service may be discontinued without notice. • Some Internet radio stations may not be played even if they are selected in the NET RADIO menu. • To listen to the Internet radio, connect this unit to your network (see page 23). • A narrowband Internet connection (i.e. 56K modem, ISDN) will not provide satisfactory results, and a broadband connection is strongly recommended (i.e. a cable modem, an xDSL modem, etc.). For detailed information, consult with your ISP. y • You can use h / s to start/stop playback independently from the menu in the OSD. • “Podcast” is a type of the Internet radio service, and there are a number of Podcast services available on the Internet. The Podcast is not a continuous service. That is, this unit stops playback when an episode of the Podcast ends. • Some security devices (such as firewall) may block the access of this unit to Internet radio stations. In such cases, configure the security settings appropriately. ■ Storing your favorite Internet radio stations with bookmarks Use this feature to select your favorite Internet radio stations quickly. Press and hold TITLE on the remote control while the selected Internet radio station service is being broadcast. The stored Internet radio station is added to the “Bookmarks” list (see page 103). y To remove the stored station from the list, select the item in the first level of “Bookmarks” list and then press and hold TITLE on the remote control. 106 En USING NETWORK/USB FEATURES Using a USB memory device or a USB portable audio player Use this feature to enjoy WAV (PCM format only), MP3 and WMA files saved on your USB memory device or USB portable audio player connected to the USB port on the front panel of this unit. Notes • This unit supports USB mass storage class devices using FAT 16 or FAT 32. • Only the first partition is displayed in the OSD. You cannot select files in other partitions. • Up to 8 levels of directory hierarchy and 500 music files per directory are recognized. • Some devices may not work properly even if they meet the requirements. • Some WAV, MP3 and WMA files may not be playable or may be noisy when played. • When you connect your USB memory device or USB portable audio player, there may be an about 10 seconds delay. y • While a song is being played, the time elapsed is displayed at the bottom of the OSD. • You can use b / a to skip backward/forward and h / s to start/stop playback independently from the menu in the OSD. • You can set the settings for repeat and shuffle mode by using the “PLAY STYLE” parameters in “NET/USB MENU” (see page 85). • You can set whether to display the operation status in the front panel display in a continuous manner or by the first 14 characters after scrolling all characters once by using “FL SCROLL” in “OPTION MENU” (see page 87). ADVANCED OPERATION 107 En RESETTING THE SYSTEM RESETTING THE SYSTEM Use this feature to reset all the parameters of this unit to the initial factory settings. Notes • This procedure completely resets all the parameters of this unit including the “SET MENU” parameters. However, the advanced setup menu parameters will not be initialized. • The initial factory settings are activated next time you turn on this unit. y To cancel the initialization procedure at any time without making any changes, press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to release it outward to the OFF position. (U.S.A. model) 3 Rotate the PROGRAM selector on the front panel to select “PRESET”. VOLUME ZONE 2 ON/OFF ZONE CONTROL PROGRAM MASTER PRESET/TUNING EDIT FM/AM A/B/C/D/E l PRESET/TUNING/CH h TUNING MODE AUTO/MAN'L LEVEL NEXT SEARCH MODE ON MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM CATEGORY DISPLAY OFF PROGRAM INPUT MAIN ZONE PHONES SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT VIDEO AUX VIDEO ON/OFF L AUDIO USB R EFFECT SILENT CINEMA 1-2,5 1 2,4 3 Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to release it outward to the OFF position to turn off this unit. PRESET-CANCEL 4 MASTER ON 2 Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the front panel repeatedly to select “RESET”. STRAIGHT OFF EFFECT Press and hold STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the front panel and then press MASTER ON/OFF inward to the ON position to turn on this unit. This unit turns on, and the advanced setup menu appears in the front panel display. PRESET-RESET While holding down STRAIGHT y MASTER Select “CANCEL” to cancel the initialization procedure without making any changes. EFFECT ON OFF 5 Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to release it outward to the OFF position to confirm your selection and turn off this unit. MASTER ON 108 En OFF TROUBLESHOOTING TROUBLESHOOTING Refer to the table below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instruction below does not help, turn off this unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center. ■ General Problem This unit fails to turn on or enters the standby mode soon after the power is turned on. No sound Remedy See page The power cable is not connected or the plug is not completely inserted. Connect the power cable firmly. — The speaker impedance setting is incorrect. Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers. 27 The protection circuitry has been activated. Make sure that all speaker wire connections on this unit and on all speakers are secure and that the wire for each connection does not touch anything other than its respective connection. 13 This unit has been exposed to a strong external electric shock (such as lightning or strong static electricity). Set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the power cable, plug it back in after 30 seconds and then use it normally. — Incorrect input or output cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 18-24 “INPUT MODE” is set to “DTS” or “ANALOG”. Set “INPUT MODE” to “AUTO”. No appropriate input source has been selected. Select an appropriate input source with the INPUT selector on the front panel (or the input selector buttons on the remote control) and MULTI CH INPUT on the front panel (or MULTI CH IN on the remote control). Speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections. 13 The front speakers to be used have not been selected properly. Select the set of front speakers with SPEAKERS A or B on the front panel or SPEAKERS on the remote control. 32 The volume is turned down. Turn up the volume. — The sound is muted. Press MUTE or VOLUME +/– on the remote control to resume audio output and then adjust the volume. 34 “INPUT MODE” is set to “ANALOG” while playing a source encoded in DTS. Set “INPUT MODE” to “AUTO” or “DTS”. 35 Signals this unit cannot reproduce are being input from a source component, such as a CD-ROM. Play a source whose signals can be reproduced by this unit. — The output and input for the picture are connected to different types of video jacks. Set “VIDEO CONV.” to “ON”. 86 35 32, 38 109 En ADDITIONAL INFORMATION No picture Cause TROUBLESHOOTING Problem The sound suddenly goes off. Cause See page Check that the speaker impedance setting is correct. 27, 91 Check that the speaker wires are not touching each other and then turn this unit back on. — The sleep timer has turned off this unit. Turn on this unit, and play the source again. — The sound is muted. Press MUTE or VOLUME +/– on the remote control to resume audio output. 34 Sound is heard from the speaker on one side only. Incorrect cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 13 Incorrect settings in “SPEAKER LEVEL”. Adjust the “SPEAKER LEVEL” settings. 79 Only the center speaker outputs substantial sound. When playing a monaural source with a CINEMA DSP program, the source signal is directed to the center channel, and the front and surround speakers output effect sounds. No sound is heard from the center speaker. “CENTER SP” in “SET MENU” is set to “NONE”. Set “CENTER SP” to “SML” or “LRG”. 78 One of the HiFi DSP programs (except for “6ch Stereo”) has been selected. Try another sound field program. 65 No sound is heard from the surround speakers. “SUR. L/R SP” in “SET MENU” is set to “NONE”. Set “SUR. L/R SP” to “SML” or “LRG”. 78 This unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode and a monaural source is being played back. Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the front panel so that “STRAIGHT” disappears from the front panel display. 39 No sound is heard from the surround back speaker. “SUR. L/R SP” in “SET MENU” is set to “NONE” and “SUR. B SP” is automatically set to “NONE”. Set “SUR. L/R SP” and “SUR. B SP” to “SML” or “LRG”. 78 “SUR. B SP” in “SET MENU” is set to “NONE”. Set “SUR. B SP” to “SML” or “LRG”. 78 “LFE/BASS OUT” in “SET MENU” is set to “FRNT” when a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is being played. Set “LFE/BASS OUT” to “SWFR” or “BOTH”. 78 “LFE/BASS OUT” in “SET MENU” is set to “SWFR” or “FRNT” when a 2channel source is being played. Set “LFE/BASS OUT” to “BOTH”. 78 No sound is heard from the subwoofer. The protection circuitry has been activated because of a short circuit, etc. Remedy The source does not contain lowfrequency signals. 110 En TROUBLESHOOTING Problem Dolby Digital or DTS sources cannot be played. (Dolby Digital or DTS indicator in the front panel display does not light up.) Cause Remedy See page The connected component is not set to output Dolby Digital or DTS digital signals. Make an appropriate setting following the operating instructions for your component. — “INPUT MODE” is set to “ANALOG”. Set “INPUT MODE” to “AUTO” or “DTS”. 35 A humming sound is heard. Incorrect cable connections. Connect the audio cables firmly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. — The volume level cannot be increased, or the sound is distorted. The component connected to the AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks of this unit is turned off. Turn on the power of the component. — The sound effect cannot be recorded. It is not possible to record the sound effect with a recording component. A source cannot be recorded by a digital recording component connected to the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack. The source component is not connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks of this unit. Connect the source component to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks. 19, 21 Some components cannot record the Dolby Digital or DTS sources. The source component is not connected to the analog AUDIO IN jacks of this unit. Connect the source component to the analog AUDIO IN jacks. 21 The sound field parameters and some other settings of this unit cannot be changed. “MEMORY GUARD” in “SET MENU” is set to “ON”. Set “MEMORY GUARD” to “OFF”. 87 This unit does not operate properly. The internal microcomputer has been frozen by an external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or by a power supply with low voltage. Disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet and then plug it in again after about 30 seconds. — “CHECK SP WIRES” appears in the front panel display. Speaker cables are short-circuited. Make sure all speaker cables are connected correctly. 13 There is noise interference from digital or radio frequency equipment. This unit is too close to the digital or highfrequency equipment. Move this unit further away from such equipment. — The picture is disturbed. The video source uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent dubbing. This unit suddenly enters the standby mode. The internal temperature becomes too high and the overheat protection circuitry has been activated. Wait about 1 hour for this unit to cool down and then turn it back on. — 111 En ADDITIONAL INFORMATION A source cannot be recorded by an analog component connected to the AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks. TROUBLESHOOTING ■ Tuner Problem Cause FM stereo reception is noisy. FM AM ■ Remedy The characteristics of FM stereo broadcasts may cause this problem when the transmitter is too far away or the antenna input is poor. See page Check the antenna connections. 25 Try using a high-quality directional FM antenna. — Use the manual tuning method. 47 There is distortion, and clear reception cannot be obtained even with a good FM antenna. There is multi-path interference. Adjust the antenna position to eliminate multi-path interference. — The desired station cannot be tuned into with the automatic tuning method. The signal is too weak. Use a high-quality directional FM antenna. — Use the manual tuning method. 47 Previously preset stations can no longer be tuned into. This unit has been disconnected for a long period. Set preset stations. The desired station cannot be tuned into with the automatic tuning method. The signal is weak or the antenna connections are loose. Tighten the AM loop antenna connections and orient it for the best reception. — Use the manual tuning method. 47 There are continuous crackling and hissing noises. Noises result from lightning, fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats and other electrical equipment. Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire. This will help somewhat, but it is difficult to eliminate all noise. — There are buzzing and whining noises. A TV set is being used nearby. Move this unit away from the TV set. — 48, 49 XM Satellite Radio (U.S.A. and Canada models only) If an operation takes longer than usual or an error occurs, one of the following messages may appear in the front panel display. In this case, read the cause and follow the corresponding remedies. Status message Cause Remedy See page CHECK ANTENNA XM Passport and XM Passport Home Dock are not connected to the XM jack of this unit or does not work properly. Check XM Passport and XM Passport Home Dock connections and orient them for the best reception level. 54 UPDATING The XM user encryption code is being updated. Wait until the encryption code is updated. — NO SIGNAL The signal is too weak. Adjust the orientation of the XM Passport System for the best reception level. 54 LOADING It takes longer than four seconds for audio or text data to be decoded. Wait until the decoding process has finished. — OFF AIR The XM Satellite Radio channel you selected is not currently broadcasting any signals. Check the channel number again or select another XM Satellite Radio channel. — <XM> - - - The Channel Station ID (SID) is no longer available. - - - No artist name or song title is available. Select another channel category by pressing CATEGORY on the front panel (or A-E/CAT. j / i on the remote control) repeatedly. 59 / - - - <CAT> - - - 112 En No channels are available for the selected category. TROUBLESHOOTING ■ Remote control Problem The remote control does not work nor function properly. Cause Remedy See page Wrong distance or angle. The remote control functions within a maximum range of 6 m (20 ft) and no more than 30 degrees offaxis from the front panel. 8 Direct sunlight or lighting (from an inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is striking the remote control sensor of this unit. Reposition this unit. — The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries. 3 The remote control code is not correctly set. Set the remote control code correctly using “LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at the end of this manual. 95 Try setting another code for the same manufacturer using “LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at the end of this manual. 95 The library code of the remote control and the remote control ID of this unit do not match. Match the remote control ID of this unit with the corresponding remote control library code. 91, 96 Even if the remote control code is correctly set, there are some models that do not respond to the remote control. ■ iPod Note In case of a transmission error without a status message appearing in the front panel and in the OSD, check the connection to your iPod (see page 22). Status message Loading... Cause Remedy See page This unit is in the middle of recognizing the connection with your iPod. This unit is in the middle of acquiring song lists from your iPod. Connect error There is a problem with the signal path from your iPod to this unit. Turn off this unit and reconnect the YAMAHA iPod universal dock to the DOCK terminal of this unit. 22 Try resetting your iPod. — Only iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini are supported. — The iPod being used is not supported by this unit. iPod connected Your iPod is properly stationed in a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit, and the connection between your iPod and this unit is complete. Disconnected Your iPod was removed from a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit. Station your iPod back in a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit. 22 Unable to play This unit cannot play back the songs currently stored on your iPod. Check that the songs currently stored on your iPod are playable. — Store some other playable music files on your iPod. — 113 En ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Unknown type TROUBLESHOOTING ■ Network and USB Problem The PC server/MCX-2000/ Internet radio does not function properly. Cause Remedy See page The IP address is not set properly. Set the DHCP server function of the router to ON. Alternately, perform manual configuration according to the current operating environment. 84 The network cable is not connected. Connect it properly. 23 The PC does not have Windows Media Connect 2.0 installed in it. Install Windows Media Connect 2.0 in the PC. — The music is recorded in a format that cannot be played on this unit. This unit cannot play music formats other than WMA, MP3 and WAV (PCM format). Also note that it cannot play certain music files even if these are recorded in the WMA, MP3 or WAV format. Play music recorded in a format that this unit is compatible with. — The music is copyright-protected. This unit cannot play copyright-protected music. — Windows Media Connect 2.0 cannot be connected. The Windows XP PC is logging on to a domain. Log on to the local machine instead of the domain. — The MusicCAST server cannot be connected. You are attempting to connect to MCX-1000. The MusicCAST server that can be connected by this unit is MCX-2000. Use MCX-2000 or the PC server. — Auto Configuration is not executed. Execute “Auto Configure”. 105 The firewall of the network device is activated. The Internet radio can be played only when it passes through the port designated by each radio station. The port number is variable depending on radio station. Check the firewall setting of the network device. — Connection to the Internet is disconnected. Check the configuration of the network device, and then contact the network connection provider. — The music files and directories in the USB device cannot be viewed. The music files and directories are placed in locations other than the FAT area. Place music files and directories in the FAT area. — You are attempting to browse directory hierarchies of over 8 levels or a directory with more than 500 files. Modify the data structure on your USB device. — The USB device cannot be recognized. The connected USB device is other than a USB mass storage class USB memory device or USB portable audio player. This unit can recognize only a USB mass storage class USB memory device or USB portable audio player. Also note that it cannot recognize certain USB devices even when they are devices as described above. 107 Some devices may become easier to recognize when they are inserted before turning this unit on. 28 Turn this unit off then on again. 28 The music in the PC server cannot be played back. The Internet radio cannot be played. “Disconnected” is displayed even when a USB device is present. 114 En This unit recognized the USB device as an illegal device. TROUBLESHOOTING Status message Please wait Cause Remedy See page This is not a system malfunction. Wait for a while. — This unit is in the middle of recognizing the connection with your USB memory device or USB portable audio player. This is not a system malfunction. Wait for a while. — Please wait (Starting Server) This unit is in the middle of waking up MCX-2000 that has been set to the standby mode. Wait for approximately 20 seconds. — Connect error There is a problem with the signal path from your network to this unit. Check the connection between this unit and the LAN port on your router or hub. 23 Make sure your router is properly connected and turned on. Also, make sure your modem is properly connected and turned on when you are attempting to listen to Internet radio. 23 Your USB memory device or USB portable audio player has been disconnected from the USB port of this unit. Check the connection between this unit and your USB memory device or USB portable audio player. — The PC server or MCX-2000 server previously connected to this unit no longer exists. Connect this unit to the available PC server or MCX-2000. 105 There is a problem with the signal path from your USB memory device or USB portable audio player to this unit. Turn off this unit and reconnect your USB memory device or USB portable audio player to the USB port of this unit. 28 Try resetting your USB memory device or USB portable audio player. — This unit cannot access your USB memory device or USB portable audio player. Try another USB memory device or USB portable audio player. — There is a problem with the signal path from your USB memory device or USB portable audio player to this unit. Turn off this unit and reconnect your USB memory device or USB portable audio player to the USB port of this unit. 28 Try resetting your USB memory device or USB portable audio player. — Make sure Windows Media Connect 2.0 is installed on your PC. — Check that the songs currently stored on your PC are playable (MP3, WMA, and WAV). — Store some other playable music files (MP3, WMA, and WAV) on your PC. — Try preparing a network exclusively for use with this unit to separate it from general network traffic. — Disconnected Access error Unable to play This unit cannot play back the songs currently stored on your PC. The network may be overloaded with heavy traffic, and playback is interrupted. List updated The list of the contents stored on your PC server or MCX-2000 has been updated. Bookmark ON The desired Internet radio station has been added to the “Bookmarks” list. Bookmark OFF The stored Internet radio station has been removed from the “Bookmarks” list. 115 En ADDITIONAL INFORMATION This unit is in the middle of recognizing the connection with your network. GLOSSARY GLOSSARY Audio information ■ Dolby Digital Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives you completely independent multi-channel audio. With 3 front channels (front L/R and center), and 2 surround stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides 5 full-range audio channels. With an additional channel especially for bass effects, called LFE (Low Frequency Effect), the system has a total of 5.1-channels (LFE is counted as 0.1 channel). By using 2-channel stereo for the surround speakers, more accurate moving sound effects and surround sound environment are possible than with Dolby Surround. The wide dynamic range from maximum to minimum volume reproduced by the 5 full-range channels and the precise sound orientation generated using digital sound processing provide listeners with unprecedented excitement and realism. With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up to a 5.1-channel configuration can be freely selected for your enjoyment. ■ Dolby Digital EX Dolby Digital EX creates 6 full-bandwidth output channels from 5.1-channel sources. This is done using a matrix decoder that derives 3 surround channels from the 2 in the original recording. For the best results, Dolby Digital EX should be used with movie sound tracks recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX. With this additional channel, you can experience more dynamic and realistic moving sound especially with scenes with “flyover” and “fly-around” effects. ■ Dolby Pro Logic II Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to decode vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround sources. This new technology enables a discrete 5-channel playback with 2 front left and right channels, 1 center channel, and 2 surround left and right channels instead of only 1 surround channel for conventional Pro Logic technology. There are three modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources and “Game mode” for game sources. ■ Dolby Pro Logic IIx Dolby Pro Logic IIx is a new technology enabling discrete multi-channel playback from 2-channel or multi-channel sources. There are three modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources (for 2-channel sources only) and “Game mode” for game sources. 116 En ■ Dolby Surround Dolby Surround uses a 4-channel analog recording system to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front left and right channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog (monaural), and a surround channel for special sound effects (monaural). The surround channel reproduces sound within a narrow frequency range. Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes and laser discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as well. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit employs a digital signal processing system that automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to enhance moving sound effects and directionality. ■ DTS 96/24 DTS 96/24 offers an unprecedented level of audio quality for multi-channel sound on DVD video, and is fully backward-compatible with all DTS decoders. “96” refers to a 96 kHz sampling rate compared to the typical 48 kHz sampling rate. “24” refers to 24-bit word length. DTS 96/ 24 offers sound quality transparent to the original 96/24 master, and 96/24 5.1-channel sound with full-quality fullmotion video for music programs and motion picture soundtracks on DVD video. ■ DTS (Digital Theater Systems) Digital Surround DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog soundtracks of movies with a 6.1-channel digital sound track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie theaters around the world. Digital Theater Systems Inc. has developed a home theater system so that you can enjoy the depth of sound and natural spatial representation of DTS digital surround in your home. This system produces practically distortion-free 6.1-channel sound (technically, front left and right, center, surround left and right, and LFE 0.1 (subwoofer) channels for a total of 5.1 channels). This unit incorporates a DTS-ES decoder that enables 6.1channel reproduction by adding the surround back channel to the existing 5.1-channel format. ■ ITU-R ITU-R is the radio communication sector of the ITU (International Telecommunication Union). ITU-R recommends a standard speaker placement which is used in many critical listening rooms, especially for mastering purposes. GLOSSARY ■ LFE 0.1 channel This channel reproduces low-frequency signals. The frequency range of this channel is from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a low-frequency range compared to the full-range reproduced by the other 5/6 channels in Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1/6.1-channel systems. ■ MP3 One of the audio compression methods used by MPEG. It employs the irreversible compression method, which achieves a high compression rate by thinning out the data of hardly audible part to the human ears. It is said to be capable of compressing the data quantity by about 1/11 (128 kbps) while maintaining a similar audio quality to music CD. ■ Neo:6 Neo:6 decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6channel playback by the specific decoder. It enables playback with the full-range channels with higher separation just like digital discrete signal playback. There are two modes available: “Music mode” for music sources and “Cinema mode” for movie sources. ■ Neural Surround Neural Surround™ represents the latest advancement in surround technology and has been adopted by XM Satellite Radio for digital radio broadcast of surround recordings and live events in surround sound. Neural Surround™ employs psychoacoustic frequency domain processing which allows delivery of a more detailed sound stage with superior channel separation and localization of audio elements. System playback is scalable from 5.1 to 7.1 multi-channel surround playback. ■ Sampling frequency and number of quantized bits When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of times the signal is sampled per second is called the sampling frequency, while the degree of fineness when converting the sound level into a numeric value is called the number of quantized bits. The range of rates that can be played back is determined based on the sampling rate, while the dynamic range representing the sound level difference is determined by the number of quantized bits. In principle, the higher the sampling frequency, the wider the range of frequencies that can be played back, and the higher the number of quantized bits, the more finely the sound level can be reproduced. ■ WAV Windows standard audio file format, which defines the method of recording the digital data obtained by converting audio signals. It does not specify the compression (coding) method so a desired compression method can be used with it. By default, it is compatible with the PCM method (no compression) and some compression methods including the ADPCM method. ■ WMA An audio compression method developed by Microsoft Corporation. It employs the irreversible compression method, which achieves a high compression rate by thinning out the data of hardly audible part to the human ears. It is said to be capable of compressing the data quantity by about 1/22 (64 kbps) while maintaining a similar audio quality to music CD. ■ PCM (Linear PCM) Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without using any compression. This is used as a method of recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per very small unit of time. Standing for “Pulse Code Modulation”, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and then modulated for recording. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 117 En GLOSSARY Video information Sound field program information ■ Component video signal ■ CINEMA DSP With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the PB and PR signals for the chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because each of these signals is independent. The component signal is also called the “color difference signal” because the luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal. A monitor with component input jacks is required in order to output component signals. Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is best felt in a theater having many speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as room size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are differences in the sound heard. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, YAMAHA CINEMA DSP uses YAMAHA original sound field technology to combine Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital and DTS systems to provide the audiovisual experience of movie theater in the listening room of your own home. ■ Composite video signal With the composite video signal system, the video signal is composed of three basic elements of a video picture: color, brightness and synchronization data. A composite video jack on a video component transmits these three elements combined. ■ S-video signal With the S-video signal system, the video signal normally transmitted using a pin cable is separated and transmitted as the Y signal for the luminance and the C signal for the chrominance through the S-video cable. Using the S VIDEO jack eliminates video signal transmission loss and allows recording and playback of even more beautiful images. 118 En ■ SILENT CINEMA YAMAHA has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound field so that accurate representations of all the sound field programs can be enjoyed on headphones. ■ Virtual CINEMA DSP YAMAHA has developed a Virtual CINEMA DSP algorithm that allows you to enjoy DSP sound field surround effects even without any surround speakers by using virtual surround speakers. It is even possible to enjoy Virtual CINEMA DSP using a minimal two-speaker system that does not include a center speaker. SPECIFICATIONS SPECIFICATIONS AUDIO SECTION • Minimum RMS Output Power for Front, Center, Surround, Surround back 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 Ω ....................................... 95 W • Maximum Useful Output Power (JEITA) [China, Korea and General models] 1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 Ω ..........................................................135 W • Dynamic Power (IHF) 8/6/4/2 Ω ........................................................ 130/165/195/240 W • Maximum Output Power [Europe model] 1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 Ω .........................................................145 W • IEC Output Power [Europe model] 1 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 Ω .......................................................105 W • Damping Factor 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω................................................... 120 or more • Maximum Input Voltage CD, etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) .................................. 2.2 V or more • Frequency Response CD, etc. .................................................. 10 Hz to 100 kHz, –3 dB V-AUX ..................................................... 10 Hz to 20 kHz, –3 dB • Total Harmonic Distortion CD, etc. to Front L/R (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 50 W, 8 Ω) ............................................................................... 0.06% or less • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network) CD, etc. (250 mV) to Front L/R .......................... 100 dB or more • Residual Noise (IHF-A Network) Front L/R ............................................................... 150 µV or less • Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz) CD (5.1 kΩ terminated) to Front L/R .......... 60 dB/45 dB or more • Tone Control (Front L/R) BASS Boost/Cut ..................................................... ±10 dB/60 Hz TREBLE Boost/Cut .............................................. ±10 dB/20 kHz • Phones Output .......................................................... 150 mV/100 Ω • Input Sensitivity/Input Impedance CD, etc. ................................................................. 200 mV/47 kΩ MULTI CH INPUT ............................................... 200 mV/47 kΩ • Rated Output Voltage/Output Impedance OUT (REC)........................................................... 200 mV/1.2 kΩ SUBWOOFER ............................................................. 4 V/1.2 kΩ ZONE 2 OUT ...................................................... 200 mV/1.2 kΩ • Volume Control........................... Mute/–80 dB to +16 dB/1 dB step VIDEO SECTION • Video Format (Gray Back) [U.S.A., Canada, Korea and General models] ..................... NTSC [Other models] ........................................................................ PAL • Video Format (Video Conversion) ................................. NTSC/PAL • Signal to Noise Ratio ................................................ 50 dB or more • Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT) Component ............................................... 5 Hz to 60 MHz, –3 dB FM SECTION • Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models] .......................... 87.5 to 107.9 MHz [General model] ........................ 87.5/87.50 to 108.0/108.00 MHz [Other models] ............................................ 87.50 to 108.00 MHz • Stereo Separation (1 kHz) ....................................................... 42 dB • Frequency Response .......................... 20 Hz to 15 kHz, +0.5, –2 dB AM SECTION • Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................. 530 to 1710 kHz [General model] ................................. 530/531 to 1710/1611 kHz [Other models] ................................................... 531 to 1611 kHz • Usable Sensitivity ............................................................. 300 µV/m GENERAL • Power Supply [U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................. AC 120 V, 60 Hz [Australia model] ............................................... AC 240 V, 50 Hz [China model] ..................................................... AC 220 V, 50 Hz [Korea model] .................................................... AC 220 V, 60 Hz [Europe model] ................................................... AC 230 V, 50 Hz [General model] .............. AC 110/120/220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz • Power Consumption [U.S.A. and Canada models] ................................. 350 W/440 VA [Other models] ................................................................... 360 W • Standby Power Consumption ...................................... 0.1 W or less • AC Outlets [Australia model] ......................................... 1 (100 W maximum) [U.S.A., Canada and China models] ... 2 (Total 100 W maximum) [Europe and General models] ............... 2 (Total 50 W maximum) • Dimensions (W x H x D) ................................. 435 x 171 x 393 mm (17.1 x 6.7 x 15.5 in) • Weight .................................................................. 11.7 kg (25.8 lbs) We Want You Listening For A Lifetime YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group want you to get the most out of your equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound come through loud and clear without annoying blaring or distortion – and, most importantly, without affecting your sensitive hearing. Since hearing damage from loud sounds is often undetectable until it is too late, YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group recommend you to avoid prolonged exposure from excessive volume levels. GPL/LGPL This product includes software code subject to the GNU General Public License (GPL) or the GNU Lesser General Public License (LGPL). The copy, distribution, or change of this software code is licensed under the terms of the GPL or the LGPL. The source code is available at the following website: http://www.global.yamaha.com/download/ The source code is also available on a physical media (such as a CD-ROM) at actual cost. Contact: AV products division, YAMAHA CORPORATION, 10-1 Nakazawa-cho, Hamamatsu 430-8650, Japan • Usable Sensitivity (IHF) ....................................... 1.0 µV (11.2 dBf) • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF) Mono/Stereo ............................................................. 76 dB/70 dB In principle, the source code is offered for 3 years from the day of purchase. 119 En ADDITIONAL INFORMATION • Rated Input Voltage Composite .................................................................. 1 Vp-p/75 Ω S-video (Y) ................................................................ 1 Vp-p/75 Ω S-video (C) .......................................................... 0.286 Vp-p/75 Ω Component (Y) .......................................................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω Component (PB, PR) ................................................. 0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω • Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz) Mono/Stereo ................................................................ 0.2%/0.3% ■ GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it. Version 2, June 1991 Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. Preamble The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software–to make sure the software is free for all its users. This General Public License applies to most of the Free Software Foundation’s software and to any other program whose authors commit to using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by the GNU Library General Public License instead.) You can apply it to your programs, too. Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Program. In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License. 3. When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things. a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or, To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it. b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or, For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights. c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute corresponding source code. (This alternative is allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you received the program in object code or executable form with such an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.) We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and (2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the software. Also, for each author’s protection and ours, we want to make certain that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original authors’ reputations. Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone’s free use or not licensed at all. The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow. TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION 0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed under the terms of this General Public License. The “Program”, below, refers to any such program or work, and a “work based on the Program” means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the term “modification”.) Each licensee is addressed as “you”. Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Program (independent of having been made by running the Program). Whether that is true depends on what the Program does. 1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program’s source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License along with the Program. You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee. 2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions: a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change. b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License. c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run, you must cause it, when started running for such interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this License. (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on the Program is not required to print an announcement.) APPENDIX-i You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following: The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a special exception, the source code distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the executable. If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place counts as distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code. 4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance. 5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Program or works based on it. 6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients’ exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to this License. 7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Program. If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances. It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system, which is implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice. This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License. 8. 9. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Program under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and “any later version”, you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation. 10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally. You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if any, to sign a “copyright disclaimer” for the program, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names: Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program ‘Gnomovision’ (which makes passes at compilers) written by James Hacker. <signature of Ty Coon>, 1 April 1989 Ty Coon, President of Vice This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine library, you may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the library. If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Library General Public License instead of this License. ■ GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2.1, February 1999 Copyright (C) 1991, 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. [This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL. It also counts as the successor of the GNU Library Public License, version 2, hence the version number 2.1.] NO WARRANTY Preamble 11. The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software–to make sure the software is free for all its users. 12. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms. To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the “copyright” line and a pointer to where the full notice is found. <one line to give the program’s name and a brief idea of what it does.> Copyright (C) <year> <name of author> This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA. Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail. If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode: Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) year name of author Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type ‘show w’. This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it under certain conditions; type ‘show c’ for details. The hypothetical commands ‘show w’ and ‘show c’ should show the appropriate parts of the General Public License. Of course, the commands you use may be called something other than ‘show w’ and ‘show c’; they could even be mouse-clicks or menu items–whatever suits your program. This license, the Lesser General Public License, applies to some specially designated software packages–typically libraries–of the Free Software Foundation and other authors who decide to use it. You can use it too, but we suggest you first think carefully about whether this license or the ordinary General Public License is the better strategy to use in any particular case, based on the explanations below. When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom of use, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish); that you receive source code or can get it if you want it; that you can change the software and use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you are informed that you can do these things. To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid distributors to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender these rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the library or if you modify it. For example, if you distribute copies of the library, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that we gave you. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. If you link other code with the library, you must provide complete object files to the recipients, so that they can relink them with the library after making changes to the library and recompiling it. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights. We protect your rights with a two-step method: (1) we copyright the library, and (2) we offer you this license, which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the library. To protect each distributor, we want to make it very clear that there is no warranty for the free library. Also, if the library is modified by someone else and passed on, the recipients should know that what they have is not the original version, so that the original author’s reputation will not be affected by problems that might be introduced by others. Finally, software patents pose a constant threat to the existence of any free program. We wish to make sure that a company cannot effectively restrict the users of a free program by obtaining a restrictive license from a patent holder. Therefore, we insist that any patent license obtained for a version of the library must be consistent with the full freedom of use specified in this license. Most GNU software, including some libraries, is covered by the ordinary GNU General Public License. This license, the GNU Lesser General Public License, applies to certain designated libraries, and is quite different from the ordinary General Public License. We use this license for certain libraries in order to permit linking those libraries into nonfree programs. When a program is linked with a library, whether statically or using a shared library, the combination of the two is legally speaking a combined work, a derivative of the original library. The ordinary General Public License therefore permits such linking only if the entire combination fits its criteria of freedom. The Lesser General Public License permits more lax criteria for linking other code with the library. We call this license the “Lesser” General Public License because it does Less to protect the user’s freedom than the ordinary General Public License. It also provides other free software developers Less of an advantage over competing non-free programs. These disadvantages are the reason we use the ordinary General Public License for many libraries. However, the Lesser license provides advantages in certain special circumstances. For example, on rare occasions, there may be a special need to encourage the widest possible use of a certain library, so that it becomes a de-facto standard. To achieve this, non-free programs must be allowed to use the library. A more frequent case is that a free library does the same job as widely used non-free libraries. In this case, there is little to gain by limiting the free library to free software only, so we use the Lesser General Public License. APPENDIX-ii In other cases, permission to use a particular library in non-free programs enables a greater number of people to use a large body of free software. For example, permission to use the GNU C Library in non-free programs enables many more people to use the whole GNU operating system, as well as its variant, the GNU/Linux operating system. 3. Although the Lesser General Public License is Less protective of the users’ freedom, it does ensure that the user of a program that is linked with the Library has the freedom and the wherewithal to run that program using a modified version of the Library. The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow. Pay close attention to the difference between a “work based on the library” and a “work that uses the library”. The former contains code derived from the library, whereas the latter must be combined with the library in order to run. TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION 0. This License Agreement applies to any software library or other program which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder or other authorized party saying it may be distributed under the terms of this Lesser General Public License (also called “this License”). Each licensee is addressed as “you”. A “library” means a collection of software functions and/or data prepared so as to be conveniently linked with application programs (which use some of those functions and data) to form executables. The “Library”, below, refers to any such software library or work which has been distributed under these terms. A “work based on the Library” means either the Library or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Library or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated straightforwardly into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the term “modification”.) “Source code” for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For a library, complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the library. Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of running a program using the Library is not restricted, and output from such a program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Library (independent of the use of the Library in a tool for writing it). Whether that is true depends on what the Library does and what the program that uses the Library does. 1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library’s complete source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; and distribute a copy of this License along with the Library. You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee. 2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the Library, and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions: a) The modified work must itself be a software library. b) You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change. c) You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License. d) If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a table of data to be supplied by an application program that uses the facility, other than as an argument passed when the facility is invoked, then you must make a good faith effort to ensure that, in the event an application does not supply such function or table, the facility still operates, and performs whatever part of its purpose remains meaningful. (For example, a function in a library to compute square roots has a purpose that is entirely well-defined independent of the application. Therefore, Subsection 2d requires that any application-supplied function or table used by this function must be optional: if the application does not supply it, the square root function must still compute square roots.) These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Library, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Library, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it. Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Library. In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library with the Library (or with a work based on the Library) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License. APPENDIX-iii You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Public License instead of this License to a given copy of the Library. To do this, you must alter all the notices that refer to this License, so that they refer to the ordinary GNU General Public License, version 2, instead of to this License. (If a newer version than version 2 of the ordinary GNU General Public License has appeared, then you can specify that version instead if you wish.) Do not make any other change in these notices. Once this change is made in a given copy, it is irreversible for that copy, so the ordinary GNU General Public License applies to all subsequent copies and derivative works made from that copy. This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of the Library into a program that is not a library. 4. You may copy and distribute the Library (or a portion or derivative of it, under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you accompany it with the complete corresponding machinereadable source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange. If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place satisfies the requirement to distribute the source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code. 5. A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the Library, but is designed to work with the Library by being compiled or linked with it, is called a “work that uses the Library”. Such a work, in isolation, is not a derivative work of the Library, and therefore falls outside the scope of this License. However, linking a “work that uses the Library” with the Library creates an executable that is a derivative of the Library (because it contains portions of the Library), rather than a “work that uses the library”. The executable is therefore covered by this License. Section 6 states terms for distribution of such executables. When a “work that uses the Library” uses material from a header file that is part of the Library, the object code for the work may be a derivative work of the Library even though the source code is not. Whether this is true is especially significant if the work can be linked without the Library, or if the work is itself a library. The threshold for this to be true is not precisely defined by law. If such an object file uses only numerical parameters, data structure layouts and accessors, and small macros and small inline functions (ten lines or less in length), then the use of the object file is unrestricted, regardless of whether it is legally a derivative work. (Executables containing this object code plus portions of the Library will still fall under Section 6.) Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library, you may distribute the object code for the work under the terms of Section 6. Any executables containing that work also fall under Section 6, whether or not they are linked directly with the Library itself. 6. As an exception to the Sections above, you may also combine or link a “work that uses the Library” with the Library to produce a work containing portions of the Library, and distribute that work under terms of your choice, provided that the terms permit modification of the work for the customer’s own use and reverse engineering for debugging such modifications. You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the Library is used in it and that the Library and its use are covered by this License. You must supply a copy of this License. If the work during execution displays copyright notices, you must include the copyright notice for the Library among them, as well as a reference directing the user to the copy of this License. Also, you must do one of these things: a) Accompany the work with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code for the Library including whatever changes were used in the work (which must be distributed under Sections 1 and 2 above); and, if the work is an executable linked with the Library, with the complete machinereadable “work that uses the Library”, as object code and/or source code, so that the user can modify the Library and then relink to produce a modified executable containing the modified Library. (It is understood that the user who changes the contents of definitions files in the Library will not necessarily be able to recompile the application to use the modified definitions.) b) Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with the Library. A suitable mechanism is one that (1) uses at run time a copy of the library already present on the user’s computer system, rather than copying library functions into the executable, and (2) will operate properly with a modified version of the library, if the user installs one, as long as the modified version is interface-compatible with the version that the work was made with. c) Accompany the work with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give the same user the materials specified in Subsection 6a, above, for a charge no more than the cost of performing this distribution. d) If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, offer equivalent access to copy the above specified materials from the same place. e) Verify that the user has already received a copy of these materials or that you have already sent this user a copy. For an executable, the required form of the “work that uses the Library” must include any data and utility programs needed for reproducing the executable from it. However, as a special exception, the materials to be distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the executable. It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license restrictions of other proprietary libraries that do not normally accompany the operating system. Such a contradiction means you cannot use both them and the Library together in an executable that you distribute. 7. NO WARRANTY 15. BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE LIBRARY, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE LIBRARY “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE LIBRARY IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE LIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. 16. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE LIBRARY (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. You may place library facilities that are a work based on the Library side-by-side in a single library together with other library facilities not covered by this License, and distribute such a combined library, provided that the separate distribution of the work based on the Library and of the other library facilities is otherwise permitted, and provided that you do these two things: a) Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based on the Library, uncombined with any other library facilities. This must be distributed under the terms of the Sections above. b) Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact that part of it is a work based on the Library, and explaining where to find the accompanying uncombined form of the same work. 8. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance. 9. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Library or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Library (or any work based on the Library), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Library or works based on it. 10. 11. Each time you redistribute the Library (or any work based on the Library), the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute, link with or modify the Library subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients’ exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the Library at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Library by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Library. If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply, and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances. It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system which is implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice. This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License. 12. 13. If the distribution and/or use of the Library is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Library under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License. END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS How to Apply These Terms to Your New Libraries If you develop a new library, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, we recommend making it free software that everyone can redistribute and change. You can do so by permitting redistribution under these terms (or, alternatively, under the terms of the ordinary General Public License). To apply these terms, attach the following notices to the library. It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the “copyright” line and a pointer to where the full notice is found. <one line to give the library’s name and a brief idea of what it does.> Copyright (C) <year> <name of author> This library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version. This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU Lesser General Public License for more details. You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public License along with this library; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail. You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if any, to sign a “copyright disclaimer” for the library, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names: Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the library ‘Frob’ (a library for tweaking knobs) written by James Random Hacker. <signature of Ty Coon>, 1 April 1990 Ty Coon, President of Vice That’s all there is to it! The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the Lesser General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Library specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and “any later version”, you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Library does not specify a license version number, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation. 14. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free programs whose distribution conditions are incompatible with these, write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally. APPENDIX-iv LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES CABLE TV RECEIVER ABC 10003, 10008, 10014, 10017, 10033 AMERICAST 10899 BELL & HOWELL 10014 BELL SOUTH 10899 CLEARMASTER 10883 CLEARMAX 10883 COOLMAX 10883 DIGEO 11187 DIGI 10637 DIRECTOR 10476 DUMONT 10637 GENERAL INSTRUMENT 10003, 10276, 10476, 10810 GOLDSTAR 10144 HAMLIN 10009, 10273 I3 MICRO 11602 JERROLD 10003, 10012, 10014, 10276, 10476, 10810 MACOM 10033 MEMOREX 10000 MOTOROLA 10014, 10276, 10476, 10810, 11187, 11254, 11376 MULTITECH 10883 MYRIO 11602 PACE 10008, 10237, 11877 PANASONIC 10000, 10107 PANTHER 10637 PARAGON 10000 PHILIPS 10317, 11305 PIONEER 10144, 10533, 10877, 11877 PULSAR 10000 QUASAR 10000 RADIOSHACK 10883 RCA 11256 REGAL 10273, 10279 RUNCO 10000 SAMSUNG 10144 SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA 10008, 10017, 10477, 10877, 11877 SEJIN 11602 SONY 11006 STARCOM 10003 SUPERCABLE 10276 SUPERMAX 10883 THOMSON 11256 TOCOM 10012 TORX 10003 TOSHIBA 10000 TRISTAR 10883 V2 10883 VIEWMASTER10883 VISION 10883 VORTEX VIEW10883 ZENITH 10000, 10525, 10899 CABLE/PVR COMBINATION AMERICAST 10899 DIGEO 11187 GENERAL INSTRUMENT 10476, 10810 JERROLD 10476, 10810 APPENDIX-v MOTOROLA 10476, 10810, 11187, 11376 PACE 10237, 11877 PIONEER 10877, 11877 RCA 11256 SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA 10877, 11877 SONY 11006 SUPERCABLE 10276 THOMSON 11256 ZENITH 10899 DBS/PVR COMBINATION DIRECTV 10099, 10392, 10639, 11076, 11142, 11377, 11392, 11442, 11443, 11444, 11640 DISH NETWORK SYSTEM 10775, 11505 DISHPRO 10775, 11505 ECHOSTAR 10775, 11170, 11505 EXPRESSVU 10775 HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEMS 11142, 11442, 11443, 11444 JVC 11170 MOTOROLA 10869 PHILIPS 11142, 11442 PROSCAN 10392 RCA 11392 SAMSUNG 11442 SONY 10639, 11640 STAR CHOICE 10869 SATELLITE RECEIVER ALPHASTAR 10772 CHAPARRAL 10053, 10216 CROSSDIGITAL 11109 DIRECTV 10099, 10247, 10392, 10566, 10639, 10724, 10749, 10819, 11076, 11108, 11109, 11142, 11377, 11392, 11414, 11442, 11443, 11444, 11609, 11639, 11640, 11749, 11856 DISH NETWJORK SYSTEM 10775, 11005, 11170, 11505, 11775 DISHPRO 10775, 11005, 11505, 11775 ECHOSTAR 10269, 10280, 10775, 11005, 11170, 11505, 11775 EXPRESSVU 10775, 11775 GE 10392, 10566 GENERAL INSTRUMENT 10869 GOI 10775, 11775 GOODMANS 11246 HISENSE 11535 HITACHI 10819, 11250 HOMECABLE 10238 HTS 10775, 11775 HUGHES 10749, 11442, 11749 HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEMS 10749, 11142, 11442, 11443, 11444, 11749 ILO 11535 IQ 10210 IQ PRISM 10210 JERROLD 10869 JVC 10775, 11170, 11775 LEGEND 10269 LG 11226, 11414 MAGNAVOX 10722, 10724 MEMOREX 10269, 10724 MITSUBISHI 10749 MOTOROLA 10856, 10869 NEC 11270 NEXT LEVEL 10869 PANASONIC 10247, 10701 PAYSAT 10724 PHILIPS 10099, 10722, 10724, 10749, 10819, 11076, 11142, 11442, 11749 PIONEER 11442 PROSCAN 10392, 10566 PROTON 11535 RADIOSHACK 10869 RCA 10143, 10392, 10566, 10855, 11392 REALISTIC 10052 SAMSUNG 11108, 11109, 11142, 11276, 11377, 11442, 11609 SANYO 11219 SONY 10639, 11639, 11640 STAR CHOICE 10869 STS 10210 TIVO 11142, 11442, 11443, 11444 TOSHIBA 10082, 10749, 10790, 10819, 11285, 11749 ULTIMATETV 11392, 11640 UNIDEN 10052, 10074, 10238, 10722, 10724 US DIGITAL 11535 USDTV 11535 VOOM 10869 ZENITH 11856 HDTV DECORDER ACCURIAN 11653 EPSON 11563, 11650 LG 11415 MACRO IMAGE TECHNOLOGY 11383 MOTOROLA 11363 MYHD 11383 PANASONIC 11120 PIONEER 11010 PRINCETON 10113, 10295 SAMSUNG 11190, 11490 SASEM 11641 SENSORY SCIENCE 11126 SHARP 11010 SYLVANIA 11563 TELEMANN 11604 VIEWSONIC 11329 VIZIO 11126 OTHER VIDEO ACCESSORIES ABS 11272 ACCURIAN 11653 ALIENWARE 11272 CYBERPOWER 11272 D-LINK 11554 ECS 11553 EPSON 11563, 11650 GATEWAY 11272 HEWLETT PACKARD 11267, 11272 HOWARD COMPUTERS 11272 HP 11272 HUSH 11272 IBUYPOWER 11272 INTERVIDEO 11393 KEYSPAN 11344 KWORLD 11403 LEADTEK 11614 LG 11415 LINKSYS 11272, 11365 MACRO IMAGE TECHNOLOGY 11383 MEDIA CENTER PC 11272 MICROSOFT 11272 MIND 11272 MOTOROLA 11363 MYHD 11383 NIVEUS MEDIA 11272 NORTHGATE 11272 PANASONIC 11120 PINNACLE SYSTEMS 11268 PIONEER 11010 PRINCETON 10113, 10295 RICAVISION 11272 ROKU 11486 SAMSUNG 11190, 11490 SASEM 11641 SENSORY SCIENCE 11126 SHARP 11010 SMC 11456 SONY 11272, 11324, 11364 STACK 9 11272 STREAMZAP 11309 SYLVANIA 11563 SYSTEMAX 11272 TAGAR SYSTEMS 11272 TELEMANN 11604 TOSHIBA 11272 TOUCH 11272 VIEWSONIC 11272, 11329 VIZIO 11126 VOODOO 11272 ZT GROUP 11272 TV ADMIRAL ADVENT 20093, 20463 20761, 20783, 20815, 20817, 20842, 21933 AIKO 20092 AIWA 20701 AKAI 20030, 20060, 20672, 20702, 20812, 21903 ALBATRON 20700, 20843 AMERICA ACTION 20180 AMPRO 20751 ANAM 20180 AOC 20030 APEX DIGITAL 20156, 20748, 20765, 20767, 20879, 21943 AUDIOVOX 20092, 20180, 20451, 20623, 20802, 20875, 21937, 21951, 21952 AVENTURA 20171 AXION 21937 BELL & HOWELL 20154 BENQ 21032 BOXLIGHT 20893 BRADFORD 20180 BROKSONIC 20180, 20236, 20463, 21929, 21935, 21938 CANDLE 20030 CARNIVALE 20030 CARVER 20054 CELEBRITY 20000 CELERA 20765 CHANGHONG 20765 CITIZEN 20030, 20060, 20092, 21928 CLARION 20180 COMMERCIAL SOLUTIONS 20047, 21447 CONTEC 20180 CRAIG 20180 CROSLEY 20054 CROWN 20180 CURTIS MATHES 20030, 20047, 20054, 20060, 20093, 20145, 20154, 20166, 20451, 20466, 20702, 21147, 21347, 21919 CXC 20180 DAEWOO 20092, 20451, 20623, 20661, 20672, 21661, 21928 DELL 21080, 21178, 21454 DENON 20145, 20511 DUMONT 20017 DURABRAND 20171, 20178, 20180, 20463, 21034 DWIN 20093, 20720, 20774 ELECTROBAND 20000 ELECTROGRAPH 21755 EMERSON 20038, 20154, 20171, 20178, 20180, 20236, 20451, 20463, 20623, 21928, 21929, 21944 ENVISION 20030, 20813 EPSON 20833, 20840 ESA 20171, 20812 FISHER 20154 FUJITSU 20683, 20809, 20853 FUNAI 20171, 20180, 21904 FUTURETECH 20180 GATEWAY 21755, 21756 GE 20047, 20051, 20178, 20451, 21147, 21347, 21447, 21917, 21919, 21922 GIBRALTER 20017, 20030 GO VIDEO 20886 GOLDSTAR 20030, 20178, 21926 GOODMANS 20360 GRUNDIG 20683 GRUNPY 20180 HAIER 21034 HALLMARK 20178 HARLEY DAVIDSON 21904 HARMAN/KARDON 20054 HARVARD 20180 HAVERMY 20093 HELIOS 20865 HELLO KITTY 20451 HISENSE 20748 HITACHI 20038, 20145, 20151, 20413, 21145, 21904, 21960 HYUNDAI 20849 INFINITY 20054 INTEQ 20017 JBL 20054 JCB 20000 JENSEN 20761, 20815, 20817, 21933 JVC 20053, 20069, 20160, 20169, 20731, 21253 KEC 20180 KENWOOD 20030, 20859 KLH 20765, 20767, 21962 KTV 20030, 20180 LG 20178, 20442, 20700, 20856, 21178, 21265 LLOYD'S 21904 LOEWE 20136 LXI 20047, 20054, 20154, 20156, 20178 MAGNASONIC 21928 MAGNAVOX 20030, 20054, 20706, 20802, 21254, 21454, 21904, 21931, 21944 MARANTZ 20030, 20054, 20704, 20854, 20855, 21154, 21454 MATSUSHITA 20250, 20650 MAXENT 21755 MEGAPOWER 20700 MEGATRON 20145, 20178 MEMOREX 20150, 20154, 20178, 20463, 21926 MGA 20030, 20150, 20155, 20178 MIDLAND 20017, 20047, 20051 MITSUBISHI 20014, 20093, 20150, 20155, 20178, 20331, 20358, 20836, 20868, 21250, 21917 MONIVISION 20700, 20843 MOTOROLA 20093 MTC MULTITECH NAD NEC NETTV NIKKO NORCENT NTC ONWA OPTIMUS OPTOMA OPTONICA ORION PANASONIC PENNEY PHILCO PHILIPS PILOT PIONEER POLAROID PORTLAND PRIMA PRINCETON PRISM PROSCAN PROTON PULSAR QUASAR 20030, 20060 20180 20156, 20178, 20866 20030, 20497, 20882, 21704 21755 20030, 20092, 20178 20748, 20824 20092 20180 20154, 20166, 20250, 20650 20887 20093 20236, 20463, 21463, 21929 20051, 20226, 20250, 20650, 20863, 21410, 21919, 21941, 21946, 21947 20030, 20047, 20051, 20060, 20156, 20178, 21347, 21919, 21926 20030, 20054 20054, 20690, 21154, 21454 20030 20038, 20166, 20679, 20866 20765, 20865 20092 20761, 20783, 20815, 20817, 21933 20700, 20717 20051 20047, 20466, 21347, 21447, 21922 20178, 20466 20017 20051, 20250, 20650, 21919 RADIOSHACK RCA REALISTIC RUNCO SAMPO SAMSUNG SANSUI SANYO SCOTCH SCOTT 20030, 20047, 20154, 20178, 20180, 21904 20038, 20047, 20090, 20679, 21047, 21147, 21247, 21347, 21447, 21547, 21917, 21919, 21922, 21948, 21953, 21958 20030, 20154, 20178, 20180 20017, 20030, 20497, 20603 20030, 21755 20030, 20060, 20178, 20587, 20702, 20766, 20812, 20814, 21060, 21903, 21959 20463, 21904, 21929, 21935 20088, 20154, 20484, 20799, 20893 20178 20178, 20180, 20236 SEARS 20047, 20054, 20154, 20156, 20171, 20178, 21904, 21926 SHARP 20093, 20153, 20491, 20688, 20689, 20818, 20851, 21917 SHENG CHIA 20093 SOLE 20813 SONY 20000, 20011, 20080, 20111, 20810, 20834, 20867, 21100, 21904, 21925 SOUNDESIGN 20178, 20180 SOVA 21952 SQUAREVIEW 20171 SSS 20180 STARLITE 20180 STUDIO EXPERIENCE 20843 SUPERSCAN 20093, 20864 SUPREME 20000 SVA 20587, 20748, 20865, 20870, 20871, 20872 SYLVANIA 20030, 20054, 20171, 21931, 21944 SYMPHONIC 20171, 20180, 21904 TANDY 20093 TATUNG 21756 TECHNICS 20051, 20250 TECHVIEW 20847 TECHWOOD 20051 TEKNIKA 20054, 20060, 20092, 20150, 20180 TELEFUNKEN 20702 THOMAS 21904 TMK 20178 TNCI 20017 TOSHIBA 20060, 20154, 20156, 20650, 20832, 20845, 21156, 21256, 21265, 21356, 21656, 21704, 21918, 21935, 21936, 21945 TVS 20463 VECTOR RESEARCH 20030 VICTOR 20053 VIDIKRON 20054 VIDTECH 20178 VIEWSONIC 20857, 20864, 20885, 21755 VIZIO 20864, 20885, 21756 WARDS 20030, 20054, 20080, 20111, 20178, 20866, 21156 WAYCON 20156 WESTINGHOUSE 20451, 20889 WHITE WESTINGHOUSE 20463, 20623 YAMAHA 20030, 20650, 20769, 20833, 20839, 21405, 21406, 21407 ZENITH 20017, 20092, 20178, 20463, 21145, 21904, 21929 APPENDIX-vi PVR ABS 31972 ALIENWARE 31972 CYBERPOWER31972 DELL 31972 DIRECTV 30739 GATEWAY 31972 HEWLETT PACKARD 31972 HOWARD COMPUTERS 31972 HP 31972 HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEMS 30739 HUMAX 30739 HUSH 31972 IBUYPOWER 31972 LG 32010 LINKSYS 31972 MEDIA CENTER PC 31972 MICROSOFT 31972 MIND 31972 NIVEUS MEDIA 31972 NORTHGATE 31972 PANASONIC 30616, 31807, 31808, 31809 PHILIPS 30618, 30739 RCA 30880 REPLAYTV 30614, 30616 SONIC BLUE 30614, 30616 SONY 30636, 31972 STACK 9 31972 SYSTEMAX 31972 TAGAR SYSTEMS 31972 TIVO 30618, 30636, 30739 TOSHIBA 31008, 31972 TOUCH 31972 VIEWSONIC 31972 VOODOO 31972 ZT GROUP 31972 VCR ABS ADMIRAL 31972 30048, 30209, 30479 AIKO 30278 AIWA 30037 AKAI 30041 ALIENWARE 31972 AMERICA ACTION 30278 AMERICAN HIGH 30035 ASHA 30240 AUDIOVOX 30037, 30278 BEAUMARK 30240 BELL & HOWELL 30104 BROKSONIC 30002, 30121, 30184, 30209, 30479 CALIX 30037 CANON 30035 CARVER 30081 CCE 30072, 30278 CITIZEN 30037, 30278 COLT 30072 CRAIG 30037, 30047, 30072, 30240 CURTIS MATHES 30035, 30041, 30060, 30162 CYBERNEX 30240 CYBERPOWER 31972 DAEWOO 30045, 30278 DELL 31972 DENON 30042 DIRECTV 30739 APPENDIX-vii DURABRAND 30038, 30039 ELECTROHOME 30037, 30043 ELECTROPHONIC 30037 EMEREX 30032 EMERSON 30002, 30037, 30043, 30121, 30184, 30209, 30278, 30479, 30593, 31593 FISHER 30047, 30104 FUJI 30033, 30035 FUNAI 30593, 31593 GATEWAY 31972 GE 30035, 30060, 30240 GO VIDEO 30240, 30432 GOLDSTAR 30037, 30038 HARMAN/KARDON 30038, 30081 HARWOOD 30072 HEWLETT PACKARD 31972 HI-Q 30047 HITACHI 30041, 30042 HOWARD COMPUTERS 31972 HP 31972 HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEMS 30042, 30739 HUMAX 30739, 31988 HUSH 31972 IBUYPOWER 31972 JENSEN 30041 JVC 30041, 30067, 31162 KEC 30037, 30278 KENWOOD 30038, 30041, 30067 KLH 30072 KODAK 30035, 30037 LG 31037, 32010 LINKSYS 31972 LOGIK 30072 LXI 30037 MAGNASONIC 30593 MAGNAVOX 30035, 30039, 30081, 30149, 30563, 30593 MAGNIN 30240 MARANTZ 30035, 30081 MARTA 30037 MATSUSHITA 30035, 30162, 31162 MEDIA CENTER PC 31972 MEI 30035 MEMOREX 30035, 30037, 30039, 30047, 30048, 30104, 30162, 30209, 30240, 30479, 31037, 31162, 31262 MGA 30043, 30240 MGN TECHNOLOGY 30240 MICROSOFT 31972 MIND 31972 MINOLTA 30042 MITSUBISHI 30043, 30067 MOTOROLA 30035, 30048 MTC 30240 MULTITECH 30072 NEC 30038, 30041, 30067, 30104 NIKKO 30037 NIVEUS MEDIA 31972 NOBLEX 30240 NORTHGATE 31972 OLYMPUS 30035 OPTIMUS 30037, 30048, 30104, 30162, 30432, 30593, 31048, 31062, 31162, 31262 ORION 30002, 30184, 30209, 30479 PANASONIC 30035, 30162, 30616, 31062, 31162, 31244, 31262, 31562, 31807, 31808, 31809 PENNEY 30035, 30037, 30038, 30042, 30240 PENTAX 30042 PHILCO 30035 PHILIPS 30035, 30081, 30618, 30739, 31081, 31181 PILOT 30037 PIONEER 30067 POLK AUDIO 30081 PROFITRONIC 30240 PROSCAN 30060 PROTEC 30072 PULSAR 30039 QUASAR 30035, 30162, 31162 RADIOSHACK 31037 RADIX 30037 RANDEX 30037 RCA 30042, 30060, 30149, 30240, 30880 REALISTIC 30035, 30037, 30047, 30048, 30104 REPLAYTV 30614, 30616 RICAVISION 31972 RUNCO 30039 SAMSUNG 30045, 30240, 30739 SANKY 30039, 30048 SANSUI 30041, 30067, 30209, 30479 SANYO 30047, 30104, 30240 SCOTT 30043, 30045, 30121, 30184 SEARS 30035, 30037, 30042, 30047, 30104 SHARP 30048, 30848 SHINTOM 30072 SHOGUN 30240 SINGER 30072 SONIC BLUE 30614, 30616 SONY 30032, 30033, 30035, 30636, 31032, 31972 STACK 9 31972 STS 30042 SYLVANIA 30035, 30043, 30081, 30593, 31593 SYMPHONIC 30593, 31593 SYSTEMAX 31972 TAGAR SYSTEMS 31972 TATUNG 30041 TEAC 30041 TECHNICS 30035, 30162 TEKNIKA 30035, 30037 TIVO 30618, 30636, 30739, 31503 TMK 30240 TOSHIBA 30043, 30045, 30209, 31008, 31972, 31988 TOTEVISION 30037, 30240 TOUCH 31972 UNITECH 30240 VECTOR 30045 VECTOR RESEARCH 30038 VIDEO CONCEPTS 30045 VIDEOMAGIC 30037 VIDEOSONIC 30240 VIEWSONIC 31972 VOODOO 31972 WARDS 30035, 30042, 30047, 30048, 30060, 30072, 30081, 30149, 30240 WHITE WESTINGHOUSE 30072, 30209 XR-1000 30035, 30072 YAMAHA 30038 ZENITH 30033, 30039, 30209, 30479, 31139 ZT GROUP 31972 DVD PLAYER ADCOM 41094 ADVENT 41016 AIWA 40641 AKAI 40899, 41089 ALCO 40790 ALLEGRO 40869 AMPHION MEDIA WORKS 40872 AMW 40872 APEX DIGITAL 40672, 40717, 40755, 40794, 40796, 40797, 40830, 41004, 41020, 41061, 41100 ASPIRE DIGITAL 41407 AUDIOVOX 40790, 41041, 41071, 41072, 41121, 41122 AXION 41071, 41072 B&K 40655, 40662 BEL CANTO DESIGN 41571 BLAUPUNKT 40717 BLUE PARADE40571 BROKSONIC 40695, 40868 CALIFORNIA AUDIO LABS 40490 CINEVISION 40833, 40869, 40876 CITIZEN 41277 COBY 40778, 40852, 41107, 41177, 41351 CURTIS MATHES 41087 CYBERHOME 40816, 40874, 41023, 41024, 41117 DAEWOO 40705, 40833, 40869, 41169, 41172, 41234, 41242 DAYTEK 40872 DENON 40490 DESAY 41407 DISNEY 40675, 41270 DUAL 41068, 41085 DURABRAND 41127 DVD2000 40521 EMERSON 40591, 40675, 40821, 41268 ENTERPRISE 40591 FUNAI 40675, 41268 GATEWAY 41073, 41077 GE 40522, 40717, 40815 GO VIDEO 40715, 40741, 40744, 40783, 40833, 40869, 41044, 41075, 41099 GO VISION 41071, 41072 GOLDSTAR 40741 GPX 40699, 40769 GRADIENTE 40490 GREENHILL 40717 GRUNDIG 40539 HARMAN/KARDON 40582, 40702 HITACHI 40573, 40664, 41247 HITEKER 40672 INITIAL 40717 INTEGRA 40571, 40627 JATON 41078 JBL 40702 JENSEN 41016 JSI 41423 JVC 40558, 40623, 40867 JWIN 41049, 41051 KAWASAKI 40790 KENWOOD 40490, 40534, 40682, 40737 KLH 40717, 40790, 41020, 41149, 41261 KONKA 40711 KOSS 40651, 41423 LANDEL 40826 LASONIC 40798, 41173 LECSON 41533 LENOXX 41127 LG 40591, 40741, 40801, 40869 LOEWE 40511 MAGNAVOX 40503, 40539, 40675, 40821 MALATA 40782, 41159 MARANTZ 40539 MCINTOSH 41273, 41533 MEMOREX 40695, 41270 MICROSOFT 40522 MINTEK 40717, 40839 MITSUBISHI 40521, 41521 MOMITSU 41082 MYRYAD 40894 NAD 40591, 40692, 40741 NAKAMICHI 41222 NEC 40785 NESA 40717 NEXT BASE 40826 NORCENT 40872, 41003, 41107, 41265 ONKYO 40503, 40627, 40792, 41627 ORITRON 40651 PANASONIC 40490, 40503, 40632, 40703, 41762 PHILIPS 40503, 40539, 40675, 40854, 41260, 41267, 41354 PIANODISC 41024 PIONEER 40525, 40571, 40632, 41571 POLAROID 41020, 41061 POLK AUDIO 40539 PRIMA 41016 PRINCETON 40674 PROCEED 40672 PROSCAN 40522 PROVISION 40778 QWESTAR 40651 RCA 40522, 40571, 40717, 40790, 40822, 41022, 41132, 41193 RIO 40869 RJTECH 41360 ROTEL 40623, 41178 ROWA 40823 SAMPO 40698, 40752 SAMSUNG 40490, 40573, 40744, 40820, 40899, 41044, 41075 SANSUI 40695 SANYO 40695, 40873 SHARP 40630, 40675, 40752, 41256 SHARPER IMAGE 41117 SHERWOOD 40633, 41043, 41077 SHINSONIC 40533, 40839 SIGMA DESIGNS 40674 SONIC BLUE 40869, 41099 SONY 40533, 40864, 41017, 41033, 41533 SOVA 41122 SUNGALE 41074 SUPERSCAN 40821 SVA 40860, 41105 SYLVANIA 40675, 40821, 41268 SYMPHONIC 40675, 41268 TAG MCLAREN 40894 TEAC 40790, 40809 TECHNICS 40490, 40703 TECHNOSONIC 40730 TECHWOOD 40692 THETA DIGITAL 40571 TOSHIBA 40503, 40695, 41154 TREDEX 40799, 40800, 40803, 40804 URBAN CONCEPTS 40503 US LOGIC 40839 VENTURER 40790 VIZIO 41064, 41226 XBOX 40522 YAMAHA 40490, 40539, 40545, 41543 YAMAKAWA 40872 ZENITH 40503, 40591, 40741, 40869 ZOECE 41265 LD PLAYER AIWA CARVER DENON DISCO VISION 40203 40064, 40194, 40323 40059, 40172 40023 FUNAI 40203 HARMAN/KARDON 40194 HITACHI 40023 MAGNAVOX 40194, 40217 MARANTZ 40064, 40194 MITSUBISHI 40059 NAD 40059 OPTIMUS 40059 PANASONIC 40204 PHILIPS 40064, 40194 PIONEER 40023, 40059 POLK AUDIO 40194 QUASAR 40204 REALISTIC 40203 SAMSUNG 40323 SEGA 40023 SONY 40193, 40201 TECHNICS 40204 THETA DIGITAL 40194 YAMAHA 40217 DVD RECORDER APEX DIGITAL 51056 ASPIRE DIGITAL 51168 COBY 51086 CYBERHOME 51129 FUNAI 50675, 51334 GATEWAY 51073, 51158 GO VIDEO 50741, 51158, 51304, 51730 ILO 51348 JVC 51164, 51275 LG 50741 LITEON 51158, 51416, 51440 MAGNAVOX 50646 PANASONIC 50490, 51010, 51011 PHILIPS 50646 PIONEER 50631, 51475, 51476 POLAROID 51086 RCA 50522 SAMSUNG 50490 SENSORY SCIENCE| 51158 SHARP 50675, 51550, 51556, 50630 SONY 51033, 51069, 51070, 51431 SYLVANIA 50675 TOSHIBA 51510 VICTOR 51275 YAMAHA 51544 ZENITH 50741 MCINTOSH 60256, 60290, 60660 MCS 60029 MIRO 60000 MISSION 60157 MTC 60420 NSM 60157 ONKYO 60101, 61327 OPTIMUS 60000, 60032, 60087, 60179, 60420, 60468 PANASONIC 60029, 60303, 60388, 60752 PARASOUND 60420 PHILIPS 60157, 60274, 60626 PIONEER 60032, 60468, 61062 POLK AUDIO 60157 PROCEED 60420 PROTON 60157 QED 60157 QUAD 60157 QUASAR 60029 RCA 60032, 60053, 60179, 60420, 60468, 61062 REALISTIC 60179, 60180, 60420 ROTEL 60157, 60420 SAE 60157 SANSUI 60157 SANYO 60087, 60179 SHARP 60180 SHERWOOD 60180 SONIC FRONTIERS 60157 SONY 60000, 60490 SUGDEN 60157 TAG MCLAREN 60157 TASCAM 60420 TEAC 60180, 60378, 60393, 60420 TECHNICS 60029, 60303 VICTOR 60072 WARDS 60053, 60157 YAMAHA 60036, 60490, 61907 CD RECORDER CD PLAYER AIWA 60157 ARCAM 60157 BURMESTER 60420 CALIFORNIA AUDIO LABS 60029, 60303 CARVER 60157, 60179 DENON 60003, 60034 DKK 60000 DMX ELECTRONICS 60157 FISHER 60179 GARRARD 60393, 60420 GENEXXA 60032 HARMAN/KARDON 60157 HITACHI 60032 INTEGRA 60101 JVC 60072 KENWOOD 60028, 60190, 60626 KLH 61318, 61372, 61711 KRELL 60157 LINN 60157 MAGNAVOX 60038, 60157 MARANTZ 60029, 60038, 60157, 60180, 60435, 60626 HARMAN/KARDON 71202 JVC 71294 KENWOOD 70626 KLH 71373 LG 71208 MARANTZ 70626 PHILIPS 70626 PIONEER 71062, 71087 RCA 70053, 70420 SONY 70000, 70100, 71364 TDK 71208 TEAC 70420 YAMAHA 70888, 71292 MD RECORDER DENON KENWOOD ONKYO OPTIMUS PIONEER SHARP SHERWOOD SONY YAMAHA 70873 70681, 70826 70868 71063 71063 70861 71067 70490 70490, 70888, 71909 APPENDIX-viii RX-N600_U_cv.fm Page 1 Wednesday, May 24, 2006 4:36 PM U TAPE DECK TUNER ADC ADCOM 80531 80616, 81616, 81617 AIWA 80121, 80158, 80189, 81405 AMC 81077 AMPLIFIER TECHNOLOGIES 81584 ANAM 81074, 81609 ARCAM 81189 ATLANTIC TECHNOLOGY 81487 MITSUBISHI MYRYAD NAD NAKAMICHI 81393 81189, 81918 80320 80347, 81313, 81555, 81919 NIRO 81908 ONKYO 80135, 81320 OPTIMUS 80177, 80219, 80531, 80670, 81023, 81074 OUTLAW 81487 OUTLAW AUDIO81487 PANASONIC 80039, 80309, 81308, 81518 PHILIPS 80189, 81189, 81269 PIONEER 80014, 80150, 80531, 80630, 81023 POLK AUDIO 80189, 81414 QUASAR 80039 RCA 80054, 80346, 80360, 80531, 81023, 81074, 81154, 81609 REALISTIC 80163 SAMSUNG 81304 SANSUI 80189, 80346, 81189 SANYO 80219 SCOTT 80163, 80322 SHERWOOD 81077, 81423, 81567, 81918 SIRIUS 81602, 81627, 81811 SONY 80158, 81058, 81406, 81759 SOUNDESIGN 80670 STEREOPHONICS 81023 SUNFIRE 81313 TEAC 80163, 81074 TECHNICS 80039, 80309, 81308, 81518 THORENS TOSHIBA VICTOR WARDS 81189 80135 80074 80014, 80054, 80158, 80189 XM 81406, 81414 YAMAHA 80176, 81176, 81276, 81331, 81375, 81908, (TUNER ID1) 81916 (TUNER ID2) 81917 (XM ID1) 81918 (XM ID2) 81919 OTHER AUDIO ACCESSORIES YAMAHA (iPod) 81981 YAMAHA (NET/USB) 81982 RX-N600 AV Receiver © 2006 YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA RX-N600 AIWA 70029, 70197 CARVER 70029 DENON 70076 HARMAN/KARDON 70029, 70182 JVC 70244, 70273 KENWOOD 70070 MAGNAVOX 70029 MARANTZ 70029 ONKYO 70135, 70282 OPTIMUS 70027, 70220 PANASONIC 70229 PHILIPS 70029 PIONEER 70027, 70099, 70220 POLK AUDIO 70029 RCA 70027, 70220 SANSUI 70029 SONY 70170, 70243, 70291 TECHNICS 70229 VICTOR 70273 WARDS 70027 YAMAHA 70094, 70097, 70524 AUDIOTRONIC 81189 AUDIOVOX 81627 B&K 80701, 80820, 80840 BEL CANTO DESIGN 81584 BK 80702 BOSE 81933 BOSTON ACOUSTICS 81918 BRIX 81602 CAPETRONIC 80531 CARVER 80008, 80121, 80189, 80360, 81189 CLASSE 81916 DELPHI 81414 DENON 80121, 81360 EMERSON 80424 FISHER 80219, 80360 FOSGATE 81487 GARRARD 80424 GATEWAY 81567 HARMAN/KARDON 80110, 80189, 80891, 81304 INTEGRA 80135, 81320 JBL 80110 JVC 80074, 81058, 81811 KENWOOD 80027, 80077, 81313, 81569, 81570 KLH 81428 KOSS 80424 LEXICON 81076 LINN 80189 MAGNAVOX 80189, 80531, 81189, 81269 MARANTZ 80039, 80189, 80200, 81189, 81269 MCS 80039, 80346 MICROMEGA 81189 All rights reserved. OWNER’S MANUAL Printed in Malaysia WG73890-1-
1
-
2
-
3
-
4
-
5
-
6
-
7
-
8
-
9
-
10
-
11
-
12
-
13
-
14
-
15
-
16
-
17
-
18
-
19
-
20
-
21
-
22
-
23
-
24
-
25
-
26
-
27
-
28
-
29
-
30
-
31
-
32
-
33
-
34
-
35
-
36
-
37
-
38
-
39
-
40
-
41
-
42
-
43
-
44
-
45
-
46
-
47
-
48
-
49
-
50
-
51
-
52
-
53
-
54
-
55
-
56
-
57
-
58
-
59
-
60
-
61
-
62
-
63
-
64
-
65
-
66
-
67
-
68
-
69
-
70
-
71
-
72
-
73
-
74
-
75
-
76
-
77
-
78
-
79
-
80
-
81
-
82
-
83
-
84
-
85
-
86
-
87
-
88
-
89
-
90
-
91
-
92
-
93
-
94
-
95
-
96
-
97
-
98
-
99
-
100
-
101
-
102
-
103
-
104
-
105
-
106
-
107
-
108
-
109
-
110
-
111
-
112
-
113
-
114
-
115
-
116
-
117
-
118
-
119
-
120
-
121
-
122
-
123
-
124
-
125
-
126
-
127
-
128
-
129
-
130
-
131
-
132
Yamaha MCX-2000 Handleiding
- Categorie
- MP3 / MP4-spelers
- Type
- Handleiding
- Deze handleiding is ook geschikt voor
in andere talen
- English: Yamaha MCX-2000 User manual
- italiano: Yamaha MCX-2000 Manuale utente
- русский: Yamaha MCX-2000 Руководство пользователя
- français: Yamaha MCX-2000 Manuel utilisateur
- español: Yamaha MCX-2000 Manual de usuario
- Deutsch: Yamaha MCX-2000 Benutzerhandbuch
- português: Yamaha MCX-2000 Manual do usuário
- dansk: Yamaha MCX-2000 Brugermanual
- suomi: Yamaha MCX-2000 Ohjekirja
- čeština: Yamaha MCX-2000 Uživatelský manuál
- svenska: Yamaha MCX-2000 Användarmanual
- Türkçe: Yamaha MCX-2000 Kullanım kılavuzu
- polski: Yamaha MCX-2000 Instrukcja obsługi
- română: Yamaha MCX-2000 Manual de utilizare
Gerelateerde artikelen
Andere documenten
-
TEAC AG-980 de handleiding
-
Sangean WFT-1 Handleiding
-
-
Harman Kardon GO+PLAY Handleiding
-
Toshiba PA5356C-1PRP Gebruikershandleiding
-
Mitsubishi DX-NV100E Handleiding
-
Sharp TU-AS1G de handleiding
-
JBL ON TIME 200ID de handleiding
-
Philips 15L5082Q Handleiding
-
Polk XT10 de handleiding